This is a modern-English version of A Series of Lessons in Raja Yoga, originally written by Atkinson, William Walker.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
Produced by Rose Koven, Juliet Sutherland, Mary Meehan and the Online
Produced by Rose Koven, Juliet Sutherland, Mary Meehan, and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team.
Distributed Proofreading Team.
A SERIES OF LESSONS
IN RAJA YOGA
By YOGI RAMACHARAKA
By Yogi Ramacharaka
Author of "Fourteen Lessons in Yogi Philosophy and Oriental Occultism"
"Advanced Course in Yogi Philosophy, etc."; "Hatha Yoga"; "Psychic
Healing"; "Science of Breath." etc.
Author of "Fourteen Lessons in Yogi Philosophy and Oriental Occultism"
"Advanced Course in Yogi Philosophy, etc."; "Hatha Yoga"; "Psychic
Healing"; "Science of Breath," etc.
1906
1906
"When the soul sees itself as a Center surrounded by its circumference—when the Sun knows that it is a Sun, surrounded by its whirling planets-then is it ready for the Wisdom and Power of the Masters."
"When the soul recognizes itself as a Center surrounded by its edges—when the Sun realizes it is a Sun, surrounded by its spinning planets—then it is prepared for the Wisdom and Power of the Masters."
PUBLISHERS' NOTICE
The lessons which compose this volume, originally appeared in the shape of monthly lessons, the first of which was issued in October, 1905, and the twelfth in September, 1906. These lessons met with a hearty and generous response from the public, and the present volume is issued in response to the demand for the lessons in a permanent and durable form. There have been no changes made in the text.
The lessons in this book were first published as monthly lessons, starting in October 1905 and ending with the twelfth lesson in September 1906. The public responded enthusiastically and generously, and this volume is being released to meet the demand for a permanent and lasting version of the lessons. There have been no changes made to the text.
The publishers take the liberty to call the attention of the reader to the great amount of information condensed within the space given to each lesson. Students have told us that they have found it necessary to read and study each lesson carefully, in order to absorb the varied information contained within its pages. They have also stated that they have found it advisable to re-read the lessons several times, allowing an interval between each reading and that at each re-reading they would discover information that had escaped them during the course of the previous study. This has been repeated to us so often that we feel justified in mentioning it, that other readers might avail themselves of the same course and plan of study.
The publishers would like to highlight the wealth of information packed into each lesson. Students have told us that they need to read and study each lesson thoroughly to absorb the diverse information within its pages. They've also mentioned that it's helpful to re-read the lessons multiple times, taking breaks in between, and that with each re-reading, they discover details they missed during their earlier studies. We've heard this feedback so often that we believe it's important to share it, so that other readers can benefit from this approach to studying.
Following his usual custom, the writer of the lessons has declined to write a preface for this book, claiming that the lessons speak for themselves, and that those for whom they are intended will receive the message contained within them, without any prefatory talk.
Following his usual habit, the author of the lessons has chosen not to write a preface for this book, stating that the lessons speak for themselves, and that the people for whom they are meant will understand the message within them, without any introductory remarks.
THE YOGI PUBLICATION SOCIETY.
INDEX
LESSON I. The "I"
LESSON I. The "I"
LESSON II. The Ego's Mental Tools
LESSON II. The Ego's Mental Tools
LESSON III. The Expansion of the Self
LESSON III. The Expansion of the Self
LESSON IV. Mental Control
Lesson 4: Mind Control
LESSON V. The Cultivation of Attention
LESSON V. The Development of Focus
LESSON VI. Cultivation of Perception
Lesson 6: Cultivating Perception
LESSON VII. The Unfoldment of Consciousness
LESSON VII. The Unfolding of Consciousness
LESSON VIII. The Highlands and Lowlands of Mind
LESSON VIII. The Highlands and Lowlands of Mind
LESSON IX. The Mental Planes
LESSON IX. The Mental Levels
LESSON X. Sub-Consciousing
LESSON X. Subconsciousness
LESSON XI. Sub-Conscious Character Building
LESSON XI. Subconscious Character Development
LESSON XII. Sub-Conscious Influences
LESSON XII. Subconscious Influences
THE FIRST LESSON.
THE "I."
In India, the Candidates for Initiation into the science of "Raja Yoga," when they apply to the Yogi Masters for instruction, are given a series of lessons designed to enlighten them regarding the nature of the Real Self, and to instruct them in the secret knowledge whereby they may develop the consciousness and realization of the real "I" within them. They are shown how they may cast aside the erroneous or imperfect knowledge regarding their real identity.
In India, candidates seeking initiation into the practice of "Raja Yoga" apply to the Yogi Masters for guidance. They receive a series of lessons aimed at helping them understand the nature of their True Self and teaching them the secret knowledge needed to develop the awareness and realization of their true identity. They are shown how to let go of any incorrect or incomplete understanding of who they really are.
Until the Candidate masters this instruction, or at least until the truth becomes fixed in his consciousness, further instruction is denied him, for it is held that until he has awakened to a conscious realization of his Actual Identity, he is not able to understand the source of his power, and, moreover, is not able to feel within him the power of the Will, which power underlies the entire teachings of "Raja Yoga."
Until the Candidate fully understands this instruction, or at least until the truth becomes clear in their mind, they are denied further instruction. It is believed that until they become consciously aware of their true identity, they cannot grasp the source of their power and, furthermore, cannot truly feel the power of the Will within them, which is the foundation of all the teachings of "Raja Yoga."
The Yogi Masters are hot satisfied if the Candidate forms merely a clear intellectual conception of this Actual Identity, but they insist that he must feel the truth of the same—must become aware of the Real Self—must enter into a consciousness in which the realization becomes a part of his everyday self—in which the realizing consciousness becomes the prevailing idea in his mind, around which his entire thoughts and actions revolve.
The Yogi Masters are not satisfied if the Candidate only has a clear intellectual understanding of this Actual Identity; they insist that he must feel the truth of it—must become aware of the Real Self—must enter a state of consciousness where this realization becomes part of his daily self—where this realizing consciousness becomes the dominant idea in his mind, shaping his entire thoughts and actions.
To some Candidates, this realization comes like a lightning flash the moment the attention is directed toward it, while in other cases the Candidates find it necessary to follow a rigorous course of training before they acquire the realization in consciousness.
To some Candidates, this realization hits them like a bolt of lightning as soon as they focus on it, while in other cases, Candidates feel the need to go through a strict training process before they achieve this awareness.
The Yogi Masters teach that there are two degrees of this awakening consciousness of the Real Self. The first, which they call "the Consciousness of the 'I'," is the full consciousness of real existence that comes to the Candidate, and which causes him to know that he is a real entity having a life not depending upon the body—life that will go on in spite of the destruction of the body—real life, in fact. The second degree, which they call "the Consciousness of the 'I AM'," is the consciousness of one's identity with the Universal Life, and his relationship to, and "in-touchness" with all life, expressed and unexpressed. These two degrees of consciousness come in time to all who seek "The Path." To some it comes suddenly; to others it dawns gradually; to many it comes assisted by the exercises and practical work of "Raja Yoga."
The Yogi Masters teach that there are two levels of awakening to the consciousness of the Real Self. The first, known as "the Consciousness of the 'I'," is the full awareness of real existence that the Candidate experiences, making him know that he is a real being whose life is not dependent on the body—life that continues even after the body is gone—real life, indeed. The second level, referred to as "the Consciousness of the 'I AM'," is the awareness of one's identity with Universal Life, and one's connection to, and "in-touchness" with all forms of life, both expressed and unexpressed. These two levels of consciousness eventually come to all who seek "The Path." For some, it happens suddenly; for others, it unfolds gradually; for many, it's supported by the practices and hands-on work of "Raja Yoga."
The first lesson of the Yogi Masters to the Candidates, leading up to the first degree, above mentioned, is as follows: That the Supreme Intelligence of the Universe—the Absolute—has manifested the being that we call Man—the highest manifestation on this planet. The Absolute has manifested an infinitude of forms of life in the Universe, including distant worlds, suns, planets, etc., many of these forms being unknown to us on this planet, and being impossible of conception by the mind of the ordinary man. But these lessons have nothing to do with that part of the philosophy which deals with these myriad forms of life, for our time will be taken up with the unfoldment in the mind of man of his true nature and power. Before man attempts to solve the secrets of the Universe without, he should master the Universe within—the Kingdom of the Self. When he has accomplished this, then he may, and should, go forth to gain the outer knowledge as a Master demanding its secrets, rather than as a slave begging for the crumbs from the table of knowledge. The first knowledge for the Candidate is the knowledge of the Self.
The first lesson from the Yogi Masters to the Candidates, leading up to the mentioned first degree, is as follows: The Supreme Intelligence of the Universe—the Absolute—has created the being we call Man—the highest manifestation on this planet. The Absolute has produced an infinite number of forms of life in the Universe, including distant worlds, suns, planets, etc., many of which are unknown to us here and are beyond the understanding of the average person. However, these lessons don't focus on the philosophy related to these countless forms of life; instead, we will concentrate on helping the mind of man realize his true nature and power. Before man tries to uncover the secrets of the Universe around him, he should first master the Universe within— the Kingdom of the Self. Once he achieves this, he may—and should—seek outer knowledge as a Master demanding its secrets, rather than as a slave begging for scraps from the table of knowledge. The initial knowledge for the Candidate is the knowledge of the Self.
Man, the highest manifestation of the Absolute, as far as this planet is concerned, is a wonderfully organized being—although the average man understands but little of his real nature. He comprises within his physical, mental and spiritual make-up both the highest and the lowest, as we have shown in our previous lessons (the "Fourteen Lessons" and the "Advanced Course"). In his bones he manifests almost in the form of mineral life, in fact, in his bones, body and blood mineral substances actually exist. The physical life of the body resembles the life of the plant. Many of the physical desires and emotions are akin to those of the lower animals, and in the undeveloped man these desires and emotions predominate and overpower the higher nature, which latter is scarcely in evidence. Then Man has a set of mental characteristics that are his own, and which are not possessed by the lower animals (See "Fourteen Lessons"). And in addition to the mental faculties common to all men, or rather, that are in evidence in a greater or lesser degree among all men, there are still higher faculties latent within Man, which when manifested and expressed render Man more than ordinary Man. The unfoldment of these latent faculties is possible to all who have reached the proper stage of development, and the desire and hunger of the student for this instruction is caused by the pressure of these unfolding latent faculties, crying to be born into consciousness. Then there is that wonderful thing, the Will, which is but faintly understood by those ignorant of the Yogi Philosophy—the Power of the Ego—its birthright from the Absolute.
Human beings, as the highest expression of the Absolute on this planet, are incredibly complex creatures—though most people have a limited understanding of their true nature. Each person includes both the highest and lowest aspects within their physical, mental, and spiritual makeup, as discussed in previous lessons (the "Fourteen Lessons" and the "Advanced Course"). In their bones, humans exhibit characteristics similar to mineral life; in fact, mineral substances exist in their bones, body, and blood. The physical life of the body is akin to that of plants. Many physical desires and emotions resemble those of lower animals, and in undeveloped individuals, these desires and emotions often overshadow their higher nature, which barely shows itself. Additionally, humans possess unique mental traits that lower animals do not have (See "Fourteen Lessons"). Beyond the mental abilities typical of all people—evident to varying degrees—there are even higher faculties lying dormant within individuals. When these faculties are activated and expressed, they elevate a person beyond the ordinary. Anyone who reaches the right level of development can awaken these latent abilities, and the deep desire for this knowledge among students arises from the pressure of these emerging faculties yearning to come into consciousness. Finally, there is the remarkable concept of Will, which is only vaguely understood by those unfamiliar with Yogi Philosophy—the Power of the Ego—its inherent right from the Absolute.
But while these mental and physical things belong to Man, they are not the Man himself. Before the Man is able to master, control, and direct the things belonging to him—his tools and instruments—he must awaken to a realization of Himself. He must be able to distinguish between the "I" and the "Not I." And this is the first task before the Candidate.
But while these mental and physical things belong to Man, they are not the Man himself. Before a person can master, control, and direct the things that belong to them— their tools and instruments—they must awaken to a realization of themselves. They need to be able to distinguish between the "I" and the "Not I." And this is the first task for the Candidate.
That which is the Real Self of Man is the Divine Spark sent forth from the Sacred Flame. It is the Child of the Divine Parent. It is Immortal—Eternal—Indestructible—Invincible. It possesses within itself Power, Wisdom, and Reality. But like the infant that contains within itself the sometime Man, the mind of Man is unaware of its latent and potential qualities, and does not know itself. As it awakens and unfolds into the knowledge of its real nature, it manifests its qualities, and realizes what the Absolute has given it. When the Real Self begins to awaken, it sets aside from itself those things which are but appendages to it, but which it, in its half-waking state, had regarded as its Self. Setting aside first this, and then that, it finally discards all of the "Not I," leaving the Real Self free and delivered from its bondage to its appendages. Then it returns to the discarded appendages, and makes use of them.
What is the true Self of a person is the Divine Spark that comes from the Sacred Flame. It is the Child of the Divine Parent. It is Immortal—Eternal—Indestructible—Invincible. It holds within it Power, Wisdom, and Reality. However, just like an infant that contains the potential to become an adult, a person's mind is unaware of its hidden and potential qualities, and does not know itself. As it awakens and reveals its true nature, it expresses its qualities and realizes what the Absolute has given it. When the true Self starts to awaken, it separates itself from those things that are merely attachments, which it, in its semi-conscious state, had mistaken for itself. By discarding this, then that, it ultimately sheds all the "Not I," freeing the true Self from its attachments. Then it returns to the discarded attachments and makes use of them.
In considering the question: "What is the Real Self?" let us first stop to examine what man usually means when he says "I."
In thinking about the question: "What is the Real Self?" let's first take a moment to look at what people typically mean when they say "I."
The lower animals do not possess this "I" sense. They are conscious of the outer world; of their own desires and animal cravings and feelings. But their consciousness has not reached the Self-conscious stage. They are not able to think of themselves as separate entities, and to reflect upon their thoughts. They are not possessed of a consciousness of the Divine Spark—the Ego—the Real Self. The Divine Spark is hidden in the lower forms of life—even in the lower forms of human life—by many sheaths that shut out its light. But, nevertheless, it is there, always. It sleeps within the mind of the savage—then, as he unfolds, it begins to throw out its light. In you, the Candidate, it is fighting hard to have its beams pierce through the material coverings When the Real Self begins to arouse itself from its sleep, its dreams vanish from it, and it begins to see the world as it is, and to recognize itself in Reality and not as the distorted thing of its dreams.
The lower animals lack this sense of "I." They are aware of the outside world, their own desires, instincts, and feelings. However, their awareness hasn't reached the stage of self-awareness. They can’t think of themselves as separate beings or reflect on their thoughts. They don’t have an awareness of the Divine Spark—the Ego—the Real Self. The Divine Spark is concealed within the lower forms of life—even in early human life—by many layers that block its light. Still, it’s always there. It lies dormant within the mind of the primitive human, and as they evolve, it starts to shine. In you, the Candidate, it is striving to break through the material barriers. When the Real Self starts to awaken, its dreams fade away, and it begins to perceive the world as it truly is and recognizes itself in Reality, rather than as the distorted version from its dreams.
The savage and barbarian are scarcely conscious of the "I." They are but a little above the animal in point of consciousness, and their "I" is almost entirely a matter of the consciousness of the wants of the body; the satisfaction of the appetites; the gratification of the passions; the securing of personal comfort; the expression of lust, savage power, etc. In the savage the lower part of the Instinctive Mind is the seat of the "I." (See "Fourteen Lessons" for explanation of the several mental planes of man.) If the savage could analyze his thoughts he would say that the "I" was the physical body, the said body having certain "feelings," "wants" and "desires." The "I" of such a man is a physical "I," the body representing its form and substance. Not only is this true of the savage, but even among so-called "civilized" men of to-day we find many in this stage. They have developed powers of thinking and reasoning, but they do not "live in their minds" as do some of their brothers. They use their thinking powers for the gratification of their bodily desires and cravings, and really live on the plane of the Instinctive Mind. Such a person may speak of "my mind," or "my soul," not from a high position where he looks upon these things from the standpoint of a Master who realizes his Real Self, but from below, from the point-of-view of the man who lives on the plane of the Instinctive Mind and who sees above himself the higher attributes. To such people the body is the "I." Their "I" is bound up with the senses, and that which comes to them through the senses. Of course, as Man advances in "culture" and "civilization," his senses become educated, and are satisfied only with more refined things, while the less cultivated man is perfectly satisfied with the more material and gross sense gratifications. Much that we call "cultivation" and "culture" is naught but a cultivation of a more refined form of sense gratification, instead of a real advance in consciousness and unfoldment. It is true that the advanced student and Master is possessed of highly developed senses, often far surpassing those of the ordinary man, but in such cases the senses have been cultivated under the mastery of the Will, and are made servants of the Ego instead of things hindering the progress of the soul—they are made servants instead of masters.
The savage and the barbarian barely recognize the concept of "I." They're just slightly above animals in terms of awareness, and their "I" mainly revolves around physical needs; fulfilling desires; satisfying cravings; ensuring personal comfort; and expressing primal instincts like lust and aggression. In savages, the lower part of the Instinctive Mind houses the "I." (See "Fourteen Lessons" for an explanation of the various mental levels of humans.) If a savage were to analyze their thoughts, they would conclude that the "I" refers to the physical body, which has certain "feelings," "wants," and "desires." For such a person, the "I" is a physical entity, represented by the body’s form and substance. This phenomenon isn’t limited to savages; even among so-called "civilized" people today, many exist at this level. They have developed thinking and reasoning skills but don’t "live in their minds" like some of their peers do. They use their intellect mainly to satisfy bodily desires and cravings, essentially residing at the level of the Instinctive Mind. Such individuals might refer to "my mind" or "my soul," but they do so from a lower standpoint—seeing these concepts as distant ideals rather than embodying them as a Master who understands their Real Self. For them, the body is the "I." Their "I" is intertwined with their senses and what they perceive through them. Of course, as humans progress in "culture" and "civilization," their senses become refined and seek more sophisticated experiences, while those less developed find satisfaction in more basic and crude sensory pleasures. Much of what we call "cultivation" and "culture" is simply a more refined version of sensory gratification, rather than a genuine advancement in awareness and personal growth. It’s true that the advanced student and Master possess highly developed senses, often exceeding those of ordinary individuals, but in these cases, the senses have been refined under the control of the Will, becoming servants of the Ego instead of hindrances to the soul's progress—they serve rather than dominate.
As Man advances in the scale, he begins to have a somewhat higher conception of the "I." He begins to use his mind and reason, and he passes on to the Mental Plane—his mind begins to manifest upon the plane of Intellect. He finds that there is something within him that is higher than the body. He finds that his mind seems more real to him than does the physical part of him, and in times of deep thought and study he is able almost to forget the existence of the body.
As people progress, they start to have a clearer understanding of the "self." They begin to engage their minds and use reason, moving into the Mental Plane—where their thoughts start to express themselves on the level of Intellect. They discover that there’s something within them that transcends the physical body. They realize that their mind feels more real to them than their physical form, and during moments of deep thought and study, they can almost forget about their body.
In this second stage, Man soon becomes perplexed. He finds problems that demand an answer, but as soon as he thinks he has answered them the problems present themselves in a new phase, and he is called upon to "explain his explanation." The mind, even although not controlled and directed by the Will, has a wonderful range, but, nevertheless, Man finds himself traveling around and around in a circle, and realizes that he is confronted continually by the Unknown. This disturbs him, and the higher the stage of "book learning" he attains, the more disturbed does he become. The man of but little knowledge does not see the existence of many problems that force themselves before the attention of the man of more knowledge, and demand an explanation from him. The tortures of the man who has attained the mental growth that enables him to see the new problems and the impossibility of their answer, cannot be imagined by one who has not advanced to that stage.
In this second stage, a person quickly becomes confused. They encounter problems that need answers, but just when they think they have figured them out, those problems reveal themselves in a new way, and they have to “explain their explanation.” The mind, even when not guided by willpower, has an impressive range, yet a person finds themselves going in circles and realizes they are constantly facing the Unknown. This unsettles them, and the higher the level of “book learning” they achieve, the more unsettled they become. A person with limited knowledge doesn’t recognize the many problems that demand attention from someone with more knowledge. The struggles of someone who has reached a level of mental growth that allows them to see these new problems and the impossibility of solving them can't be imagined by those who haven't reached that point.
The man in this stage of consciousness thinks of his "I" as a mental thing, having a lower companion, the body. He feels that he has advanced, but yet his "I" does not give him the answer to the riddles and questions that perplex him. And he becomes most unhappy. Such men often develop into Pessimists, and consider the whole of life as utterly evil and disappointing—a curse rather than a blessing. Pessimism belongs to this plane, for neither the Physical Plane man or the Spiritual Plane man have this curse of Pessimism. The former man has no such disquieting thoughts, for he is almost entirely absorbed in gratifying his animal nature, while the latter man recognizes his mind as an instrument of himself, rather than as himself, and knows it to be imperfect in its present stage of growth. He knows that he has in himself the key to all knowledge—locked up in the Ego—and which the trained mind, cultivated, developed and guided by the awakened Will, may grasp as it unfolds. Knowing this the advanced man no longer despairs, and, recognizing his real nature, and his possibilities, as he awakens into a consciousness of his powers and capabilities, he laughs at the old despondent, pessimistic ideas, and discards them like a worn-out garment. Man on the Mental Plane of consciousness is like a huge elephant who knows not his own strength. He could break down barriers and assert himself over nearly any condition or environment, but in his ignorance of his real condition and power he may be mastered by a puny driver, or frightened by the rustling of a piece of paper.
The man at this stage of awareness sees his "I" as a mental thing, with the body as a lesser companion. He feels that he's made progress, but his "I" doesn't provide answers to the puzzles and questions that confuse him. This leads to significant unhappiness. Such individuals often turn into pessimists, viewing life as completely evil and disappointing—a curse instead of a blessing. Pessimism is characteristic of this stage, as neither the person focused on the Physical Plane nor the one on the Spiritual Plane experiences this burden of pessimism. The former is typically engrossed in satisfying his animal instincts, while the latter understands his mind as a tool he possesses rather than being his true self, and he realizes it is imperfect at its current level of development. He is aware that he holds the key to all knowledge—locked within the Ego—knowledge that a trained mind, honed, developed, and guided by an awakened Will, can access as it evolves. Knowing this, the enlightened individual no longer feels despair, and as he recognizes his true nature and potential, awakening to his powers and abilities, he laughs at the old, gloomy, pessimistic thoughts and tosses them aside like an old piece of clothing. A man on the Mental Plane of consciousness is like a massive elephant unaware of its own strength. He could break down barriers and assert himself over almost any situation or environment, but due to his ignorance of his true state and abilities, he can be controlled by a tiny handler or intimidated by the rustling of a piece of paper.
When the Candidate becomes an Initiate—when he passes from the purely Mental Plane on to the Spiritual Plane—he realizes that the "I," the Real Self—is something higher than either body or mind, and that both of the latter may be used as tools and instruments by the Ego or "I." This knowledge is not reached by purely intellectual reasoning, although such efforts of the mind are often necessary to help in the unfoldment, and the Masters so use it. The real knowledge, however, comes as a special form of consciousness. The Candidate becomes "aware" of the real "I," and this consciousness being attained, he passes to the rank of the Initiates. When the Initiate passes the second degree of consciousness, and begins to grow into a realization of his relationship to the Whole—when he begins to manifest the Expansion of Self—then is he on the road to Mastership.
When the Candidate becomes an Initiate—when they transition from the purely Mental Plane to the Spiritual Plane—they realize that the "I," the Real Self, is something greater than either the body or mind, and that both can be used as tools and instruments by the Ego or "I." This understanding isn't achieved just through intellectual reasoning, although those mental efforts are often necessary to aid in the process, and the Masters utilize them. The real knowledge, however, comes as a unique form of consciousness. The Candidate becomes "aware" of the real "I," and once this consciousness is achieved, they move up to the rank of Initiates. When the Initiate reaches the second degree of consciousness and starts to understand their connection to the Whole—when they begin to express the Expansion of Self—then they are on the path to Mastership.
In the present lesson we shall endeavor to point out to the Candidate the methods of developing or increasing the realization of this "I" consciousness—this first degree work. We give the following exercises or development drills for the Candidate to practice. He will find that a careful and conscientious following of these directions will tend to unfold in him a sufficient degree of the "I" consciousness, to enable him to enter into higher stages of development and power. All that is necessary is for the Candidate to feel within himself the dawn of the awakening consciousness, or awareness of the Real Self. The higher stages of the "I" consciousness come gradually, for once on the Path there is no retrogression or going backward. There may be pauses on the journey, but there is no such thing as actually losing that which is once gained on The Path.
In this lesson, we will aim to show the Candidate how to develop or deepen their sense of "I" consciousness—this first degree work. We provide the following exercises or development drills for the Candidate to practice. They'll find that carefully and diligently following these instructions will help unfold a significant level of "I" consciousness, allowing them to progress to higher stages of development and power. All that is required is for the Candidate to sense within themselves the beginning of this awakening consciousness or awareness of the Real Self. The higher stages of "I" consciousness come gradually; once on the Path, there's no going back. There may be pauses on the journey, but there’s no way to actually lose what has once been gained on The Path.
This "I" consciousness, even in its highest stages, is but a preliminary step toward what is called "Illumination," and which signifies the awakening of the Initiate to a realization of his actual connection with and relation to the Whole. The full sight of the glory of the "I," is but a faint reflected glow of "Illumination." The Candidate, once that he enters fully into the "I" consciousness, becomes an "Initiate." And the Initiate who enters into the dawn of Illumination takes his first step upon the road to Mastery. The Initiation is the awakening of the soul to a knowledge of its real existence—the Illumination is the revelation of the real nature of the soul, and of its relationship with the Whole. After the first dawn of the "I" consciousness has been attained, the Candidate is more able to grasp the means of developing the consciousness to a still higher degree—is more able to use the powers latent within him; to control his own mental states; to manifest a Centre of Consciousness and Influence that will radiate into the outer world which is always striving and hunting for such centres around which it may revolve.
This "I" awareness, even at its highest levels, is just an initial step toward what we call "Illumination," which means the awakening of the Initiate to the understanding of their actual connection with and relationship to the Whole. The complete vision of the glory of the "I" is merely a faint reflection of "Illumination." Once the Candidate fully embraces the "I" awareness, they become an "Initiate." The Initiate who begins to experience the dawn of Illumination takes their first step on the path to Mastery. Initiation is the awakening of the soul to the knowledge of its true existence—Illumination reveals the true nature of the soul and its relationship with the Whole. After achieving the initial dawn of "I" awareness, the Candidate is better equipped to understand how to develop their consciousness to an even higher level—better able to harness the latent powers within them; to control their mental states; to create a Center of Consciousness and Influence that will radiate into the outer world, which constantly seeks such centers around which it can revolve.
Man must master himself before he can hope to exert an influence beyond himself. There is no royal road to unfoldment and power—each step must be taken in turn, and each Candidate must take the step himself, and by his own effort. But he may, and will, be aided by the helping hand of the teachers who have traveled The Path before him, and who know just when that helping hand is needed to lift the Candidate over the rough places.
A person needs to take control of themselves before they can expect to have an impact outside of themselves. There's no easy shortcut to personal growth and strength—every step must be taken one at a time, and each individual must take those steps on their own, putting in their own effort. However, they will receive support from teachers who have walked The Path before them and know exactly when to provide the necessary assistance to help the individual through challenging times.
We bid the Candidate to pay strict attention to the following instruction, as it is all important. Do not slight any part of it, for we are giving you only what is necessary, and are stating it as briefly as possible. Pay attention, and follow the instruction closely. This lesson must be mastered before you progress. And it must be practiced not only now, but at many stages of the journey, until full Initiation and Illumination is yours.
We ask the Candidate to pay close attention to the following instructions, as they are very important. Don’t overlook any part of it, because we’re providing only what’s necessary and stating it as briefly as we can. Focus and follow the instructions carefully. This lesson must be mastered before you can move forward. And it must be practiced not just now, but at various stages of the journey, until you achieve full Initiation and Illumination.
RULES AND EXERCISES DESIGNED TO AID THE CANDIDATE IN HIS INITIATION.
The first instruction along the line of Initiation is designed to awaken the mind to a full realization and consciousness of the individuality of the "I." The Candidate is taught to relax his body, and to calm his mind and to meditate upon the "I" until it is presented clearly and sharply before the consciousness. We herewith give directions for producing the desired physical and mental condition, in which meditation and concentration are more readily practiced. This state of Meditation will be referred to in subsequent exercises, so the Candidate is advised to acquaint himself thoroughly with it.
The first instruction for Initiation aims to awaken the mind to a full understanding and awareness of the individuality of the "I." The Candidate is taught to relax their body, calm their mind, and meditate on the "I" until it becomes clear and distinct in their awareness. We provide guidance for achieving the right physical and mental state that makes meditation and concentration easier to practice. This state of Meditation will be mentioned in later exercises, so the Candidate is encouraged to become fully familiar with it.
STATE OF MEDITATION. If possible, retire to a quiet place or room, where you do not fear interruption, so that your mind may feel secure and at rest. Of course, the ideal condition cannot always be obtained, in which case you must do the best you can. The idea is that you should be able to abstract yourself, so far as is possible, from distracting impressions, and you should be alone with yourself—in communion with your Real Self.
STATE OF MEDITATION. If you can, find a quiet place or room where you won’t be interrupted, so your mind can feel safe and at ease. Naturally, you might not always achieve perfect conditions, and in that case, just do your best. The goal is to distance yourself as much as possible from distractions and spend time alone with yourself—in touch with your True Self.
It is well to place yourself in an easy chair, or on a couch, so that you may relax the muscles and free the tension of your nerves. You should be able to "let go" all over, allowing every muscle to become limp, until a feeling of perfect peace and restful calm permeates every particle of your being. Rest the body and calm the mind. This condition is best in the earlier stages of the practice, although after the Candidate has acquired a degree of mastery he will be able to obtain the physical relaxation and mental calm whenever and wherever he desires.
It's a good idea to settle into a comfy chair or on a couch so you can relax your muscles and ease the tension in your nerves. You should be able to fully "let go," letting every muscle go slack until you feel a sense of deep peace and calm wash over you. Rest your body and quiet your mind. This state is most beneficial in the earlier stages of practice, but once the Candidate has gained some mastery, they'll be able to achieve physical relaxation and mental calm whenever and wherever they want.
But he must guard against acquiring a "dreamy" way of going around, wrapped in meditation when he should be attending to the affairs of life. Remember this, the State of Meditation should be entirely under the control of the Will, and should be entered into only deliberately and at the proper times. The Will must be master of this, as well as of every other mental state. The Initiates are not "day dreamers," but men and women having full control of themselves and their moods. The "I" consciousness while developed by meditation and consciousness, soon becomes a fixed item of consciousness, and does not have to be produced by meditation. In time of trial, doubt, or trouble, the consciousness may be brightened by an effort of the Will (as we shall explain in subsequent lessons) without going into the State of Meditation.
But he must be careful not to develop a "dreamy" way of going through life, lost in thought when he should be focusing on real-life responsibilities. Remember this, the State of Meditation should always be controlled by the Will, and should only be entered intentionally and at the right moments. The Will must be in charge of this, just as it is of every other mental state. The Initiates are not "daydreamers," but individuals who have full control over themselves and their emotions. The "I" consciousness, while enhanced by meditation and awareness, soon becomes a stable part of consciousness and doesn’t need to be generated through meditation. In times of challenge, doubt, or trouble, the consciousness can be uplifted by an effort of the Will (as we will explain in later lessons) without needing to enter the State of Meditation.
THE REALIZATION OF THE "I." The Candidate must first acquaint himself with the reality of the "I," before he will be able to learn its real nature. This is the first step. Let the Candidate place himself in the State of Meditation, as heretofore described. Then let him concentrate his entire attention upon his Individual Self, shutting out all thought of the outside world, and other persons. Let him form in his mind the idea of himself as a real thing—an actual being—an individual entity—a Sun around which revolves the world. He must see himself as the Centre around which the whole world revolves. Let not a false modesty, or sense of depreciation interfere with this idea, for you are not denying the right of others to also consider themselves centres. You are, in fact, a centre of consciousness—made so by the Absolute—and you are awakening to the fact. Until the Ego recognizes itself as a Centre of Thought, Influence and Power, it will not be able to manifest these qualities. And in proportion as it recognizes its position as a centre, so will it be able to manifest its qualities. It is not necessary that you should compare yourself with others, or imagine yourself greater or higher than them. In fact, such comparisons are to be regretted, and are unworthy of the advanced Ego, being a mark and indication of a lack of development, rather than the reverse. In the Meditation simply ignore all consideration of the respective qualities of others, and endeavor to realize the fact that YOU are a great Centre of Consciousness—a Centre of Power—a Centre of Influence—a Centre of Thought. And that like the planets circling around the sun, so does your world revolve around YOU who are its centre. It will not be necessary for you to argue out this matter, or to convince yourself of its truth by intellectual reasoning. The knowledge does not come in that way. It comes in the shape of a realization of the truth gradually dawning upon your consciousness through meditation and concentration. Carry this thought of yourself as a "Centre of Consciousness—Influence—Power" with you, for it is an occult truth, and in the proportion that you are able, to realize it so will be your ability to manifest the qualities named.
THE REALIZATION OF THE "I." The Candidate must first understand the reality of the "I" before being able to learn its true nature. This is the first step. Let the Candidate enter a meditative state, as previously described. Then let him focus all his attention on his Individual Self, blocking out any thoughts of the outside world and other people. He should envision himself as a real entity—an actual being—an individual entity—a Sun around which the world revolves. He must see himself as the Center around which the whole world turns. Don’t let false modesty or feelings of worthlessness interfere with this idea, because you’re not denying others their right to see themselves as centers too. You are, in fact, a center of consciousness—created by the Absolute—who is awakening to this truth. Until the Ego recognizes itself as a Center of Thought, Influence, and Power, it won’t be able to manifest these qualities. The more it recognizes its position as a center, the more it will be able to express these qualities. It's not necessary for you to compare yourself with others or imagine yourself to be better or higher than them. In fact, such comparisons are regrettable and unworthy of an advanced Ego, indicating a lack of development rather than the opposite. In meditation, simply disregard any thoughts about the qualities of others and strive to realize that YOU are a significant Center of Consciousness—a Center of Power—a Center of Influence—a Center of Thought. Just as the planets orbit around the sun, your world revolves around YOU as its center. You won’t need to argue this point or convince yourself of its truth with logic. The understanding doesn’t come that way. It comes as a realization that gradually emerges in your consciousness through meditation and concentration. Carry this thought of yourself as a "Center of Consciousness—Influence—Power" with you, for it is an occult truth, and the more you can realize it, the better you will be able to manifest the qualities mentioned.
No matter how humble may be your position—no matter how hard may be your lot—no matter how deficient in educational advantages you may be—still you would not change your "I" with the most fortunate, wisest and highest man or woman in the world. You may doubt this, but think for a moment and you will see that we are right. When you say that you "would like to be" this person or that, you really mean that you would like to have their degree of intelligence, power, wealth, position, or what not. What you want is something that is theirs, or something akin to it. But you would not for a moment wish to merge your identity with theirs, or to exchange selves. Think of this for a moment To be the other person you would have to let yourself die, and instead of yourself you would be the other person. The real you would be wiped out of existence, and you would not be you at all, but would be he.
No matter how low your position is—no matter how tough your circumstances—no matter how lacking you may feel in educational opportunities—you wouldn’t trade your "I" with the most fortunate, wisest, or most accomplished person in the world. You might question this, but take a moment to think it over and you'll see it’s true. When you say you "would like to be" someone else, what you really mean is that you wish you had their level of intelligence, power, wealth, status, or something similar. What you desire is something that belongs to them, or something like it. But you wouldn't want to lose your own identity for a second or swap your self with theirs. Consider this for a moment: to truly be the other person, you would have to let yourself die, and instead of being yourself, you would become that person. The real you would be erased from existence, and you wouldn't be you at all; you'd be them.
If you can but grasp this idea you will see that not for a moment would you be willing for such an exchange. Of course such an exchange is impossible. The "I" of you cannot be wiped out. It is eternal, and will go on, and on, and on, to higher and higher states—but it always will be the same "I." Just as you, although a far different sort of person from your childhood self, still you recognize that the same "I" is there, and always has been there. And although you will attain knowledge, experience, power and wisdom in the coming years, the same "I" will be there. The "I" is the Divine Spark and cannot be extinguished.
If you can really understand this idea, you'll see that you wouldn't want to make such a trade for even a second. Of course, that kind of trade is impossible. The "you" inside can't be erased. It's eternal and will continue to grow and evolve into higher states, but it will always be the same "you." Just as you can recognize that, even though you're a very different person now compared to when you were a child, the same "you" has always been there. And even though you will gain knowledge, experience, power, and wisdom in the years to come, the same "you" will still be there. The "you" is the Divine Spark and cannot be extinguished.
The majority of people in the present stage of the race development have but a faint conception of the reality of the "I." They accept the statement of its existence, and are conscious of themselves as an eating, sleeping, living creature—something like a higher form of animal. But they have not awakened to an "awareness" or realization of the "I," which must come to all who become real centres of Influence and Power. Some men have stumbled into this consciousness, or a degree of it, without understanding the matter. They have "felt" the truth of it, and they have stepped out from the ranks of the commonplace people of the world, and have become powers for good or bad. This is unfortunate to some extent, as this "awareness" without the knowledge that should accompany it may bring pain to the individual and others.
Most people today have only a vague idea of what the "I" truly is. They accept that it exists and recognize themselves as living beings—similar to a more advanced form of animal. However, they haven't fully awakened to an "awareness" or understanding of the "I," which is essential for anyone who wants to become a true center of Influence and Power. Some individuals have accidentally arrived at this awareness, or some level of it, without really grasping what it means. They have "felt" its truth and have stepped away from the everyday crowd, becoming forces for good or evil. This can be somewhat unfortunate, as this "awareness" without the accompanying knowledge may lead to suffering for themselves and others.
The Candidate must meditate upon the "I," and recognize it—feel it—to be a Centre. This is his first task. Impress upon your mind the word "I," in this sense and understanding, and let it sink deep down into your consciousness, so that it will become a part of you. And when you say "I," you must accompany the word with the picture of your Ego as a Centre of Consciousness, and Thought, and Power, and Influence. See yourself thus, surrounded by your world. Wherever you go, there goes the Centre of your world. YOU are the Centre, and all outside of you revolves around that Centre. This is the first great lesson on the road to Initiation. Learn it!
The Candidate needs to reflect on the "I" and recognize it—feel it—to be a center. This is their first task. Keep the word "I" in mind, with this understanding, and let it sink deep into your consciousness so that it becomes part of you. When you say "I," you should picture your Ego as a Center of Consciousness, Thought, Power, and Influence. Visualize yourself this way, surrounded by your world. Wherever you go, the Center of your world goes with you. YOU are the Center, and everything outside of you revolves around that Center. This is the first important lesson on the path to Initiation. Learn it!
The Yogi Masters teach the Candidates that their realization of the "I" as a Centre may be hastened by going into the Silence, or State of Meditation, and repeating their first name over slowly, deliberately and solemnly a number of times. This exercise tends to cause the mind to centre upon the "I," and many cases of dawning Initiation have resulted from this practice. Many original thinkers have stumbled upon this method, without having been taught it. A noted example is that of Lord Tennyson, who has written that he attained a degree of Initiation in this way. He would repeat his own name, over and over, and the same time meditating upon his identity, and he reports that he would become conscious and "aware" of his reality and immortality—in short would recognize himself as a real center of consciousness.
The Yogi Masters teach the Candidates that they can speed up their realization of the "I" as a center by entering into Silence, or a state of meditation, and slowly, deliberately, and solemnly repeating their first name multiple times. This practice helps focus the mind on the "I," and many instances of emerging Initiation have come from this method. Many original thinkers have discovered this technique on their own, without any formal teaching. A well-known example is Lord Tennyson, who stated that he achieved a level of Initiation this way. He would repeat his name over and over while meditating on his identity, and he reported that he became conscious and "aware" of his reality and immortality—essentially recognizing himself as a real center of consciousness.
We think we have given you the key to the first stage of meditation and
concentration. Before passing on, let us quote from one of the old Hindu
Masters. He says, regarding this matter: "When the soul sees itself as a
Centre surrounded by its circumference—when the Sun knows that it is a
Sun, and is surrounded by its whirling planets—then is it ready for the
Wisdom and Power of the Masters."
We believe we’ve provided you with the key to the first stage of meditation and
concentration. Before moving on, let us quote one of the ancient Hindu
Masters. He states, regarding this topic: "When the soul recognizes itself as a
Center surrounded by its boundaries—when the Sun acknowledges that it is a
Sun, and is surrounded by its orbiting planets—then it is ready for the
Wisdom and Power of the Masters."
THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE INDEPENDENCE OF THE "I" FROM THE BODY. Many of the Candidates find themselves prevented from a full realization of the "I" (even after they have begun to grasp it) by the confusing of the reality of the "I" with the sense of the physical body. This is a stumbling block that is easily overcome by meditation and concentration, the independence of the "I" often becoming manifest to the Candidate in a flash, upon the proper thought being used as the subject of meditation.
THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE INDEPENDENCE OF THE "I" FROM THE BODY. Many candidates struggle to fully understand the "I" (even after they’ve started to get it) because they confuse the reality of the "I" with their physical body. This barrier is easy to overcome through meditation and concentration, and the independence of the "I" often becomes clear to the candidate in an instant when the right thought is used as the focus of meditation.
The exercise is given as follows: Place yourself in the State of Meditation, and think of YOURSELF—the Real "I"—as being independent of the body, but using the body as a covering and an instrument. Think of the body as you might of a suit of clothes. Realize that you are able to leave the body, and still be the same "I." Picture yourself as doing this, and looking down upon your body. Think of the body as a shell from which you may emerge without affecting your identity. Think of yourself as mastering and controlling the body that you occupy, and using it to the best advantage, making it healthy, strong and vigorous, but still being merely a shell or covering for the real "You." Think of the body as composed of atoms and cells which are constantly changing, but which are held together by the force of your Ego, and which you can improve at Will. Realize that you are merely inhabiting the body, and using it for your convenience, just as you might use a house.
The exercise is given as follows: Take a moment to settle into a state of meditation and think of YOURSELF—the true "I"—as separate from your body, seeing it as a covering and a tool. Consider your body like a suit of clothes. Understand that you can detach from your body and still be the same "I." Imagine yourself doing this and looking down at your body. See the body as a shell that you can exit without losing your identity. Visualize yourself as the one in charge of the body you inhabit, using it to your advantage by keeping it healthy, strong, and energetic, all while recognizing it’s just a shell for the real "You." Think of the body made up of atoms and cells that are constantly changing, all held together by the force of your Ego, which you can improve at your discretion. Acknowledge that you are simply living in the body and utilizing it for your convenience, much like you would a house.
In meditating further, ignore the body entirely, and place your thought upon the Real "I" that you are beginning to feel to be "you," and you will find that your identity—your "I"—is something entirely apart from the body. You may now say "my body" with a new meaning. Divorce the idea of your being a physical being, and realize that you are above body. But do not let this conception and realization cause you to ignore the body. You must regard the body as the Temple of the Spirit, and care for it, and make it a fit habitation for the "I." Do not be frightened if, during this meditation, you happen to experience the sensation of being out of the body for a few moments, and of returning to it when you are through with the exercise. The Ego is able (in the case of the advanced Initiate) of soaring above the confines of the body, but it never severs its connection at such times. It is merely as if one were to look out of the window of a room, seeing what was going on outside, and drawing in his head when he wishes. He does not leave the room, although he may place his head outside in order to observe what is doing in the street. We do not advise the Candidate to try to cultivate this sensation—but if it comes naturally during meditation, do not fear.
When you meditate more deeply, completely disregard your body and focus on the Real "I" that you're starting to recognize as "you." You'll discover that your identity—your "I"—is completely separate from your physical self. You can now say "my body" with a fresh perspective. Let go of the idea that you are just a physical being and understand that you exist beyond your body. However, don’t let this understanding lead you to neglect your body. You should treat your body as the Temple of the Spirit, taking care of it and making it a suitable home for the "I." Don’t be alarmed if, during this meditation, you briefly feel like you're outside your body and then return to it once you're done. The Ego can, for those who are more advanced, rise above the limits of the body, but it never completely disconnects during those moments. It's similar to looking out of a window to see what’s happening outside and then pulling your head back in when you want. You don’t leave the room; you just peek outside to observe what’s going on in the street. We don't recommend that you try to force this feeling, but if it happens naturally while you meditate, don’t be afraid.
REALIZING THE IMMORTALITY AND INVINCIBILITY OF THE EGO. While the majority accept on faith the belief in the Immortality of the Soul, yet but few are aware that it may be demonstrated by the soul itself. The Yogi Masters teach the Candidates this lesson, as follows: The Candidate places himself in the State of Meditation, or at least in a thoughtful frame of mind, and then endeavors to "imagine" himself as "dead"—that is, he tries to form a mental conception of himself as dead. This, at first thought, appears a very easy thing to imagine, but as a matter of fact it is impossible to do so, for the Ego refuses to entertain the proposition, and finds it impossible to imagine it. Try it for yourself. You will find that you may be able to imagine your body as lying still and lifeless, but the same thought finds that in so doing You are standing and looking at the body. So you see that You are not dead at all, even in imagination, although the body may be. Or, if you refuse to disentangle yourself from your body, in imagination, you may think of your body as dead but You who refuse to leave it are still alive and recognize the dead body as a thing apart from your Real Self. No matter how you may twist it you cannot imagine yourself as dead. The Ego insists upon being alive in any of these thoughts, and thus finds that it has within itself the sense and assurance of Immortality. In case of sleep or stupor resulting from a blow, or from narcotics or anaesthetics, the mind is apparently blank, but the "I" is conscious of a continuity of existence. And so one may imagine himself as being in an unconscious state, or asleep, quite easily, and sees the possibility of such a state, but when it comes to imagining the "I" as dead, the mind utterly refuses to do the work. This wonderful fact that the soul carries within itself the evidence of its own immortality is a glorious thing, but one must have reached a degree of unfoldment before he is able to grasp its full significance.
REALIZING THE IMMORTALITY AND INVINCIBILITY OF THE EGO. While most people believe in the Immortality of the Soul as a matter of faith, very few realize that it can be proven by the soul itself. The Yogi Masters teach this lesson to the Candidates as follows: The Candidate puts themselves in a meditative state or at least gets into a thoughtful mindset and then tries to "imagine" themselves as "dead"—essentially, they try to mentally picture themselves as dead. At first glance, this seems like a simple task, but in reality, it is impossible to do, because the Ego refuses to accept the idea and cannot picture it. Try it for yourself. You may be able to envision your body lying still and lifeless, but that same thought reveals that You are standing there, looking at the body. So you see that You are not dead at all, even in imagination, despite the body being so. Or, if you refuse to separate yourself from your body in your mind, you might think of your body as dead, but You, who will not leave it, are still alive and see the lifeless body as something separate from your true self. No matter how you approach it, you cannot imagine yourself as dead. The Ego insists on being alive in any of these thoughts, and thus realizes that it has within itself the sense and assurance of Immortality. In cases of sleep or stupor caused by a blow, narcotics, or anesthesia, the mind may seem blank, but the "I" still feels a continuity of existence. One can easily imagine being in an unconscious or sleeping state and recognizes the possibility of such a condition, but when it comes to picturing the "I" as dead, the mind completely rejects the idea. This incredible fact that the soul holds the evidence of its own immortality is a magnificent realization, but one must reach a certain level of understanding before they can fully appreciate its significance.
The Candidate is advised to investigate the above statement for himself, by meditation and concentration, for in order that the "I" may know its true nature and possibilities, it must realize that it cannot be destroyed or killed. It must know what it is before it is able to manifest its nature. So do not leave this part of the teaching until you have mastered it. And it is well occasionally to return to it, in order that you may impress upon the mind the fact of your immortal and eternal nature. The mere glimmering of this conception of truth will give you an increased sense of strength and power, and you will find that your Self has expanded and grown, and that you are more of a power and Centre than you have heretofore realized.
The Candidate is encouraged to explore the above statement for themselves through meditation and focus. To truly understand the nature and potential of the "I," it must recognize that it cannot be destroyed or killed. It needs to know what it is before it can express its true nature. So don’t skip over this part of the teaching until you’ve mastered it. It’s also beneficial to revisit this concept from time to time, so you can reinforce the understanding of your immortal and eternal nature. Just having a glimpse of this truth will boost your sense of strength and power, and you’ll discover that your Self has expanded and grown, making you more powerful and centered than you’ve realized before.
The following exercises are useful in bringing about a realization of the invincibility of the Ego—its superiority to the elements.
The following exercises are helpful in understanding the strength of the Ego—its dominance over the elements.
Place yourself in the State of Meditation, and imagine the "I" as withdrawn from the body. See it passing through the tests of air, fire and water unharmed. The body being out of the way, the soul is seen to be able of passing through the air at will—of floating like a bird—of soaring—of traveling in the ether. It may be seen as able to pass through fire without harm and without sensation, for the elements affect only the physical body, not the Real "I." Likewise it may be seen as passing through water without discomfort or danger or hurt.
Place yourself in a state of meditation and imagine the "I" as separate from the body. Visualize it moving through air, fire, and water without being harmed. With the body out of the way, the soul appears capable of gliding through the air at will—like a bird—soaring—traveling in the ether. It can be imagined as passing through fire without injury or sensation, since the elements only impact the physical body, not the true "I." Similarly, it can be seen as moving through water without any discomfort, danger, or pain.
This meditation will give you a sense of superiority and strength, and will show you something of the nature of the real "I." It is true that you are confined in the body, and the body may be affected by the elements, but the knowledge that the Real "I" is superior to the body—superior to the elements that affect the body—and cannot be injured any more than it can be killed, is wonderful, and tends to develop the full "I" consciousness within you. For You—the Real "I"—are not body. You are Spirit. The Ego is Immortal and Invincible, and cannot be killed and harmed. When you enter into this realization and consciousness, you will feel an influx of strength and power impossible to describe. Fear will fall from you like a worn-out cloak, and you will feel that you are "born again." An understanding of this thought, will show you that the things that we have been fearing cannot affect the Real "I," but must rest content with hurting the physical body. And they may be warded off from the physical body by a proper understanding and application of the Will.
This meditation will give you a sense of confidence and strength and will reveal some aspects of the true "I." It’s true that you are limited by your body, and that the body can be influenced by external forces, but the understanding that the Real "I" is greater than the body—greater than the forces that impact the body—and cannot be harmed any more than it can be destroyed is amazing and helps to develop your full "I" consciousness. Because you—the Real "I"—are not just a body. You are Spirit. The Ego is immortal and unbeatable, and cannot be destroyed or harmed. When you truly grasp this realization, you'll experience a surge of strength and power that’s hard to put into words. Fear will fall away from you like an old cloak, and you'll feel like you're "born again." Understanding this concept will show you that the things we fear cannot impact the Real "I," but can only hurt the physical body. And those threats can be avoided by properly understanding and applying your will.
In our next lesson, you will be taught how to separate the "I" from the mechanism of the mind—how you may realize your mastery of the mind, just as you now realize your independence of the body. This knowledge must be imparted to you by degrees, and you must place your feet firmly upon one round of the ladder before you take the next step.
In our next lesson, you will learn how to separate the "I" from the workings of the mind—how you can achieve mastery over your mind, just like you now understand your independence from your body. This knowledge will be shared with you gradually, and you need to firmly establish yourself on one step of the ladder before moving on to the next one.
The watchword of this First Lesson is "I." And the Candidate must enter fully into its meaning before he is able to progress. He must realize his real existence—independent of the body. He must see himself as invincible and impervious to harm, hurt, or death. He must see himself as a great Centre of Consciousness—a Sun around which his world revolves. Then will come to him a new strength. He will feel a calm dignity and power, which will be apparent to those with whom he comes in contact. He will be able to look the world in the face without flinching, and without fear, for he will realize the nature and power of the "I." He will realize that he is a Centre of Power—of Influence. He will realize that nothing can harm the "I," and that no matter how the storms of life may dash upon the personality, the real "I"—the Individuality—is unharmed. Like a rock that stands steadfast throughout the storm, so does the "I" stand through the tempests of the life of personality. And he will know that as he grows in realization, he will be able to control these storms and bid them be still.
The key idea of this First Lesson is "I." The Candidate must fully grasp its meaning before moving forward. They need to understand their true existence—separate from the body. They should see themselves as invincible and immune to harm, pain, or death. They must view themselves as a powerful Center of Consciousness—a Sun around which their world revolves. This realization will bring them new strength. They will feel a calm dignity and power, which will be noticeable to those around them. They will be able to face the world confidently and fearlessly, recognizing the true nature and power of the "I." They will understand that they are a Center of Power—of Influence. They will realize that nothing can harm the "I," and regardless of how life’s storms may batter their personality, the real "I"—the Individuality—remains unscathed. Just like a rock that stands strong during a storm, the "I" endures the tempests of personal life. And they will know that as they grow in awareness, they will be able to calm these storms and make them be still.
In the words of one of the Yogi Masters: "The 'I' is eternal. It passes unharmed through the fire, the air, the water. Sword and spear cannot kill or wound it. It cannot die. The trials of the physical life are but as dreams to it. Resting secure in the knowledge of the 'I,' Man may smile at the worst the world has to offer, and raising his hand he may bid them disappear into the mist from which they emerged. Blessed is he who can say (understandingly) 'I'."
In the words of one of the Yogi Masters: "The 'I' is eternal. It moves through fire, air, and water without being harmed. No sword or spear can kill or injure it. It cannot die. The challenges of physical life are just like dreams to it. With the understanding of the 'I,' a person can smile at the worst that the world throws his way, and with a wave of his hand, he can make them fade back into the mist from which they came. Blessed is he who can confidently say 'I'."
So dear Candidate, we leave you to master the First Lesson. Be not discouraged if your progress be slow. Be not cast down if you slip back a step after having gained it. You will gain two at the next step. Success and realization will be yours. Mastery is before. You will Attain. You will Accomplish. Peace be with you.
So, dear Candidate, we leave you to master the First Lesson. Don’t be discouraged if your progress is slow. Don’t be upset if you take a step back after making progress. You'll make two steps forward next time. Success and realization will be yours. Mastery is ahead. You will achieve it. You will succeed. Peace be with you.
MANTRAMS (AFFIRMATIONS) FOR THE FIRST LESSON.
"I" am a Centre. Around me revolves my world.
"I" am a center. My world revolves around me.
"I" am a Centre of Influence and Power.
"I" am a Center of Influence and Power.
"I" am a Centre of Thought and Consciousness.
"I" am a Center of Thought and Awareness.
"I" am Independent of the Body.
"I" am Independent of the Body.
"I" am Immortal and cannot be Destroyed.
"I" am immortal and cannot be destroyed.
"I" am Invincible and cannot be Injured.
"I" am invincible and can't be hurt.
[Illustration: "I"]
[Illustration: "Me"]
THE SECOND LESSON.
THE EGO'S MENTAL TOOLS.
In the First Lesson we gave instruction and exercises designed to awaken the consciousness of the Candidate to a realization of the real "I." We confined our instructions to the preliminary teachings of the reality of the "I," and the means whereby the Candidate might be brought to a realization of his real Self, and its independence from the body and the things of the flesh. We tried to show you how you might awaken to a consciousness of the reality of the "I"; its real nature; its independence of the body; its immortality; its invincibility and invulnerability. How well we have succeeded may be determined only by the experience of each Candidate, for we can but point out the way, and the Candidate must do the real work himself.
In the First Lesson, we provided guidance and exercises aimed at helping the Candidate recognize their true "I." We focused our teachings on the initial concepts of the reality of the "I" and how the Candidate could come to understand their true Self and its separation from the body and physical desires. We aimed to illustrate how you could become aware of the reality of the "I," including its true nature, independence from the body, immortality, invincibility, and invulnerability. How well we succeeded can only be determined by each Candidate’s personal experience, as we can only show the path, and the Candidate must do the actual work themselves.
But there is more to be said and done in this matter of awakening to a realization of the "I." So far, we have but told you how to distinguish between the material coverings of the Ego and the "I" itself. We have tried to show you that you had a real "I," and then to show you what it was, and how it was independent of the material coverings, etc. But there is still another step in this self analysis—a more difficult step. Even when the Candidate has awakened to a realization of his independence of the body, and material coverings, he often confounds the "I" with the lower principles of the mind. This is a mistake. The Mind, in its various phases and planes, is but a tool and instrument of the "I," and is far from being the "I" itself. We shall try to bring out this fact in this lesson and its accompanying exercises. We shall avoid, and pass by, the metaphysical features of the case, and shall confine ourselves to the Yogi Psychology. We shall not touch upon theories, nor attempt to explain the cause, nature and purpose of the Mind—the working tool of the Ego—but instead shall attempt to point out a way whereby you may analyze the Mind and then determine which is the "not I" and which is the real "I." It is useless to burden you with theories or metaphysical talk, when the way to prove the thing is right within your own grasp. By using the mind, you will be able to separate it into its parts, and force it to give you its own answer to the questions touching itself.
But there’s more to uncover and do in the journey of realizing the "I." Until now, we’ve only explained how to differentiate between the material layers of the Ego and the "I" itself. We’ve attempted to show you that you have a genuine "I," what it is, and how it exists independently of those material layers, among other things. However, there’s another step in this self-analysis—a more challenging step. Even after a person has awakened to the understanding of their independence from the body and material layers, they often confuse the "I" with the lower aspects of the mind. This is an error. The Mind, in its various forms and levels, is just a tool and instrument of the "I," and is far from being the "I" itself. We’ll aim to highlight this fact in this lesson and its related exercises. We will avoid discussing the metaphysical aspects of the situation, focusing instead on Yogi Psychology. We won’t delve into theories or try to explain the cause, nature, and purpose of the Mind—the operational tool of the Ego—but instead will suggest a method for you to analyze the Mind and determine what constitutes the "not I" and what is the true "I." It’s pointless to weigh you down with theories or metaphysical discussions when the means to prove this is right at your fingertips. By utilizing the mind, you’ll be able to break it down into its components and compel it to provide you with its own answers to questions about itself.
In the second and third lessons of our "Fourteen Lessons," we pointed out to you the fact that man had three Mental Principles, or subdivisions of mind, all of which were below the plane of Spirit. The "I" is Spirit, but its mental principles are of a lower order. Without wishing to unduly repeat ourselves, we think it better to run hastily over these three Principles in the mind of Man.
In the second and third lessons of our "Fourteen Lessons," we highlighted that humans have three Mental Principles, or subdivisions of the mind, which are all beneath the level of Spirit. The "I" represents Spirit, but its mental principles are of a lower order. Without wanting to overemphasize, we believe it’s better to quickly review these three Principles in the human mind.
First, there is what is known as the Instinctive Mind, which man shares in common with the lower animals. It is the first principle of mind that appears in the scale of evolution. In its lowest phases, consciousness is but barely perceptible, and mere sensation is apparent. In its higher stages it almost reaches the plane of Reason or Intellect, in fact, they overlap each other, or, rather, blend into each other. The Instinctive Mind does valuable work in the direction of maintaining animal life in our bodies, it having charge of this part of our being. It attends to the constant work of repair; replacement; change; digestion; assimilation; elimination, etc., all of which work is performed below the plane of consciousness.
First, there’s what we call the Instinctive Mind, which humans share with lower animals. It’s the earliest form of mind that emerges in the evolution process. In its most basic form, consciousness is barely noticeable, and only basic sensations are evident. In its more advanced stages, it comes close to the level of Reason or Intellect; in fact, they overlap or blend into one another. The Instinctive Mind does important work to sustain animal life within our bodies, overseeing that aspect of our existence. It manages ongoing tasks like repair, replacement, change, digestion, assimilation, elimination, and so on, all of which happen below the level of consciousness.
But this is but a small part of the work of the Instinctive Mind. For this part of the mind has stored up all the experiences of ourselves and ancestors in our evolution from the lower forms of animal life into the present stage of evolution. All of the old animal instincts (which were all right in their place, and quite necessary for the well-being of the lower forms of life) have left traces in this part of the mind, which traces are apt to come to the front under pressure of unusual circumstances, even long after we think we have outgrown them. In this part of the mind are to be found traces of the old fighting instinct of the animal; all the animal passions; all the hate, envy, jealousy, and the rest of it, which are our inheritances from the past. The Instinctive Mind is also the "habit mind" in which is stored up all the little, and great, habits of many lives, or rather such as have not been entirely effaced by subsequent habits of a stronger nature. The Instinctive Mind is a queer storehouse, containing quite a variety of objects, many of them very good in their way, but others of which are the worst kind of old junk and rubbish.
But this is just a small part of what the Instinctive Mind does. This part of the mind has accumulated all the experiences of ourselves and our ancestors as we evolved from lower forms of animal life to our current state of evolution. All the old animal instincts (which were fine in their time and essential for the survival of lower life forms) have left traces in this part of the mind, and these traces can resurface under unusual circumstances, even long after we believe we’ve outgrown them. In this part of the mind, you'll find remnants of the ancient fighting instinct of animals; all the animal passions; all the hate, envy, jealousy, and the like, which we inherit from the past. The Instinctive Mind is also the "habit mind," where all the little and big habits of many lives are stored, or at least those that haven't been completely erased by stronger, newer habits. The Instinctive Mind is an odd storage space, containing a mix of items, some of which are quite helpful, but others are just old junk and useless clutter.
This part of the mind also is the seat of the appetites; passions; desires; instincts; sensations; feelings and emotions of the lower order, manifested in the lower animals; primitive man; the barbarian; and the man of today, the difference being only in the degree of control over them that has been gained by the higher parts of the mind. There are higher desires, aspirations, etc., belonging to a higher part of the mind, which we will describe in a few minutes, but the "animal nature" belongs to the Instinctive Mind. To it also belong the "feelings" belonging to our emotional and passional nature. All animal desires, such as hunger and thirst; sexual desires (on the physical plane); all passions, such as physical love; hatred; envy; malice; jealousy; revenge, etc., are part of this part of the mind. The desire for the physical (unless a means of reaching higher things) and the longing for the material, belong to this region of the mind. The "lust of the flesh; the lust of the eyes; the pride of life," belong to the Instinctive Mind.
This part of the mind is also where our appetites, passions, desires, instincts, sensations, feelings, and lower emotions are centered. These aspects are seen in lower animals, primitive humans, barbarians, and people today, with the difference being the level of control the higher parts of the mind have over them. There are higher desires and aspirations related to the more advanced part of the mind, which we’ll discuss shortly, but the "animal nature" is linked to the Instinctive Mind. This part also encompasses the feelings tied to our emotional and passionate nature. All animal desires, like hunger and thirst, sexual desires (on the physical level), and passions such as physical love, hatred, envy, malice, jealousy, and revenge, are part of this aspect of the mind. The desire for the physical (unless it's a means to achieve higher goals) and the yearning for material things belong to this area of the mind. The "lust of the flesh, the lust of the eyes, and the pride of life" are all part of the Instinctive Mind.
Take note, however, that we are not condemning the things belonging to this plane of the mind. All of them have their place—many were necessary in the past, and many are still necessary for the continuance of physical life. All are right in their place, and to those in the particular plane of development to which they belong, and are wrong only when one is mastered by them, or when he returns to pick up an unworthy thing that has been cast off in the unfoldment of the individual. This lesson has nothing to do with the right and wrong of these things (we have treated of that elsewhere) and we mention this part of the mind that you may understand that you have such a thing in your mental make-up, and that you may understand the thought, etc., coming from it, when we start in to analyze the mind in the latter part of this lesson. All we will ask you to do at this stage of the lesson is to realize that this part of the mind, while belonging to you, is not You, yourself. It is not the "I" part of you.
Take note, however, that we are not condemning the things belonging to this part of the mind. All of them have their place—many were necessary in the past, and many are still necessary for the continuation of physical life. All are appropriate in their place, and to those in the specific stage of development they belong to, and are only inappropriate when one is controlled by them, or when someone goes back to retrieve something unworthy that has been left behind in the individual's growth. This lesson has nothing to do with determining the rightness or wrongness of these things (we’ve discussed that elsewhere) and we mention this aspect of the mind so you can understand that you have such a component in your mental makeup, and that you can grasp the thoughts, etc., coming from it, when we begin to analyze the mind in the later part of this lesson. All we ask you to do at this stage of the lesson is to realize that this part of the mind, while belonging to you, is not You, yourself. It is not the "I" part of you.
Next in order, above the Instinctive Mind, is what we have called the Intellect, that part of the mind that does our reasoning, analyzing; "thinking," etc. You are using it in the consideration of this lesson. But note this: You are using it, but it is not You, any more than was the Instinctive Mind that you considered a moment ago. You will begin to make the separation, if you will think but a moment. We will not take up your time with a consideration of Intellect or Reason. You will find a good description of this part of the mind in any good elementary work on Psychology. Our only idea in mentioning it is that you may make the classification, and that we may afterward show you that the Intellect is but a tool of the Ego, instead of being the real "I" itself, as so many seem to imagine.
Next in line, above the Instinctive Mind, is what we refer to as the Intellect, which is the part of the mind that handles our reasoning, analyzing, and "thinking," among other things. You're using it while considering this lesson. But remember: you are using it, but it is not you, just like the Instinctive Mind you thought about a moment ago. You'll start to make that distinction if you take a moment to think. We won’t spend time discussing the Intellect or Reason. You can find a good description of this aspect of the mind in any basic Psychology textbook. Our only purpose in mentioning it is so you can make the distinction, and later we can show you that the Intellect is just a tool of the Ego, rather than the real "I" itself, as many people seem to believe.
The third, and highest, Mental Principle is what is called the Spiritual Mind, that part of the mind which is almost unknown to many of the race, but which has developed into consciousness with nearly all who read this lesson, for the fact that the subject of this lesson attracts you is a proof that this part of your mental nature is unfolding into consciousness. This region of the mind is the source of that which we call "genius," "inspiration," "spirituality," and all that we consider the "highest" in our mental make-up. All the great thoughts and ideas float into the field of consciousness from this part of the mind. All the great unfoldment of the race comes from there. All the higher mental ideas that have come to Man in his upward evolutionary journey, that tend in the direction of nobility; true religious feeling; kindness; humanity; justice; unselfish love; mercy; sympathy, etc., have come to him through his slowly unfolding Spiritual Mind. His love of God and of his fellow man have come in this way. His knowledge of the great occult truths reach him through this channel. The mental realization of the "I," which we are endeavoring to teach in these lessons, must come to him by way of the Spiritual Mind unfolding its ideas into his field of consciousness.
The third and highest Mental Principle is what's known as the Spiritual Mind, the part of the mind that's mostly unfamiliar to many people. However, it has developed into awareness for nearly everyone reading this lesson. The fact that this topic interests you shows that this aspect of your mental nature is becoming conscious. This area of the mind is the source of what we term "genius," "inspiration," "spirituality," and everything we view as the "highest" in our mental composition. All the profound thoughts and ideas emerge into our consciousness from this part of the mind. The significant progress of humanity originates from here. All the elevated mental ideas that have come to humans on their upward journey of evolution—ideas directing us toward nobility, genuine religious feeling, kindness, compassion, justice, selfless love, mercy, sympathy, etc.—have come through the gradual unfolding of the Spiritual Mind. Our love for God and fellow humans has developed in this manner. Our understanding of essential occult truths is communicated through this channel. The mental recognition of the "I," which we're working to explain in these lessons, must arise from the unfolding of the Spiritual Mind as it brings its ideas into our conscious awareness.
But even this great and wonderful part of the mind is but a tool—a highly finished one, it is true, but still a tool—to the Ego, or "I."
But even this amazing and incredible part of the mind is just a tool—a very refined one, for sure, but still a tool—for the Ego, or "I."
We propose to give you a little mental drill work, toward the end that you may be able more readily to distinguish the "I" from the mind, or mental states. In this connection we would say that every part, plane, and function of the mind is good, and necessary, and the student must not fall into the error of supposing that because we tell him to set aside first this part of the mind and then that part, that we are undervaluing the mind, or that we regard it as an encumbrance or hindrance. Far from this, we realize that it is by the use of the mind that Man is enabled to arrive at a knowledge of his true nature and Self, and that his progress through many stages yet will depend upon the unfolding of his mental faculties.
We suggest doing a little mental exercise so you can better differentiate the "I" from your mind or mental states. In this context, we want to emphasize that every part, aspect, and function of the mind is valuable and necessary. The student shouldn't make the mistake of thinking that when we ask them to temporarily set aside certain parts of the mind, we're devaluing it or seeing it as a burden or obstacle. On the contrary, we understand that it is through the use of the mind that a person can gain insight into their true nature and self, and that their growth through various stages will still depend on the development of their mental abilities.
Man is now using but the lower and inferior parts of his mind, and he has within his mental world great unexplored regions that far surpass anything of which the human mind has dreamed. In fact, it is part of the business of "Raja Yoga" to aid in unfolding these higher faculties and mental regions. And so far from decrying the Mind, the "Raja Yoga" teachers are chiefly concerned in recognizing the Mind's power and possibilities, and directing the student to avail himself of the latent powers that are inherent in his soul.
Man is currently only using the lower and less developed parts of his mind, while there are vast unexplored areas in his mental world that far exceed anything the human mind has ever imagined. In fact, one of the goals of "Raja Yoga" is to help awaken these higher abilities and mental spaces. Rather than dismissing the Mind, the "Raja Yoga" teachers focus on recognizing its power and potential, guiding the student to tap into the hidden abilities that are naturally part of his being.
It is only by the mind that the teachings we are now giving you may be grasped and understood, and used to your advantage and benefit. We are talking direct to your mind now, and are making appeals to it, that it may be interested and may open itself to what is ready to come into it from its own higher regions. We are appealing to the Intellect to direct its attention to this great matter, that it may interpose less resistance to the truths that are waiting to be projected from the Spiritual Mind, which knows the Truth.
It’s only through the mind that the teachings we’re sharing with you can be understood and used to your advantage. We’re speaking directly to your mind now, aiming to engage it so that it can be receptive to what is coming from its higher levels. We’re encouraging your intellect to focus on this important matter, so it can be less resistant to the truths that are waiting to be revealed from the Spiritual Mind, which knows the Truth.
MENTAL DRILL.
Place yourself in a calm, restful condition, that you may be able to meditate upon the matters that we shall place before you for consideration. Allow the matters presented to meet with a hospitable reception from you, and hold a mental attitude of willingness to receive what may be waiting for you in the higher regions of your mind.
Put yourself in a calm, relaxed state so that you can meditate on the topics we’ll present for your consideration. Be open to the ideas we share, and adopt a mindset that is ready to receive whatever insights may be waiting for you in the deeper parts of your mind.
We wish to call your attention to several mental impressions or conditions, one after another, in order that you may realize that they are merely something incident to you, and not YOU yourself—that you may set them aside and consider them, just as you might anything that you have been using. You cannot set the "I" aside and so consider it, but the various forms of the "not I" may be so set aside and considered.
We want to bring your attention to various mental impressions or states, one after another, so you can understand that they are just something incidental to you, and not YOU yourself—that you can put them aside and examine them, just like anything else you’ve been using. You can't put the "I" aside to examine it, but the different aspects of the "not I" can be set aside and analyzed.
In the First Lesson you gained the perception of the "I" as independent from the body, the latter merely being an instrument for use. You have now arrived at the stage when the "I" appears to you to be a mental creature—a bundle of thoughts, feelings, moods, etc. But you must go farther. You must be able to distinguish the "I" from these mental conditions, which are as much tools as is the body and its parts.
In the First Lesson, you realized that the "I" is separate from the body, which is just a tool. Now, you've reached the point where the "I" seems like a mental being—a collection of thoughts, feelings, moods, and so on. But you need to go further. You must be able to tell the "I" apart from these mental states, which are just as much tools as the body and its parts.
Let us begin by considering the thoughts more closely connected with the body, and then work up to the higher mental states.
Let’s start by looking at the thoughts that are more closely related to the body, and then move up to the higher mental states.
The sensations of the body, such as hunger; thirst; pain; pleasurable sensations; physical desires, etc., etc., are not apt to be mistaken for essential qualities of the "I" by many of the Candidates, for they have passed beyond this stage, and have learned to set aside these sensations, to a greater or lesser extent, by an effort of the Will, and are no longer slaves to them. Not that they do not experience these sensations, but they have grown to regard them as incidents of the physical life—good in their place—but useful to the advanced man only when he has mastered them to the extent that he no longer regards them as close to the "I." And yet, to some people, these sensations are so closely identified with their conception of the "I" that when they think of themselves they think merely of a bundle of these sensations. They are not able to set them aside and consider them as things apart, to be used when necessary and proper, but as things not fastened to the "I." The more advanced a man becomes the farther off seem these sensations. Not that he does not feel hungry, for instance. Not at all, for he recognizes hunger, and satisfies it within reason, knowing that his physical body is making demands for attention, and that these demands should be heeded. But—mark the difference—instead of feeling that the "I" is hungry the man feels that "my body" is hungry, just as he might become conscious that his horse or dog was crying for food insistently. Do you see what we mean? It is that the man no longer identifies himself—the "I"—with the body, consequently the thoughts which are most closely allied to the physical life seem comparatively "separate" from his "I" conception. Such a man thinks "my stomach, this," or "my leg, that," or "my body, thus," instead of "'I,' this," or "'I' that." He is able, almost automatically, to think of the body and its sensations as things of him, and belonging to him, which require attention and care, rather than as real parts of the "I." He is able to form a conception of the "I" as existing without any of these things—without the body and its sensations—and so he has taken the first step in the realization of the "I."
The sensations of the body, like hunger, thirst, pain, pleasurable feelings, physical desires, etc., are usually not confused with the essential qualities of the "I" by many Candidates. They've moved past this phase and learned to set these sensations aside, to some degree, through willpower, so they're no longer controlled by them. It’s not that they don’t feel these sensations, but they see them as just part of physical life—important in their own way—but beneficial to an advanced person only when he has gained enough control to not view them as closely tied to the "I." Yet for some people, these sensations are so strongly linked to their idea of the "I" that when they think of themselves, they only see a bundle of these feelings. They can’t separate them and see them as things that can be used when appropriate, instead of things attached to the "I." The more advanced a person becomes, the more distant these sensations feel. This doesn’t mean he doesn’t feel hunger, for example. Not at all. He recognizes hunger and satisfies it reasonably, knowing that his body needs attention, and those needs should be acknowledged. But—note the difference—instead of feeling that the "I" is hungry, he feels that "my body" is hungry, just like he would notice when his horse or dog is begging for food. Do you see what we mean? The person no longer identifies the "I" with the body; therefore, the thoughts related to physical life seem fairly "separate" from his "I" concept. Such a person thinks "my stomach, this," or "my leg, that," or "my body, thus," instead of "'I,' this," or "'I' that." He can almost automatically think of the body and its sensations as things of him, and belonging to him, that need attention and care, rather than as actual parts of the "I." He can imagine the "I" existing without any of these things—without the body and its sensations—thus taking the first step toward realizing the "I."
Before going on, we ask the students to stop a few moments, and mentally run over these sensations of the body. Form a mental image of them, and realize that they are merely incidents to the present stage of growth and experience of the "I," and that they form no real part of it. They may, and will be, left behind in the Ego's higher planes of advancement. You may have attained this mental conception perfectly, long since, but we ask that to give yourself the mental drill at this time, in order to fasten upon your mind this first step.
Before we continue, we ask the students to pause for a moment and think about these bodily sensations. Create a mental image of them and understand that they are just part of this stage of growth and experience of the "I," and that they don't truly define it. They can, and will be, left behind as the Ego moves to higher levels of growth. You may have already mastered this mental concept, but we ask you to practice this mental exercise now to reinforce this first step in your mind.
In realizing that you are able to set aside, mentally, these sensations—that you are able to hold them out at arm's length and "consider" them as an "outside" thing, you mentally determine that they are "not I" things, and you set them down in the "not I" collection—the first to be placed there. Let us try to make this still plainer, even at the risk of wearying you by repetitions (for you must get this idea firmly fixed in your mind). To be able to say that a thing is "not I," you must realize that there are two things in question (1) the "not I" thing, and (2) the "I" who is regarding the "not I" thing just as the "I" regards a lump of sugar, or a mountain. Do you see what we mean? Keep at it until you do.
In recognizing that you can set aside these sensations mentally—that you can hold them away from yourself and "consider" them as something "outside," you mentally decide that they are "not I" things, and you categorize them in the "not I" collection—the first to go there. Let's try to clarify this further, even if it means repeating ourselves (because you need to understand this concept clearly). To say that something is "not I," you have to realize that there are two aspects being considered: (1) the "not I" thing, and (2) the "I" who is observing the "not I" thing, just like the "I" might observe a lump of sugar or a mountain. Do you understand what we mean? Keep working on it until you do.
Next, consider some of the emotions, such as anger; hate; love, in its ordinary forms; jealousy; ambition; and the hundred and one other emotions that sweep through our brains. You will find that you are able to set each one of these emotions or feelings aside and study it; dissect it; analyze it; consider it. You will be able to understand the rise, progress and end of each of these feelings, as they have come to you, and as you recall them in your memory or imagination, just as readily as you would were you observing their occurrence in the mind of a friend. You will find them all stored away in some parts of your mental make-up, and you may (to use a modern American slang phrase) "make them trot before you, and show their paces." Don't you see that they are not "You"—that they are merely something that you carry around with you in a mental bag. You can imagine yourself as living without them, and still being "I," can you not?
Next, think about some of the emotions, like anger, hate, love in its usual forms, jealousy, ambition, and the countless other feelings that rush through our minds. You’ll find that you can set each of these emotions aside and examine them, break them down, analyze them, and think about them. You’ll be able to grasp how each of these feelings emerges, develops, and fades away as they’ve come to you, and as you remember them, just as easily as if you were watching them happen in a friend’s mind. You’ll discover they’re all tucked away in different parts of your mental makeup, and you can, to use a modern American slang phrase, “make them trot before you and show their paces.” Don’t you realize that they aren’t “You”—they’re just things you carry around in a mental bag. You can picture yourself living without them and still being “I,” can’t you?
And the very fact that you are able to set them aside and examine and consider them is a proof that they are "not I" things—for there are two things in the matter (1) You who are examining and considering them, and (2) the thing itself which is the object of the examination and consideration at mental arm's length. So into the "not I" collection go these emotions, desirable and undesirable. The collection is steadily growing, and will attain quite formidable proportions after a while.
And the simple fact that you can put them aside and evaluate them is proof that they are "not I" things—because there are two elements involved: (1) You who are evaluating them, and (2) the actual thing that is the object of your evaluation, kept at a mental distance. So, all these emotions, both the desirable and the undesirable, end up in the "not I" category. This collection keeps growing and will eventually become quite significant.
Now, do not imagine that this is a lesson designed to teach you how to discard these emotions, although if it enables you to get rid of the undesirable ones, so much the better. This is not our object, for we bid you place the desirable (at this time) ones in with the opposite kind, the idea being to bring you to a realization that the "I" is higher, above and independent of these mental somethings, and then when you have realized the nature of the "I," you may return and use (as a Master) the things that have been using you as a slave. So do not be afraid to throw these emotions (good and bad) into the "not I" collection. You may go back to them, and use the good ones, after the Mental Drill is over. No matter how much you may think that you are bound by any of these emotions, you will realize, by careful analysis, that it is of the "not I" kind, for the "I" existed before the emotion came into active play, and it will live long after the emotion has faded away. The principal proof is that you are able to hold it out at arm's length and examine it—a proof that it is "not I."
Now, don’t think this is a lesson aimed at teaching you to get rid of these emotions, although if it helps you eliminate the undesirable ones, that’s a bonus. That’s not our goal. Instead, we want you to mix the desirable ones (for now) with the undesirable ones, so you can realize that the “I” is greater, separate, and independent from these mental feelings. Once you understand the nature of the “I,” you can come back and use the emotions that have been controlling you as a slave, as a Master. So, don’t hesitate to put these emotions (both good and bad) into the “not I” category. You can always revisit the good ones after the Mental Drill is complete. No matter how much you may feel trapped by any of these emotions, you’ll find, upon careful examination, that they belong to the “not I” category, because the “I” was there before the emotion took hold, and it will remain long after the emotion has faded. The main proof is that you can hold it out at arm's length and analyze it—a sign that it is “not I.”
Run through the entire list of your feelings; emotions; moods; and what not, just as you would those of a well-known friend or relative, and you will see that each one—every one—is a "not I" thing, and you will lay it aside for the time, for the purpose of the scientific experiment, at least.
Run through the whole list of your feelings, emotions, moods, and so on, just like you would for a close friend or family member, and you’ll realize that each one—every single one—is a "not me" thing. You can set it aside for now, at least for the sake of this scientific experiment.
Then passing on to the Intellect, you will be able to hold out for examination each mental process and principle. You don't believe it, you may say. Then read and study some good work on Psychology, and you will learn to dissect and analyze every intellectual process—and to classify it and place it in the proper pigeon-hole. Study Psychology by means of some good text-book, and you will find that one by one every intellectual process is classified, and talked about and labeled, just as you would a collection of flowers. If that does not satisfy you, turn the leaves of some work on Logic, and you will admit that you may hold these intellectual processes at arm's length and examine them, and talk about them to others. So that these wonderful tools of Man—the Intellectual powers may be placed in the "not I" collection, for the "I" is capable of standing aside and viewing them—it is able to detach them from itself. The most remarkable thing about this is that in admitting this fact, you realize that the "I" is using these very intellectual faculties to pass upon themselves. Who is the Master that compels these faculties to do this to themselves? The Master of the Mind—The "I."
Then, moving on to the Intellect, you'll be able to examine each mental process and principle. You might not believe this. If so, read and study a good book on Psychology, and you'll learn how to dissect and analyze every intellectual process—and classify it, organizing it properly. By studying Psychology through a solid textbook, you'll see that each intellectual process is categorized, discussed, and labeled, just like you'd do with a collection of flowers. If that doesn't satisfy you, check out a book on Logic, and you'll see that you can hold these intellectual processes at arm's length, examine them, and discuss them with others. So, these incredible tools of humans—the Intellectual powers—can be placed in the "not I" category, because the "I" can step back and observe them, able to separate them from itself. The most fascinating part is that in acknowledging this fact, you realize the "I" is using these very intellectual faculties to evaluate themselves. Who is the Master that makes these faculties do this to themselves? The Master of the Mind—The "I."
And reaching the higher regions of the mind—even the Spiritual Mind, you will be compelled to admit that the things that have come into consciousness from that region may be considered and studied, just as may be any other mental thing, and so even these high things must be placed in the "not I" collection. You may object that this does not prove that all the things in the Spiritual Mind may be so treated—that there may be "I" things there that can not be so treated. We will not discuss this question, for you know nothing about the Spiritual Mind except as it has revealed itself to you, and the higher regions of that mind are like the mind of a God, when compared to what you call mind. But the evidence of the Illumined—those in whom the Spiritual Mind has wonderfully unfolded tell us that even in the highest forms of development, the Initiates, yea, even the Masters, realize that above even their highest mental states there is always that eternal "I" brooding over them, as the Sun over the lake; and that the highest conception of the "I" known even to advanced souls, is but a faint reflection of the "I" filtering through the Spiritual Mind, although that Spiritual Mind is as clear as the clearest crystal when compared with our comparatively opaque mental states. And the highest mental state is but a tool or instrument of the "I," and is not the "I" itself.
And as you reach the higher levels of the mind—even the Spiritual Mind—you can't deny that the things coming from that level can be considered and studied just like anything else in your mind, so even those lofty concepts belong in the "not I" category. You might argue that this doesn't prove that everything in the Spiritual Mind can be treated this way—that there may be "I" aspects there that can't be approached in this manner. We won't delve into this issue, since you only know about the Spiritual Mind through its revelations to you, and the higher levels of that mind are like the mind of a God, compared to what you consider mind. However, the insight from the Illumined—those in whom the Spiritual Mind has beautifully unfolded—shows us that even in the highest forms of growth, the Initiates, and even the Masters, understand that above their most advanced mental states, there is always that eternal "I" watching over them, like the Sun over a lake; and that the highest understanding of the "I," even for advanced souls, is merely a faint reflection of the "I" coming through the Spiritual Mind, even though that Spiritual Mind is as clear as crystal compared to our relatively murky mental states. And the highest mental state is just a tool or instrument of the "I," not the "I" itself.
And yet the "I" is to be found in the faintest forms of consciousness, and animates even the unconscious life. The "I" is always the same, but its apparent growth is the result of the mental unfoldment of the individual. As we described it in one of the lessons of the "Advanced Course" it is like an electric lamp that is encased in many wrappings of cloth. As cloth after cloth is removed, the light seems to grow brighter and stronger, and yet it has changed not, the change being in the removal of the confining and bedimming coverings. We do not expect to make you realize the "I" in all its fullness—that is far beyond the highest known to man of to-day—but we do hope to bring you to a realization of the highest conception of the "I," possible to each of you in your present stage of unfoldment, and in the process we expect to cause to drop from you some of the confining sheaths that you have about outgrown. The sheaths are ready for dropping, and all that is required is the touch of a friendly hand to cause them to fall fluttering from you. We wish to bring you to the fullest possible (to you) realization of the "I," in order to make an Individual of you—in order that you may understand, and have courage to take up the tools and instruments lying at your hand, and do the work before you.
And yet, the "I" is present in the faintest forms of consciousness and influences even unconscious life. The "I" remains constant, but its apparent growth comes from the mental development of the individual. As we described in one of the lessons of the "Advanced Course," it’s like an electric lamp wrapped in several layers of cloth. As each layer is removed, the light appears to shine brighter and stronger, yet it hasn't changed; the change comes from taking away the restricting and dimming coverings. We don’t expect you to fully grasp the "I" in its entirety—that's far beyond what even the most advanced humans understand today—but we do hope to help you reach the highest understanding of the "I" possible for you at your current level of development. In this process, we aim to help you shed some of the limiting layers you've outgrown. These layers are ready to be released, and all it takes is a gentle push from a supportive hand to make them fall away. We want to help you achieve the fullest realization of the "I" that you can, so you can become an Individual—so you can understand and have the courage to pick up the tools and instruments at your disposal and tackle the work ahead of you.
And now, back to the Mental Drill. After you have satisfied yourself that about everything that you are capable of thinking about is a "not I" thing—a tool and instrument for your use—you will ask, "And now, what is there left that should not be thrown in the "not I" collection." To this question we answer "THE 'I' ITSELF." And when you demand a proof we say, "Try to set aside the 'I' for consideration!" You may try from now until the passing away of infinities of infinities, and you will never be able to set aside the real "I" for consideration. You may think you can, but a little reflection will show you that you are merely setting aside some of your mental qualities or faculties. And in this process what is the "I" doing? Simply setting aside and considering things. Can you not see that the "I" cannot be both the considerer and the thing considered—the examiner and the thing examined? Can the sun shine upon itself by its own light? You may consider the "I" of some other person, but it is your "I" that is considering. But you cannot, as an "I," stand aside and see yourself as an "I." Then what evidence have we that there is an "I" to us? This: that you are always conscious of being the considerer and examiner, instead of the considered and examined thing—and then, you have the evidence of your consciousness. And what report does this consciousness give us? Simply this, and nothing more: "I AM." That is all that the "I" is conscious of, regarding its true self: "I AM," but that consciousness is worth all the rest, for the rest is but "not I" tools that the "I" may reach out and use.
And now, back to the Mental Drill. After you've figured out that almost everything you're capable of thinking about is a "not I" thing—a tool or instrument for your use—you will ask, "So, what is left that shouldn't be included in the 'not I' collection?" To this question, we say, "THE 'I' ITSELF." And when you ask for proof, we respond, "Try to set aside the 'I' for consideration!" You could try this for an eternity, and you'll never be able to set aside the real "I" for consideration. You might think you can, but with a bit of reflection, you'll see that you're just setting aside some of your mental qualities or abilities. So what is the "I" doing in this process? It's simply setting aside and reflecting on things. Can't you see that the "I" can't be both the considerer and the thing considered—the examiner and the thing examined? Can the sun shine on itself with its own light? You might be able to consider someone else's "I," but it's your "I" that's doing the considering. Yet as an "I," you can't stand apart and see yourself as an "I." So what proof do we have that there is an "I" for us? This: you are always aware of being the considerer and examiner, not the considered and examined thing—and that gives you the evidence of your consciousness. What does this consciousness tell us? Simply this, and nothing more: "I AM." That's all the "I" is conscious of regarding its true self: "I AM," but that awareness holds immense value because everything else is just "not I" tools that the "I" can reach out and use.
And so at the final analysis, you will find that there is something that refuses to be set aside and examined by the "I." And that something is the "I" itself—that "I" eternal, unchangeable—that drop of the Great Spirit Ocean—that spark from the Sacred Flame.
And so, in the end, you'll discover that there's something that can’t be ignored or analyzed by the "I." And that something is the "I" itself—that eternal, unchanging "I"—that drop from the Great Spirit Ocean—that spark from the Sacred Flame.
Just as you find it impossible to imagine the "I" as dead, so will you find it impossible to set aside the "I" for consideration—all that comes to you is the testimony: "I AM."
Just like you can't picture the "I" as dead, you also won't be able to ignore the "I" for reflection—all that you get is the statement: "I AM."
If you were able to set aside the "I" for consideration, who would be the one to consider it? Who could consider except the "I" itself, and if it be here, how could it be there? The "I" cannot be the "not I" even in the wildest flights of the imagination—the imagination with all its boasted freedom and power, confesses itself vanquished when asked to do this thing.
If you could put aside the "I" for a moment, who would be the one to think about it? Who could think about it other than the "I" itself, and if it’s here, how could it be there? The "I" can’t be the "not I," even in the wildest leaps of imagination—the imagination, with all its claimed freedom and power, admits defeat when asked to do this.
Oh, students, may you be brought to a realization of what you are. May you soon awaken to the fact that you are sleeping gods—that you have within you the power of the Universe, awaiting your word to manifest in action. Long ages have you toiled to get this far, and long must you travel before you reach even the first Great Temple, but you are now entering into the conscious stage of Spiritual Evolution. No longer will your eyes be closed as you walk the Path. From now on you will begin to see clearer and clearer each step, in the dawning light of consciousness.
Oh, students, may you come to understand who you really are. May you soon wake up to the fact that you are sleeping gods—that you have the power of the Universe within you, waiting for you to set it in motion. You have worked hard to get this far, and there’s still a long way to go before you reach even the first Great Temple, but you are now entering the conscious stage of Spiritual Evolution. No longer will you walk the Path with your eyes closed. From now on, you will begin to see more clearly with each step, in the growing light of consciousness.
You are in touch with all of life, and the separation of your "I" from the great Universal "I" is but apparent and temporary. We will tell you of these things in our Third Lesson, but before you can grasp that you must develop the "I" consciousness within you. Do not lay aside this matter as one of no importance. Do not dismiss our weak explanation as being "merely words, words, words," as so many are inclined to do. We are pointing out a great truth to you. Why not follow the leadings of the Spirit which even now—this moment while you read—is urging you to walk The Path of Attainment? Consider the teachings of this lesson, and practice the Mental Drill until your mind has grasped its significance, then let it sink deep down into your inner consciousness. Then will you be ready for the next lessons, and those to follow.
You’re connected to all of life, and the separation of your "I" from the larger Universal "I" is only temporary and not as real as it seems. We’ll cover these ideas in our Third Lesson, but first, you need to cultivate the "I" awareness within you. Don’t brush off this topic as unimportant. Don’t write off our tentative explanation as just "words, words, words," which many people tend to do. We’re revealing a significant truth to you. Why not listen to the Spirit’s guidance that’s encouraging you—right now as you read—to pursue The Path of Attainment? Reflect on the teachings in this lesson, and practice the Mental Drill until you really understand its meaning, then let it embed itself deep in your inner consciousness. That’s when you’ll be ready for the next lessons and those that come after.
Practice this Mental Drill until you are fully assured of the reality of the "I" and the relativity of the "not "I" in the mind. When you once grasp this truth, you will find that you will be able to use the mind with far greater power and effect, for you will recognize that it is your tool and instrument, fitted and intended to do your bidding. You will be able to master your moods, and emotions when necessary, and will rise from the position of a slave to a Master.
Practice this mental exercise until you are completely confident in the reality of the "I" and the relativity of the "not I" in your mind. Once you understand this truth, you'll notice that you can use your mind with much more power and effectiveness because you'll realize it's your tool, designed to do your bidding. You'll be able to control your moods and emotions when needed, moving from being a slave to becoming a Master.
Our words seem cheap and poor, when we consider the greatness of the truth that we are endeavoring to convey by means of them. For who can find words to express the inexpressible? All that we may hope to do is to awaken a keen interest and attention on your part, so that you will practice the Mental Drill, and thus obtain the evidence of your own mentality to the truth. Truth is not truth to you until you have proven it in your own experience, and once so proven you cannot be robbed of it, nor can it be argued away from you.
Our words feel simple and insufficient when we think about the importance of the truth we're trying to share. Who can find the right words for something that can't be fully expressed? All we can hope for is to spark your interest and focus, so you'll try the Mental Drill and gain your own evidence of the truth. Truth isn't truly yours until you experience it for yourself, and once you do, no one can take it away from you or debate it out of your understanding.
You must realize that in every mental effort You—the "I"—are behind it. You bid the Mind work, and it obeys your Will. You are the Master, and not the slave of your mind. You are the Driver, not the driven. Shake yourself loose from the tyranny of the mind that has oppressed you for so long. Assert yourself, and be free. We will help you in this direction during the course of these lessons, but you must first assert yourself as a Master of your Mind. Sign the mental Declaration of Independence from your moods, emotions, and uncontrolled thoughts, and assert your Dominion over them. Enter into your Kingdom, thou manifestation of the Spirit!
You need to understand that in every mental effort, you—the "I"—are in control. You tell your mind to work, and it follows your command. You are the master, not a slave to your mind. You are the driver, not just being driven. Free yourself from the mental control that has held you back for so long. Stand up for yourself and be free. We'll support you in this journey throughout these lessons, but first, you must claim your role as the Master of your Mind. Sign the mental Declaration of Independence from your moods, emotions, and uncontrolled thoughts, and take back your power over them. Step into your Kingdom, you manifestation of the Spirit!
While this lesson is intended primarily to bring clearly into your consciousness the fact that the "I" is a reality, separate and distinct from its Mental Tools, and while the control of the mental faculties by the Will forms a part of some of the future lessons, still, we think that this is a good place to point out to you the advantages arising from a realization of the true nature of the "I" and the relative aspect of the Mind.
While this lesson is mainly meant to make you clearly aware that the "I" is a real thing, separate and distinct from its Mental Tools, and while controlling the mental faculties with the Will will be covered in future lessons, we believe this is a good time to highlight the benefits of understanding the true nature of the "I" and the relative nature of the Mind.
Many of us have supposed that our minds were the masters of ourselves, and we have allowed ourselves to be tormented and worried by thoughts "running away" with us, and presenting themselves at inopportune moments. The Initiate is relieved from this annoyance, for he learns to assert his mastery over the different parts of the mind, and controls and regulates his mental processes, just as one would a fine piece of machinery. He is able to control his conscious thinking faculties, and direct their work to the best advantage, and he also learns how to pass on orders to the subconscious mental region and bid it work for him while he sleeps, or even when he is using his conscious mind in other matters. These subjects will be considered by us in due time, during the course of lessons.
Many of us have thought that our minds are in control of us, and we've let ourselves be stressed and troubled by thoughts that seem to take over at the worst times. The Initiate is free from this frustration, as he learns to take charge of the different parts of his mind, controlling and organizing his thought processes just like a well-tuned machine. He can manage his conscious thinking and direct it for maximum benefit, and he also learns how to send instructions to his subconscious mind, making it work for him while he sleeps or even when he’s focused on other things. We will discuss these topics in due course during our lessons.
In this connection it may be interesting to read what Edward Carpenter says of the power of the individual to control his thought processes. In his book "From Adam's Peak to Eleplumta," in describing his experience while visiting a Hindu Gnani Yogi, he says:
In this context, it might be interesting to see what Edward Carpenter says about the individual's ability to control their thought processes. In his book "From Adam's Peak to Eleplumta," while describing his experience visiting a Hindu Gnani Yogi, he states:
"And if we are unwilling to believe in this internal mastery over the body, we are perhaps almost equally unaccustomed to the idea of mastery over our own inner thoughts and feelings. That a man should be a prey to any thought that chances to take possession of his mind, is commonly among us assumed as unavoidable. It may be a matter of regret that he should be kept awake all night from anxiety as to the issue of a lawsuit on the morrow, but that he should have the power of determining whether he be kept awake or not seems an extravagant demand. The image of an impending calamity is no doubt odious, but its very odiousness (we say) makes it haunt the mind all the more pertinaciously and it is useless to try to expel it.
"And if we are unwilling to believe in this internal control over our bodies, we might also be just as unaccustomed to the idea of controlling our own inner thoughts and feelings. It's often assumed that a person should be vulnerable to any thought that happens to take over their mind. While it might be unfortunate that someone is kept awake all night worrying about the outcome of a lawsuit the next day, the idea that they should be able to choose whether to stay awake or not seems like an unreasonable expectation. The thought of a looming disaster is definitely unpleasant, but we say its very unpleasantness makes it stick in the mind even more stubbornly, and it's pointless to try to get rid of it."
"Yet this is an absurd position—for man, the heir of all the ages: hag-ridden by the flimsy creatures of his own brain. If a pebble in our boot torments us, we expel it. We take off the boot and shake it out. And once the matter is fairly understood it is just as easy to expel an intruding and obnoxious thought from the mind. About this there ought to be no mistake, no two opinions. The thing is obvious, clear and unmistakable. It should be as easy to expel an obnoxious thought from your mind as it is to shake a stone out of your shoe; and till a man can do that it is just nonsense to talk about his ascendancy over Nature, and all the rest of it. He is a mere slave, and prey to the bat-winged phantoms that flit through the corridors of his own brain.
"Yet this is an absurd position—for humanity, the heir of all the ages: tormented by the flimsy creatures of its own mind. If a pebble in our shoe bothers us, we take it out. We remove the shoe and shake it out. And once we understand the situation well, it’s just as easy to get rid of an intrusive and annoying thought from the mind. There should be no confusion about this, no two opinions. The truth is obvious, clear, and unmistakable. It should be as easy to clear an annoying thought from your mind as it is to shake a stone out of your shoe; and until a person can do that, it’s pointless to talk about their control over Nature, and all that. They are simply a slave, at the mercy of the bat-winged phantoms that flit through the hallways of their own mind."
"Yet the weary and careworn faces that we meet by thousands, even among the affluent classes of civilization, testify only too clearly how seldom this mastery is obtained. How rare indeed to meet a man! How common rather to discover a creature hounded on by tyrant thoughts (or cares or desires), cowering, wincing under the lash—or perchance priding himself to run merrily in obedience to a driver that rattles the reins and persuades him that he is free—whom we cannot converse with in careless tete-a-tete because that alien presence is always there, on the watch.
"Yet the tired and worn faces we see by the thousands, even among the wealthy classes of society, clearly show how rarely this mastery is achieved. How rare it is to encounter a man! Instead, it's much more common to find someone driven by oppressive thoughts (or worries or desires), cringing under the pressure—or perhaps taking pride in racing happily under the control of a driver who shakes the reins and convinces him he is free—someone with whom we can’t have a casual tete-a-tete because that foreign presence is always lurking, watching."
"It is one of the most prominent doctrines of Raja Yoga that the power of expelling thoughts, or if need be, killing them dead on the spot, must be attained. Naturally the art requires practice, but like other arts, when once acquired there is no mystery or difficulty about it. And it is worth practice. It may indeed fairly be said that life only begins when this art has been acquired. For obviously when instead of being ruled by individual thoughts, the whole flock of them in their immense multitude and variety and capacity is ours to direct and dispatch and employ where we list ('for He maketh the winds his messengers and the flaming fire His minister'), life becomes a thing so vast and grand compared with what it was before, that its former condition may well appear almost antenatal.
One of the key principles of Raja Yoga is that you must learn to control your thoughts, even to the point of stopping them completely when necessary. This skill requires practice, but like any other skill, once you’ve mastered it, it becomes straightforward and easy. And it's definitely worth practicing. You could say that life truly begins once you have this ability. Clearly, when you stop being controlled by individual thoughts and instead can manage the entire array of them—each with its own diversity and potential—you open up a world of possibilities. Life becomes so much larger and more magnificent compared to what it was before that its previous state may seem almost like a mere precursor to real living.
"If you can kill a thought dead, for the time being, you can do anything else with it that you please. And therefore it is that this power is so valuable. And it not only frees a man from mental torment (which is nine-tenths at least of the torment of life), but it gives him a concentrated power of handling mental work absolutely unknown to him before. The two things are co-relative to each other. As already said this is one of the principles of Raja Yoga.
"If you can completely suppress a thought for a while, you can do anything else with it that you want. That's why this ability is so important. It not only frees someone from mental suffering (which is at least nine-tenths of life's struggles), but it also provides them with a focused ability to manage mental tasks that they never knew they had before. These two aspects are interconnected. As mentioned earlier, this is one of the principles of Raja Yoga."
"While at work your thought is to be absolutely concentrated in it, undistracted by anything whatever irrelevant to the matter in hand—pounding away like a great engine, with giant power and perfect economy—no wear and tear of friction, or dislocation of parts owing to the working of different forces at the same time. Then when the work is finished, if there is no more occasion for the use of the machine, it must stop equally, absolutely—stop entirely—no worrying (as if a parcel of boys were allowed to play their devilments with a locomotive as soon as it was in the shed)—and the man must retire into that region of his consciousness where his true self dwells.
"While you’re working, your focus should be completely on the task at hand, free from any distractions unrelated to the job—working hard like a powerful machine, with great efficiency and no unnecessary wear and tear, avoiding any disruption from different forces operating at once. Once the work is done, if there’s no more need for the machine, it should stop completely—absolutely stop—no worrying (like letting a bunch of kids mess around with a train as soon as it’s in the shed)—and then the person should retreat into that part of their mind where their true self resides."
"I say the power of the thought-machine itself is enormously increased by this faculty of letting it alone on the one hand, and of using it singly and with concentration on the other. It becomes a true tool, which a master-workman lays down when done with, but which only a bungler carries about with him all the time to show that he is the possessor of it."
"I believe the power of the thought-machine is greatly enhanced by the ability to leave it alone on one hand, and to use it focused and individually on the other. It turns into a genuine tool, which a skilled worker puts aside when finished, but which only an incompetent person keeps on hand all the time to flaunt that he owns it."
We ask the students to read carefully the above quotations from Mr. Carpenter's book, for they are full of suggestions that may be taken up to advantage by those who are emancipating themselves from their slavery to the unmastered mind, and who are now bringing the mind under control of the Ego, by means of the Will.
We ask students to carefully read the quotes above from Mr. Carpenter's book, as they are packed with ideas that can benefit those who are freeing themselves from the constraints of an unmanaged mind and are now learning to control their mind through the power of their will.
Our next lesson will take up the subject of the relationship of the "I" to the Universal "I," and will be called the "Expansion of the Self." It will deal with the subject, not from a theoretical standpoint, but from the position of the teacher who is endeavoring to make his students actually aware in their consciousness of the truth of the proposition. In this course we are not trying to make our students past-masters of theory, but are endeavoring to place them in a position whereby they may know for themselves, and actually experience the things of which we teach.
Our next lesson will cover the relationship between the "I" and the Universal "I," and it will be called "Expansion of the Self." This session will approach the topic not from a theoretical perspective but from the viewpoint of a teacher who aims to make students genuinely aware in their consciousness of the truth behind the idea. In this course, we’re not trying to turn our students into experts in theory, but rather we want to help them know for themselves and truly experience the concepts we teach.
Therefore we urge upon you not to merely rest content with reading this lesson, but, instead, to study and meditate upon the teachings mentioned under the head of "Mental Drill," until the distinctions stand out clearly in your mind, and until you not only believe them to be true, but actually are conscious of the "I" and its Mental Tools. Have patience and perseverance. The task may be difficult, but the reward is great. To become conscious of the greatness, majesty, strength and power of your real being is worth years of hard study. Do you not think so? Then study and practice hopefully, diligently and earnestly.
Therefore, we encourage you not to simply be satisfied with reading this lesson, but instead to study and reflect on the teachings mentioned under "Mental Drill" until the distinctions are clear in your mind, and until you not only believe them to be true, but are actually aware of the "I" and its Mental Tools. Be patient and persistent. The task may be challenging, but the reward is significant. Becoming aware of the greatness, majesty, strength, and power of your true self is worth years of dedicated study. Don't you agree? So study and practice with hope, diligence, and seriousness.
Peace be with you.
Peace be with you.
MANTRAMS (AFFIRMATIONS) FOR THE SECOND LESSON.
"I" am an entity—my mind is my instrument of expression.
"I" am a being—my mind is my tool for expression.
"I" exist independent of my mind, and am not dependent upon it for existence or being.
"I" exist independently of my mind and do not rely on it for existence or being.
"I" am Master of my mind, not its slave.
"I" am the master of my mind, not its slave.
"I" can set aside my sensations, emotions, passions, desires, intellectual faculties, and all the rest of my mental collection of tools, as "not I" things—and still there remains something—and that something is "I," which cannot be set aside by me, for it is my very self; my only self; my real self—"I." That which remains after all that may be set aside is set aside is the "I"—Myself—eternal, constant, unchangeable.
"I" can put aside my sensations, emotions, passions, desires, intellectual abilities, and everything else in my mind as "not me" things—and still, there’s something left—and that something is "I," which I cannot set aside, because it is my true self; my only self; my real self—"I." What remains after everything else is set aside is the "I"—Myself—eternal, constant, unchangeable.
[Illustration: "I am"]
"I am"
THE THIRD LESSON.
THE EXPANSION OF THE SELF.
In the first two lessons of this course we have endeavored to bring to the candidate a realization in consciousness of the reality of the "I," and to enable him to distinguish between the Self and its sheaths, physical and mental. In the present lesson we will call his attention to the relationship of the "I" to the Universal "I," and will endeavor to give him an idea of a greater, grander Self, transcending personality and the little self that we are so apt to regard as the "I."
In the first two lessons of this course, we aimed to help the candidate understand the reality of the "I" and to distinguish between the Self and its layers, both physical and mental. In this lesson, we will focus on the connection between the "I" and the Universal "I" and try to provide an idea of a greater, more expansive Self that goes beyond individuality and the small self that we often identify as the "I."
The keynote of this lesson will be "The Oneness of All," and all of its teachings will be directed to awakening a realization in consciousness of that great truth. But we wish to impress upon the mind of the Candidate that we are not teaching him that he is the Absolute. We are not teaching the "I Am God" belief, which we consider to be erroneous and misleading, and a perversion of the original Yogi teachings. This false teaching has taken possession of many of the Hindu teachers and people, and with its accompanying teaching of "Maya" or the complete illusion or non-existence of the Universe, has reduced millions of people to a passive, negative mental condition which undoubtedly is retarding their progress. Not only in India is this true, but the same facts may be observed among the pupils of the Western teachers who have embraced this negative side of the Oriental Philosophy. Such people confound the "Absolute" and "Relative" aspects of the One, and, being unable to reconcile the facts of Life and the Universe with their theories of "I Am God," they are driven to the desperate expedient of boldly denying the Universe, and declaring it to be all "an illusion" or "Maya."
The main idea of this lesson will be "The Oneness of All," and all its teachings will aim to help you realize that deep truth. However, we want to make it clear to the Candidate that we are not teaching that he is the Absolute. We aren’t promoting the belief of "I Am God," which we see as wrong and misleading, and a distortion of the original Yogi teachings. This mistaken belief has influenced many Hindu teachers and followers, and along with the idea of "Maya," or the complete illusion or non-existence of the Universe, it has left millions in a passive, negative mental state that is likely hindering their growth. This isn’t just true in India, but can also be seen among students of Western teachers who have adopted this negative aspect of Eastern Philosophy. Such individuals confuse the "Absolute" and "Relative" sides of the One, and when they can’t align the realities of Life and the Universe with their "I Am God" theories, they resort to the extreme position of outright denying the Universe, declaring it all to be merely "an illusion" or "Maya."
You will have no trouble in distinguishing the pupils of the teachers holding this view. They will be found to exhibit the most negative mental condition—a natural result of absorbing the constant suggestion of "nothingness"—the gospel of negation. In marked contrast to the mental condition of the students, however, will be observed the mental attitude of the teachers, who are almost uniformly examples of vital, positive, mental force, capable of hurling their teaching into the minds of the pupils—of driving in their statements by the force of an awakened Will. The teacher, as a rule, has awakened to a sense of the "I" consciousness, and really develops the same by his "I Am God" attitude, because by holding this mental attitude he is enabled to throw off the influence of the sheaths of the lower mental principles, and the light of the Self shows forth fiercely and strongly, sometimes to such an extent that it fairly scorches the mentality of the less advanced pupil. But, notwithstanding this awakened "I" consciousness, the teacher is handicapped by his intellectual misconception and befogging metaphysics, and is unable to impart the "I" consciousness to his pupils, and, instead of raising them up to shine with equal splendor with himself, he really forces them into a shadow by reason of his teachings.
You won’t have any trouble recognizing the students of teachers who hold this view. They will show a very negative mental state—a natural outcome of constantly absorbing the idea of "nothingness"—the doctrine of negation. In stark contrast to the students’ mental condition, you’ll see that the teachers almost universally demonstrate a dynamic, positive mental energy, capable of delivering their lessons powerfully into the minds of their students—instilling their messages with a strong sense of Will. Generally, the teacher has awakened to an awareness of their "I" consciousness and truly enhances this awareness with their "I Am God" mindset, because by maintaining this mental stance, they can shed the influence of lower mental patterns, and the light of the Self shines brightly and intensely, sometimes so much that it nearly overwhelms the understanding of less developed students. However, despite this awakened "I" consciousness, the teacher is limited by their intellectual misunderstandings and confusing metaphysical concepts, making it difficult to pass on the "I" consciousness to their pupils. Instead of uplifting them to shine just as brilliantly as themselves, they inadvertently cast their students into shadow due to their teachings.
Our students, of course, will understand that the above is not written in the spirit of carping criticism or fault-finding. We hold no such mental attitude, and indeed could not if we remain true to our conception of Truth. We are mentioning these matters simply that the student may avoid this "I Am God" pitfall which awaits the Candidate just as he has well started on the Path. It would not be such a serious matter if it were merely a question of faulty metaphysics, for that would straighten itself out in time. But it is far more serious than this, for the teaching inevitably leads to the accompanying teaching that all is Illusion or Maya, and that Life is but a dream—a false thing—a lie—a nightmare; that the journey along the Path is but an illusion; that everything is "nothing"; that there is no soul; that You are God in disguise, and that He is fooling Himself in making believe that He is You; that Life is but a Divine masquerade or sleight-of-hand performance; that You are God, but that You (God) are fooling Yourself (God) in order to amuse Yourself (God). Is not this horrible? And yet it shows to what lengths the human mind will go before it will part with some pet theory of metaphysics with which it has been hypnotized. Do you think that we have overdrawn the picture? Then read some of the teachings of these schools of the Oriental Philosophy, or listen to some of the more radical of the Western teachers preaching this philosophy. The majority of the latter lack the courage of the Hindu teachers in carrying their theories to a logical conclusion, and, consequently they veil their teachings with metaphysical subtlety. But a few of them are more courageous, and come out into the open and preach their doctrine in full.
Our students will understand that this isn't meant to be nitpicky or overly critical. We're not approaching it with that mindset, and we couldn't if we wanted to stay true to our understanding of Truth. We're pointing out these issues so the student can avoid the "I Am God" trap that can catch the Candidate just as they're getting started on the Path. It wouldn’t be as serious if it was just about flawed metaphysics, since that would eventually sort itself out. But it's actually much more serious, as this teaching inevitably leads to the idea that everything is Illusion or Maya, and that Life is just a dream—a falsehood, a lie, a nightmare; that the journey along the Path is an illusion; that everything is "nothing"; that there is no soul; that You are God in disguise, and that He is deceiving Himself by pretending to be You; that Life is just a Divine masquerade or sleight-of-hand trick; that You are God, but You (God) are deceiving Yourself (God) for your own amusement (God). Isn't that awful? Yet, it exemplifies how far the human mind will go before it lets go of some cherished metaphysical theory it has become entranced by. Do you think we've exaggerated? Then check out some teachings from these schools of Eastern Philosophy, or listen to some of the more extreme Western teachers promoting this philosophy. Most of the latter lack the courage that Hindu teachers have in following their theories to logical conclusions, and as a result, they hide their teachings behind metaphysical complexity. However, a few are bolder and present their doctrine openly.
Some of the modern Western teachers of this philosophy explain matters by saying that "God is masquerading as different forms of life, including Man, in order that he may gain the experience resulting therefrom, for although He has Infinite and Absolute Wisdom and Knowledge, he lacks the experience that comes only from actually living the life of the lowly forms, and therefore He descend thus in order to gain the needed experience." Can you imagine the Absolute, possessed of all possible Knowledge and Wisdom, feeling the need of such petty "experience," and living the life of the lowly forms (including Man) in order "to gain experience?" To what Depths do these vain theories of Man drive us? Another leading Western teacher, who has absorbed the teaching of certain branches of the Oriental Philosophy, and who possesses the courage of his convictions, boldly announces that "You, yourself, are the totality of being, and with your mind alone create, preserve and destroy the universe, which is your own mental product." And again the last mentioned teacher states: "the entire universe is a bagatelle illustration of your own creative power, which you are now exhibiting for your own inspection." "By their fruits shall you know them," is a safe rule to apply to all teachings. The philosophy that teaches that the Universe is an illusion perpetrated by you (God) to amuse, entertain or fool yourself (God), can have but one result, and that is the conclusion that "everything is nothing," and all that is necessary to do is to sit down, fold your hands and enjoy the Divine exhibition of legerdemain that you are performing for your own entertainment, and then, when the show is over, return to your state of conscious Godhood and recall with smiles the pleasant memories of the "conjure show" that you created to fool yourself with during several billions of ages. That is what it amounts to, and the result is that those accepting this philosophy thrust upon them by forceful teachers, and knowing in their hearts that they are not God, but absorbing the suggestions of "nothingness," are driven into a state of mental apathy and negativeness, the soul sinking into a stupor from which it may not be roused for a long period of time.
Some modern Western teachers of this philosophy explain things by saying that "God is disguising Himself as different forms of life, including humans, to gain the experience that comes from that, because although He has Infinite and Absolute Wisdom and Knowledge, He lacks the experience that only comes from actually living the lives of lower forms, and therefore He descends to gain the necessary experience." Can you imagine the Absolute, who possesses all possible Knowledge and Wisdom, feeling the need for such trivial "experience" and living the life of lower forms (including humans) just to "gain experience?" How low do these empty theories of humanity take us? Another prominent Western teacher, who has learned from certain branches of Eastern philosophy, and who genuinely believes in his views, boldly states, "You are the totality of being, and with your mind alone, you create, preserve, and destroy the universe, which is your own mental creation." This same teacher also says: "The entire universe is a trivial illustration of your own creative power, which you are now displaying for your own review." "By their fruits, you shall know them" is a reliable principle to apply to all teachings. The philosophy that claims the Universe is an illusion created by you (God) for your own amusement, can only lead to the conclusion that "everything is nothing," and all that needs to be done is to sit back, fold your hands, and enjoy the Divine show of trickery that you are performing for your own entertainment. Then, when the show is over, you can return to your state of conscious Godhood and recall with a smile the pleasant memories of the "magic show" you created to entertain yourself for billions of years. That’s what it boils down to, and the outcome is that those who adopt this philosophy, forcefully promoted by assertive teachers, and who know deep down that they are not God, but who are absorbing the idea of "nothingness," find themselves in a state of mental numbness and negativity, with their soul sinking into a stupor that may take a long time to awaken from.
We wish you to avoid confounding our teaching with this just mentioned. We wish to teach you that You are a real Being—not God Himself, but a manifestation of Him who is the Absolute. You are a Child of the Absolute, if you prefer the term, possessed of the Divine Heritage, and whose mission it is to unfold qualities which are your inheritances from your Parent. Do not make the great mistake of confounding the Relative with the Absolute. Avoid this pitfall into which so many have fallen. Do not allow yourself to fall into the "Slough of Despond," and wallow in the mud of "nothingness," and to see no reality except in the person of some forceful teacher who takes the place of the Absolute in your mind. But raise your head and assert your Divine Parentage, and your Heritage from the Absolute, and step out boldly on the Path, asserting the "I."
We want you to avoid mixing up our teachings with what was just mentioned. We want to teach you that you are a real being—not God Himself, but a manifestation of Him who is the Absolute. You are a child of the Absolute, if you prefer that term, endowed with the divine heritage, and your mission is to develop the qualities that are your inheritance from your Parent. Don't make the big mistake of confusing the Relative with the Absolute. Stay clear of this trap that so many have fallen into. Don't let yourself sink into the "Slough of Despond" and get stuck in the "mud of nothingness," thinking that the only reality lies in a powerful teacher who replaces the Absolute in your mind. Instead, raise your head, acknowledge your divine parentage, claim your heritage from the Absolute, and boldly step onto the Path, asserting the "I."
(We must refer the Candidate back to our "Advanced Course," for our teachings regarding the Absolute and the Relative. The last three lessons of that course will throw light upon what we have just said To repeat the teaching at this point would be to use space which is needed for the lesson before us.)
(We need to direct the Candidate back to our "Advanced Course" for our teachings on the Absolute and the Relative. The last three lessons of that course will clarify what we've just mentioned. Repeating the information here would take up space needed for the lesson at hand.)
And yet, while the "I" is not God, the Absolute, it is infinitely greater than we have imagined it to be before the light dawned upon us. It extends itself far beyond what we had conceived to be its limits. It touches the Universe at all its points, and is in the closest union with all of Life. It is in the closest touch with all that has emanated from the Absolute—all the world of Relativity. And while it faces the Relative Universe, it has its roots in the Absolute, and draws nourishment therefrom, just as does the babe in the womb obtain nourishment from the mother. It is verily a manifestation of God, and God's very essence is in it. Surely this is almost as "high" a statement as the "I Am God" of the teachers just mentioned,—and yet how different. Let us consider the teaching in detail in this lesson, and in portions of others to follow.
And yet, while the "I" is not God, the Absolute, it is so much greater than we ever imagined before we gained this understanding. It goes far beyond what we thought were its limits. It connects with the Universe at every point and is closely linked to all of Life. It is deeply intertwined with everything that has come from the Absolute—all the world of Relativity. While it faces the Relative Universe, it has its roots in the Absolute, drawing nourishment from it, just like a baby in the womb gets nourishment from the mother. It is truly a manifestation of God, and God's essence exists within it. Surely, this is nearly as "high" a statement as the "I Am God" from the teachers previously mentioned,—yet it is so different. Let’s examine the teaching in detail in this lesson and in portions of others to follow.
Let us begin with a consideration of the instruments of the Ego, and the material with which and through which the Ego works. Let us realize that the physical body of man is identical in substance with all other forms of matter, and that its atoms are continually changing and being replaced, the material being drawn from the great storehouse of matter, and that there is a Oneness of matter underlying all apparent differences of form and substance. And then let us realize that the vital energy or Prana that man uses in his life work is but a portion of that great universal energy which permeates everything and everywhere, the portion being used by us at any particular moment being drawn from the universal supply, and again passing out from us into the great ocean of force or energy. And then let us realize that even the mind, which is so close to the real Self that it is often mistaken for it—even that wonderful thing Thought—is but a portion of the Universal Mind, the highest emanation of the Absolute beneath the plane of Spirit, and that the Mind—substance or Chitta that we are using this moment, is not ours separately and distinctly, but is simply a portion from the great universal supply, which is constant and unchangeable. Let us then realize that even this thing that we feel pulsing within us—that which is so closely bound up with the Spirit as to be almost inseparable from it—that which we call Life—is but a bit of that Great Life Principle that pervades the Universe, and which cannot be added to, nor subtracted from. When we have realized these things, and have begun to feel our relation (in these particulars) to the One Great Emanation of the Absolute, then we may begin to grasp the idea of the Oneness of Spirit, and the relation of the "I" to every other "I," and the merging of the Self into the one great Self, which is not the extinction of Individuality, as some have supposed, but the enlargement and extension of the Individual Consciousness until it takes in the Whole.
Let's start by examining the tools of the Ego and the materials with which and through which the Ego operates. We should understand that the physical body of a person is made up of the same substance as all other forms of matter, and that its atoms are constantly changing and being replaced. This material is drawn from the vast reservoir of matter, and there is a fundamental Oneness of matter that underlies all apparent differences in form and substance. Additionally, we need to recognize that the vital energy or Prana that we use in our lives is just a part of the immense universal energy that fills everything everywhere. The portion we use at any given moment is taken from this universal supply and then returns to the vast ocean of force or energy. We should also acknowledge that even the mind—so closely connected to the real Self that it is often mistaken for it—even that amazing thing we call Thought is simply a fragment of the Universal Mind, the highest expression of the Absolute beneath the level of Spirit. The Mind—substance or Chitta—that we are using right now is not exclusively ours; it’s merely a piece from the great universal supply, which remains constant and unchanging. We should recognize that even the feeling we have pulsing within us—so intimately linked with Spirit that it feels almost inseparable—what we call Life—is just a small part of the Great Life Principle that permeates the Universe and cannot be added to or taken away from. Once we grasp these concepts and start to sense our relationship (in these areas) with the One Great Emanation of the Absolute, we can begin to understand the Oneness of Spirit, the connection of the "I" to every other "I," and the merging of the Self into the one great Self, which is not the end of Individuality, as some have assumed, but rather the expansion and extension of Individual Consciousness until it encompasses the Whole.
In Lessons X and XI, of the "Advanced Course" we called your attention to the Yogi teachings concerning Akasa or Matter, and showed you that all forms of what we know as Matter are but different forms of manifestation of the principle called Akasa, or as the Western scientists call it, "Ether." This Ether or Akasa is the finest, thinnest and most tenuous form of Matter, in fact it is Matter in its ultimate or fundamental form, the different forms of what we call Matter being but manifestations of this Akasa or Ether, the apparent difference resulting from different rates of vibration, etc. We mention this fact here merely to bring clearly before your mind the fact of the Universality of Matter, to the end that you may realize that each and every particle of your physical body is but a portion of this great principle of the Universe, fresh from the great store-house, and just about returning to it again, for the atoms of the body are constantly changing. That which appears as your flesh to-day, may have been part of a plant a few days before, and may be part of some other living thing a few days hence. Constant change is going on, and what is yours to-day was someone's else yesterday, and still another's to-morrow. You do not own one atom of matter personally, it is all a part of the common supply, the stream flowing through you and through all Life, on and on forever.
In Lessons X and XI of the "Advanced Course," we highlighted the Yogi teachings about Akasa or Matter and showed you that all forms of what we refer to as Matter are just different expressions of the principle called Akasa, which Western scientists label "Ether." This Ether or Akasa is the finest, most subtle form of Matter; in fact, it represents Matter in its most basic or fundamental state, with the various forms we call Matter being mere expressions of this Akasa or Ether. The apparent differences arise from varying rates of vibration and other factors. We mention this to make it clear that Matter is universal so you can understand that every particle of your physical body is just a part of this universal principle, fresh from the vast storehouse, and soon to return to it. The atoms in your body are constantly changing. What you see as your flesh today may have been part of a plant just a few days ago and might become part of another living thing in the near future. There’s a constant flow of change, and what you possess today was someone else's yesterday and will belong to another tomorrow. You don't personally own a single atom of Matter; it's all part of a common supply, a continuous stream flowing through you and all life, endlessly.
And so it is with the Vital Energy that you are using every moment of your life. You are constantly drawing upon the great Universal supply of Prana, then using what is given you, allowing the force to pass on to assume some other form. It is the property of all, and all you can do is to use what you need, and allow it to pass on. There is but one Force or Energy, and that is to be found everywhere at all times.
And that’s how it is with the Vital Energy you use every moment of your life. You’re always tapping into the vast Universal supply of Prana, taking what you need, and letting the energy transform into something else. It belongs to everyone, and all you can do is use what you require and let it flow onward. There is only one Force or Energy, and it exists everywhere all the time.
And even the great principle, Mind-substance, is under the same law. It is hard for us to realize this. We are so apt to think of our mental operations as distinctively our own—something that belongs to us personally—that it is difficult for us to realize that Mind-substance is a Universal principle just as Matter or Energy, and that we are but drawing upon the Universal supply in our mental operations. And more than this, the particular portion of Mind-substance that we are using, although separated from the Mind-substance used by other individuals by a thin wall of the very finest kind of Matter, is really in touch with the other apparently separated minds, and with the Universal Mind of which it forms a part. Just as is the Matter of which our physical bodies are composed really in touch with all Matter; and just as is the Vital Force used by us really in touch with all Energy; so is our Mind-substance really in touch with all Mind-substance. It is as if the Ego in its progress were moving through great oceans of Matter, Energy, or Mind-substance, making use of that of each which it needed and which immediately surrounded it, and leaving each behind as it moved on through the great volume of the ocean. This illustration is clumsy, but it may bring to your consciousness a realization that the Ego is the only thing that is really Yours, unchangeable and unaltered, and that all the rest is merely that portion of the Universal supply that you draw to yourself for the wants of the moment. It may also bring more clearly before your mind the great Unity of things—may enable you to see things as a Whole, rather than as separated parts. Remember, You—the "I"—are the only Real thing about and around you—all that has permanence—and Matter, Force and even Mind-substance, are but your instruments for use and expression. There are great oceans of each surrounding the "I" as it moves along.
Even the major concept of Mind-substance follows the same rule. It’s tough for us to grasp this. We tend to see our thoughts and mental processes as uniquely ours—something that belongs to us personally—which makes it hard to realize that Mind-substance is a Universal principle just like Matter or Energy, and that we are tapping into this Universal supply in our thinking. Moreover, the specific part of Mind-substance we’re using, though separated from the Mind-substance used by others by a thin barrier of the finest Matter, is actually connected to other seemingly separate minds, as well as the Universal Mind of which it is a part. Just as the Matter that makes up our physical bodies is truly connected to all Matter, and just as the Vital Force we use is connected to all Energy, our Mind-substance is connected to all Mind-substance. It’s like the "I" is moving through vast oceans of Matter, Energy, or Mind-substance, using what it needs that’s immediately around it, and leaving each behind as it flows through the great expanse of the ocean. This analogy might seem awkward, but it can help you realize that the "I" is the only thing that is truly yours, unchanging and constant, and everything else is just a portion of the Universal supply that you're drawing in for your current needs. It may also help you see the greater Unity of things—enabling you to view the world as a whole, rather than as separate parts. Remember, you—the “I”—are the only real thing around you that has permanence—all that you truly possess—and Matter, Force, and even Mind-substance are just tools for your use and expression. There are vast oceans of each surrounding the "I" as it moves onward.
It is well for you also to bear in mind the Universality of Life. All of the Universe is alive, vibrating and pulsating with life and energy and motion. There is nothing dead in the Universe. Life is everywhere, and always accompanied by intelligence. There is no such thing as a dead, unintelligent Universe. Instead of being atoms of Life floating in a sea of death, we are atoms of Life surrounded by an ocean of Life, pulsating, moving, thinking, living. Every atom of what we call Matter is alive. It has energy or force with it, and is always accompanied by intelligence and life. Look around us as we will—at the animal world—at the plant world—yes, even at the world of minerals and we see life, life, life—all alive and having intelligence. When we are able to bring this conception into the realm of actual consciousness—when we are able not only to intellectually accept this fact, but to even go still further and feel and be conscious of this Universal Life on all sides, then are we well on the road to attaining the Cosmic Consciousness.
It's important to remember the Universality of Life. The entire Universe is alive, vibrating, and pulsating with life, energy, and movement. There’s nothing dead in the Universe. Life is everywhere, always accompanied by intelligence. The Universe isn’t some dead, unintelligent space. Instead of being atoms of Life floating in a sea of death, we are atoms of Life surrounded by an ocean of Life, pulsating, moving, thinking, living. Every atom of what we call Matter is alive. It has energy or force and is always paired with intelligence and life. If we look around—at the animal world, the plant world, and even the mineral world—we see life, life, life—all alive and intelligent. When we can bring this understanding into our actual awareness—when we can not only intellectually accept this fact but also truly feel and be conscious of this Universal Life all around us, then we are well on the path to achieving Cosmic Consciousness.
But all these things are but steps leading up to the realization of the Oneness in Spirit, on the part of the Individual. Gradually there dawns upon him the realization that there is a Unity in the manifestation of Spirit from the Absolute—a unity with itself, and a Union with the Absolute. All this manifestation of Spirit on the part of the Absolute—all this begetting of Divine Children—was in the nature of a single act rather than as a series of acts, if we may be permitted to speak of the manifestation as an act. Each Ego is a Centre of Consciousness in this great ocean of Spirit—each is a Real Self, apparently separate from the others and from its source, but the separation is only apparent in both cases, for there is the closest bond of union between the Egos of the Universe of Universes—each is knit to the other in the closest bond of union, and each is still attached to the Absolute by spiritual filaments, if we may use the term. In time we shall grow more conscious of this mutual relationship, as the sheaths are outgrown and cast aside, and in the end we will be withdrawn into the Absolute—shall return to the Mansion of the Father.
But all these things are just steps leading to the understanding of the Oneness in Spirit for the Individual. Gradually, they realize that there is a Unity in the expression of Spirit from the Absolute—a unity with itself, and a Union with the Absolute. All this expression of Spirit from the Absolute—all this creation of Divine Children—was more like a single act than a series of acts, if we can refer to the manifestation as an act. Each Ego is a Center of Consciousness in this vast ocean of Spirit—each is a Real Self, seemingly separate from the others and from its source, but that separation is only apparent in both cases, for there is a close bond of unity among the Egos of the Universe of Universes—each is connected to the other in this strong bond, and each is still linked to the Absolute by spiritual threads, if we can use that term. Over time, we will become more aware of this mutual relationship as we shed our outer layers and, ultimately, we will be drawn back into the Absolute—we will return to the Mansion of the Father.
It is of the highest importance to the developing soul to unfold into a realization of this relationship and unity, for when this conception is once fully established the soul is enabled to rise above certain of the lower planes, and is free from the operation of certain laws that bind the undeveloped soul. Therefore the Yogi teachers are constantly leading the Candidates toward this goal. First by this path, and then by that one, giving them different glimpses of the desired point, until finally the student finds a path best fitted for his feet, and he moves along straight to the mark, and throwing aside the confining bonds that have proved so irksome, he cries aloud for joy at his new found Freedom.
It is extremely important for a developing soul to realize this relationship and unity, because once this understanding is fully established, the soul can rise above certain lower levels and is free from the laws that restrict the undeveloped soul. For this reason, Yogi teachers continuously guide the Candidates toward this goal. They show them different paths, offering various glimpses of the desired destination, until the student discovers the path that suits them best. Then they move straight toward the goal, shedding the confining limitations that have been so burdensome, and they joyfully cry out in celebration of their newfound Freedom.
The following exercises and Mental Drills are intended to aid the Candidate in his work of growing into a realization of his relationship with the Whole of Life and Being.
The following exercises and Mental Drills are designed to help the Candidate in his journey towards understanding his connection with the Whole of Life and Being.
MENTAL DRILL.
(1) Read over what we have said in the "Advanced Course" regarding the principle known as Matter. Realize that all Matter is One at the last—that the real underlying substance of Matter is Akasa or Ether, and that all the varying forms evident to our senses are but modifications and grosser forms of that underlying principle. Realize that by known chemical processes all forms of Matter known to us, or rather all combinations resulting in "forms," may be resolved into their original elements, and that these elements are merely Akasa in different states of vibration. Let the idea of the Oneness of the visible Universe sink deeply into your mind, until it becomes fixed there. The erroneous conception of diversity in the material world must be replaced by the consciousness of Unity—Oneness, at the last, in spite of the appearance of variety and manifold forms. You must grow to see behind the world of forms of Matter, and see the great principle of Matter (Akasa or Ether) back of, within, and under it all. You must grow to feel this, as well as to intellectually see it.
(1) Review what we've discussed in the "Advanced Course" about the principle of Matter. Understand that all Matter is fundamentally One—that the true underlying substance of Matter is Akasa or Ether, and that all the different forms we perceive are just variations and denser expressions of that core principle. Recognize that through known chemical processes, all forms of Matter we are aware of, or rather all combinations that create "forms," can be broken down into their original elements, which are simply Akasa in different states of vibration. Let the concept of the Oneness of the visible Universe settle deeply in your mind until it becomes ingrained there. The misleading idea of diversity in the material world needs to be replaced with an awareness of Unity—Oneness in the end, despite the appearance of variety and countless forms. You must learn to see beyond the world of Matter's forms and recognize the great principle of Matter (Akasa or Ether) that exists behind, within, and underneath it all. You must learn to feel this, as well as understand it intellectually.
(2) Meditate over the last mentioned truths, and then follow the matter still further. Read what we have said in the "Advanced Course" (Lesson XI) about the last analysis of Matter showing it fading away into Force or Energy until the dividing line is lost, and Matter merges into Energy or Force, showing them both to be but the same thing, Matter being a grosser form of Energy or Force. This idea should be impressed upon the understanding, in order that the complete edifice of the Knowing of the Oneness may be complete in all of its parts.
(2) Think about the truths we've just mentioned, and then explore the topic further. Check out what we've discussed in the "Advanced Course" (Lesson XI) regarding the final analysis of Matter, which reveals that it fades into Force or Energy until the distinction disappears, and Matter merges into Energy or Force, illustrating that they are essentially the same thing, with Matter being a heavier form of Energy or Force. This concept should be firmly understood to ensure that the entire structure of understanding Oneness is complete in all its aspects.
(3) Then read in the "Advanced Lessons" about Energy or Force, in the oneness underlying its various manifestations. Consider how one form of Energy may be transformed into another, and so on around the circle, the one principle producing the entire chain of appearances. Realize that the energy within you by which you move and act, is but one of the forms of this great Principle of Energy with which the Universe is filled, and that you may draw to you the required Energy from the great Universal supply. But above all endeavor to grasp the idea of the Oneness pervading the world of Energy or Force, or Motion. See it in its entirety, rather than in its apparent separateness. These steps may appear somewhat tedious and useless, but take our word for it, they are all helps in fitting the mind to grasp the idea of the Oneness of All. Each step is important, and renders the next higher one more easily attained. In this mental drill, it will be well to mentally picture the Universe in perpetual motion—everything is in motion—all matter is moving and changing its forms, and manifesting the Energy within it. Suns and worlds rush through space, their particles constantly changing and moving. Chemical composition and decomposition is constant and unceasing, everywhere the work of building up and breaking down is going on. New combinations of atoms and worlds are constantly being formed and dissolved. And after considering this Oneness of the principle of Energy, reflect that through all these changes of form the Ego—the Real Self—YOU—stand unchanged and unharmed—Eternal, Invincible, Indestructible, Invulnerable, Real and Constant among this changing world of forms and force. You are above it all, and it revolves around and about you—Spirit.
(3) Then read in the "Advanced Lessons" about Energy or Force, and the unity behind its various forms. Think about how one type of Energy can change into another, and so on in a cycle, with one principle creating the entire chain of appearances. Understand that the energy within you that allows you to move and act is just one of the forms of this great Principle of Energy that fills the Universe, and that you can tap into the needed Energy from the vast Universal supply. But most importantly, try to grasp the idea of the Oneness that permeates the world of Energy, Force, or Motion. See it as a whole instead of focusing on its apparent separateness. These steps might seem boring and pointless, but trust us, they are all valuable in preparing your mind to understand the Oneness of All. Each step is crucial and makes the next higher one easier to achieve. In this mental exercise, it will help to visualize the Universe in constant motion—everything is moving—all matter is shifting and changing its forms, expressing the Energy within it. Suns and planets travel through space, their particles continually changing and shifting. Chemical formation and breakdown are constant and unending, everywhere the processes of creating and dissolving are happening. New combinations of atoms and worlds are always being formed and dissolved. And after contemplating this Oneness of the principle of Energy, remember that through all these changes in form, the Ego—the Real Self—YOU—remain unchanged and unharmed—Eternal, Invincible, Indestructible, Invulnerable, Real, and Constant amid this shifting world of forms and forces. You are above it all, and everything revolves around you—Spirit.
(4) Read what we have said in the "Advanced Course" about Force or Energy, shading into Mind-substance which is its parent. Realize that Mind is back of all this great exhibition of Energy and Force that you have been considering. Then will you be ready to consider the Oneness of Mind.
(4) Read what we discussed in the "Advanced Course" about Force or Energy, which connects to Mind-substance, its source. Understand that Mind is behind all this impressive display of Energy and Force that you've been thinking about. Then you'll be ready to explore the Oneness of Mind.
(5) Read what we have said in the "Advanced Lessons" about Mind-substance. Realize that there is a great world of Mind-substance, or an Universal Mind, which is at the disposal of the Ego. All Thought is the product of the Ego's use of this Mind-substance, its tool and instrument. Realize that this Ocean of Mind is entire and Whole, and that the Ego may draw freely from it. Realize that You have this great ocean of Mind at your command, when you unfold sufficiently to use it. Realize that Mind is back of and underneath all of the world of form and names and action, and that in that sense: "All is Mind," although still higher in the scale than even Mind are You, the Real Self, the Ego, the Manifestation of the Absolute.
(5) Read what we discussed in the "Advanced Lessons" about Mind-substance. Understand that there is a vast world of Mind-substance, or a Universal Mind, which the Ego can access. All Thought is created through the Ego's utilization of this Mind-substance, which serves as its tool and instrument. Recognize that this Ocean of Mind is complete and Whole, allowing the Ego to draw freely from it. Acknowledge that You have this immense ocean of Mind at your disposal when you develop enough to use it. Understand that Mind is the foundation behind all forms, names, and actions in the world, and in that sense: "All is Mind," although even higher than Mind are You, the Real Self, the Ego, the Manifestation of the Absolute.
(6) Realize your identity with and relationship to All of Life. Look around you at Life in all its forms, from the lowest to the highest, all being exhibitions of the great principle of Life in operation along different stages of The Path. Scorn not the humblest forms, but look behind the form and see the reality—Life. Feel yourself a part of the great Universal Life. Let your thought sink to the depths of the ocean, and realize your kinship with the Life back of the forms dwelling there. Do not confound the forms (often hideous from your personal point of view) with the principle behind them. Look at the plant-life, and the animal life, and seek to see behind the veil of form into the real Life behind and underneath the form. Learn to feel your Life throbbing and thrilling with the Life Principle in these other forms, and in the forms of those of your own race. Gaze into the starry skies and see there the numerous suns and worlds, all peopled with life in some of its myriad forms, and feel your kinship to it. If you can grasp this thought and consciousness, you will find yourself at-one-ment with those whirling worlds, and, instead of feeling small and insignificant by comparison, you will be conscious of an expansion of Self, until you feel that in those circling worlds is a part of yourself—that You are there also, while standing upon the Earth—that you are akin to all parts of the Universe—nay, more, that they are as much your home as is the spot upon which you are standing. You will find sweeping upon you a sense of consciousness that the Universe is your home—not merely a part of it, as you had previously thought. You will experience a sense of greatness, and broadness and grandness such as you have never dreamed of. You will begin to realize at least a part of your Divine inheritance, and to know indeed that you are a Child of the Infinite, the very essence of your Divine Parent being in the fibres of your being, At such times of realization one becomes conscious of what lies before the soul in its upward path, and how small the greatest prizes that Earth has to offer are when compared to some of these things before the soul, as seen by the eyes of the Spiritual Mind in moments of clear vision.
(6) Recognize your identity and relationship with All of Life. Look around you at Life in all its forms, from the simplest to the most complex, all demonstrating the great principle of Life in action at different stages of The Path. Don't look down on the humblest forms; instead, look beyond the surface and see the reality—Life. Feel yourself connected to the vast Universal Life. Let your thoughts dive deep into the ocean, and acknowledge your bond with the Life behind the forms dwelling there. Don't mistake the forms (which may seem ugly from your perspective) for the principle behind them. Observe the plant life and animal life, and strive to see beyond the outer appearance into the real Life underneath. Learn to sense your own Life pulsing and resonating with the Life Principle in these other forms, as well as in those of your own kind. Gaze into the starry sky and see the countless suns and worlds, all filled with life in its many forms, and feel your connection to it. If you can embrace this thought and awareness, you will find yourself in harmony with those spinning worlds, and instead of feeling small and insignificant, you will experience an expansion of self, until you realize that those circling worlds are a part of you—that you are there as well, while standing on Earth—that you are connected to all parts of the Universe—indeed, more than that, they are as much your home as the very spot you stand on. You will feel a realization that the Universe is your home—not just a part of it, as you had previously believed. You will experience a sense of greatness, vastness, and magnificence like you have never imagined. You will start to recognize at least a part of your Divine inheritance, knowing that you are a Child of the Infinite, with the essence of your Divine Parent woven into the fibers of your being. In such moments of realization, one becomes aware of what lies ahead for the soul on its upward journey, and how trivial the greatest rewards that Earth has to offer are in comparison to these deeper visions that the Spiritual Mind perceives in moments of clarity.
You must not dispute with these visions of the greatness of the soul, but must treat them hospitably, for they are your very own, coming to you from the regions of your Spiritual Mind which are unfolding into consciousness.
You shouldn't argue with these visions of the greatness of the soul; instead, you should welcome them, as they are a part of you, emerging from the areas of your Spiritual Mind that are becoming aware.
(7) The highest step in this dawning consciousness of the Oneness of All, is the one in which is realized that there is but One Reality, and at the same time the sense of consciousness that the "I" is in that Reality. It is most difficult to express this thought in words for it is something that must be felt, rather than seen by the Intellect. When the Soul realizes that the Spirit within it is, at the last, the only real part of it, and that the Absolute and its manifestation as Spirit is the only real thing in the Universe, a great step has been taken. But there is still one higher step to be taken before the full sense of the Oneness and Reality comes to us. That step is the one in which we realize the Identity of the "I" with the great "I" of the Universe. The mystery of the manifestation of the Absolute in the form of the Spirit, is veiled from us—the mind confesses its inability to penetrate behind the veil shielding the Absolute from view, although it will give us a report of its being conscious of the presence of the Absolute just at the edge of the boundary line. But the highest region of the Spiritual Mind, when explored by the advanced souls who are well along the Path, reports that it sees beyond the apparent separation of Spirit from Spirit, and realizes that there is but one Reality of Spirit, and that all the "I"'s are really but different views of that One—Centres of Consciousness upon the surface of the One Great "I," the Centre of which is the Absolute Itself. This certainly penetrates the whole region of the Spiritual Mind, and gives us all the message of Oneness of the Spirit, just as the Intellect satisfies us with its message of the Oneness of Matter, Energy, and Mind. The idea of Oneness permeates all planes of Life.
(7) The highest stage in this emerging awareness of the unity of everything is the moment we realize that there is only one Reality, and at the same time, we feel that our "I" exists within that Reality. It’s really hard to put this idea into words because it’s something that needs to be experienced, rather than understood intellectually. When the Soul understands that the Spirit within it is ultimately the only truly real part, and that the Absolute and its expression as Spirit is the only real aspect of the Universe, we make significant progress. However, there is still one higher level to reach before we fully grasp the Oneness and Reality. That level is when we recognize the Identity of the "I" with the great "I" of the Universe. The mystery of how the Absolute manifests as Spirit is hidden from us—the mind admits it can’t see past the veil that conceals the Absolute, even though it can sense the Absolute's presence just at the fringes of perception. Yet, in the highest realm of the Spiritual Mind, those who have advanced on the Path report seeing beyond the apparent separation of Spirit from Spirit, realizing that there is only one Reality of Spirit and that all the "I"s are merely different perspectives of that Oneness—Centers of Consciousness on the surface of the One Great "I," whose core is the Absolute itself. This definitely reaches into the entire expanse of the Spiritual Mind, delivering the message of the Oneness of Spirit, just as the Intellect fulfills us with its understanding of the Oneness of Matter, Energy, and Mind. The concept of Oneness is present throughout all levels of Life.
The sense of Reality of the "I" that is apparent to You in the moments of your clearest mental vision, is really the reflection of the sense of Reality underlying the Whole—it is the consciousness of the Whole, manifesting through your point or Centre of Consciousness. The advanced student or Initiate finds his consciousness gradually enlarging until it realizes its identity with the Whole. He realizes that under all the forms and names of the visible world, there is to be found One Life—One Force—One Substance—One Existence—One Reality—ONE. And, instead of his experiencing any sense of the loss of identity or individuality, he becomes conscious of an enlargement of an expansion of individuality or identity—instead of feeling himself absorbed in the Whole, he feels that he is spreading out and embracing the Whole. This is most hard to express in words, for there are no words to fit the conception, and all that we can hope to do is to start into motion, by means of our words, the vibrations that will find a response in the minds of those who read the words, to the end that they will experience the consciousness which will bring its own understanding. This consciousness cannot be transmitted by words proceeding from the Intellect, but vibrations may be set up that will prepare the mind to receive the message from its own higher planes.
The sense of reality of the "I" that you notice during your clearest moments of understanding is actually a reflection of the underlying reality of the whole. It's the awareness of the whole expressing itself through your individual point or center of consciousness. The advanced student or initiate finds their awareness gradually expanding until they recognize their identity as part of the whole. They come to understand that beneath all the forms and names in the visible world is one life—one force—one substance—one existence—one reality—ONE. Rather than feeling a loss of identity or individuality, they become aware of a growth and expansion of their individuality or identity. Instead of feeling absorbed into the whole, they feel as if they are reaching out and encompassing the whole. This idea is difficult to express in words because there are no perfect words for it, and all we can do is use our words to set in motion vibrations that will resonate with the minds of those who read them, so they may experience a level of awareness that brings its own understanding. This awareness can't be conveyed through intellectual words alone, but vibrations can be created that prepare the mind to receive the message from its higher levels.
Even in the early stages of this dawning consciousness, one is enabled to identify the real part of himself with the real part of all the other forms of life that pass before his notice. In every other man—in every animal—in every plant—in every mineral—he sees behind the sheath and form of appearance, an evidence of the presence of the Spirit which is akin to his own Spirit—yea, more than akin, for the two are One. He sees Himself in all forms of life, in all time in all places. He realizes that the Real Self is everywhere present and everlasting, and that the Life within himself is also within all the Universe—in everything, for there is nothing dead in the Universe, and all Life, in all of its varying phases, is simply the One Life, held, used and enjoyed in common by all. Each Ego is a Centre of Consciousness in this great ocean of Life, and while apparently separate and distinct, is yet really in touch with the Whole, and with every apparent part.
Even in the early stages of this awakening awareness, one can recognize the real part of themselves in connection with the real part of all other forms of life that come into their view. In every person—in every animal—in every plant—in every mineral—they see beyond the surface and appearance, evidence of the Spirit that is similar to their own Spirit—yes, more than similar, because the two are One. They see themselves in all forms of life, throughout all time and in all places. They understand that the Real Self is everywhere and eternal, and that the Life within them is also present in the entire Universe—in everything, because there is nothing lifeless in the Universe, and all Life, in its many forms, is simply the One Life, shared, experienced, and appreciated by all. Each individual is a Center of Consciousness in this vast ocean of Life, and while seemingly separate and distinct, is truly connected with the Whole and with every visible part.
It is not our intention, in this lesson, to go into the details of this great mystery of Life, or to recite the comparatively little of the Truth that the most advanced teachers and Masters have handed down. This is not the place for it—it belongs to the subject of Gnani Yoga rather than to Raja Yoga—and we touch upon it here, not for the purpose of trying to explain the scientific side of it to you, but merely in order that your minds may be led to take up the idea and gradually manifest it in conscious realization. There is quite a difference between the scientific, intellectual teaching of Gnani Yoga, whereby the metaphysical and scientific sides of the Yogi teachings are presented to the minds of the students, in a logical, scientific manner, and the methods of Raja Yoga, in which the Candidate is led by degrees to a consciousness (outside of mere intellectual belief) of his real nature and powers. We are following the latter plan, for this course is a Course in Raja Yoga. We are aiming to present the matter to the mind in such a manner that it may prepare the way for the dawning consciousness, by brushing away the preconceived notions and prejudices, and allowing a clean entrance for the new conception. Much that we have said in this lesson may appear, on the one hand, like useless repetition, and, on the other hand, like an incomplete presentation of the scientific side of the Yogi teachings. But it will be found, in time, that the effect has been that the mind of the student has undergone a change from the absorbing of the idea of the Oneness of Life, and the Expansion of the Self. The Candidate is urged not to be in too much of a hurry. Development must not be forced. Read what we have written, and practice the Mental Drills we have given, even if they may appear trifling and childish to some of you—we know what they will do for you, and you will agree with us in time. Make haste slowly. You will find that the mind will work out the matter, even though you be engaged in your ordinary work, and have forgotten the subject for the time. The greater portion of mental work is done in this way, while you are busy with something else, or even asleep, for the sub-conscious portion of the mind works along the lines pointed out for it, and performs its task.
It’s not our goal in this lesson to dive into the details of this great mystery of Life or to repeat the relatively small amount of Truth that the most advanced teachers and Masters have shared. This isn’t the right space for it—it fits more with Gnani Yoga than with Raja Yoga—and we mention it here not to explain the scientific aspects to you, but just so that your minds can start to embrace the idea and gradually turn it into conscious realization. There’s a big difference between the scientific, intellectual approach of Gnani Yoga, which presents the metaphysical and scientific sides of Yogi teachings to students in a logical, scientific way, and the methods of Raja Yoga, where the Candidate is gradually led to a consciousness (beyond mere intellectual belief) of their true nature and abilities. We are following the latter approach since this course is about Raja Yoga. Our goal is to present the material in a way that opens the door for new consciousness by clearing away preconceived notions and biases, allowing for a fresh perspective. Much of what we’ve discussed in this lesson might seem, on one hand, like unnecessary repetition, and on the other hand, like an incomplete view of the scientific aspect of Yogi teachings. However, over time, you will find that the effect has been a shift in the student’s mind as they absorb the concept of the Oneness of Life and the Expansion of the Self. The Candidate should not rush. Development shouldn’t be pushed. Read what we’ve written and practice the Mental Drills we’ve provided, even if they may seem trivial or childish to some of you—we know what they will do for you, and in time, you will agree with us. Take your time. You’ll discover that the mind will work through these concepts, even when you’re busy with your everyday tasks and have temporarily set the subject aside. Most mental work happens this way, while you're occupied with something else or even asleep, as the subconscious mind works along the lines we’ve pointed out and gets the job done.
As we have said, the purpose of this lesson is to bring you in the way of the unfoldment of consciousness, rather than to teach you the details of the scientific side of the Yogi teachings. Development is the keynote of Raja Yoga. And the reason that we wish to develop this sense of the Reality of the "I," and the Expansion of the Self, at this place is that thereby you may assert your Mastery over Matter, Energy and Mind. Before you may mount your throne as King, you must fully realize in consciousness that you are the Reality in this world of appearances. You must realize that you—the real You—are not only existent, and real, but that you are in touch with all else that is real, and that the roots of your being are grounded in the Absolute itself. You must realize that instead of being a separate atom of Reality, isolated and fixed in a narrow space, you are a Centre of Consciousness in the Whole of Reality, and that the Universe of Universes is your home—that your Centre of Consciousness might be moved on to a point trillions of miles from the Earth (which distance would be as nothing in Space) and still you—the awakened soul—would be just as much at home there as here—that even while you are here, your influence extends far out into space. Your real state, which will be revealed to you, gradually, throughout the ages, is so great and grand, that your mind in its present state of development cannot grasp even the faint reflection of that glory.
As we mentioned, the goal of this lesson is to guide you towards expanding your consciousness, rather than focusing on the scientific details of Yogi teachings. Growth is the central theme of Raja Yoga. We want to foster your awareness of the Reality of the "I" and the expansion of the Self here so that you can claim your mastery over Matter, Energy, and Mind. Before you can take your place as King, you must fully understand in your consciousness that you are the Reality in this world of appearances. You need to realize that you—the real You—are not only existing and real, but also connected to everything that is real, with the roots of your being anchored in the Absolute itself. You should understand that instead of being a separate piece of Reality, isolated and confined to a small space, you are a Centre of Consciousness within the entirety of Reality, and that the vast Universe of Universes is your home—that your Centre of Consciousness could be shifted to a point trillions of miles from Earth (a distance that is insignificant in Space) and still you—the awakened soul—would feel just as much at home there as here. Even while you are here, your influence reaches far out into space. Your true state, which will gradually be revealed to you over time, is so immense and magnificent that your mind, in its current level of development, cannot even begin to grasp the faintest reflection of that glory.
We wish you to try to form at least a faint idea of your Real State of Being, in order that you may control the lower principles by the force of your awakened Will, which Will depends upon your degree of consciousness of the Real Self.
We want you to try to get at least a basic understanding of your true state of being so that you can manage the less advanced aspects of yourself through the power of your awakened will, which relies on how aware you are of your true self.
As man grows in understanding and consciousness of the Real Self, so does his ability to use his Will grow. Will is the attribute of the Real Self. It is well that this great realization of the Real Self brings with it Love for all of Life, and Kindness, for, were it not so, the Will that comes to him who grows into a realization of his real being could be used to the great hurt of those of the race who had not progressed so far (their relative hurt, we mean, for in the end, and at the last, no soul is ever really hurt). But the dawning power brings with it greater Love and Kindness, and the higher the soul mounts the more is it filled with the higher ideals and the more does it throw from it the lower animal attributes. It is true that some souls growing into a consciousness of their real nature, without an understanding of what it all means, may commit the error of using the awakened Will for selfish ends, as may be seen in the cases of the Black Magicians spoken of in the occult writings, and also in the cases of well known characters in history and in modern life, who manifest an enormous Will which they misuse. All of this class of people of great Will have stumbled or grown blindly into a consciousness (or partial consciousness) of the real nature, but lack the restraining influence of the higher teachings. But such misuse of the Will brings pain and unrest to the user, and he is eventually driven into the right road.
As a person develops their understanding and awareness of their true self, their ability to wield their willpower increases as well. Willpower is a trait of the true self. It's essential that this profound realization of the true self fosters love for all of life and kindness; otherwise, the willpower granted to someone who awakens to their real being could potentially harm those who have not advanced as much (their relative harm, since ultimately, no soul is truly hurt). However, this newfound power brings along greater love and kindness, and as the soul elevates, it becomes more imbued with higher ideals and sheds lower, more animalistic traits. It's true that some individuals, as they awaken to their true nature without fully comprehending it, might err by using their awakened will for selfish purposes. This can be seen in the cases of Black Magicians mentioned in occult literature, as well as in well-known historical figures and contemporary individuals who display immense willpower that they misuse. These individuals who possess great will often stumble into an awareness (or partial awareness) of their true nature but lack the guiding influence of higher teachings. However, such misuse of their will leads to pain and unrest for them, ultimately pushing them toward the right path.
We do not expect our students to grasp fully this idea of the Expansion of Self. Even the highest grasp it only partially. But until you get a glimmering of the consciousness you will not be able to progress far on the path of Raja Yoga. You must understand what you are, before you are able to use the power that lies dormant within you. You must realize that you are the Master, before you can claim the powers of the Master, and expect to have your commands obeyed. So bear patiently with us, your Teachers, while we set before you the lessons to be learned—the tasks to be performed. The road is long, and is rough in places—the feet may become tired and bruised, but the reward is great, and there are resting places along the path. Be not discouraged if your progress seem slow, for the soul must unfold naturally as does the flower, without haste, without force.
We don't expect our students to fully understand the idea of the Expansion of Self. Even those who grasp it best only do so partially. But until you have some awareness of this consciousness, you won’t be able to make much progress on the path of Raja Yoga. You need to understand who you are before you can tap into the power that’s sitting dormant within you. You have to recognize that you are the Master before you can claim the Master's powers and expect your instructions to be followed. So please be patient with us, your Teachers, as we present the lessons you need to learn and the tasks you need to complete. The journey is long and can be tough at times—your feet might get tired and sore, but the rewards are significant, and there are places to rest along the way. Don’t get discouraged if your progress feels slow, because the soul must develop naturally, just like a flower, without rushing or forcing it.
And be not dismayed nor affrighted if you occasionally catch a glimpse of your higher self. As "M.C." says, in her notes on "Light on the Path" (see "Advanced Course," page 95): "To have seen thy soul in its bloom, is to have obtained a momentary glimpse in thyself of the transfiguration which shall eventually make thee more than man; to recognize, is to achieve the great task of gazing upon the blazing light without dropping the eyes, and not falling back in terror as though before some ghastly phantom. This happens to some, and so, when the victory is all but won, it is lost."
And don't be discouraged or scared if you sometimes catch a glimpse of your higher self. As "M.C." mentions in her notes on "Light on the Path" (see "Advanced Course," page 95): "Seeing your soul at its best means you've had a brief look at the transformation that will eventually elevate you beyond being just human; to recognize this is to accomplish the significant challenge of looking at the dazzling light without looking away or recoiling in fear as if faced with a terrifying ghost. This happens to some people, and just when victory seems within reach, it slips away."
Peace be with thee.
Peace be with you.
MANTRAM (AFFIRMATION) FOR THE THIRD LESSON.
There is but one ultimate form of Matter; one ultimate form of Energy; one ultimate form of Mind. Matter proceeds from Energy, and Energy from Mind, and all are an emanation of the Absolute, threefold in appearance but One in substance. There is but One Life, and that permeates the Universe, manifesting in various forms, but being, at the last, but One. My body is one with Universal Matter; My energy and vital force is one with the Universal Energy; My Mind is one with the Universal Mind; My Life is one with the Universal Life. The Absolute has expressed and manifested itself in Spirit, which is the real "I" overshadowing and embracing all the apparently separate "I"s. "I" feel my identity with Spirit and realize the Oneness of All Reality. I feel my unity with all Spirit, and my Union (through Spirit) with the Absolute. I realize that "I" am an Expression and Manifestation of the Absolute, and that its very essence is within me. I am filled with Divine Love. I am filled with Divine Power. I am filled with Divine Wisdom. I am conscious of identity in spirit, in substance; and in nature; with the One Reality.
There is just one ultimate form of Matter, one ultimate form of Energy, and one ultimate form of Mind. Matter comes from Energy, Energy comes from Mind, and all of these are expressions of the Absolute, threefold in appearance but unified in essence. There is only One Life, which permeates the Universe and manifests in various forms, yet ultimately is still One. My body is one with Universal Matter; my energy and vital force are one with Universal Energy; my Mind is one with Universal Mind; my Life is one with Universal Life. The Absolute has expressed and manifested itself in Spirit, which is the true "I" that overshadows and embraces all the seemingly separate "I"s. I feel my identity with Spirit and recognize the Oneness of All Reality. I feel my unity with all Spirit and my connection (through Spirit) with the Absolute. I understand that "I" am an Expression and Manifestation of the Absolute, and that its very essence resides within me. I am filled with Divine Love. I am filled with Divine Power. I am filled with Divine Wisdom. I am aware of my identity in spirit, substance, and nature with the One Reality.
THE FOURTH LESSON.
MENTAL CONTROL.
In our first three lessons of this series, we have endeavored to bring into realization within your mind (1) the consciousness of the "I"; its independence from the body; its immortality; its invincibility and invulnerability; (2) the superiority of the "I" over the mind, as well as over the body; the fact that the mind is not the "I," but is merely an instrument for the expression of the "I"; the fact that the "I" is master of the mind, as well as of the body; that the "I" is behind all thought; that the "I" can set aside for consideration the sensations, emotions, passions, desires, and the rest of the mental phenomena, and still realize that it, the "I," is apart from these mental manifestations, and remains unchanged, real and fully existent; that the "I" can set aside any and all of its mental tools and instruments, as "not I" things, and still consciously realize that after so setting them aside there remains something—itself—the "I" which cannot be set aside or taken from; that the "I" is the master of the mind, and not its slave; (3) that the "I" is a much greater thing than the little personal "I" we have been considering it to be; that the "I" is a part of that great One Reality which pervades all the Universe; that it is connected with all other forms of life by countless ties, mental and spiritual filaments and relations; that the "I" is a Centre of Consciousness in that great One Reality or Spirit, which is behind and back of all Life and Existence, the Centre of which Reality or Existence, is the Absolute or God; that the sense of Reality that is inherent in the "I," is really the reflection of the sense of Reality inherent in the Whole—the Great "I" of the Universe.
In the first three lessons of this series, we have tried to help you understand (1) the awareness of the "I"; its independence from the body; its immortality; its strength and resilience; (2) the superiority of the "I" over both the mind and the body; the idea that the mind is not the "I," but just a tool for expressing the "I"; that the "I" is in control of the mind and the body; that the "I" is behind all thoughts; that the "I" can set aside feelings, emotions, desires, and other mental experiences, and still recognize that it, the "I," is separate from these thoughts and remains unchanged, real, and fully existing; that the "I" can disregard any and all of its mental tools as "not I" things, and still consciously understand that even after doing so, something remains—itself—the "I," which cannot be dismissed or taken away; that the "I" is the master of the mind, and not its servant; (3) that the "I" is much greater than the limited personal "I" we've been thinking of; that the "I" is part of the great One Reality that fills the entire Universe; that it is linked to all other forms of life through countless mental and spiritual connections; that the "I" is a Center of Consciousness in that great One Reality or Spirit, which is the foundation of all Life and Existence, the core of which Reality or Existence is the Absolute or God; and that the sense of Reality inherent in the "I" is truly a reflection of the sense of Reality in the Whole—the Great "I" of the Universe.
The underlying principle of these three lessons is the Reality of the "I," in itself, over and above all Matter, Force, or Mind—positive to all of them, just as they are positive or negative to each other—and negative only to the Centre of the One—the Absolute itself. And this is the position for the Candidate or Initiate to take: "I am positive to Mind, Energy, and Matter, and control them all—I am negative only to the Absolute, which is the Centre of Being, of which Being I Am. And, as I assert my mastery over Mind, Energy, and Matter, and exercise my Will over them, so do I acknowledge my subordination to the Absolute, and gladly open my soul to the inflow of the Divine Will, and partake of its Power, Strength, and Wisdom."
The key idea behind these three lessons is the reality of the "I" that exists above and beyond all matter, energy, or thought—being positive to all of them, just as they can be positive or negative to one another—and being negative only in relation to the Center of the One—the Absolute itself. This is the stance that the Candidate or Initiate should adopt: "I am in control of Mind, Energy, and Matter—I am only negative in relation to the Absolute, which is the Center of Being, of which I exist. As I assert my control over Mind, Energy, and Matter, and exercise my will over them, I also acknowledge my submission to the Absolute, and willingly open my soul to receive the Divine Will, participating in its Power, Strength, and Wisdom."
In the present lesson, and those immediately following it, we shall endeavor to assist the Candidate or Initiate in acquiring a mastery of the subordinate manifestations, Matter, Energy, and Mind. In order to acquire and assert this mastery, one must acquaint himself with the nature of the thing to be controlled.
In this lesson and the ones that follow, we will work to help the Candidate or Initiate gain a strong understanding of the basic elements: Matter, Energy, and Mind. To achieve and demonstrate this mastery, it's essential to become familiar with the nature of what you are trying to control.
In our "Advanced Course" we have endeavored to explain to you the nature of the Three Great Manifestations, known as Chitta, or Mind-Substance; Prana, or Energy; and Akasa, or the Principle of Matter. We also explained to you that the "I" of man is superior to these three, being what is known as Atman or Spirit. Matter, Energy, and Mind, as we have explained, are manifestations of the Absolute, and are relative things. The Yogi philosophy teaches that Matter is the grossest form of manifested substance, being below Energy and Mind, and consequently negative to, and subordinate to both. One stage higher than Matter, is Energy or Force, which is positive to, and has authority over, Matter (Matter being a still grosser form of substance), but which is negative to and subordinate to Mind, which is a still higher form of substance. Next in order comes the highest of the three—Mind—the finest form of substance, and which dominates both Energy and Matter, being positive to both. Mind, however is negative and subordinate to the "I," which is Spirit, and obeys the orders of the latter when firmly and intelligently given. The "I" itself is subordinate only to the Absolute—the Centre of Being—the "I" being positive and dominant over the threefold manifestation of Mind, Energy, and Matter.
In our "Advanced Course," we've aimed to clarify the nature of the Three Great Manifestations, known as Chitta or Mind-Substance; Prana or Energy; and Akasa or the Principle of Matter. We also explained that the "I" of a person is greater than these three, referred to as Atman or Spirit. Matter, Energy, and Mind, as we've discussed, are manifestations of the Absolute and are relative concepts. Yogi philosophy teaches that Matter is the most basic form of manifested substance, being below Energy and Mind, and therefore negative to and subordinate to both. One step above Matter is Energy or Force, which is positive to and has authority over Matter (with Matter being an even more basic form of substance), but is negative to and subordinate to Mind, which is a higher form of substance. Next comes the highest of the three—Mind—the finest form of substance that dominates both Energy and Matter, being positive to both. However, Mind is negative and subordinate to the "I," which is Spirit, and follows its commands when given clearly and intelligently. The "I" itself is only subordinate to the Absolute—the Center of Being—being positive and dominant over the threefold manifestations of Mind, Energy, and Matter.
The "I," which for the sake of the illustration must be regarded as a separate thing (although it is really only a Centre of Consciousness in the great body of Spirit), finds itself surrounded by the triple-ocean of Mind, Energy and Matter, which ocean extends into Infinity. The body is but a physical form through which flows an unending stream of matter, for, as you know the particles and atoms of the body are constantly changing; being renewed; replaced; thrown off, and supplanted. One's body of a few years ago, or rather the particles composing that body, have passed off and now form new combinations in the world of matter. And one's body of to-day is passing away and being replaced by new particles. And one's body of next year is now occupying some other portion of space, and its particles are now parts of countless other combinations, from which space and combinations they will later come to combine and form the body of next year. There is nothing permanent about the body—even the particles of the bones are being constantly replaced by others. And so it is with the Vital Energy, Force, or Strength of the body (including that of the brain). It is constantly being used up, and expended, a fresh supply taking its place. And even the Mind of the person is changeable, and the Mind-substance or Chitta, is being used up and replenished, the new supply coming from the great Ocean of Mind, into which the discarded portion slips, just as is the case with the matter and energy.
The "I," which for the sake of this illustration must be seen as a separate entity (even though it's really just a Center of Consciousness in the vast body of Spirit), finds itself surrounded by the triple-ocean of Mind, Energy, and Matter, which stretches into Infinity. The body is merely a physical form through which an endless stream of matter flows, because, as you know, the particles and atoms of the body are constantly changing; being renewed, replaced, discarded, and replaced again. One's body from a few years ago, or rather the particles that made up that body, have been shed and now form new combinations in the physical world. And today's body is also undergoing change and being replaced by new particles. The body of next year is now occupying a different part of space, with its particles currently making up countless other combinations, from which space and combinations it will later come together to form next year's body. There is nothing permanent about the body—even the particles in the bones are continually being replaced. The same goes for the Vital Energy, Force, or Strength of the body (including that of the brain). It is constantly being used up and spent, with a fresh supply taking its place. Even a person's Mind is changeable, and the Mind-substance or Chitta, is being consumed and replenished, with the new supply coming from the great Ocean of Mind, into which the discarded portion flows, just like with matter and energy.
While the majority of our students, who are more or less familiar with the current material scientific conceptions, will readily accept the above idea of the ocean of Matter, and Energy, and the fact that there is a continual using up and replenishing of one's store of both, they may have more or less trouble in accepting the idea that Mind is a substance or principle amenable to the same general laws as are the other two manifestations, or attributes of substance. One is so apt to think of his Mind as "himself"—the "I." Notwithstanding the fact that in our Second Lesson of this series we showed you that the "I" is superior to the mental states, and that it can set them aside and regard and consider them as "not-I" things, yet the force of the habit of thought is very strong, and it may take some of you considerable time before you "get into the way" of realizing that your Mind is "something that you use," instead of being You—yourself. And yet, you must persevere in attaining this realization, for in the degree that you realize your dominance over your mind, so will be your control of it, and its amenability to that control. And, as is the degree of that dominance and control, so will be the character, grade and extent of the work that your Mind will do for you. So you see: Realization brings Control—and Control brings results. This statement lies at the base of the science of Raja Yoga. And many of its first exercises are designed to acquaint the student with that realization, and to develop the realization and control by habit and practice.
While most of our students, who are somewhat familiar with current scientific ideas, will easily accept the concept of the ocean of Matter and Energy and the fact that there's a constant use and replenishment of both, they might struggle with the notion that Mind is a substance or principle that follows the same general laws as those two other manifestations or attributes of substance. People tend to think of their Mind as "themselves"—the "I." Even though in our Second Lesson of this series we demonstrated that the "I" is greater than mental states and can set them aside as "not-I" things, the force of habitual thinking is strong, and it may take some of you quite a while to truly understand that your Mind is "something that you use," rather than being You—yourself. However, you must keep working towards this understanding, because the more you realize your control over your mind, the more you will be able to manage it, and the greater your ability to influence that control will be. And, as your degree of that control increases, so will the character, level, and extent of the work your Mind will accomplish on your behalf. So you see: Realization brings Control—and Control brings results. This idea is fundamental to the science of Raja Yoga. Many of its initial exercises are designed to help students achieve that realization and to develop control through habit and practice.
The Yogi Philosophy teaches that instead of Mind being the "I." it is the thing through and by means of which the "I" thinks, at least so far as is concerned the knowledge concerning the phenomenal or outward Universe—that is the Universe of Name and Form. There is a higher Knowledge locked up in the innermost part of the "I," that far transcends any information that it may receive about or from the outer world, but that is not before us for consideration at this time, and we must concern ourselves with the "thinking" about the world of things.
The Yogi Philosophy teaches that the Mind isn’t the “I.” Instead, it’s the tool through which the “I” thinks, at least when it comes to our understanding of the phenomenal or external Universe—that is, the Universe of Name and Form. There’s a deeper Knowledge hidden within the core of the “I,” which goes far beyond any information it might get from the outside world, but we won’t discuss that right now, so we need to focus on “thinking” about the world of objects.
Mind-substance in Sanscrit is called "Chitta," and a wave in the Chitta (which wave is the combination of Mind and Energy) is called "Vritta," which is akin to what we call a "thought." In other words it is "mind in action," whereas Chitta is "mind in repose." Vritta, when literally translated means "a whirlpool or eddy in the mind," which is exactly what a thought really is.
Mind-substance in Sanskrit is called "Chitta," and a wave in the Chitta (which wave is the combination of Mind and Energy) is called "Vritta," similar to what we refer to as a "thought." In other words, it’s "mind in action," while Chitta is "mind at rest." Vritta, when literally translated, means "a whirlpool or eddy in the mind," which is exactly what a thought is.
But we must call the attention of the student, at this point, to the fact that the word "Mind" is used in two ways by the Yogis and other occultists, and the student is directed to form a clear conception of each meaning, in order to avoid confusion, and that he may more clearly perceive the two aspects of the things which the word is intended to express. In the first place the word "Mind" is used as synonymous with Chitta, or Mind-substance, which is the Universal Mind Principle. From this Chitta, Mind-substance, or Mind, all the material of the millions of personal minds is obtained. The second meaning of the word "Mind" is that which we mean when we speak of the "mind" of anyone, thereby meaning the mental faculties of that particular person—that which distinguishes his mental personality from that of another. We have taught you that this "mind" in Man, functions on three planes, and have called the respective manifestations (1) the Instinctive Mind; (2) the Intellect; and (3) the Spiritual Mind. (See "Fourteen Lessons in Yogi Philosophy," etc.) These three mental planes, taken together, make up the "mind" of the person, or to be more exact they, clustered around the "I" form the "soul" of the individual. The word "soul" is often used as synonymous with "spirit" but those who have followed us will distinguish the difference. The "soul" is the Ego surrounded by its mental principles, while the Spirit is the "soul of the soul"—the "I," or Real Self.
But we need to draw the student's attention to the fact that the word "Mind" is used in two different ways by Yogis and other occultists. The student should clearly understand each meaning to avoid confusion and better grasp the two aspects of what the word is meant to express. First, the word "Mind" refers to Chitta, or Mind-substance, which is the Universal Mind Principle. From this Chitta, Mind-substance, or Mind, all the material for the millions of personal minds comes. The second meaning of "Mind" refers to what we mean when we talk about someone's "mind," specifically the mental faculties of that individual—what makes their mental personality unique. We’ve taught you that this "mind" in humans functions on three levels, which we’ve called (1) the Instinctive Mind; (2) the Intellect; and (3) the Spiritual Mind. (See "Fourteen Lessons in Yogi Philosophy," etc.) Together, these three mental levels comprise a person's "mind," or more accurately, they cluster around the "I" to form the individual's "soul." The term "soul" is often used interchangeably with "spirit," but those who have followed us will recognize the difference. The "soul" is the Ego surrounded by its mental principles, while the Spirit is the "soul of the soul"—the "I," or Real Self.
The Science of Raja Yoga, to which this series of lessons is devoted, teaches, as its basic principle, the Control of the Mind. It holds that the first step toward Power consists in obtaining a control of one's own mind. It holds that the internal world must be conquered before the outer world is attacked. It holds that the "I" manifests itself in Will, and that that Will may be used to manipulate, guide, govern and direct the mind of its owner, as well as the physical world. It aims to clear away all mental rubbish, and encumbrances—to conduct a "mental house-cleaning," as it were, and to secure a clear, clean, healthy mind. Then it proceeds to control that mind intelligently, and with effect, saving all waste-power, and by means of concentration bringing the Mind in full harmony with the Will, that it may be brought to a focus and its power greatly increased and its efficiency fully secured. Concentration and Will-power are the means by which the Yogis obtain such wonderful results, and by which they manage and direct their vigorous, healthy minds, and master the material world, acting positively upon Energy and Matter. This control extends to all planes of the Mind and the Yogis not only control the Instinctive Mind, holding in subjection its lower qualities and making use of its other parts, but they also develop and enlarge the field of their Intellect and obtain from it wonderful results. Even the Spiritual Mind is mastered, and aided in its unfoldment, and urged to pass down into the field of consciousness some of the wonderful secrets to be found within its area. By means of Raja Yoga many of the secrets of existence and Being—many of the Riddles of the Universe—are answered and solved. And by it the latent powers inherent in the constitution of Man are unfolded and brought into action. Those highly advanced in the science are believed to have obtained such a wonderful degree of power and control over the forces of the universe, that they are as gods compared with the ordinary man.
The science of Raja Yoga, which this series of lessons focuses on, teaches that the core principle is Mind Control. It asserts that the first step toward gaining power involves mastering one’s own mind. It believes that the internal world needs to be conquered before tackling the external world. It states that the "I" expresses itself through Will, which can be used to influence, guide, govern, and direct not only the owner's mind but also the physical world. Its goal is to eliminate all mental clutter and distractions—to perform a "mental spring cleaning," so to speak, and to achieve a clear, clean, healthy mind. Then it aims to control that mind intelligently and effectively, conserving all wasted energy, and through concentration, align the Mind fully with Will, so it can be focused, power amplified, and efficiency maximized. Concentration and Will-power are the tools that Yogis use to achieve remarkable results, manage their vigorous, healthy minds, and master the physical world, acting positively on Energy and Matter. This control extends across all levels of the Mind, as Yogis not only tame the Instinctive Mind, keeping its lower traits in check and utilizing its other functions, but they also expand and enhance their Intellect to yield amazing results. They even gain mastery over the Spiritual Mind, supporting its growth, and encouraging it to reveal some of the incredible secrets hidden within. Through Raja Yoga, many mysteries of existence and Being—many of the Riddles of the Universe—are answered and unraveled. It also awakens and activates the latent powers inherent within human nature. Those who are highly advanced in this science are believed to possess an extraordinary level of control and power over the forces of the universe, making them seem god-like compared to the average person.
Raja Yoga teaches that not only may power of this kind be secured, but that a wonderful field of Knowledge is opened out through its practice. It holds that when the concentrated mind is focused upon thing or subject, the true nature and inner meaning, of, and concerning, that thing or subject will be brought to view. The concentrated mind passes through the object or subject just as the X-Ray passes through a block of wood, and the thing is seen by the "I" as it is—in truth—and not as it had appeared before, imperfectly and erroneously. Not only may the outside world be thus explored, but the mental ray may be turned inward, and the secret places of the mind explored. When it is remembered that the bit of mind that each man possesses, is like a drop of the ocean which contains within its tiny compass all the elements that make up the ocean, and that to know perfectly the drop is to know perfectly the ocean, then we begin to see what such a power really means.
Raja Yoga teaches that not only can this kind of power be attained, but that an amazing field of Knowledge is opened through its practice. It suggests that when the focused mind zeroes in on something or a subject, the true nature and deeper meaning of that thing or subject will come to light. The concentrated mind goes through the object or subject just like an X-ray goes through a block of wood, allowing it to be seen by the "I" as it is—in truth—and not as it previously appeared, imperfectly and inaccurately. Not only can the external world be explored this way, but the mental focus can also be directed inward, revealing the hidden areas of the mind. When we remember that the bit of mind each person has is like a drop of the ocean that contains within it all the elements that make up the ocean, and that truly understanding the drop means understanding the ocean, we start to grasp what such power really signifies.
Many in the Western world who have attained great results in the intellectual and scientific fields of endeavor, have developed these powers more or less unconsciously. Many great inventors are practical Yogis, although they do not realize the source of their power. Anyone who is familiar with the personal mental characteristics of Edison, will see that he follows some of the Raja Yoga methods, and that Concentration is one of his strongest weapons. And from all reports, Prof. Elmer Gates, of Washington, D.C., whose mind has unfolded many wonderful discoveries and inventions, is also a practical Yogi although he may repudiate the assertion vigorously, and may not have familiarized himself with the principles of this science, which he has "dropped into" unconsciously. Those who have reported upon Prof. Gates' methods, say that he fairly "digs out" the inventions and discoveries from his mind, after going into seclusion and practicing concentration, and what is known as the Mental Vision.
Many people in the Western world who have achieved significant results in intellectual and scientific fields have developed their abilities mostly without realizing it. Many great inventors are practical Yogis, even if they aren’t aware of where their power comes from. Anyone who is familiar with Thomas Edison’s personal mental traits will see that he employs some of the Raja Yoga techniques, and Concentration is one of his strongest tools. Additionally, reports indicate that Professor Elmer Gates from Washington, D.C., who has come up with numerous amazing discoveries and inventions, is also a practical Yogi, even if he may strongly deny this and hasn’t familiarized himself with the principles of this discipline, which he has stumbled upon unconsciously. Those who have studied Professor Gates’ methods say that he essentially "digs out" inventions and discoveries from his mind after entering seclusion and practicing concentration, along with what’s known as Mental Vision.
But we have given you enough of theory for one lesson, and must begin to give you directions whereby you may aid yourself in developing these latent powers and unfolding these dormant energies. You will notice that in this series we first tell you something about the theory, and then proceed to give you "something to do." This is the true Yogi method as followed and practiced by their best teachers. Too much theory is tiresome, and sings the mind to sleep, while too much exercise tires one, and does not give the inquiring part of his mind the necessary food. To combine both in suitable proportions is the better plan, and one that we aim to follow.
But we've given you enough theory for one lesson, and now we need to start giving you guidance on how to develop these hidden abilities and unleash your dormant energies. You'll see that in this series, we first share some theoretical background, then move on to provide you with "something to do." This is the genuine Yogi method practiced by the best teachers. Too much theory can be boring and puts the mind to sleep, while excessive exercise can exhaust you and leave the curious part of your mind unsatisfied. Finding the right balance between both is the better approach, and that's what we aim to achieve.
MENTAL DRILL AND EXERCISES.
Before we can get the mind to do good work for us, we must first "tame" it, and bring it to obedience to the Will of the "I." The mind, as a rule, has been allowed to run wild, and follow its own sweet will and desires, without regard to anything else. Like a spoiled child or badly trained domestic animal, it gets into much trouble, and is of very little pleasure, comfort or use. The minds of many of us are like menageries of wild animals, each pursuing the bent of its own nature, and going its own way. We have the whole menagerie within us—the tiger, the ape, the peacock, the ass, the goose, the sheep the hyena, and all the rest. And we have been letting these animals rule us. Even our Intellect is erratic, unstable, and like the quicksilver to which the ancient occultists compared it, shifting and uncertain. If you will look around you you will see that those men and women in the world who have really accomplished anything worth while have trained their minds to obedience. They have asserted the Will over their own minds, and learned Mastery and Power in that way. The average mind chafes at the restraint of the Will, and is like a frisky monkey that will not be "taught tricks." But taught it must be, if it wants to do good work. And teach it you must if you expect to get any use from it—if you expect to use it, instead of having it use you.
Before we can get our minds to work effectively for us, we first need to "tame" them and bring them under the control of our Will. Generally, our minds have been allowed to run free, following their own whims and desires without considering anything else. Like a spoiled child or a poorly trained pet, they often get into trouble and provide little pleasure, comfort, or utility. Many of our minds resemble a zoo filled with wild animals, each one chasing its own instincts and going its own way. We have the entire zoo inside us—the tiger, the monkey, the peacock, the donkey, the goose, the sheep, the hyena, and all the rest. And we've been letting these animals take charge. Even our intellect tends to be erratic and unstable, much like quicksilver, shifting and unpredictable. If you look around, you'll notice that those who have really achieved something valuable have trained their minds to be obedient. They have asserted their Will over their own minds and learned to attain Mastery and Power in that way. The average mind resists the discipline of the Will, acting like a playful monkey reluctant to be "taught tricks." But it must be taught if it wants to produce good work. And you must teach it if you expect to gain any benefit from it—if you want to use it instead of letting it control you.
And this is the first thing to be learned in Raja Yoga—this control of the mind. Those who had hoped for some royal road to mastery, may be disappointed, but there is only one way and that is to master and control the mind by the Will. Otherwise it will run away when you most need it. And so we shall give you some exercise designed to aid you in this direction.
And this is the first thing to learn in Raja Yoga—the control of the mind. If you were hoping for an easy path to mastery, you might be disappointed, but there’s only one way, and that’s to master and control the mind with your Will. Otherwise, it will escape you when you need it most. So we will provide you with some exercises aimed at helping you in this area.
The first exercise in Raja Yoga Is what is called Pratyahara or the art of making the mind introspective or turned inward upon itself. It is the first step toward mental control. It aims to turn the mind from going outward, and gradually turning it inward upon itself or inner nature. The object is to gain control of it by the Will. The following exercises will aid in that direction:
The first exercise in Raja Yoga is known as Pratyahara, which is the art of making the mind introspective or focused inward. It's the first step toward gaining mental control. The goal is to shift the mind away from external distractions and gradually turn it inward to explore its inner nature. The aim is to take charge of it through Will. The following exercises will help with that:
EXERCISE I.
(a) Place yourself in a comfortable position, and so far as possible free from outside disturbing influences. Make no violent effort to control the mind, but rather allow it to run along for a while and exhaust its efforts. It will take advantage of the opportunity, and will jump around like an unchained monkey at first, until it gradually slows down and looks to you for orders. It may take some time to tame down at first trial, but each time you try it will come around to you in shorter time. The Yogis spend much time in acquiring this mental peace and calm, and consider themselves well paid for it.
(a) Get into a comfortable position, and try to eliminate any outside distractions. Don’t force yourself to control your mind too harshly; instead, let it wander for a bit to tire itself out. At first, it will bounce around like a wild monkey, but eventually, it will settle down and look to you for direction. It might take some time to calm down the first time you try, but with each attempt, it will respond more quickly. Yogis dedicate a lot of time to achieving this mental peace and tranquility and feel it’s worth the effort.
(b) When the mind is well calmed down, and peaceful, fix the thought on the "I Am," as taught in our previous lessons. Picture the "I" as an entity independent of the body; deathless; invulnerable; immortal; real. Then think of it as independent of the body, and able to exist without its fleshly covering. Meditate upon this for a time, and then gradually direct the thought to the realization of the "I" as independent and superior to the mind, and controlling same. Go over the general ideas of the first two lessons, and endeavor to calmly reflect upon them and to see them in the "mind's eye." You will find that your mind is gradually becoming more and more peaceful and calm, and that the distracting thoughts of the outside world are farther and farther removed from you.
(b) When your mind is calm and at peace, focus your thoughts on the "I Am," as we discussed in our earlier lessons. Visualize the "I" as something separate from the body; it’s eternal, untouchable, and real. Then consider it as existing independently of the body, capable of living without its physical form. Spend some time meditating on this, and then slowly shift your thoughts to recognize the "I" as separate and greater than the mind, and as something that can control it. Review the main concepts from the first two lessons, and try to reflect on them calmly while visualizing them in your "mind's eye." You'll notice that your mind is becoming increasingly peaceful and calm, and that distracting thoughts from the outside world are drifting further away from you.
(c) Then let the mind pass on to a calm consideration of the Third Lesson, in which we have spoken of the Oneness of All, and the relationship of the "I" to the One Life; Power; Intelligence; Being. You will find that you are acquiring a mental control and calm heretofore unknown to you. The exercises in the first three lessons will have prepared you for this.
(c) Now, let's move on to a thoughtful look at the Third Lesson, where we discussed the Oneness of All and how the "I" relates to the One Life; Power; Intelligence; Being. You’ll notice that you’re gaining a level of mental control and calm that you haven't experienced before. The exercises from the first three lessons will have set you up for this.
(d) The following is the most difficult of the variations or degrees of this exercise, but the ability to perform it will come gradually. The exercise consists in gradually shutting out all thought or impression of the outside world; of the body; and of the thoughts themselves, the student concentrating and meditating upon the word and idea "I AM," the idea being that he shall concentrate upon the idea of mere "being" or "existence," symbolized by the words "I Am." Not "I am this," or "I am that," or "I do this," or "I think that," but simply: "I AM." This exercise will focus the attention at the very centre of Being within oneself, and will gather in all the mental energies, instead of allowing them to be scattered upon outside things. A feeling of Peace, Strength, and Power will result, for the affirmation, and the thought back of it, is the most powerful and strongest that one may make, for it is a statement of Actual Being, and a turning of the thought inward to that truth. Let the mind first dwell upon the word "I," identifying it with the Self, and then let it pass on to the word "AM," which signifies Reality, and Being. Then combine the two with the meanings thereof, and the result a most powerful focusing of thought inward, and most potent Statement of Being.
(d) This is the hardest variation of this exercise, but you'll get better at it gradually. The exercise involves shutting out all thoughts or impressions from the outside world, your body, and even your own thoughts. The student should focus on the phrase "I AM," which represents the concept of just "being" or "existence." It's not "I am this," or "I am that," or "I do this," or "I think that," but simply: "I AM." This exercise will concentrate your attention at the very core of your being and draw in all your mental energies instead of letting them scatter on outside distractions. You'll feel a sense of Peace, Strength, and Power because this affirmation is one of the most powerful statements you can make—it's a declaration of Actual Being that directs your thoughts inward to that truth. First, let your mind focus on the word "I," connecting it to the Self; then move to the word "AM," which represents Reality and Being. Together, these concepts create a powerful inward focus and a strong Statement of Being.
It is well to accompany the above exercises with a comfortable and easy physical attitude, so as to prevent the distraction of the attention by the body. In order to do this one should assume an easy attitude and then relax every muscle, and take the tension from every nerve, until a perfect sense of ease, comfort and relaxation is obtained. You should practice this until you have fully acquired it. It will be useful to you in many ways, besides rendering Concentration and Meditation easier. It will act as a "rest cure" for tired body, nerves, and mind.
It’s important to complement the exercises above with a relaxed and comfortable physical posture to avoid distractions from your body. To achieve this, find a relaxed position and then let go of any muscle tension and ease every nerve until you feel completely relaxed and at ease. You should practice this until it becomes second nature. It will benefit you in many ways, making concentration and meditation easier, and will serve as a "rest cure" for your tired body, nerves, and mind.
EXERCISE II.
The second step in Raja Yoga is what is known as Dharana, or Concentration. This is a most wonderful idea in the direction of focusing the mental forces, and may be cultivated to an almost incredible degree, but all this requires work, time, and patience. But the student will be well repaid for it. Concentration consists in the mind focusing upon a certain subject, or object, and being held there for a time. This, at first thought seems very easy, but a little practice will show how difficult it is to firmly fix the attention and hold it there. It will have a tendency to waver, and move to some other object or subject, and much practice will be needed in order to hold it at the desired point. But practice will accomplish wonders, as one may see by observing people who have acquired this faculty, and who use it in their everyday life. But the following point should be remembered. Many persons have acquired the faculty of concentrating their attention, but have allowed it to become almost involuntary, and they become a slave to it, forgetting themselves and everything else, and often neglecting necessary affairs. This is the ignorant way of concentrating, and those addicted to it become slaves to their habits, instead of masters of their minds. They become day-dreamers, and absent-minded people, instead of Masters. They are to be pitied as much as those who cannot concentrate at all. The secret is in a mastery of the mind. The Yogis can concentrate at will, and completely bury themselves in the subject before them, and extract from it every item of interest, and can then pass the mind from the thing at will, the same control being used in both cases. They do not allow fits of abstraction, or "absent-mindedness" to come upon them, nor are they day-dreamers. On the contrary they are very wide awake individuals; close observers; clear thinkers; correct reasoners. They are masters of their minds, not slaves to their moods. The ignorant concentrator buries himself in the object or subject, and allows it to master and absorb himself, while the trained Yogi thinker asserts the "I," and then directs his mind to concentrate upon the subject or object, keeping it well under control and in view all the time. Do you see the difference? Then heed the lesson.
The second step in Raja Yoga is called Dharana, or Concentration. This is a fantastic concept aimed at focusing mental energy, and it can be developed to an extraordinary level, but it requires effort, time, and patience. However, students will find it worthwhile. Concentration involves focusing the mind on a specific subject or object and maintaining that focus for a period. At first glance, this seems simple, but a bit of practice reveals how challenging it is to hold attention firmly in place. It tends to drift and shift to other objects or topics, necessitating considerable practice to keep it focused on the intended point. However, with practice, incredible results can be achieved, as seen in those who have mastered this ability and apply it in their daily lives. One important point to remember is that many people can concentrate their attention but let it become almost automatic, turning them into slaves to it—neglecting themselves and important matters. This is an unwise approach to concentration, and those who fall into this trap become victims of their habits rather than masters of their minds. They turn into daydreamers and absent-minded individuals instead of being in control. They deserve as much sympathy as those who cannot concentrate at all. The key is mastering the mind. Yogis can concentrate at will, immersing themselves fully in a subject, extracting every detail of interest, and then shifting their focus as needed, employing the same level of control in both instances. They don’t let distractions or absent-mindedness take over, nor do they indulge in daydreams. Instead, they are alert, observant, clear thinkers, and logical reasoners. They are the masters of their minds, not victims of their feelings. In contrast, an ignorant concentrator loses himself in the subject or object, letting it overwhelm him, while a trained Yogi thinker asserts their sense of self and directs their mind to focus on the subject or object, keeping it consistently under control and in view. Do you see the difference? Then pay attention to the lesson.
The following exercises may be found useful in the first steps of
Concentration:
The following exercises might be helpful in the initial stages of
Concentration:
(a) Concentrate the attention upon some familiar object—a pencil, for instance. Hold the mind there and consider the pencil to the exclusion of any other object. Consider its size; color; shape; kind of wood. Consider its uses, and purposes; its materials; the process of its manufacture, etc., etc., etc. In short think as many things about the pencil as possible allowing the mind to pursue any associated by-paths, such as a consideration of the graphite of which the "lead" is made; the forest from which came the wood used in making the pencil; the history of pencils, and other implements used for writing, etc. In short exhaust the subject of "Pencils." In considering a subject under concentration, the following plan of synopsis will be found useful. Think of the thing in question from the following view-points:
(a) Focus your attention on something familiar—a pencil, for example. Keep your mind on it and think about the pencil without distraction. Think about its size, color, shape, and type of wood. Reflect on its uses and purposes, its materials, and how it’s made, etc., etc., etc. In short, think of as many aspects of the pencil as you can, allowing your mind to wander into related topics, like the graphite that makes up the "lead," the forest where the wood came from, the history of pencils, and other writing tools, etc. Basically, fully explore the topic of "Pencils." When concentrating on a subject, the following outline will be helpful. Consider the object from these different perspectives:
(1) The thing itself.
The thing itself.
(2) The place from whence it came.
(2) The place it came from.
(3) Its purpose or use.
Purpose or use.
(4) Its associations.
Its connections.
(5) Its probable end.
Its likely conclusion.
Do not let the apparently trivial nature of the inquiry discourage you, for the simplest form of mental training is useful, and will help to develop your Will and Concentration. It is akin to the process of developing a physical muscle by some simple exercise, and in both cases one loses sight of the unimportance of the exercise itself, in view of the end to be gained.
Don't let the seemingly trivial nature of the question discourage you, because the simplest form of mental training is valuable and will help you strengthen your Will and Concentration. It's similar to building a physical muscle through simple exercises, and in both situations, we often overlook the exercise's minor importance compared to the ultimate goal.
(b) Concentrate the attention upon some part of the body—the hand for instance, and fixing your entire attention upon it, shut off or inhibit all sensation from the other parts of the body. A little practice will enable you to do this. In addition to the mental training, this exercise will stimulate the part of the body concentrated upon, for reasons that will appear in future lessons. Change the parts of the body concentrated upon, and thus give the mind a variety of exercises, and the body the effect of a general stimulation.
(b) Focus your attention on a specific part of your body—like your hand. By fixing all your attention on it, try to block out any sensation from the other parts of your body. With a little practice, you'll be able to do this. Besides the mental training, this exercise will also energize the area you're concentrating on, for reasons that will be explained in future lessons. Change the body parts you concentrate on to give your mind a variety of exercises and provide your body with a general boost.
(c) These exercises may be extended indefinitely upon familiar objects about you. Remember always, that the thing in itself is of no importance, the whole idea being to train the mind to obey the Will, so that when you really wish to use the mental forces upon some important object, you may find them well trained and obedient. Do not be tempted to slight this part of the work because it is "dry" and uninteresting, for it leads up to things that are most interesting, and opens a door to a fascinating subject.
(c) You can keep doing these exercises with familiar objects around you for as long as you want. Always remember, the specific thing you focus on doesn’t really matter; the main goal is to train your mind to follow your will. That way, when you actually want to apply your mental energy to something important, you'll find it well-trained and ready. Don't be tempted to overlook this part of the work just because it seems "boring" and unexciting—it's essential because it leads to much more interesting things and introduces you to a captivating topic.
(d) Practice focusing the attention upon some abstract subject—that is upon some subject of interest that may offer a field for mental exploration. Think about the subject in all its phases and branches, following up one by-path, and then another, until you feel that you know all about the subject that your mind has acquired. You will be surprised to find how much more you know about any one thing or subject than you had believed possible. In hidden corners of your mind you will find some useful or interesting information about the thing in question, and when you are through you will feel well posted upon it, and upon the things connected with it. This exercise will not only help, to develop your intellectual powers, but will strengthen your memory, and broaden your mind, and give you more confidence in yourself. And, in addition, you will have taken a valuable exercise in Concentration or Dharana.
(d) Practice focusing your attention on an abstract topic—something interesting that can serve as a field for mental exploration. Think about the topic in all its aspects and branches, exploring one side path and then another, until you feel you have a complete understanding of what your mind has absorbed. You'll be surprised at how much more you know about a single topic than you initially thought possible. In the hidden corners of your mind, you’ll discover useful or intriguing information about the subject, and when you’re done, you’ll feel well-informed about it and related topics. This exercise will not only enhance your intellectual abilities, but it will also improve your memory, expand your thinking, and boost your self-confidence. Moreover, you will have engaged in a valuable exercise in Concentration or Dharana.
The Importance of Concentration.
The Importance of Focus.
Concentration is a focusing of the mind. And this focusing of the mind requires a focusing, or bringing to a center, of the Will. The mind is concentrated because the Will is focused upon the object. The mind flows into the mould made by the Will. The above exercises are designed not only to accustom the mind to the obedience and direction of the Will, but also tend to accustom the Will to command. We speak of strengthening the Will, when what we really mean is training the mind to obey, and accustoming the Will to command. Our Will is strong enough, but we do not realize it. The Will takes root in the very center of our being—in the "I," but our imperfectly developed mind does not recognize this tact. We are like young elephants that do not recognize their own strength, but allow themselves to be mastered by puny drivers, whom they could brush aside with a movement. The Will is back of all action—all doing—mental and physical.
Concentration is about focusing the mind. And this focus requires directing the Will to a specific point. The mind is concentrated because the Will is directed toward the object. The mind flows into the shape created by the Will. The exercises mentioned are meant to train the mind to follow the Will and to help the Will become more commanding. When we talk about strengthening the Will, we actually mean teaching the mind to obey and training the Will to take charge. Our Will is strong enough, but we often don’t realize it. The Will is rooted in the core of our being—in the "I," but our underdeveloped mind doesn’t recognize this fact. We are like young elephants who don’t see their own strength and allow themselves to be controlled by small handlers, whom they could easily push aside with a simple move. The Will is behind all actions—both mental and physical.
We shall have much to say touching the Will, in these lessons and the student should give the matter his careful attention. Let him look around him, and he will see that the great difference between the men who have stepped forward from the ranks, and those who remain huddled up in the crowd, consists in Determination and Will. As Buxton has well said: "The longer I live, the more certain I am that the great difference between men, the feeble and the powerful; the great and the insignificant; is Energy and Invincible Determination." And he might have added that the thing behind that "energy and invincible determination" was Will.
We have a lot to discuss about the Will in these lessons, and students should pay close attention to it. If they take a moment to observe their surroundings, they'll notice that the significant difference between those who have risen above the masses and those who remain lost in the crowd is Determination and Will. As Buxton wisely stated, "The longer I live, the more certain I am that the great difference between people, the weak and the strong; the great and the insignificant; is Energy and Unyielding Determination." He could also have pointed out that the driving force behind that "energy and unyielding determination" is Will.
The writers and thinkers of all ages have recognized the wonderful and transcendent importance of the Will. Tennyson sings: "O living Will thou shalt endure when all that seems shall suffer shock." Oliver Wendell Holmes says: "The seat of the Will seems to vary with the organ through which it is manifested; to transport itself to different parts of the brain, as we may wish to recall a picture, a phrase, a melody; to throw its force on the muscles or the intellectual processes. Like the general-in-chief, its place is everywhere in the field of action. It is the least like an instrument of any of our faculties; the farthest removed from our conceptions of mechanism and matter, as we commonly define them." Holmes was correct in his idea, but faulty in his details. The Will does not change its seat, which is always in the center of the Ego, but the Will forces the mind to all parts, and in all directions, and it directs the Prana or vital force likewise. The Will is indeed the general-in-chief, but it does not rush to the various points of action, but sends its messengers and couriers there to carry out its orders. Buxton has said: "The Will will do anything that can be done in this world. And no talents, no circumstances, no opportunities will make a two-legged creature a Man without it." Ik Marvel truly says: "Resolve is what makes a man manifest; not puny resolve, not crude determinations, not errant purpose—but that strong and indefatigable Will which treads down difficulties and danger, as a boy treads down the heaving frost-lands of winter; which kindles his eye and brain with a proud pulse-beat toward the unattainable. Will makes men giants."
The writers and thinkers throughout history have acknowledged the incredible and profound importance of the Will. Tennyson expresses: "O living Will, you shall endure when everything that seems will face shock." Oliver Wendell Holmes states: "The source of the Will appears to shift depending on the organ through which it expresses itself; it moves to different parts of the brain when we want to recall a picture, a phrase, a melody; it exerts its force on muscles or on our thinking processes. Like a general-in-chief, its presence is felt everywhere in the field of action. It is the least instrument-like of our faculties; the furthest removed from our usual understanding of mechanism and matter." Holmes was right in his overall idea but incorrect in the specifics. The Will does not change its location, which is always at the center of the self, but rather it directs the mind in every direction and guides the Prana or life force as well. The Will is indeed the general-in-chief, but it doesn’t rush to various points of action; instead, it sends out messengers and couriers to execute its commands. Buxton has said: "The Will can achieve anything possible in this world. And no talents, no circumstances, no opportunities can turn a two-legged creature into a Man without it." Ik Marvel aptly states: "Resolve is what brings a man to life; not weak resolve, not crude intentions, not wandering purpose—but that strong and tireless Will that overcomes challenges and dangers, just as a boy walks across the frozen lands of winter; which ignites his eyes and mind with a proud drive toward the impossible. Will transforms men into giants."
The great obstacle to the proper use of the Will, in the case of the majority of people, is the lack of ability to focus the attention. The Yogis clearly understand this point, and many of the Raja Yoga exercises which are given to the students by the teachers, are designed to overcome this difficulty. Attention is the outward evidence of the Will. As a French writer has said: "The attention is subject to the superior authority of the Ego. I yield it, or I withhold it, as I please. I direct it in turn to several points. I concentrate it upon each point as long as my Will can stand the effort." Prof. James has said: "The essential achievement of the Will, when it is most voluntary, is to attend to a difficult object, and hold it fast before the mind. Effort of Attention is the essential phenomenon of the Will." And Prof. Halleck says: "The first step toward the development of Will lies in the exercise of Attention. Ideas grow in distinctness and motor-power as we attend to them. If we take two ideas of the same intensity and center the attention upon one, we shall notice how much it grows in power." Prof. Sully says: "Attention may be roughly defined as the active self-direction of the mind to any object which presents itself at the moment." The word "Attention" is derived from two Latin words, ad tendere, meaning "to stretch towards," and this is just what the Yogis know it to be. By means of their psychic or clairvoyant sight, they see the thought of the attentive person stretched out toward the object attended to, like a sharp wedge, the point of which is focused upon the object under consideration, the entire force of the thought being concentrated at that point. This is true not only when the person is considering an object, but when he is earnestly impressing his ideas upon another, or upon some task to be accomplished. Attention means reaching the mind out to and focusing it upon something.
The main obstacle to effectively using our Will for most people is the inability to maintain focus. Yogis understand this well, and many of the Raja Yoga exercises taught by instructors are specifically designed to help with this issue. Attention is a visible sign of the Will. As a French writer mentioned, "Attention is under the control of the Ego. I can give it or take it away as I want. I can shift it to various points and focus on each one for as long as my Will can handle the effort." Professor James stated, "The key achievement of the Will, when it’s at its most voluntary, is to focus on a challenging object and keep it in mind. The effort of Attention is the fundamental aspect of the Will." Professor Halleck notes, "The first step in developing Will is exercising Attention. Ideas become clearer and more powerful as we focus on them. If we have two equally intense ideas but concentrate our attention on one, we'll see how much stronger it becomes." Professor Sully says, "Attention can be roughly defined as the active self-direction of the mind toward any object that comes to mind." The term "Attention" comes from two Latin words, ad tendere, which means "to stretch towards," and this is exactly how the Yogis perceive it. Through their psychic or clairvoyant abilities, they can see a person's focused thought extending toward the object of their attention, like a sharp wedge with the tip concentrated on that object, with all the mental energy directed there. This holds true not only when a person is contemplating an object but also when they are intensely impressing their ideas on someone else or working on a task. Attention signifies extending the mind to and concentrating on something.
The trained Will exhibits itself in a tenacious Attention, and this Attention is one of the signs of the trained Will. The student must not hastily conclude that this kind of Attention is a common faculty among men. On the contrary it is quite rare, and is seen only among those of "strong" mentality. Anyone may fasten his Attention upon some passing, pleasing thing, but it takes a trained will to fasten it upon some unattractive thing, and hold it there. Of course the trained occultist is able to throw interest into the most unattractive thing upon which it becomes advisable to focus his Attention, but this, in itself, comes with the trained Will, and is not the possession of the average man. Voluntary Attention is rare, and is found only among strong characters. But it may be cultivated and grown, until he who has scarcely a shade of it to-day, in time may become a giant. It is all a matter of practice, exercise, and Will.
The trained Will shows itself in a persistent focus, and this focus is one of the signs of a trained Will. The student shouldn't quickly assume that this kind of focus is a common trait among people. In fact, it's quite rare and is only found in those with a "strong" mentality. Anyone can fix their focus on something appealing for a moment, but it takes a trained will to concentrate on something unappealing and maintain that focus. Naturally, the trained occultist can direct interest towards the most unattractive things when it's necessary to focus, but this ability comes from a trained Will and isn't something the average person possesses. Voluntary attention is uncommon and is typically seen in strong individuals. However, it can be developed and improved, so that someone who barely has it today may become highly skilled over time. It's all about practice, effort, and Will.
It is difficult to say too much in favor of the development of the faculty of tenacious Attention. One possessing this developed faculty is able to accomplish far more than even a much "brighter" man who lacks it. And the best way to train the Attention, under the direction of the Will, is to practice upon uninteresting objects, and ideas, holding them before the mind until they begin to assume an Interest. This is difficult at first, but the task soon begins to take on a pleasant aspect, for one finds that his Will-power and Attention are growing, and he feels himself acquiring a Force and Power that were lacking before—he realizes that he is growing Stronger. Charles Dickens said that the secret of his success consisted in his developing a faculty of throwing his entire Attention into whatever he happened to be doing at the moment and then being able to turn that same degree of Attention to the next thing coming before him for consideration. He was like a man behind a great searchlight, which was successively turned upon point after point, illuminating each in turn. The "I" is the man behind the light, and the Will is the reflector, the light being the Attention.
It's hard to emphasize enough how important it is to develop the skill of focused Attention. A person with this skill can achieve far more than even someone who is naturally "brighter" but lacks it. The best way to train Attention, guided by Will, is to practice with uninteresting objects and ideas, keeping them in mind until they start to become interesting. This can be challenging at first, but it quickly turns into a rewarding experience, as you notice your Willpower and Attention growing, making you feel stronger and more capable than before. Charles Dickens mentioned that the secret to his success was his ability to fully engage his Attention in whatever he was doing at the moment and then smoothly transition that same level of Attention to the next task at hand. He was like a person operating a powerful searchlight, shining it on one point after another, illuminating each in turn. The "I" represents the person behind the light, the Will is the reflector, and the light itself represents Attention.
This discussion of Will and Attention may seem somewhat "dry" to the student, but that is all the more reason that he should attend to it. It is the secret that lies at the basis of the Science of Raja Yoga, and the Yogi Masters have attained a degree of Concentrated Will and Attention that would be inconceivable to the average "man on the street." By reason of this, they are able to direct the mind here and there, outward or inward, with an enormous force. They are able to focus the mind upon a small thing with remarkable intensity, just as the rays of the sun may be focused through a "sun-glass" and caused to ignite linen, or, on the other hand, they are able to send forth the mind with intense energy, illuminating whatever it rests upon, just as happens in the case of the strong electric searchlight, with which many of us are familiar. By all means start in to cultivate the Attention and Will. Practice on the unpleasant tasks—do the things that you have before you, and from which you have been shrinking because they were unpleasant. Throw interest into them, and the difficulty will vanish, and you will come out of it much stronger, and filled with a new sense of Power.
This discussion about Will and Attention might seem a bit "boring" to students, but that's exactly why they should pay attention to it. It's the key concept at the core of the Science of Raja Yoga, and the Yogi Masters have developed a level of Concentrated Will and Attention that would be unimaginable to the average person. Because of this, they can direct their minds effortlessly, whether outward or inward, with immense power. They can concentrate on something small with incredible intensity, just like how sunlight can be focused through a magnifying glass to ignite fabric, or they can project their minds with intense energy, illuminating whatever they focus on, similar to a powerful electric searchlight that many of us know. Definitely start working on cultivating your Attention and Will. Tackle the unpleasant tasks—do the things you've been avoiding because they were unappealing. Put your interest into them, and the difficulty will disappear, leaving you much stronger and filled with a new sense of Power.
MANTRAM (AFFIRMATION).
"I" have a Will—it is my inalienable property and right. I determine to cultivate and develop it by practice and exercise. My mind is obedient to my Will. I assert my Will over my Mind. I am Master of my mind and body. I assert my Mastery. My Will is Dynamic—full of Force and Energy, and Power. I feel my strength. I am Strong. I am Forceful. I am Vital. I am Center of Consciousness, Energy, Strength, and Power, and I claim my birthright.
"I" have a Will—it's my inalienable property and right. I plan to cultivate and develop it through practice and exercise. My mind obeys my Will. I assert my Will over my Mind. I am the Master of my mind and body. I assert my Mastery. My Will is Dynamic—full of Force and Energy, and Power. I feel my strength. I am Strong. I am Forceful. I am Vital. I am the Center of Consciousness, Energy, Strength, and Power, and I claim my birthright.
THE FIFTH LESSON.
THE CULTIVATION OF ATTENTION.
In our last lesson we called your attention to the fact that the Yogis devote considerable time and practice to the acquirement of Concentration. And we also had something to say regarding the relation of Attention to the subject of Concentration. In this lesson we shall have more to say on the subject of Attention, for it is one of the important things relating to the practice of Raja Yoga, and the Yogis insist upon their students practicing systematically to develop and cultivate the faculty. Attention lies at the base of Will-power, and the cultivation of one makes easy the exercise of the other.
In our last lesson, we pointed out that Yogis spend a lot of time and effort working on their Concentration. We also discussed how Attention relates to Concentration. In this lesson, we will delve deeper into Attention, as it is a key aspect of practicing Raja Yoga, and the Yogis emphasize that their students should systematically practice to develop and enhance this skill. Attention is fundamental to Will-power, and improving one makes it easier to strengthen the other.
To explain why we lay so much importance to the cultivation of Attention, would necessitate our anticipating future lessons of this series, which we do not deem advisable at this time. And so we must ask our students to take our word for it, that all that we have to say regarding the importance of the cultivation of Attention, is occasioned by the relation of that subject to the use of the mind in certain directions as will appear fully later on.
To explain why we place such high importance on developing Attention would require us to hint at future lessons in this series, which we don't think is a good idea right now. Therefore, we need to ask our students to trust us when we say that everything we discuss about the importance of developing Attention is related to how this topic connects to the use of the mind in specific ways, as will be made clear later on.
In order to let you know that we are not advancing some peculiar theory of the Yogis, which may not be in harmony with modern Western Science, we give you in this article a number of quotations, from Western writers and thinkers, touching upon this important faculty of the mind, so that you may see that the West and East agree upon this main point, however different may be their explanations of the fact, or their use of the power gained by the cultivation of Attention.
To clarify, we are not promoting some strange Yogi theory that might clash with modern Western science. In this article, we’re sharing several quotes from Western writers and thinkers regarding this crucial mental ability. This way, you can see that both the West and East agree on this key point, even if their explanations and applications of the power obtained through developing Attention differ.
As we said in our last lesson, the word Attention is derived from two Latin words "ad tendere," meaning "to stretch toward," which is really what Attention is. The "I" wills that the mind be focused on some particular object or thing, and the mind obeys and "stretches toward" that object or thing, focusing its entire energy upon it, observing every detail, dissecting, analyzing, consciously and sub-consciously, drawing to itself every possible bit of information regarding it, both from within and from without. We cannot lay too much stress upon the acquirement of this great faculty, or rather, the development of it, for it is necessary for the intelligent study of Raja Yoga.
As we mentioned in our last lesson, the word Attention comes from two Latin words "ad tendere," which means "to stretch toward." That’s exactly what Attention is. The "I" decides that the mind should focus on a specific object or thing, and the mind responds, "stretching toward" that object or thing. It channels all its energy into it, noticing every detail, breaking it down, analyzing it, both consciously and subconsciously, gathering every possible piece of information about it from both inside and outside. We can't stress enough how important it is to acquire and develop this essential skill, as it is crucial for the intelligent study of Raja Yoga.
In order to bring out the importance of the subject, suppose we start in by actually giving our Attention to the subject of Attention, and see how much more there is in it than we had thought. We shall be well repaid for the amount of time and trouble expended upon it.
In order to highlight how important this topic is, let’s dive into the subject of Attention and explore how much more there is to it than we realized. We'll find that the time and effort we invest in it will be well worth it.
Attention has been defined as a focusing of consciousness, or, if one prefers the form of expression, as "detention in consciousness." In the first case, we may liken it to the action of the sun-glass through which the sun's rays are concentrated upon an object, the result being that the heat is gathered together at a small given point, the intensity of the same being raised many degrees until the heat is sufficient to burn a piece of wood, or evaporate water. If the rays were not focused, the same rays and heat would have been scattered over a large surface, and the effect and power lessened. And so it is with the mind. If it is allowed to scatter itself over the entire field of a subject, it will exert but little power and the results will be weak. But if it is passed through the sun-glass of attention, and focused first over one part, and then over another, and so on, the matter may be mastered in detail, and a result accomplished that will seem little less than marvelous to those who do not know the secret.
Attention is defined as a concentration of awareness, or, in other words, as "holding something in consciousness." In the first sense, we can compare it to the way a magnifying glass focuses sunlight onto a specific spot, resulting in heat being concentrated at that point. This intensity can increase significantly, enough to burn wood or boil water. If the light wasn’t focused, the same rays and heat would be spread out over a larger area, reducing their effectiveness. The mind operates in a similar way. If it’s allowed to disperse across an entire topic, its influence will be minimal and the outcomes weak. However, if it’s directed through the lens of attention, focusing on one part at a time, the subject can be understood in detail, leading to results that may seem nearly miraculous to those unaware of the method.
Thompson has said: "The experiences most permanently impressed upon consciousness, are those upon which the greatest amount of attention has been fixed."
Thompson has said: "The experiences that leave the deepest marks on our minds are the ones we focus on the most."
Another writer upon the subject has said that "Attention is so essentially necessary to understanding, that without some degree of it the ideas and perceptions that pass through the mind seem to leave no trace behind them."
Another writer on the subject has said that "Attention is so crucial for understanding that without some level of it, the ideas and perceptions that go through the mind seem to leave no impact behind them."
Hamilton has said: "An act of attention, that is, an act of concentration, seems thus necessary to every exertion of consciousness, as a certain contraction of the pupil is requisite to every exertion of vision. Attention then is to consciousness what the contraction of the pupil is to sight, or, to the eye of the mind what the microscope or telescope is to the bodily eye. It constitutes the better half of all intellectual power."
Hamilton has said: "Paying attention, or concentrating, seems essential for any effort of consciousness, just like the constriction of the pupil is necessary for every act of seeing. Attention is to consciousness what the contraction of the pupil is to sight, or, for the mind's eye what a microscope or telescope is to the physical eye. It represents the better half of all intellectual power."
And Brodie adds, quite forcibly: "It is Attention much more than any difference in the abstract power of reasoning, which constitutes the vast difference which exists between minds of different individuals."
And Brodie adds, quite emphatically: "It is attention, much more than any difference in the abstract ability to reason, that creates the significant difference between the minds of different individuals."
Butler gives us this important testimony: "The most important intellectual habit I know of is the habit of attending exclusively to the matter in hand. It is commonly said that genius cannot be infused by education, yet this power of concentrated attention, which belongs as a part of his gift to every great discoverer, is unquestionably capable of almost indefinite augmentation by resolute practice."
Butler provides this important insight: "The most crucial intellectual habit I can think of is focusing exclusively on the task at hand. People often say that genius can’t be taught, but this ability to concentrate fully, which is inherent to every great discoverer, can undoubtedly be significantly improved through dedicated practice."
And, concluding this review of opinions, and endorsements of that which the Yogis have so much to say, and to which they attach so much importance, let us listen to the words of Beattie, who says: "The force wherewith anything strikes the mind, is generally in proportion to the degree of attention bestowed upon it. Moreover, the great art of memory is attention, and inattentive people always have bad memories."
And to wrap up this review of the opinions and endorsements regarding what the Yogis emphasize so much, let’s consider the words of Beattie, who says: "The impact that something has on the mind is usually in direct proportion to the level of attention given to it. Furthermore, the key to good memory is attention, and people who are not attentive always have poor memories."
There are two general kinds of Attention. The first is the Attention directed within the mind upon mental objects and concepts. The other is the Attention directed outward upon objects external to ourselves. The same general rules and laws apply to both equally.
There are two main types of Attention. The first is the Attention focused internally on thoughts and ideas. The other is the Attention directed outward toward things outside ourselves. The same basic rules and principles apply to both equally.
Likewise there may be drawn another distinction and division of attention into two classes, viz., Attenion attracted by some impression coming into consciousness without any conscious effort of the Will—this is called Involuntary Attention, for the Attention and Interest is caught by the attractiveness or novelty of the object. Attention directed to some object by an effort of the Will, is called Voluntary Attention. Involuntary Attention is quite common, and requires no special training. In fact, the lower animals, and young children seem to have a greater share of it than do adult men. A great percentage of men and women never get beyond this stage to any marked degree. On the other hand, Voluntary Attention requires effort, will, and determination—a certain mental training, that is beyond the majority of people, for they will not "take the trouble" to direct their attention in this way. Voluntary Attention is the mark of the student and other thoughtful men. They focus their minds on objects that do not yield immediate interest or pleasure, in order that they may learn and accomplish. The careless person will not thus fasten his Attention, at least not more than a moment or so, for his Involuntary Attention is soon attracted by some passing object of no matter how trifling a nature, and the Voluntary Attention disappears and is forgotten. Voluntary Attention is developed by practice and perseverance, and is well worth the trouble, for nothing in the mental world is accomplished without its use.
There’s also another way to divide attention into two categories: namely, attention that’s drawn in without any conscious effort from the will—this is called Involuntary Attention, as the attention and interest are captured by the attractiveness or novelty of the object. Attention that is directed toward an object by an effort of the will is referred to as Voluntary Attention. Involuntary Attention is quite common and doesn’t require any specific training. In fact, lower animals and young children seem to have more of it than adult men. A significant number of men and women never progress beyond this level to any noticeable extent. On the flip side, Voluntary Attention demands effort, willpower, and determination—a certain kind of mental training that most people don’t pursue because they won’t "bother" to direct their attention this way. Voluntary Attention is a trait of students and other reflective individuals. They concentrate their minds on subjects that don’t provide instant interest or enjoyment, in order to learn and achieve. A careless person won’t hold onto their attention for long, as their Involuntary Attention is quickly drawn to some fleeting object, no matter how trivial, causing their Voluntary Attention to fade away and be forgotten. Voluntary Attention is developed through practice and persistence, and it’s definitely worth the effort because nothing significant in the mental realm is accomplished without it.
The Attention does not readily fasten itself to uninteresting objects, and, unless interest can be created it requires a considerable degree of Voluntary Attention in order that the mind may be fastened upon such an object. And, more than this, even if the ordinary attention is attracted it will soon waver, unless there is some interesting change in the aspect of the object, that will give the attention a fresh hold of interest, or unless some new quality, characteristic or property manifests itself in the object. This fact occurs because the mind mechanism has not been trained to bear prolonged Voluntary Attention, and, in fact, the physical brain is not accustomed to the task, although it may be so trained by patient practice.
The mind doesn't easily focus on boring things, and unless something interesting comes up, it takes a lot of effort to keep the mind on that topic. Plus, even if something does grab our attention at first, it can quickly fade unless there's a new, interesting change in what we're looking at, or unless the object shows some new quality or trait. This happens because our mental processes haven't been trained to maintain prolonged focus, and honestly, our brains aren't used to it either, though they can be trained with consistent practice.
It has been noticed by investigators that the Attention may be rested and freshened, either by withdrawing the Voluntary Attention from the object, and allowing the Attention to manifest along Involuntary lines toward passing objects, etc.; or, on the other hand, by directing the Voluntary Attention into a new field of observation—toward some new object. Sometimes one plan will seem to give the best results, and again the other will seem preferable.
Investigators have observed that Attention can be refreshed and restored either by pulling Voluntary Attention away from the current object and letting it naturally focus on passing objects, or by shifting Voluntary Attention to a new area of observation—toward a different object. Sometimes one approach will yield the best results, while at other times the alternative may seem better.
We have called your attention to the fact that Interest develops Attention, and holds it fixed, while an uninteresting object or subject requires a much greater effort and application. This fact is apparent to anyone. A common illustration may be found in the matter of reading a book. Nearly everyone will give his undivided attention to some bright, thrilling story, while but few are able to use sufficient Voluntary Attention to master the pages of some scientific work. But, right here, we wish to call your attention to the other side of the case, which is another example of the fact that Truth is composed of paradoxes.
We’ve pointed out that interest develops attention and keeps it focused, while something uninteresting demands a lot more effort and concentration. This is clear to anyone. A common example is reading a book. Almost everyone will give their full attention to an exciting, engaging story, while only a few can summon the voluntary attention needed to get through the pages of a scientific text. However, we want to highlight the other side of this situation, which is another example of the idea that truth consists of paradoxes.
Just as Interest develops Attention, so it is a truth that Attention develops Interest. If one will take the trouble to give a little Voluntary Attention to an object, he will soon find that a little perseverance will bring to light points of Interest in the object. Things before unseen and unsuspected, are quickly brought to light. And many new phases, and aspects of the subject or object are seen, each one of which, in turn, becomes an object of Interest. This is a fact not so generally known, and one that it will be well for you to remember, and to use in practice. Look for the interesting features of an uninteresting thing, and they will appear to your view, and before long the uninteresting object will have changed into a thing having many-sided interests.
Just as interest creates attention, it’s also true that attention fosters interest. If you take the time to focus voluntarily on something, you’ll quickly discover that a little persistence can reveal points of interest in that object. Things that were previously unseen or unthought-of come to light rapidly. Many new facets and aspects of the subject or object emerge, each of which, in turn, becomes a point of interest. This isn’t widely known, but it’s something worth keeping in mind and applying in practice. Look for the interesting parts of what seems uninteresting, and they will come into focus. Before long, the dull object will transform into something with multiple facets of interest.
Voluntary Attention is one of the signs of a developed Will. That is, of a mind that has been well trained by the Will, for the Will is always strong, and it is the mind that has to be trained, not the Will. And on the other hand, one of the best ways to train the mind by the Will, is by practice in Voluntary Attention. So you see how the rule works both ways. Some Western psychologists have even advanced theories that the Voluntary Attention is the only power of the Will, and that that power is sufficient, for if the Attention be firmly fixed, and held upon an object the mind will "do the rest." We do not agree with this school of philosophers, but merely mention the fact as an illustration of the importance attributed by psychologists to this matter of Voluntary Attention.
Voluntary Attention is one of the indicators of a strong Will. That is, it reflects a mind that has been effectively trained by the Will, since the Will is always powerful, and it is the mind that needs training, not the Will itself. Conversely, one of the most effective ways to train the mind using the Will is through practice in Voluntary Attention. So, you can see how this principle works in both directions. Some Western psychologists have even proposed theories that Voluntary Attention is the only power of the Will, and that this power is enough because if Attention is firmly focused on an object, the mind will "take care of the rest." We don't agree with this philosophical viewpoint, but we mention it to highlight the significance that psychologists place on Voluntary Attention.
A man of a strongly developed Attention often accomplishes far more than some much brighter man who lacks it. Voluntary Attention and Application is a very good substitute for Genius, and often accomplishes far more in the long run.
A man with well-developed focus often achieves much more than a much smarter person who doesn't have it. Deliberate attention and commitment can be a great substitute for genius, and often lead to greater accomplishments in the long run.
Voluntary Attention is the fixing of the mind earnestly and intently upon some particular object, at the same time shutting out from consciousness other objects pressing for entrance. Hamilton has defined it as "consciousness voluntarily applied under its law of limitations to some determinate object." The same writer goes on to state that "the greater the number of objects to which our consciousness is simultaneously extended, the smaller is the intensity with which it is able to consider each, and consequently the less vivid and distinct will be the information it contains of the several objects. When our interest in any particular object is excited, and when we wish to obtain all the knowledge concerning it in our power, it behooves us to limit our consideration to that object to the exclusion of others."
Voluntary Attention is the focused, intense engagement of the mind on a specific object while ignoring other competing objects. Hamilton defined it as "consciousness voluntarily applied under its law of limitations to some determinate object." He further explains that "the more objects our consciousness tries to engage with at once, the less intensely we can focus on each one, resulting in less clear and detailed information about those objects. When we are particularly interested in one object and want to gather all the knowledge we can about it, it's important to concentrate solely on that object and disregard others."
The human mind has the power of attending to only one object at a time, although it is able to pass from one object to another with a marvelous degree of speed, so rapidly, in fact, that some have held that it could grasp several things at once. But the best authorities, Eastern and Western, hold to the "single idea" theory as being correct. On this point we may quote a few authorities.
The human mind can focus on only one thing at a time, but it can switch from one topic to another with incredible speed—so quickly, in fact, that some people believe it can understand multiple things simultaneously. However, the top experts, both Eastern and Western, support the "single idea" theory as the accurate viewpoint. On this subject, we can reference a few authorities.
Jouffroy says that "It is established by experience that we cannot give our attention to two different objects at the same time." And Holland states that "Two thoughts, however closely related to one another, cannot be presumed to exist at the same time." And Lewes has told us that "The nature of our organism prevents our having more than one aspect of an object at each instant presented to consciousness." Whateley says: "The best philosophers are agreed that the mind cannot actually attend to more than one thing at a time, but, when it appears to be doing so it is really shifting with prodigious rapidity backward and forward from one to the other."
Jouffroy says that "Experience shows that we can't focus on two different things at the same time." And Holland points out that "Two thoughts, no matter how closely related, can't actually exist simultaneously." Lewes has mentioned that "The nature of our mind prevents us from perceiving more than one aspect of an object at any given moment." Whateley states: "The best philosophers agree that the mind can't truly focus on more than one thing at once; when it seems to do so, it's actually shifting back and forth with incredible speed between the two."
By giving a concentrated Voluntary Attention to an object, we not only are able to see and think about it with the greatest possible degree of clearness, but the mind has a tendency, under such circumstances, to bring into the field of consciousness all the different ideas associated in our memory with that object or subject, and to build around the object or subject a mass of associated facts and information. And at the same time the Attention given the subject makes more vivid and clear all that we learn about the thing at the time, and, in fact, all that we may afterwards learn about it. It seems to cut a channel, through which knowledge flows.
By focusing our voluntary attention on an object, we can see and think about it as clearly as possible. In such situations, our mind tends to bring into our awareness all the different ideas connected to that object or subject from our memory, and to create a wealth of associated facts and information around it. Additionally, the attention we give to the subject makes everything we learn about it at that moment more vivid and clear, as well as anything we might learn later. It seems to create a pathway through which knowledge flows.
Attention magnifies and increases the powers of perception, and greatly aids the exercise of the perceptive faculties. By "paying attention" to something seen or heard, one is enabled to observe the details of the thing seen or heard, and where the inattentive mind acquires say three impressions the attentive mind absorbs three times three, or perhaps three times "three times three," or twenty-seven. And, as we have just said, Attention brings into play the powers of association, and gives us the "loose end" of an almost infinite chain of associated facts, stored away in our memory, forming new combinations of facts which we had never grouped together before, and bring out into the field of consciousness all the many scraps of information regarding the thing to which we are giving attention. The proof of this is within the experience of everyone. Where is the one who does not remember sitting down to some writing, painting, reading, etc., with interest and attention, and finding, much to his surprise, what a flow of facts regarding the matter in hand was passing through his mind. Attention seems to focus all the knowledge of a thing that you possess, and by bringing it to a point enables you to combine, associate, classify, etc., and thus create new knowledge. Gibbon tells us that after he gave a brief glance and consideration to a new subject, he suspended further work upon it, and allowed his mind (under concentrated attention) to bring forth all his associated knowledge regarding the subject, after which he renewed the task with increased power and efficiency.
Attention enhances and boosts our ability to perceive, significantly helping us use our perceptive abilities. By "paying attention" to something we see or hear, we can notice the details of that observation. While an inattentive mind might gather, say, three impressions, an attentive mind can absorb nine, or even twenty-seven. Additionally, as mentioned earlier, attention activates our associative powers, providing us with the "loose end" of a nearly endless chain of related facts stored in our memory. This leads us to create new combinations of information that we may not have linked before, and it brings to our awareness various pieces of information related to what we are focusing on. Evidence of this is evident in everyone's experiences. Who hasn’t sat down to write, paint, read, etc., with interest and focus, only to be surprised by the amount of information flowing through their mind? Attention seems to concentrate all the knowledge you have about a subject and enables you to combine, associate, and classify it, thus generating new understanding. Gibbon explains that after he took a quick look and thought about a new topic, he would pause further work on it and let his mind (with focused attention) retrieve all his associated knowledge on the subject. After that, he would resume his task with greater strength and efficiency.
The more one's attention is fixed upon a subject under consideration, the deeper is the impression which the subject leaves upon the mind. And the easier will it be for him to afterwards pursue the same train of thought and work.
The more someone focuses on a topic they are thinking about, the stronger the impression that topic makes on their mind. And the easier it will be for them to later continue along the same line of thought and work.
Attention is a prerequisite of good memory, and in fact there can be no memory at all unless some degree of attention is given. The degree of memory depends upon the degree of attention and interest. And when it is considered that the work of today is made efficient by the memory of things learned yesterday, the day before yesterday, and so on, it is seen that the degree of attention given today regulates the quality of the work of tomorrow.
Attention is necessary for a good memory, and really, there can't be any memory without some level of attention. The quality of memory relies on how much attention and interest is given. When you think about how today's work is made better by what we've learned in the past—yesterday, the day before, and so on—it's clear that the amount of attention we give today impacts the quality of our work tomorrow.
Some authorities have described Genius as the result of great powers of attention, or, at least, that the two seem to run together. Some writer has said that "possibly the best definition of genius is the power of concentrating upon some one given subject until its possibilities are exhausted and absorbed." Simpson has said that "The power and habit of thinking closely and continuously upon the subject at hand, to the exclusion, for the time, of all other subjects, is one of the principal, if, indeed, not the principal, means of success." Sir Isaac Newton has told us his plan of absorbing information and knowledge. He has stated that he would keep the subject under consideration before him continually, and then would wait till the first dawning of perception gradually brightened into a clear light, little by little. A mental sunrise, in fact.
Some experts have described genius as something that comes from powerful focus, or at least that the two are closely linked. One writer has stated that "possibly the best definition of genius is the ability to concentrate on a single subject until its possibilities are fully explored and understood." Simpson mentioned that "the ability and habit of thinking deeply and continuously about the topic at hand, while ignoring all other topics for a time, is one of the main—if not the main—keys to success." Sir Isaac Newton shared his method for absorbing information and knowledge. He explained that he would keep the subject he was considering in front of his mind constantly and then wait for the first signs of understanding to gradually develop into a clear insight, little by little. A mental sunrise, indeed.
That sage observer, Dr. Abercrombie, has written that he considered that he knew of no more important rule for rising to eminence in any profession or occupation than the Ability to do one thing at a time, avoiding all distracting and diverting objects or subjects, and keeping the leading matter continually before the mind. And others have added that such a course will enable one to observe relations between the subject and other things that will not be apparent to the careless observer or student.
That wise observer, Dr. Abercrombie, wrote that he believed there was no more crucial rule for achieving greatness in any profession or field than the ability to focus on one task at a time, avoiding all distractions and keeping the main topic continually in mind. Others have pointed out that this approach will help one notice connections between the subject and other things that may not be obvious to those who are careless or inattentive.
The degree of Attention cultivated by a man is the degree of his capacity for intellectual work. As we have said, the "great" men of all walks of life have developed this faculty to a wonderful degree, and many of them seem to get results "intuitively," whereas, in truth, they obtain them by reason of their concentrated power of Attention, which enables them to see right into the center of a subject or proposition—and all around it, back and front, and all sides, in a space of time incredible to the man who has not cultivated this mighty power. Men who have devoted much attention to some special line of work or research, are able to act almost as if they possessed "second sight," providing the subject is within their favorite field of endeavor. Attention quickens every one of the faculties—the reasoning faculties—the senses—the deriding qualities—the analytical faculties, and so on, each being given a "fine edge" by their use under a concentrated Attention.
The level of attention a person develops determines their ability to do intellectual work. As we've mentioned, the "great" individuals in every field have honed this skill remarkably, and many seem to achieve results “intuitively.” However, in reality, they achieve this because their intense focus allows them to grasp the core of a topic or argument—and everything around it, from every angle, in a time frame that seems impossible to someone who hasn’t developed this powerful ability. Those who have dedicated significant attention to a particular area of work or research can act almost as if they have "second sight,” as long as the topic is within their area of expertise. Attention enhances all faculties—the reasoning skills, the senses, the critical attributes, the analytical skills, and more—each sharpened through their application under focused attention.
And, on the other hand, there is no surer indication of a weak mind than the deficiency in Attention. This weakness may arise from illness or physical weakness reacting upon the brain, in which case the trouble is but temporary. Or it may arise from a lack of mental development. Imbeciles and idiots have little or no Attention. The great French psychologist, Luys, speaking of this fact, says "Imbeciles and idiots see badly, hear badly, feel badly, and their sensorium is, in consequence, in a similar condition of sensitive poverty. Its impressionability for the things of the external world is at a minimum, its sensibility weak, and consequently, it is difficult to provoke the physiological condition necessary for the absorption of the external impression."
And, on the other hand, there's no clearer sign of a weak mind than a lack of attention. This weakness can come from illness or physical issues affecting the brain, in which case it's only temporary. Or it might stem from insufficient mental development. People with intellectual disabilities have very little or no attention. The great French psychologist, Luys, noted this by saying, "People with intellectual disabilities see poorly, hear poorly, feel poorly, and their sensory awareness is, as a result, in a similar state of limited sensitivity. Their ability to respond to the external world is at a minimum, their sensitivity is weak, and therefore, it's hard to trigger the physiological conditions needed for absorbing external impressions."
In old age the Attention is the first faculty to show signs of decay. Some authorities have held that the Memory was the first faculty to be affected by the approach of old age, but this is incorrect, for it is a matter of common experience that the aged manifest a wonderfully clear memory of events occurring in the far past. The reason that their memory of recent events is so poor is because their failing powers of Attention has prevented them from receiving strong, clear mental impressions, and as is the impression so is the memory. Their early impressions having been clear and strong, are easily recalled, while their later ones, being weak, are recalled with difficulty. If the Memory were at fault, it would be difficult for them to recall any impression, recent or far distant in time.
In old age, attention is the first ability to show signs of decline. Some experts have claimed that memory is the first thing to be affected by aging, but that's not correct. It's well-known that older adults often have a remarkably clear memory of events from long ago. The reason their memory for recent events is so poor is that their declining attention has prevented them from taking in strong, clear mental impressions. As the impression is, so is the memory. Since their early impressions were clear and strong, they can easily recall those memories, while more recent ones are weak and harder to remember. If memory were truly the issue, it would be difficult for them to recall any impression, whether recent or from a long time ago.
But we must stop quoting examples and authorities, and urging upon you the importance of the faculty of Attention. If you do not now realize it, it is because you have not given the subject the Attention that you should have exercised, and further repetition would not remedy matters.
But we need to stop citing examples and authorities and stressing the importance of the ability to focus. If you don't see it now, it's because you haven't given the topic the attention it deserves, and repeating it won't help.
Admitting the importance of Attention, from the psychological point of view, not to speak of the occult side of the subject, is it not a matter of importance for you to start in to cultivate that faculty? We think so. And the only way to cultivate any mental or physical part or faculty is to Exercise it. Exercise "uses up" a muscle, or mental faculty, but the organism makes haste to rush to the scene additional material—cell-stuff, nerve force, etc., to repair the waste, and it always sends a little more than is needed. And this "little more," continually accruing and increasing, is what increases the muscles and brain centers. And improved and strengthened brain centers give the mind better instruments with which to work.
Recognizing the significance of Attention from a psychological standpoint, not to mention the deeper aspects of the topic, isn’t it crucial for you to begin developing that skill? We believe it is. The only way to improve any mental or physical ability is to practice it. Exercising "uses up" a muscle or cognitive skill, but the body quickly responds by supplying extra resources—cell material, nerve energy, etc.—to repair the wear and tear, often providing a bit more than necessary. This "extra" continually adds up, leading to increased strength in muscles and brain areas. Enhanced and fortified brain areas equip the mind with better tools to work with.
One of the first things to do in the cultivation of Attention is to learn to think of, and do, one thing at a time. Acquiring the "knack" or habit of attending closely to the things before us, and then passing on to the next and treating it in the same way, is most conducive to success, and its practice is the best exercise for the cultivation of the faculty of Attention. And on the contrary, there is nothing more harmful from the point of view of successful performance—and nothing that will do more to destroy the power of giving Attention—than the habit of trying to do one thing while thinking of another. The thinking part of the mind, and the acting part should work together, not in opposition.
One of the first things you should do to develop your Attention is to learn to focus on one thing at a time. Getting the hang of really paying attention to what's in front of you and then moving on to the next thing in the same way is really helpful for success, and doing this is the best practice for improving your Attention skills. On the flip side, nothing is more detrimental to effective performance—and nothing can undermine your ability to focus more—than trying to do one thing while thinking about another. The thinking part of your mind and the acting part should work together, not against each other.
Dr. Beattie, speaking of this subject, tells us "It is a matter of no small importance that we acquire the habit of doing only one thing at a time; by which I mean that while attending to any one object, our thoughts ought not to wander to another." And Granville adds, "A frequent cause of failure in the faculty of Attention is striving to think of more than one thing at a time." And Kay quotes, approvingly, a writer who says: "She did things easily, because she attended to them in the doing. When she made bread, she thought of the bread, and not of the fashion of her next dress, or of her partner at the last dance." Lord Chesterfield said, "There is time enough for everything in the course of the day, if you do but one thing at a time; but there is not time enough in the year if you try to do two things at a time."
Dr. Beattie mentions, "It's really important to get into the habit of focusing on one task at a time; this means that when we focus on something, our thoughts shouldn't drift to something else." Granville adds, "A common reason people struggle with staying focused is trying to think about more than one thing at once." Kay cites a writer who observes, "She completed tasks effortlessly because she focused on them while doing them. When she was making bread, she thought about the bread, not her next outfit or her partner from the last dance." Lord Chesterfield said, "There’s enough time for everything throughout the day if you focus on just one thing at a time; however, there’s not enough time in a year if you try to juggle two things at once."
To attain the best results one should practice concentrating upon the task before him, shutting out, so far as possible, every other idea or thought. One should even forget self—personality—in such cases, as there is nothing more destructive of good thinking than to allow morbid self-consciousness to intrude. One does best when he "forgets himself" in his work, and sinks his personality in the creative work. The "earnest" man or woman is the one who sinks personality in the desired result, or performance of the task undertaken. The actor, or preacher, or orator, or writer, must lose sight of himself to get the best results. Keep the Attention fixed on the thing before you, and let the self take care of itself.
To achieve the best results, you should focus on the task at hand, blocking out every other thought or idea as much as possible. You should even forget about yourself in these situations, because nothing disrupts good thinking more than excessive self-awareness. You perform best when you "lose yourself" in your work and immerse your personality in the creative process. The truly dedicated man or woman is the one who puts their personality aside for the sake of the desired outcome or the execution of the task. Actors, preachers, orators, and writers need to overlook themselves to achieve the best results. Keep your attention fixed on what you are doing, and let your self take care of itself.
In connection with the above, we may relate an anecdote of Whateley that may be interesting in connection with the consideration of this subject of "losing one's self" in the task. He was asked for a recipe for "bashfulness," and replied that the person was bashful simply because he was thinking of himself and the impression he was making. His recipe was that the young man should think of others—of the pleasure he could give them—and in that way he would forget all about himself. The prescription is said to have effected the cure. The same authority has written, "Let both the extemporary speaker, and the reader of his own compositions, study to avoid as far as possible all thoughts of self, earnestly fixing the mind on the matter of what is delivered; and they will feel less that embarrassment which arises from the thought of what opinion the hearers will form of them."
In relation to the above, we can share a story about Whateley that might be relevant to the topic of "losing oneself" in a task. He was asked for advice on overcoming "bashfulness," and he explained that a person feels shy simply because they are focused on themselves and how they are being perceived. His advice was for the young man to think about others—considering the joy he could bring to them—and in doing so, he would forget about himself. This approach is said to have successfully solved the issue. The same source wrote, "Both the spontaneous speaker and the person reading their own work should try to minimize self-reflection, concentrating instead on the content being shared; this way, they will feel less of the awkwardness that comes from worrying about how the audience will perceive them."
The same writer, Whateley, seems to have made quite a study of Attention and has given us some interesting information on its details. The following may be read with interest, and if properly understood may be employed to advantage. He says, "It is a fact, and a very curious one. that many people find that they can best attend to any serious matter when they are occupied with something else which requires a little, and but a little, attention, such as working with the needle, cutting open paper leaves, or, for want of some such employment, fiddling anyhow with the fingers." He does not give the reason for this, and at first sight it might seem like a contradiction of the "one thing at a time" idea. But a closer examination will show us that the minor work (the cutting leaves, etc.) is in the nature of an involuntary or automatic movement, inasmuch as it requires little or no voluntary attention, and seems to "do itself." It does not take off the Attention from the main subject, but perhaps acts to catch the "waste Attention" that often tries to divide the Attention from some voluntary act to another. The habit mind may be doing one thing, while the Attention is fixed on another. For instance, one may be writing with his attention firmly fixed upon the thought he wishes to express, while at the time his hand is doing the writing, apparently with no attention being given it. But, let a boy, or person unaccustomed to writing, try to express his thoughts in this way, and you will find that he is hampered in the flow of his thoughts by the fact that he has to give much attention to the mechanical act of writing. In the same way, the beginner on the typewriter finds it difficult to compose to the machine, while the experienced typist finds the mechanical movements no hindrance whatever to the flow of thought and focusing of Attention; in fact, many find that they can compose much better while using the typewriter than they can by dictating to a stenographer. We think you will see the principle.
The same writer, Whateley, seems to have studied Attention quite a bit and has shared some intriguing details about it. The following insights are interesting and, if understood correctly, can be beneficial. He states, "It’s a fact, and a very curious one, that many people find they can focus better on serious matters when they’re doing something else that requires a bit of attention, like sewing, cutting paper, or, lacking any such tasks, just fiddling with their fingers." He doesn’t explain why this happens, and at first glance, it might seem contradictory to the idea of focusing on "one thing at a time." However, a closer look reveals that these minor tasks (like cutting paper) are involuntary or automatic movements that require little to no conscious effort and seem to "take care of themselves." They don’t distract from the main subject but might help capture the "waste Attention" that often tries to pull focus from one voluntary activity to another. The mind can be engaged in one thing while Attention is concentrated on something else. For instance, someone might be writing while their focus is entirely on the thoughts they want to convey, and their hand is writing almost automatically. But if a beginner or someone not used to writing tries to express their thoughts this way, they’ll find their thought process is interrupted by the need to concentrate on the physical act of writing. Similarly, someone new to typing may struggle to create content while using a typewriter, while an experienced typist can type without that mechanical process hindering their concentration or thought flow; in fact, many find they can write much better on a typewriter than by dictating to a stenographer. We believe you’ll understand the principle.
And now for a little Mental Drill in Attention, that you may be started on the road to cultivate this important faculty.
And now for a short mental exercise in attention, so you can begin to develop this important skill.
MENTAL DRILL IN ATTENTION.
Exercise I. Begin by taking some familiar object and placing it before you, try to get as many impressions regarding it as is possible for you. Study its shape, its color, its size, and the thousand and one little peculiarities about it that present themselves to your attention. In doing this, reduce the thing to its simplest parts—analyze it as far as is possible—dissect it, mentally, and study its parts in detail. The more simple and small the part to be considered, the more clearly will the impression be received, and the more vividly will it be recalled. Reduce the thing to the smallest possible proportions, and then examine each portion, and mastering that, then pass on to the next part, and so on, until you have covered the entire field. Then, when you have exhausted the object, take a pencil and paper and put down as nearly as possible all the things or details of the object examined. When you have done this, compare the written description with the object itself, and see how many things you have failed to note.
Exercise I. Start by taking a familiar object and placing it in front of you. Try to gather as many impressions about it as you can. Observe its shape, color, size, and all the little details that catch your attention. As you do this, break the object down into its simplest parts—analyze it as much as you can—mentally dissect it and study each part closely. The smaller and simpler the part you're focusing on, the clearer the impression will be, and the more vividly you’ll remember it. Break the object down to the smallest possible pieces, examine each one, master that, then move on to the next part, and continue this way until you’ve covered everything. Once you’ve thoroughly analyzed the object, take a pencil and paper and write down as many details about it as you can. After you’ve finished, compare your written description with the actual object and see how many details you missed.
The next day take up the same object, and after re-examining it, write down the details and you will find that you will have stored away a greater number of impressions regarding it, and, moreover, you will have discovered many new details during your second examination. This exercise strengthens the memory as well as the Attention, for the two are closely connected, the memory depending largely upon the clearness and strength of the impressions received, while the impressions depend upon the amount of attention given to the thing observed. Do not tire yourself with this exercise, for a tired Attention is a poor Attention. Better try it by degrees, increasing the task a little each time you try it. Make a game of it if you like, and you will find it quite interesting to notice the steady but gradual improvement.
The next day, take the same object again, and after examining it once more, write down the details. You'll find that you've remembered more about it, and you'll notice many new details during your second look. This exercise boosts both memory and attention, since they're closely linked; memory relies on the clarity and strength of the impressions we receive, while those impressions depend on how much attention we give to what we're observing. Don’t push yourself too hard with this exercise, because tired attention isn’t effective. It’s better to approach it gradually, increasing the challenge a little each time you practice. You can even turn it into a game if you want, and you’ll find it quite fascinating to see the steady but gradual improvement.
It will be interesting to practice this in connection with some friend, varying the exercise by both examining the object, and writing down their impressions, separately, and then comparing results. This adds interest to the task, and you will be surprised to see how rapidly both of you increase in your powers of observation, which powers, of course, result from Attention.
It will be engaging to practice this with a friend, switching up the exercise by both exploring the object and writing down your impressions separately, then comparing your results. This makes the task more interesting, and you’ll be amazed at how quickly both of you improve your observation skills, which come from paying attention.
Exercise II. This exercise is but a variation of the first one. It consists in entering a room, and taking a hasty glance around, and then walking out, and afterward writing down the number of things that you have observed, with a description of each. You will be surprised to observe how many things you have missed at first sight, and how you will improve in observation by a little practice. This exercise, also, may be improved by the assistance of a friend, as related in our last exercise. It is astonishing how many details one may observe and remember, after a little practice. It is related of Houdin, the French conjurer, that he improved and developed his faculty of Attention and Memory by playing this game with a young relative. They would pass by a shop window, taking a hasty, attentive glance at its contents. Then they would go around the corner and compare notes. At first they could remember only a few prominent articles—that is, their Attention could grasp only a few. But as they developed by practice, they found that they could observe and remember a vast number of things and objects in the window. And, at last, it is related that Houdin could pass rapidly before any large shop window, bestowing upon it but one hasty glance, and then tell the names of, and closely describe, nearly every object in plain sight in the window. The feat was accomplished by the fact that the cultivated Attention enabled Houdin to fasten upon his mind a vivid mental image of the window and its contents, and then he was able to describe the articles one by one from the picture in his mind.
Exercise II. This exercise is just a variation of the first one. It involves entering a room, taking a quick look around, and then walking out, followed by writing down how many things you observed and describing each one. You’ll be surprised by how many things you miss at first glance and how much you can improve your observation skills with a bit of practice. This exercise can also be enhanced with the help of a friend, as mentioned in our last exercise. It’s amazing how many details you can notice and remember with a little practice. It’s said that Houdin, the French magician, improved his attention and memory by playing this game with a young relative. They would walk past a shop window, taking a quick, attentive look at its contents. Then they would go around the corner and compare what they noticed. At first, they could only remember a few standout items—that is, their attention could only grasp a few. But as they practiced, they found they could observe and remember a lot more things in the window. Eventually, it’s said that Houdin could quickly walk past any large shop window, give it just one quick glance, and then name and closely describe almost every object in plain sight. He achieved this by honing his attention, which allowed him to create a vivid mental image of the window and its contents, enabling him to describe the items one by one from the picture in his mind.
Houdin taught his son to develop Attention by a simple exercise which may be interesting and of value to you. He would lay down a domino before the boy—a five-four, for example. He would require the boy to tell him the combined number at once, without allowing him to stop to count the spots, one by one. "Nine" the boy would answer after a moment's hesitation. Then another domino, a three-four, would be added. "That makes sixteen," cried the boy. Two dominoes at a time was the second day's task. The next day, three was the standard. The next day, four, and so on, until the boy was able to handle twelve dominoes—that is to say, give instantaneously the total number of spots on twelve dominoes, after a single glance. This was Attention, in earnest, and shows what practice will do to develop a faculty. The result was shown by the wonderful powers of observation, memory and attention, together with instantaneous mental action, that the boy developed. Not only was he able to add dominoes instantaneously, but he had powers of observation, etc., that seemed little short of miraculous. And yet it is related that he had poor attention, and deficient memory to begin with.
Houdin taught his son to improve his attention with a simple exercise that might interest you. He would place a domino in front of the boy—a five-four, for example. He required the boy to quickly say the combined number without counting the spots one by one. "Nine," the boy would respond after a brief hesitation. Then he would add another domino, a three-four. "That makes sixteen," the boy would exclaim. The second day's challenge was to handle two dominoes at a time. The next day it was three, then four, and so on, until the boy could instantly give the total number of spots on twelve dominoes with just a quick glance. This was serious attention training and demonstrates what practice can do to develop a skill. The outcome was remarkable—his powers of observation, memory, and attention improved greatly, along with instantaneous mental reactions. Not only could he quickly add the dominoes, but his observational abilities and more seemed almost miraculous. Yet, it's said that he initially had poor attention and a weak memory.
If this seems incredible, let us remember how old whist players note and remember every card in the pack, and can tell whether they have been played or not, and all the circumstances attending upon them. The same is true of chess players, who observe every move and can relate the whole game in detail long after it has been played. And remember, also, how one woman may pass another woman on the street, and without seeming to give her more than a careless glance, may be able to relate in detail every feature of the other woman's apparel, including its color, texture, style of fashioning, probable price of the material, etc., etc. And a mere man would have noticed scarcely anything about it—because he would not have given it any attention. But how soon would that man learn to equal his sister in attention and observation of women's wearing apparel, if his business success depended upon it, or if his speculative instinct was called into play by a wager with some friend as to who could remember the most about a woman's clothing, seen in a passing glance? You see it is all a matter of Interest and Attention.
If this seems unbelievable, let’s remember how experienced whist players can keep track of and recall every card in the deck, knowing whether they’ve been played or not, along with all the details surrounding them. The same goes for chess players, who notice every move and can recount the entire game in detail long after it’s over. Also think about how one woman might pass another on the street, and without seeming to pay much attention, could describe every detail of the other woman's outfit, including its color, texture, style, and even the likely price of the fabric, etc. In contrast, a man would hardly notice anything—because he wouldn’t be paying attention. But how quickly would that man become as observant as his sister regarding women’s clothing if his job depended on it, or if a friendly bet challenged him to see who could remember the most about a woman’s outfit from a quick glance? It all comes down to Interest and Attention.
But we forget that the Attention may be developed and cultivated, and we complain that we "cannot remember things," or that we do not seem to be able to "take notice." A little practice will do wonders in this direction.
But we forget that attention can be developed and improved, and we complain that we "can't remember things" or that we don't seem to be able to "pay attention." A bit of practice can make a big difference in this area.
Now, while the above exercises will develop your memory and powers of observation, still that is not the main reason that we have given them to you. We have an ulterior object, that will appear in time. We aim to develop your Will-power, and we know that Attention stands at the gate of Will-power. In order to be able to use your Will, you must be able to focus the Attention forcibly and distinctly. And these childish exercises will help you to develop the mental muscles of the Attention. If you could but realize the childish games the young Yogi students are required to play, in order to develop the mental faculties, you would change your minds about the Yogi Adepts whom you have been thinking about as mere dreamers, far removed from the practical. These men, and their students, are intensely practical. They have gained the mastery of the Mind, and its faculties, and are able to use them as sharp edged tools, while the untrained man finds that he has but a dull, unsharpened blade that will do nothing but hack and hew roughly, instead of being able to produce the finished product.
Now, while the exercises mentioned above will improve your memory and observation skills, that's not the main reason we're giving them to you. We have a deeper purpose that will become clear over time. Our goal is to strengthen your willpower, and we know that focus is key to willpower. To effectively use your will, you need to be able to concentrate your attention clearly and forcefully. These simple exercises will help you build the mental strength of your attention. If you could see the simple games that young Yogi students are required to play to develop their mental abilities, you would change your perception of the Yogi Adepts you think of as mere dreamers, far from practical matters. These individuals and their students are incredibly practical. They have mastered the mind and its abilities, allowing them to use them as precise tools, while someone untrained realizes they only have a dull, unsharpened blade that can only hack and chop roughly, rather than produce a polished result.
The Yogi believes in giving the "I" good tools with which to work, and he spends much time in tempering and sharpening these tools. Oh, no, the Yogi are not idle dreamers. Their grasp of "practical things" would surprise many a practical, matter-of-fact Western business man, if he could but observe it.
The Yogi believes in providing the "I" with effective tools to use, and they invest a lot of time in refining and honing these tools. Oh, no, Yogi are not just idle dreamers. Their understanding of "practical things" would astonish many straightforward, no-nonsense Western businesspeople if they could just see it.
And so, we ask you to practice "observing things." The two exercises we have given are but indications of the general line. We could give you thousands, but you can prepare them yourselves as well as could we. The little Hindu boy is taught Attention by being asked to note and remember the number, color, character and other details of a number of colored stones, jewelry, etc., shown for an instant in an open palm, the hand being closed the moment after. He is taught to note and describe passing travelers, and their equipages—houses he sees on his journeys—and thousands of other everyday objects. The results are almost marvelous. In this way he is prepared as a chela or student, and he brings to his guru or teacher a brain well developed—a mind thoroughly trained to obey the Will of the "I"—and with faculties quickened to perceive instantly that which others would fail to see in a fortnight. It is true that he does not turn these faculties to "business" or other so-called "practical" pursuits, but prefers to devote them to abstract studies and pursuits outside of that which the Western man considers to be the end and aim of life. But remember that the two civilizations are quite different—following different ideals—having different economic conditions—living in different worlds, as it were. But that is all a matter of taste and ideals—the faculty for the "practical life" of the West is possessed by the chela, if he saw fit to use it. But all Hindu youths are not chelas, remember—nor are all Western youths "captains of industry," or Edisons.
And so, we ask you to practice "observing things." The two exercises we’ve provided are just examples of the broader concept. We could suggest thousands, but you can come up with your own just as easily. The young Hindu boy learns attention by being asked to note and remember the number, color, characteristics, and other details of a variety of colored stones, jewelry, etc., shown briefly in an open palm, with the hand closing right after. He learns to observe and describe passing travelers and their vehicles—houses he sees during his journeys—and countless other everyday objects. The results are pretty amazing. In this way, he is prepared as a chela or student, and he brings to his guru or teacher a well-developed mind—one that is thoroughly trained to follow the Will of the "I"—and with abilities sharpened to quickly notice things that others might miss in two weeks. It’s true that he doesn’t apply these skills to "business" or other so-called "practical" pursuits, but prefers to focus on abstract studies and interests outside of what Western society sees as the goal and purpose of life. But keep in mind that the two civilizations are quite different—they pursue different ideals—have different economic conditions—living in different worlds, in a sense. But that’s all just a matter of preference and ideals—the skill for the "practical life" of the West is within the reach of the chela, if he chooses to use it. But not all Hindu youths are chelas, remember—nor are all Western youths "captains of industry," or Edisons.
MANTRAM (AFFIRMATION).
I am using my Attention to develop my mental faculties, so as to give the "I" a perfect instrument with which to work. The mind is My instrument and I am bringing it to a state of capacity for perfect work.
I am focusing my attention to enhance my mental abilities, so I can give the "I" a perfect tool to use. The mind is my tool, and I am improving it to be capable of achieving perfect work.
MANTRAM (OR AFFIRMATION).
There is but One Life—One Life Underlying. This Life is manifesting through ME, and through every other shape, form, and thing. I am resting on the bosom of the Great Ocean of Life, and it is supporting me, and will carry me safely, though the waves rise and fall—though the storms rage and the tempests roar. I am safe on the Ocean of Life, and rejoice as I feel the sway of its motion. Nothing can harm me—though changes may come and go, I am Safe. I am One with the All Life, and its Power, Knowledge, and Peace are behind, underneath, and within Me. O! One Life! express Thyself through me—carry me now on the crest of the wave, now deep down in the trough of the ocean—supported always by Thee—all is good to me, as I feel Thy life moving in and through me. I am Alive, through thy life, and I open myself to thy full manifestation and inflow.
There is only One Life—One Life at the core of everything. This Life is expressing itself through me and through every other shape, form, and being. I am resting in the embrace of the Great Ocean of Life, which supports me and will carry me safely, even as the waves rise and fall—when the storms rage and the tempests roar. I am safe on the Ocean of Life, and I feel joy as I sense its movement. Nothing can harm me—though changes may come and go, I am safe. I am one with All Life, and its Power, Knowledge, and Peace are behind, beneath, and within me. Oh! One Life! Express Yourself through me—carry me now on the crest of the wave, now deep in the trough of the ocean—always supported by You—everything is good to me, as I feel Your life moving in and through me. I am alive through Your life, and I open myself to Your full expression and inflow.
THE SIXTH LESSON.
CULTIVATION OF PERCEPTION.
Man gains his knowledge of the outside world through his senses. And, consequently, many of us are in the habit of thinking of these senses as if they did the sensing, instead of being merely carriers of the vibrations coming from the outside world, which are then presented to the Mind for examination. We shall speak of this at greater length a little later on in this lesson. Just now we wish to impress upon you the fact that it is the Mind that perceives, not the senses. And, consequently, a development of Perception is really a development of the Mind.
Man gains his knowledge of the outside world through his senses. Because of this, many of us tend to think of these senses as if they are the ones doing the sensing, rather than just being conduits for the vibrations coming from the outside world that are then sent to the Mind for analysis. We'll discuss this in more detail later in this lesson. For now, we want to emphasize that it is the Mind that perceives, not the senses. Therefore, developing Perception is really about developing the Mind.
The Yogis put their students through a very arduous course of practice and exercises designed to develop their powers of perception. To many this would appear to be merely a development of the Senses, which might appear odd in view of the fact that the Yogis are constantly preaching the folly of being governed and ruled by the senses. But there is nothing paradoxical about all this, for the Yogis, while preaching the folly of sense life, and manifesting the teaching in their lives, nevertheless believe in any and all exercises calculated to "sharpen" the Mind, and develop it to a keen state and condition.
The Yogis put their students through a demanding series of practices and exercises aimed at enhancing their perception skills. To many, this might seem like just a way to develop the senses, which could seem strange since the Yogis often talk about the foolishness of being controlled by the senses. However, there’s nothing contradictory about it, because the Yogis, while warning against a life governed by the senses and embodying this teaching in their own lives, still believe in any and all exercises that are meant to "sharpen" the mind and enhance its focus and clarity.
They see a great difference between having a sharpened perception, on the one hand, and being a slave to the senses on the other. For instance, what would be thought of a man who objected to acquiring a keen eyesight, for fear it would lead him away from higher things, by reason of his becoming attached to the beautiful things he might see. To realize the folly of this idea, one may look at its logical conclusion, which would be that one would then be much better off if all their senses were destroyed. The absurdity, not to say wickedness, of such an idea will be apparent to everyone, after a minute's consideration.
They see a big difference between having sharp awareness and being controlled by the senses. For example, what would people think of someone who refused to sharpen their eyesight out of fear that it would distract them from more important things because they might get too attached to the beautiful things they see? To understand how foolish this idea is, one can look at its logical conclusion: it would mean that a person would be better off if all their senses were shut down. The ridiculousness, if not the wrongness, of such a notion will be clear to anyone after just a moment of thought.
The secret of the Yogi theory and teachings regarding the development of the Mental powers, lies in the word "Mastery." The Yoga student accomplishes and attains this mastery in two ways. The first way is by subordinating all the feelings, sense-impressions, etc., to the Mastery of the "I," or Will, the Mastery being obtained in this way by the assertion of the dominancy of the "I" over the faculties and emotions, etc. The second step, or way, lies in the Yogi, once having asserted the mastery, beginning to develop and perfect the Mental instrument, so as to get better work and returns from it. In this way he increases his kingdom and is Master over a much larger territory.
The key to the Yogi theory and teachings about developing mental powers is the word "Mastery." The Yoga student achieves this mastery in two ways. The first is by bringing all feelings, sense impressions, and so on under the control of the "I," or Will, with mastery gained by asserting the dominance of the "I" over faculties and emotions. The second step involves the Yogi, once they've asserted this mastery, beginning to refine and enhance the Mental instrument to achieve better results. This way, they expand their domain and become the Master over a much larger territory.
In order for one to gain knowledge, it is necessary to use to the best advantage the mental instruments and tools that he finds at his disposal. And again, one must develop and improve such tools—put a keen edge upon them, etc. Not only does one gain a great benefit from a development of the faculties of perception, but he also acquires an additional benefit from the training of the whole mind arising from the mental discipline and training resulting from the former exercises, etc. In our previous lessons we have pointed out some of the means by which these faculties might be greatly improved, and their efficiency increased. In this lesson we shall point out certain directions in which the Perceptive faculties may be trained. We trust that the simplicity of the idea may not cause any of our students to lose interest in the work. If they only knew just what such development would lead to they would gladly follow our suggestions in the matter. Every one of the ideas and exercises given by us are intended to lead up to the strengthening of the Mind, and the attainment of powers and the unfoldment of faculties. There is no royal road to Raja Yoga, but the student will be well repaid for the work of climbing the hill of Attainment.
To gain knowledge, you need to make the most of the mental tools and resources you have. It's also important to develop and sharpen these tools. Not only do you benefit from enhancing your perception, but you also gain from training your entire mind through the discipline that comes from these exercises. In our earlier lessons, we highlighted ways to significantly improve these faculties and boost their efficiency. In this lesson, we will discuss specific methods for training your perceptive abilities. We hope the simplicity of this concept won't cause any of our students to lose interest. If they understood what such development could achieve, they would eagerly follow our suggestions. Every idea and exercise we provide is designed to strengthen the mind, enhance abilities, and develop faculties. There’s no easy path to Raja Yoga, but the student will be rewarded for the effort put into reaching this level of achievement.
In view of the above, let us examine the question of The Senses. Through the doors of the senses Man receives all his information regarding the outside world. If he keeps these doors but half open, or crowded up with obstacles and rubbish, he may expect to receive but few messages from outside. But if he keeps his doorways clear, and clean, he will obtain the best that is passing his way.
In light of the above, let's take a look at the question of The Senses. Through the doors of the senses, people gather all their information about the outside world. If they keep these doors only partially open, or filled with obstacles and clutter, they can expect to receive only a few messages from the outside. However, if they keep their doorways clear and clean, they'll get the best that comes their way.
If one were born without sense-organs—no matter how good a Mind he might have—he would be compelled to live his life in a dreamy plant-life stage of existence, with little or no consciousness. The Mind would be like a seed in the earth, that for some reason was prevented from growing.
If someone were born without senses—no matter how great their mind might be—they would have to live in a vague, plant-like state, with little or no awareness. The mind would be like a seed in the ground that, for some reason, was unable to grow.
One may object that the highest ideas do not come to us through the senses, but the reply is that the things obtained through the senses are the "raw material" upon which the mind works, and fashions the beautiful things that it is able to produce in its highest stages. Just as is the body dependent for growth upon the nourishment taken into it, so is the mind dependent for growth upon the impressions received from the Universe—and these impressions come largely through the senses. It may be objected to that we know many things that we have not received through our senses. But, does the objector include the impressions that came through his senses in some previous existence, and which have been impressed upon his instinctive mind, or soul-memory? It is true that there are higher senses than those usually recognized, but Nature insists upon one learning the lessons of the lower grades before attempting those of the higher.
One might argue that our greatest ideas don’t come from our senses, but the counterpoint is that the sensory information we gather serves as the "raw material" for the mind to work with, crafting the beautiful concepts it can achieve at its highest levels. Just as the body relies on nourishment for growth, the mind relies on the impressions it receives from the Universe—and these impressions come mainly through our senses. Some may object that we know many things we haven't gained through our senses. However, does the objector consider the impressions he received through his senses in a past life that have been imprinted on his instinctive mind or soul-memory? It’s true that there are higher senses than the ones we usually acknowledge, but Nature requires that one grasps the lessons of the lower levels before moving on to the higher ones.
Do not forget that all that we know we have "worked for." There is nothing that comes to the idler, or shirker. What we know is merely the result of "stored-up accumulations of previous experience," as Lewes has so well said.
Do not forget that everything we know is something we have "worked for." Nothing comes to the lazy or the slacker. What we know is simply the result of "stored-up accumulations of previous experience," as Lewes has so aptly stated.
So it will be seen that the Yogi idea that one should develop all parts of the Mind is strictly correct, if one will take the trouble to examine into the matter. A man sees and knows but very little of what is going on about him. His limitations are great. His powers of vision report only a few vibrations of light, while below and above the scale lie an infinity of vibrations unknown to him. The same is true of the powers of hearing, for only a comparatively small portion of the sound-waves reach the Mind of Man—even some of the animals hear more than he does.
So it’s clear that the Yogi concept of developing all aspects of the mind is completely valid if you take the time to look into it. A person sees and knows very little of what’s happening around them. Their limitations are significant. Their ability to see only captures a few wavelengths of light, while countless other wavelengths lie out of reach. The same goes for hearing; only a relatively small range of sound waves reaches the human mind—even some animals can hear more than we can.
If a man had only one sense he would obtain but a one-sense idea of the outside world. If another sense is added his knowledge is doubled. And so on. The best proof of the relation between increased sense perception and development is had in the study of the evolution of animal forms. In the early stages of life the organism has only the sense of feeling—and very dim at that—and a faint sense of taste. Then developed smell, hearing and sight, each marking a distinct advance in the scale of life, for a new world has been opened out to the advancing forms of life. And, when man develops new senses—and this is before the race—he will be a much wiser and greater being.
If a person had only one sense, they would have a limited understanding of the world around them. When another sense is added, their knowledge doubles. This continues with each new sense. The best evidence of the connection between increased sensory perception and development can be seen in the study of how animal forms have evolved. In the early stages of life, an organism only has the sense of touch—and it’s quite weak at that—and a slight sense of taste. Then smell, hearing, and sight develop, each marking a significant advance in the evolutionary scale, as a new world is revealed to these evolving life forms. And when humans develop new senses—and this comes before the species as a whole—they will become much wiser and greater beings.
Carpenter, many years ago, voiced a thought that will be familiar to those who are acquainted with the Yogi teachings regarding the unfoldment of new senses. He said: "It does not seem at all improbable that there are properties of matter of which none of our senses can take immediate cognizance, and which other beings might be formed to perceive in the same manner as we are sensible to light, sound, etc."
Carpenter, many years ago, shared an idea that will resonate with those familiar with Yogi teachings about developing new senses. He said: "It doesn’t seem unlikely that there are properties of matter that our senses can’t immediately recognize, and that other beings might be designed to perceive them in the same way we perceive light, sound, and so on."
And Isaac Taylor said: "It may be that within the field observed by the visible and ponderable universe there is existing and moving another element fraught with another species of life—corporeal, indeed, and various in its orders, but not open to cognizance of those who are confined to the conditions of animal organization. Is it to be thought that the eye of man is the measure of the Creator's power?—and that He created nothing but that which he has exposed to our present senses? The contrary seems much more than barely possible; ought we not to think it almost certain?"
And Isaac Taylor said: "It’s possible that within the realm of the observable and physical universe, there exists and moves another element filled with a different kind of life—physical, yes, and varied in its forms, but not detectable by those who are limited to the conditions of animal existence. Should we really believe that the human eye is the measure of the Creator's power?—and that He created nothing except what we can currently perceive? The opposite seems much more than just a possibility; shouldn’t we consider it almost certain?"
Another writer. Prof. Masson, has said: "If a new sense or two were added to the present normal number, in man, that which is now the phenomenal world for all of us might, for all that we know, burst into something amazingly different and wider, in consequence of the additional revelations of these new senses."
Another writer, Prof. Masson, has said: "If a new sense or two were added to the current normal number in humans, what we now perceive as the phenomenal world might, for all we know, explode into something incredibly different and broader, thanks to the new insights provided by these additional senses."
But not only is this true, but Man may increase his powers of knowledge and experience if he will but develop the senses he has to a higher degree of efficiency, instead of allowing them to remain comparatively atrophied. And toward this end, this lesson is written.
But not only is this true, but a person can enhance their knowledge and experiences if they choose to refine their senses to a higher level of efficiency, instead of letting them stay relatively underdeveloped. This lesson is written to help with that.
The Mind obtains its impressions of objects of the outside world by means of the brain and sense organs. The sensory organs are the instruments of the Mind, as is also the brain and the entire nervous system. By means of the nerves, and the brain, the Mind makes use of the sensory organs in order that it may obtain information regarding external objects.
The mind gets its impressions of objects in the outside world through the brain and sensory organs. The sensory organs act as tools for the mind, just like the brain and the entire nervous system. Through the nerves and the brain, the mind uses the sensory organs to gather information about external objects.
The senses are usually said to consist of five different forms, viz., sight, hearing, smell, touch, and taste.
The senses are typically said to consist of five different types: sight, hearing, smell, touch, and taste.
The Yogis teach that there are higher senses, undeveloped, or comparatively so, in the majority of the race, but toward the unfoldment of which the race is tending. But we shall not touch upon these latent senses in this lesson, as they belong to another phase of the subject. In addition to the five senses above enumerated, some physiologists and psychologists have held that there were several others in evidence. For instance, the sense by which the inner organs revealed their presence and condition, The muscular system reports to the mind through some sense that is not that of "touch," although closely allied to it. And the feelings of hunger, thirst, etc., seem to come to us through an unnamed sense.
The Yogis say that there are higher senses that most people haven't developed yet, but humanity is moving toward developing them. However, we won't discuss these latent senses in this lesson because they belong to a different part of the topic. Besides the five senses mentioned above, some physiologists and psychologists believe there are additional senses that are noticeable. For example, there's the sense that lets us know about the inner organs and their condition. The muscular system communicates with the mind through a sense that's not "touch," but is closely related. Additionally, feelings like hunger and thirst seem to come to us through a sense that doesn't have a name.
Bernstein has distinguished between the five senses and the one just referred to as follows: "The characteristic distinction between these common sensations and the sensations of the senses is that by the latter we gain knowledge of the occurrences and objects which belong to the external world (and which sensations we refer to external objects), whilst by the former we only feel conditions of our own body."
Bernstein has made a distinction between the five senses and the one just mentioned in this way: "The key difference between these common sensations and the sensations of the senses is that with the latter, we acquire knowledge about events and objects in the external world (to which we attribute those sensations), while with the former, we only perceive the states of our own body."
A sensation is the internal, mental conception, resulting from an external object or fact exciting the sense organs and nerves, and the brain, thus making the mind "aware" of the external object or fact. As Bain has said, it is the "mental impression, feeling, or conscious state, resulting from the action of external things on some part of the body, called on that account, sensitive."
A sensation is the internal, mental concept that comes from an external object or fact stimulating the sense organs and nerves, leading the brain to make the mind "aware" of that external object or fact. As Bain noted, it's the "mental impression, feeling, or conscious state that results from the action of external things on some part of the body, which is why it's called sensitive."
Each channel of sense impressions has an organ, or organs, peculiarly adapted for the excitation of its substance by the particular kind of vibrations through which it receives impressions. The eye is most cunningly and carefully designed to receive the light-waves; and sound-waves produce no effect upon it. And, likewise, the delicate mechanism of the ear responds only to sound-waves; light-waves failing to register upon it. Each set of sensations is entirely different, and the organs and nerves designed to register each particular set are peculiarly adapted to their own special work. The organs of sense, including their special nervous systems, may be compared to a delicate instrument that the mind has fashioned for itself, that it may investigate, examine and obtain reports from the outside world.
Each sense has specific organs designed to respond to the unique vibrations they receive. The eye is intricately designed to detect light waves, while sound waves do not affect it at all. Similarly, the ear's delicate structure only responds to sound waves and does not register light waves. Each type of sensation is completely different, and the organs and nerves dedicated to each are specially adapted for their functions. The sensory organs, along with their specific nervous systems, can be thought of as a finely tuned instrument that the mind has created to explore, analyze, and gather information from the external world.
We have become so accustomed to the workings of the senses that we take them as a "matter of course," and fail to recognize them as the delicate and wonderful instruments that they are—designed and perfected by the mind for its own use. If we will think of the soul as designing, manufacturing and using these instruments, we may begin to understand their true relations to our lives, and, accordingly treat them with more respect and consideration.
We’ve gotten so used to how our senses work that we take them for granted and don't see them as the delicate and amazing tools they truly are—crafted and refined by our minds for our own benefit. If we think of the soul as the one creating, shaping, and utilizing these tools, we might start to grasp their real significance in our lives and, as a result, treat them with more respect and care.
We are in the habit of thinking that we are aware of all the sensations received by our mind. But this is very far from being correct. The unconscious regions of the mind are incomparably larger than the small conscious area that we generally think of when we say "my mind." In future lessons we shall proceed to consider this wonderful area, and examine what is to be found there. Taine has well said, "There is going on within us a subterranean process of infinite extent; its products alone are known to us, and are only known to us in the mass. As to elements, and their elements, consciousness does not attain to them. They are to sensations what secondary molecules and primitive molecules are to bodies. We get a glance here and there at obscure and infinite worlds extending beneath our distinct sensations. These are compounds and wholes. For their elements to be perceptible to consciousness, it is necessary for them to be added together, and so to acquire a certain bulk and to occupy a certain time, for if the group does not attain this bulk, and does not last this time, we observe no changes in our state. Nevertheless, though it escapes us, there is one."
We tend to believe that we are aware of all the feelings and sensations that our mind experiences. But that's far from true. The unconscious parts of the mind are much larger than the small conscious area we usually refer to when we say "my mind." In future lessons, we will explore this fascinating area and see what we can find there. Taine effectively stated, "There is a vast, underground process happening within us; we only know the outcomes, and only in a general sense. When it comes to the individual components and their elements, consciousness doesn't reach them. They are to sensations what secondary molecules and primary molecules are to physical bodies. We occasionally catch glimpses of the obscure and infinite worlds existing beneath our clear sensations. These are compounds and wholes. For their elements to become noticeable to our consciousness, they need to combine to form a certain mass and duration; if the group doesn't reach that mass and doesn't last long enough, we don't notice any changes in our state. Yet, even though it evades our awareness, it is there."
But we must postpone our consideration of this more than interesting phase of the subject, until some future lesson, when we shall take a trip into the regions of Mind, under and above Consciousness. And a most wonderful trip many of us will find it, too.
But we need to put off our discussion of this really fascinating part of the topic until a future lesson, when we'll explore the areas of the Mind, both below and above Consciousness. And many of us will find it to be a truly amazing journey.
For the present, we must pay our attention to the channels by which the material for knowledge and thought enter our minds. For these sense impressions, coming to us from without, are indeed "material" upon which the mind works in order to manufacture the product called "Thought."
For now, we need to focus on the ways that information and ideas come into our minds. These sense impressions, coming from the outside, are the "material" that the mind uses to create what we call "Thought."
This material we obtain through the channels of the senses, and then store in that wonderful storehouse, the Memory, from whence we bring out material from time to time, which we proceed to weave into the fabric of Thought. The skill of the worker depends upon his training, and his ability to select and combine the proper materials. And the acquiring of good materials to be stored up is an important part of the work.
This material comes to us through our senses, and we then store it in that amazing place, Memory, from which we periodically take out information to weave into the fabric of Thought. The worker's skill depends on their training and their ability to pick and combine the right materials. Acquiring quality materials to store is an essential part of the process.
A mind without stored-up material of impressions and experiences would be like a factory without material. The machinery would have nothing upon which to work, and the shop would be idle. As Helmholtz has said, "Apprehension by the senses supplies directly or indirectly, the material of all human knowledge, or at least the stimulus necessary to develop every inborn faculty of the mind." And Herbert Spencer, has this to say of this phase of the subject, "It is almost a truism to say that in proportion to the numerousness of the objects that can be distinguished, and in proportion to the variety of coexistences and sequences that can be severally responded to, must be the number and rapidity and variety of the changes within the organism—must be the amount of vitality."
A mind without accumulated impressions and experiences would be like a factory without raw materials. The machinery would have nothing to operate on, and the shop would sit idle. As Helmholtz said, "Perception through the senses provides the material for all human knowledge, or at least the spark needed to develop every inherent ability of the mind." Herbert Spencer also remarked on this aspect, saying, "It’s almost a given that the number of objects we can distinguish, and the variety of coexistences and sequences we can respond to, will determine the number, speed, and variety of changes within the organism—this reflects the level of vitality."
A little reflection upon this subject will show us that the greater degree of exercise and training given the senses, the greater the degree of mental power and capability. As we store our mental storehouse with the materials to be manufactured into thought, so is the quality and quantity of the fabric produced.
A bit of thinking about this topic will reveal that the more we exercise and train our senses, the more mental power and ability we gain. Just as we fill our minds with the information we use to form thoughts, the quality and quantity of what we create depend on that input.
It therefore behooves us to awaken from our "lazy" condition of mind, and to proceed to develop our organs of sense, and their attendant mechanism, as by doing so we increase our capacity for thought and knowledge.
It’s important for us to wake up from our “lazy” mindset and to work on developing our senses and the systems that support them, as this will enhance our ability to think and gain knowledge.
Before passing to the exercises, however, it may be well to give a hasty passing glance at the several senses, and their peculiarities.
Before moving on to the exercises, it might be helpful to quickly overview the different senses and their unique characteristics.
The sense of Touch is the simplest and primal sense. Long before the lower forms of life had developed the higher senses, they had evidenced the sense of Touch or Feeling. Without this sense they would have been unable to have found their food, or to receive and respond to outside impressions. In the early forms of life it was exercised equally by all parts of the body, although in the higher forms this sense has become somewhat localized, as certain parts of the body are far more sensitive than are others. The skin is the seat of the sense of Touch, and its nerves are distributed over the entire area of the skin. The hand, and particularly the fingers, and their tips, are the principal organs of this sense.
The sense of touch is the most basic and fundamental sense. Long before simpler life forms developed more advanced senses, they had already shown the ability to feel. Without this sense, they wouldn't have been able to find food or react to external stimuli. In early life forms, this sense was felt throughout the entire body, but in more complex beings, it has become somewhat concentrated, with certain areas being much more sensitive than others. The skin is where the sense of touch is located, and its nerves cover the entire skin surface. The hands, especially the fingertips, are the main organs for this sense.
The acuteness of Touch varies materially in different parts of the body. Experiments have shown that a pair of compasses would register impressions as a very slight distance apart when applied to the tip of the tongue. The distance at which the two points could be distinguished from one point, on the tip of the tongue, was called "one line." Using this "line" as a standard, it was found that the palmar surface of the third finger registered 2 lines; the surface of the lips 4 lines, and the skin of the back, and on the middle of the arm or thigh, as high as 60 lines The degree of sensitiveness to Touch varies greatly with different individuals, some having a very fine sense of touch in their fingers, while others manifested a very much lower degree.
The sensitivity of touch varies significantly across different parts of the body. Experiments have shown that a pair of compasses would register impressions as only a small distance apart when applied to the tip of the tongue. The distance at which the two points could be distinguished from one point on the tip of the tongue was called "one line." Using this "line" as a standard, it was found that the palm of the third finger registered 2 lines; the surface of the lips registered 4 lines, and the skin of the back, as well as on the middle of the arm or thigh, could measure as high as 60 lines. The level of sensitivity to touch varies greatly among individuals; some have a very keen sense of touch in their fingers, while others show a much lower degree.
In the same way, there is a great difference in the response of the fingers to weight—a great difference in the ability to distinguish the difference of the weight of objects. It has been found that some people can distinguish differences in weight down to very small fractions of an ounce. Fine distinctions in the differences in temperature have also been noticed.
In the same way, there is a big difference in how fingers respond to weight—a significant difference in the ability to tell apart the weights of objects. Research has shown that some people can detect weight differences down to tiny fractions of an ounce. Subtle distinctions in temperature differences have also been observed.
The sense of touch, and its development has meant much for Man. It is the one sense in which Man surpasses the animals in the matter of degree and acuteness. The animal may have a keener smell, taste, hearing and sight, but its sense of Touch is far beneath that of Man. Anaxagoras is quoted as saying that "if the animals had hands and fingers, they would be like men."
The sense of touch and its development have meant a lot to humanity. It's the one sense where humans excel compared to animals in terms of degree and sensitivity. While animals may have sharper smell, taste, hearing, and sight, their sense of touch is significantly weaker than that of humans. Anaxagoras is quoted as saying, "if animals had hands and fingers, they would be like humans."
In developing the sense of Touch, the student must remember that Attention is the key to success. The greater the amount of Attention the greater the degree of development possible in the case of any sense. When the Attention is concentrated upon any particular sense, the latter becomes quickened and more acute, and repeated exercise, under the stimulus of Attention, will work wonders in the case of any particular sense. And on the other hand, the sense of touch may be almost, or completely inhibited, by firmly fixing the Attention upon something else. As an extreme proof of this latter fact, the student is asked to remember the fact that men have been known to suffer excruciating torture, apparently without feeling, owing to the mind being intently riveted upon some idea or thought. As Wyld has said, "The martyr borne above sensuous impressions, is not only able to endure tortures, but is able to endure and quench them. The pinching and cutting of the flesh only added energy to the death song of the American Indian, and even the slave under the lash is sustained by the indignant sense of his wrongs."
In developing the sense of touch, the student must remember that attention is the key to success. The more attention you give, the greater the development possible for any sense. When attention is focused on a specific sense, that sense becomes quicker and more sensitive, and consistent practice with this focused attention can lead to remarkable improvements in any particular sense. Conversely, the sense of touch can be nearly or completely blocked if attention is firmly directed elsewhere. To illustrate this point, the student should consider that some individuals have endured intense torture seemingly without feeling anything, due to their minds being completely absorbed in a particular idea or thought. As Wyld has stated, "The martyr beyond sensory impressions is not only able to endure tortures, but can also overcome and extinguish them. The pinching and cutting of the flesh only fueled the death song of the American Indian, and even the slave under the lash is sustained by the righteous sense of his wrongs."
In the cases of persons engaged in occupations requiring a fine degree of Touch, the development is marvelous. The engraver passes his hand over the plate, and is able to distinguish the slightest imperfection. And the handler of cloth and fabrics is able to distinguish the finest differences, simply by the sense of touch. Wool sorters also exercise a wonderfully high degree of fineness of touch. And the blind are able to make up for the loss of sight by their greatly increased sense of Touch, cases being recorded where the blind have been able to distinguish color by the different "feel" of the material.
In the case of people working in jobs that need a high level of touch sensitivity, the development is impressive. The engraver runs their hand over the plate and can notice the tiniest flaws. Similarly, those who work with fabrics can sense even the smallest differences just by touch. Wool sorters also show an incredible level of touch precision. Furthermore, blind individuals can compensate for their loss of sight with a significantly heightened sense of touch, with reports of blind people being able to identify color through the different textures of materials.
The sense of Taste is closely allied to that of Touch—in fact some authorities have considered Taste as a very highly developed sense of Touch in certain surfaces of the body, the tongue notably. It will be remembered that the tongue has the finest sense of Touch, and it also has the sense of Taste developed to perfection. In Taste and Touch the object must be brought in direct contact with the organ of sense, which is not the case in Smell, Hearing, or Sight. And, be it remembered, that the latter senses have special nerves, while Taste is compelled to fall back upon the ordinary nerves of Touch. It is true that Taste is confined to a very small part of the surface of the body, while Touch is general. But this only indicates a special development of the special area. The sense of Taste also depends to a great extent upon the presence of fluids, and only substances that are soluble make their presence known through the organs and sense of Taste.
The sense of taste is closely related to touch—in fact, some experts have considered taste to be a highly developed version of touch in certain areas of the body, especially the tongue. It's worth noting that the tongue has the most sensitive touch and also has the sense of taste developed to perfection. For both taste and touch, the object must make direct contact with the sensory organ, unlike smell, hearing, or sight. Additionally, it's important to remember that the latter senses have specialized nerves, while taste relies on the regular touch nerves. Although taste is limited to a small area of the body, whereas touch is more widespread, this just highlights a special development in that specific area. The sense of taste also heavily depends on the presence of fluids, meaning that only soluble substances can be detected by the taste organs.
Physiologists report that the sense of Taste in some persons is so acute that one part of strychnine in one million parts of water has been distinguished. There are certain occupations, such as that of wine-tasters, tea-tasters, etc., the followers of which manifest a degree of fineness of Taste almost incredible.
Physiologists say that some people's sense of taste is so sharp that they can detect one part of strychnine in a million parts of water. There are specific jobs, like wine-tasters and tea-tasters, where individuals show an incredible level of sensitivity to taste.
The sense of Smell is closely connected with the sense of Taste, and often acts in connection therewith, as the tiny particles of the substance in the mouth arise to the organs of Smell, by means of the opening or means of communication situated in the back part of the mouth. Besides which the nose usually detects the odor of substances before they enter the mouth. The sense of Smell operates by reason of the tiny particles or the object being carried to the mucous membrane of the interior of the nose, by means of the air. The membrane, being moist, seizes and holds these particles for a moment, and the fine nervous organism reports differences and qualities and the Mind is thus informed of the nature of the object.
The sense of smell is closely linked to the sense of taste and often works together with it, as small particles from what we eat rise to the smell receptors through the passage at the back of the mouth. Additionally, our nose usually picks up the scent of things before they even enter the mouth. Smell functions because tiny particles from an object are carried to the moist mucous membrane inside the nose through the air. This membrane captures these particles briefly, and the delicate nervous system detects differences and qualities, informing the brain about the nature of the object.
The sense of Smell is very highly developed among animals, who are compelled to rely upon it to a considerable extent. And many occupations among men require the development of this sense, for instance, the tobacconist, the wine dealer, the perfumers, the chemist, etc. It is related that in the cases of certain blind people, it has been observed that they could distinguish persons in this manner.
The sense of smell is highly developed in animals, who often depend on it significantly. Many jobs for people also require a strong sense of smell, such as tobacconists, wine merchants, perfumers, and chemists. It's reported that some blind individuals have been able to identify people this way.
The sense of Hearing is a more complex one than in the case of Taste, Touch and Smell. In the latter three the objects to be sensed must be brought in close contact with the sense-organs, while in Hearing the object may be far removed, the impressions being carried by the vibrations of the air, which are caught up and reported upon by the nervous organism of the sense of Hearing. The internal mechanism of the ear is most wonderfully intricate and complex, and excites to wonder the person examining it. It cannot be described here for want of space, but the student is advised to inquire into it if he has access to any library containing books on the subject. It is a wonderful illustration of the work of the mind in building up for itself instruments with which to work—to acquire knowledge.
The sense of hearing is more complex than taste, touch, and smell. In the latter three, the things we sense need to be in close contact with our sense organs, while with hearing, the objects can be far away; the impressions are carried by vibrations in the air, which our auditory system picks up and interprets. The internal structure of the ear is incredibly intricate and complex, leaving anyone who examines it in awe. There isn’t enough space to describe it here, but students are encouraged to look it up in any library with relevant books. It’s a fascinating example of how the mind creates tools to gain knowledge.
The ear records vibrations in the air from 20 or 32 per second, the rate of the lowest audible note, to those of 38,000 per second, the rate of the highest audible note. There is a great difference in individuals in regard to the fineness of the sense of Hearing. But all may develop this sense by the application of Attention. The animals and savages have wonderfully acute senses of Hearing developed only along the lines of distinctness, however—on the other hand musicians have developed the sense along different lines.
The ear picks up vibrations in the air ranging from 20 to 32 vibrations per second, which is the frequency of the lowest note we can hear, to 38,000 vibrations per second, which is the frequency of the highest note. There's a significant variation among individuals when it comes to the sensitivity of hearing. However, anyone can enhance this sense through focused attention. Animals and primitive people have an exceptionally sharp sense of hearing, developed primarily for recognizing distinct sounds; in contrast, musicians have refined their hearing in different ways.
The sense of Sight is generally conceded to be the highest and most complex of all the senses of Man. It deals with a far larger number of objects—at longer distances—and gives a far greater variety of reports to the mind than any of its associate senses. It is the sense of Touch magnified many times. As Wilson says of it, "Our sight may be considered as a more delicate and diffusive kind of touch that spreads itself over an infinite number of bodies; comprehends the largest figures, and brings into our reach some of the most remote parts of the universe."
The sense of sight is widely recognized as the most advanced and intricate of all human senses. It interacts with a much larger number of objects—over greater distances—and provides a far wider range of information to the mind than any of the other senses. It’s like touch magnified many times over. As Wilson puts it, "Our sight can be seen as a more refined and expansive form of touch that extends over countless objects; grasping the largest shapes and bringing some of the farthest parts of the universe within our reach."
The sense of Sight receives its impressions from the outside world by means of waves that travel from body to body—from sun to earth, and from lamp to eye. These waves of light arise from vibrations in substance, of an almost incredible degree of rapidity. The lowest light vibration is about 450,000,000,000,000 per second, while the highest is about 750,000,000,000,000 per second. These figures deal only with the vibrations recognizable by the eye as light. Above and below these figures of the scale are countless other degrees invisible to the eye, although some of them may be recorded by instruments. The different sensations of color, depend upon the rate of the vibrations, red being the limit of the lowest, and violet the limit of the highest visible vibrations—orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo being the intermediate rates or colors.
The sense of sight gets its impressions from the external world through waves that travel from one object to another—from the sun to the earth, and from a lamp to the eye. These waves of light come from vibrations in matter, occurring at an almost unbelievable speed. The lowest light vibration is about 450 trillion per second, while the highest is around 750 trillion per second. These numbers only cover the vibrations detectable by the eye as light. Above and below these figures on the scale are countless other frequencies that are invisible to the eye, although some can be measured by instruments. The various sensations of color depend on the vibration rate, with red being the lowest visible vibration and violet being the highest—orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo fall in between as the intermediate rates or colors.
The cultivation of the sense of Sight, under the aid of Attention is most important to ail persons. By being able to clearly see and distinguish the parts of an object, a degree of knowledge regarding it is obtained that one may not acquire without the said exercise of the faculty. We have spoken of this under the subject of Attention, in a previous lesson, to which lesson we again refer the student. The fixing of the eye upon an object has the power of concentrating the thoughts and preventing them from wandering. The eye has other properties and qualities that will be dwelt upon in future lessons. It has other uses than seeing. The influence of the eye is a marvelous thing, and may be cultivated and developed.
The development of the sense of sight, supported by attention, is really important for everyone. By being able to clearly see and differentiate the parts of an object, we gain a level of understanding about it that we might not achieve without practicing this skill. We’ve discussed this in the context of attention in a previous lesson, which we refer students back to. Focusing the eye on an object helps concentrate our thoughts and stops them from wandering. The eye has other properties and qualities that we’ll explore in future lessons. It serves more purposes than just seeing. The impact of the eye is remarkable, and it can be developed and enhanced.
We trust that what we have said will bring the student to a realization of the importance of developing the powers of Perception. The senses have been developed by the mind during a long period of evolution and effort that surely would not have been given unless the object in view was worth it all. The "I" insists upon obtaining knowledge of the Universe, and much of this knowledge may be obtained only through the senses. The Yogi student must be "wide awake" and possessed of developed senses and powers of Perception. The senses of Sight and Hearing, the two latest in the scale of Evolutionary growth and unfoldment, must receive a particular degree of attention. The student must make himself "aware" of what is going on about and around him, so that he may "catch" the best vibrations.
We believe that what we've shared will help students understand the importance of enhancing their Perception abilities. Over a long period of evolution, the mind has developed the senses, and this effort surely wouldn’t have been put forth unless it was worthwhile. The "I" seeks to gain knowledge of the Universe, and much of this can only be acquired through the senses. The Yogi student must be fully alert and have well-developed senses and perceptual abilities. The senses of Sight and Hearing, the most recently evolved, require special attention. The student must become "aware" of what’s happening around him or her to "catch" the best vibrations.
It would surprise many Westerners if they could come in contact with a highly developed Yogi, and witness the marvelously finely developed senses he possesses. He is able to distinguish the finest differences in things, and his mind is so trained that, in thought, he may draw conclusions from what he has perceived, in a manner that seems almost "second-sight" to the uninitiated. In fact, a certain degree of second-sight is possible to one who develops his sense of Sight, under the urge of Attention. A new world is opened out to such a person. One must learn to master the senses, not only in the direction of being independent of and superior to their urgings, but also in the matter of developing them to a high degree. The development of the physical senses, also has much to do with the development of the "Astral Senses," of which we have spoken in our "Fourteen Lessons," and of which we may have more to say in the present series. The idea of Raja Yoga is to render the student the possessor of a highly developed Mind, with highly developed instruments with which the mind may work.
It would astonish many Westerners if they encountered a highly developed Yogi and experienced the incredibly refined senses he has. He can notice the tiniest differences in things, and his mind is so trained that he can draw conclusions from his observations in a way that seems almost like "second sight" to those who aren't familiar with it. In fact, a certain level of second sight is achievable for anyone who enhances their sense of Sight through focused Attention. A new world unfolds for such individuals. One must learn to master their senses, not just to be independent from and superior to their impulses, but also to develop them to a high level. The enhancement of physical senses is closely linked to the development of the "Astral Senses," which we've discussed in our "Fourteen Lessons," and we may delve deeper into this topic in the current series. The goal of Raja Yoga is to equip the student with a highly developed Mind, along with advanced tools for the mind to work with.
In our future lessons we shall give the student many illustrations, directions, and exercises calculated to develop the different faculties of the mind—not only the ordinary faculties of everyday use, but others hidden behind these familiar faculties and senses. Commencing with the next lesson, we shall present a system of exercises, drills, etc., the purpose of which will be the above mentioned development of the faculties of the Mind.
In our upcoming lessons, we will provide students with a variety of examples, instructions, and exercises designed to enhance different mental abilities—not just the usual skills we use daily, but also those hidden behind more familiar faculties and senses. Starting with the next lesson, we will introduce a series of exercises, drills, and more, aimed at developing thesemental abilities.
In this lesson we shall not attempt to give specific exercises, but will content ourselves with calling the attention of the student to a few general rules underlying the development of Perception.
In this lesson, we won’t provide specific exercises, but we will focus on highlighting a few general rules that support the development of Perception.
GENERAL RULES OF PERCEPTION.
The first thing to remember in acquiring the art of Perception is that one should not attempt to perceive the whole of a complex thing or object at the same time, or at once. One should consider the object in detail, and then, by grouping the details, he will find that he has considered the whole. Let us take the face of a person as a familiar object. If one tries to perceive a face as a whole, he will find that he will meet with a certain degree of failure, the impression being indistinct and cloudy, it following, also, that the memory of that face will correspond with the original perception.
The first thing to keep in mind when learning the art of Perception is that you shouldn't try to take in everything about a complex object all at once. Instead, you should look at the object in detail, and then by putting those details together, you'll realize you have a clearer understanding of the whole. Let's use a person's face as a familiar example. If someone tries to see a face all at once, they may struggle to get a clear impression—it will seem fuzzy and unclear. As a result, their memory of that face will reflect that initial unclear perception.
But let the observer consider the face in detail, first the eyes, then the nose, then the mouth, then the chin, then the hair, then the outline of the face, the complexion, etc., and he will find that he will have acquired a clear and distinct impression or perception of the whole face.
But if the observer looks closely at the face, starting with the eyes, then the nose, then the mouth, then the chin, then the hair, and finally the shape of the face and the skin tone, they'll discover that they will have formed a clear and precise idea of the entire face.
The same rule may be applied to any subject or object. Let us take another familiar illustration. You wish to observe a building. If you simply get a general perception of the building as a whole, you will be able to remember very little about it, except its general outlines, shape, size, color, etc. And a description will prove to be very disappointing. But if you have noted, in detail, the material used, the shape of the doors, chimney, roof, porches, decorations, trimmings, ornamentation, size and number of the window-panes etc., etc., the shape and angles of the roof, etc., you will have an intelligent idea of the building, in the place of a mere general outline or impression of such as might be acquired by an animal in passing.
The same rule can be applied to any subject or object. Let’s use another familiar example. If you want to observe a building, simply getting a general sense of it will only help you remember a little about its overall shape, size, color, and so on. A description would be quite disappointing. But if you pay attention, in detail, to the materials used, the design of the doors, chimney, roof, porches, decorations, trim, ornamentation, the size and number of the window panes, and so forth, you’ll have an intelligent understanding of the building, rather than just a vague outline or impression that an animal might gather while passing by.
We will conclude this lesson with an anecdote of the methods of that famous naturalist Agassiz, in his training of his pupils. His pupils became renowned for their close powers of observation and perception, and their consequent ability to "think" about the things they had seen. Many of them rose to eminent positions, and claimed that this was largely by reason of their careful training.
We will wrap up this lesson with a story about the teaching methods of the famous naturalist Agassiz and how he trained his students. His students became well-known for their keen observation skills and their ability to reflect on what they observed. Many of them achieved prominent positions and claimed that their success was largely due to their thorough training.
The tale runs that a new student presented himself to Agassiz one day, asking to be set to work. The naturalist took a fish from a jar in which it had been preserved, and laying it before the young student bade him observe it carefully, and be ready to report upon what he had noticed about the fish. The student was then left alone with the fish. There was nothing especially interesting about that fish—it was like many other fishes that he had seen before. He noticed that it had fins and scales, and a mouth and eyes, yes, and a tail. In a half hour he felt certain that he had observed all about that fish that there was to be perceived. But the naturalist remained away.
The story goes that a new student approached Agassiz one day, asking to start working. The naturalist took a fish from a jar where it had been preserved and placed it in front of the young student, instructing him to observe it closely and be prepared to discuss what he had noticed about the fish. The student was then left alone with the fish. There was nothing particularly interesting about that fish—it was like many others he had seen before. He noticed that it had fins and scales, a mouth and eyes, and yes, a tail. After half an hour, he was sure he had noticed everything there was to see about that fish. But the naturalist did not return.
The time rolled on, and the youth, having nothing else to do, began to grow restless and weary. He started out to hunt up the teacher, but he failed to find him, and so had to return and gaze again at that wearisome fish. Several hours had passed, and he knew but little more about the fish than he did in the first place.
The time passed, and the young man, having nothing else to do, started to feel restless and tired. He set out to look for the teacher but couldn’t find him, so he had to go back and stare at that boring fish again. Several hours had gone by, and he still knew very little more about the fish than he did at the start.
He went out to lunch and when he returned it was still a case of watching the fish. He felt disgusted and discouraged, and wished he had never come to Agassiz, whom, it seemed, was a stupid old man after all,—one away behind the times. Then, in order to kill time, he began to count the scales. This completed he counted the spines of the fins. Then he began to draw a picture of the fish. In drawing the picture he noticed that the fish had no eyelids. He thus made the discovery that as his teacher had expressed it often, in lectures, "a pencil is the best of eyes." Shortly after the teacher returned, and after ascertaining what the youth had observed, he left rather disappointed, telling the boy to keep on looking and maybe he would see something.
He went out for lunch, and when he got back, it was still a matter of watching the fish. He felt grossed out and discouraged, wishing he had never come to Agassiz, who seemed to be just an old man stuck in the past. To pass the time, he started counting the scales. Once he finished that, he counted the spines on the fins. Then he began to draw a picture of the fish. While drawing, he noticed that the fish had no eyelids. He then realized, as his teacher often said in lectures, “a pencil is the best of eyes.” Shortly after, the teacher returned, and after checking to see what the young man had observed, he left feeling somewhat disappointed, telling the boy to keep looking, and maybe he would discover something.
This put the boy on his mettle, and he began to work with his pencil, putting down little details that had escaped him before, but which now seemed very plain to him. He began to catch the secret of observation. Little by little he brought to light new objects of interest about the fish. But this did not suffice his teacher, who kept him at work on the same fish for three whole days. At the end of that time the student really knew something about the fish, and, better than all, had acquired the "knack" and habit of careful observation and perception in detail.
This challenged the boy, and he started to sketch with his pencil, capturing little details he hadn't noticed before, but which now seemed very obvious to him. He began to understand the art of observation. Bit by bit, he uncovered new points of interest about the fish. But this wasn't enough for his teacher, who had him focus on the same fish for three full days. By the end of that time, the student really knew something about the fish and, even better, had developed the "skill" and habit of careful observation and attention to detail.
Years after, the student, then attained to eminence, is reported as saying: "That was the best zoological lesson I ever had—a lesson whose influence has extended to the details of every subsequent study; a legacy that the professor left to me, as he left to many others, of inestimable value, which we could not buy, and with which we cannot part."
Years later, the student, now successful, is said to have remarked: "That was the best zoology lesson I ever had—a lesson that has impacted every study I've pursued since; a priceless gift from the professor, just as he gave to many others, something we couldn't purchase and can never let go of."
Apart from the value to the student of the particular information obtained, was the quickening of the perceptive faculties that enabled him to observe the important points in a subject or object, and, consequently to deduce important information from that which was observed. The Mind is hungry for knowledge, and it has by years of weary evolution and effort built up a series of sense systems in order to yield it that knowledge and it is still building. The men and women in the world who have arrived at the point of success have availed themselves of these wonderful channels of information, and by directing them under the guidance of Will and Attention, have attained wonderful results. These things are of importance, and we beg of our students not to pass by this portion of the subject as uninteresting. Cultivate a spirit of wide-awakeness and perception, and the "knowing" that will come to you will surprise you.
Aside from the value of the specific information a student gains, there's also the enhancement of their awareness that allows them to notice the key aspects of a subject or object, which helps them draw important conclusions from what they observe. The mind craves knowledge, and over many years of hard evolution and effort, it has developed a set of sensory systems to provide that knowledge, and it's still growing. The people in the world who have achieved success have tapped into these amazing sources of information, and by steering them with Will and Attention, they've achieved remarkable outcomes. These concepts are significant, and we encourage our students not to overlook this part of the topic as uninteresting. Foster a mindset of alertness and perception, and the insights you gain will astonish you.
No only do you develop the existing senses by such practice and use, but you help in the unfoldment of the latent powers and senses that are striving for unfoldment. By using and exercising the faculties that we have, we help to unfold those for the coming of which we have been dreaming.
Not only do you enhance the senses you already have through practice and use, but you also assist in the development of the hidden abilities and senses that are eager to emerge. By using and exercising the abilities we possess, we foster the growth of those we have been dreaming about.
MANTRAM (AFFIRMATION).
I am a Soul, possessed of channels of communication with the outer world. I will use these channels, and thereby acquire the information and knowledge necessary for my mental development. I will exercise and develop my organs of sense, knowing that in so doing I shall cause to unfold the higher senses, of which they are but forerunners and symbols. I will be "wide-awake" and open to the inflow of knowledge and information. The Universe is my Home—I will explore it.
I am a soul with ways to connect with the outside world. I will use these connections to gain the information and knowledge I need for my personal growth. I will train my senses, understanding that this will help develop my higher abilities, which are just early signs and symbols of what’s to come. I will be "wide-awake" and ready to receive knowledge and information. The Universe is my home—I will explore it.
THE SEVENTH LESSON.
THE UNFOLDMENT OF CONSCIOUSNESS.
We have thought it well to make a slight change in the arrangement of these lessons—that is, in the order in which they should appear. We had contemplated making this Seventh Lesson a series of Mental Drills, intended to develop certain of the mental faculties, but we have decided to postpone the same until a later lesson, believing that by so doing a more logical sequence or order of arrangement will be preserved. In this lesson we will tell you of the unfoldment of consciousness in Man, and in the next lesson, and probably in the one following it, we shall present to you a clear statement regarding the states of mind, below and over consciousness—a most wonderful region, we assure you, and one that has been greatly misunderstood and misinterpreted. This will lead up to the subject of the cultivation of the various faculties—both conscious and outside of consciousness, and the series will be concluded by three lessons going right to the heart of this part of the subject, and giving certain rules and instruction calculated to develop Man's wonderful "thought-machine" that will be of the greatest interest and importance to all of our students. When the lessons are concluded you will see that the present arrangement is most logical and proper.
We think it’s a good idea to make a slight change in the order of these lessons. We had planned to make this Seventh Lesson a series of Mental Drills aimed at developing certain mental abilities, but we've decided to push that to a later lesson. We believe this will create a more logical order. In this lesson, we will discuss the unfolding of consciousness in humans, and in the next lesson—and likely the one after that—we will provide a clear explanation of the states of mind, both below and above consciousness. This is a truly fascinating area that has often been misunderstood. This will lead us to the topic of developing various faculties—both conscious and those outside of consciousness. The series will wrap up with three lessons that will delve deeply into this aspect of the subject, offering specific rules and instructions designed to enhance humanity’s remarkable "thought-machine," which will be of great interest and importance to all our students. By the end of the lessons, you’ll see that the current arrangement makes the most sense.
In this lesson we take up the subject of "The Unfoldment of Consciousness"—a most interesting subject. Many of us have been in the habit of identifying "consciousness" with mind, but as we proceed with this series of lessons we will see that that which is called "consciousness" is but a small portion of the mind of the individual, and even that small part is constantly changing its states, and unfolding new states undreamed of.
In this lesson, we discuss "The Unfoldment of Consciousness"—a fascinating topic. Many of us tend to equate "consciousness" with the mind, but as we move through this series of lessons, we'll discover that what we refer to as "consciousness" is just a small part of an individual's mind, and even that small portion is always shifting and revealing new, unimaginable states.
"Consciousness" is a word we use very often in considering the science of the Mind. Let us see what it means. Webster defines it as one's "knowledge of sensations and mental operations, or of what passes in one's own mind." Halleck defines it as "that undefinable characteristic of mental states which causes one to be aware of them." But, as Halleck states, "Consciousness is incapable of definition. To define anything we are obliged to describe it in terms of something else. And there is nothing else in the world like consciousness, hence we can define it only in terms of itself, and that is very much like trying to lift one's self by one's own boot straps. Consciousness is one of the greatest mysteries that confronts us."
"Consciousness" is a term we frequently use when discussing the science of the mind. Let's explore what it means. Webster defines it as a person's "awareness of sensations and mental processes, or of what happens in one's own mind." Halleck describes it as "that indescribable quality of mental states that makes one aware of them." However, as Halleck points out, "Consciousness can't really be defined. To define something, we have to describe it using other concepts. There’s nothing else in the world quite like consciousness, so we can only define it in terms of itself, which is a lot like trying to pull yourself up by your own bootstraps. Consciousness is one of the greatest mysteries we face."
Before we can understand what Consciousness really is, we must know just what "Mind" really is—and that knowledge is lacking, notwithstanding the many injenious theories evolved in order to explain the mystery. The metaphysicians do not throw much light on the subject, and as for materialistic science, listen to what Huxley says: "How it comes about that anything so remarkable as a state of consciousness comes about by the result of irritating nervous tissue, is just as unaccountable as the appearance of the genie when Aladdin rubbed his lamp."
Before we can really understand what consciousness is, we need to know what "mind" truly means—and that knowledge is lacking, despite the many clever theories created to explain the mystery. Metaphysicians don’t clarify much on the topic, and regarding materialistic science, listen to what Huxley says: "How something as extraordinary as a state of consciousness arises from stimulating nervous tissue is just as mysterious as the appearance of the genie when Aladdin rubbed his lamp."
To many persons the words "consciousness" and "mental process," or "thought" are regarded as synonymous. And, in fact, psychologists so held until quite recently. But now it is generally accepted as a fact that mental processes are not limited to the field of consciousness, and it is now generally taught that the field of sub-consciousness (that is, "under" conscious) mentation, is of a much greater extent than that of conscious mentation.
To many people, the terms "consciousness," "mental process," and "thought" are seen as the same thing. Psychologists used to believe this until recently. But now, it's widely accepted that mental processes aren't confined to consciousness. It's generally taught that the realm of subconscious thought (that is, thought happening "under" consciousness) is much larger than that of conscious thought.
Not only is it true that the mind can hold in consciousness but one fact at any one instant, and that, consequently, only a very small fraction of our knowledge can be in consciousness at any one moment, but it is also true that the consciousness plays but a very small part in the totality of mental processes, or mentation. The mind is not conscious of the greater portion of its own activities—Maudsley says that only ten per cent comes into the field of consciousness. Taine has stated it in these words: "Of the world which makes up our being, we only perceive the highest points—the lighted up peaks of a continent whose lower levels remain in the shade."
Not only is it true that the mind can focus on just one thing at a time, meaning that only a tiny fraction of what we know can be in our awareness at any given moment, but it’s also true that our consciousness is only a small part of all the mental processes happening. The mind isn’t aware of most of its own activities—Maudsley claims that only ten percent comes into our consciousness. Taine expressed it this way: "Of the world that makes up our existence, we only see the highest points—the illuminated peaks of a continent, while the lower levels stay in the shadows."
But it is not our intention to speak of this great subconscious region of the mind at this point, for we shall have much to do with it later on. It is mentioned here in order to show that the enlargement or development of consciousness is not so much a matter of "growth" as it is an "unfoldment"—not a new creation or enlargement from outside, but rather an unfoldment outward from within.
But we don’t plan to talk about this vast subconscious area of the mind right now, since we will deal with it more later. It’s mentioned here to highlight that the expansion or development of consciousness isn’t just about “growth”; it’s more like an “unfolding”—not about creating something new or expanding from the outside, but about unfolding outward from within.
From the very beginning of Life—among the Particles of Inorganic Substance, may be found traces of something like Sensation, and response thereto. Writers have not cared to give to this phenomenon the name of "sensation," or "sensibility," as the terms savored too much of "senses," and "sense-organs." But Modern Science has not hesitated to bestow the names so long withheld. The most advanced scientific writers do not hesitate to state that in reaction, chemical response, etc., may be seen indications of rudimentary sensation. Haeckel says: "I cannot imagine the simplest chemical and physical process without attributing the movement of the material particles to unconscious sensation. The idea of Chemical Affinity consists in the fact that the various chemical elements perceive the qualitative differences in other elements and experience 'pleasure' or 'revulsion' at contacts with them, and execute their specific movements on this ground." He also speaks of the sensitiveness of "plasm," or the substance of "living bodies," as being "only a superior degree of the general irritability of substance."
From the very beginning of life—among the particles of inorganic substance—there are signs of something resembling sensation and a response to it. Writers have been hesitant to call this phenomenon "sensation" or "sensibility" because those terms are too closely linked to "senses" and "sense organs." However, modern science has boldly adopted these terms that were long avoided. The most advanced scientific writers openly state that in reactions, chemical responses, and so on, we can see signs of basic sensation. Haeckel says, "I can’t imagine the simplest chemical and physical process without attributing the movement of material particles to unconscious sensation. The idea of chemical affinity is based on the fact that different chemical elements perceive the qualitative differences in other elements and experience 'pleasure' or 'revulsion' when they come into contact with them, responding accordingly." He also mentions the sensitivity of "plasm," or the substance of "living bodies," as being "just a higher degree of the general irritability of substance."
Chemical reaction, between atoms, is spoken of by chemists as a "sensitive" reaction. Sensitiveness is found even in the Particles of Inorganic Substance, and may be regarded as the first glimmerings of thought. Science recognizes this when it speaks of the unconscious sensation of the Particles as athesis or "feeling," and the unconscious Will that responds thereto, as tropesis, or "inclination." Haeckel says of this that "Sensation perceives the different qualities of the stimuli, and feeling the quantity," and also, "We may ascribe the feeling of pleasure and pain (in the contact with qualitatively differing atoms) to all atoms, and so explain the elective affinity in chemistry (attraction of loving atoms, inclination; repulsion of hating atoms, disinclination)."
Chemical reactions between atoms are referred to by chemists as "sensitive" reactions. Sensitivity is present even in the particles of inorganic substances and can be seen as the first hints of thought. Science acknowledges this by describing the unconscious sensation of the particles as athesis or "feeling," and the unconscious will that responds to it as tropesis, or "inclination." Haeckel states that "sensation identifies the different qualities of the stimuli, and feeling identifies the quantity," and adds, "We can attribute the feelings of pleasure and pain (when interacting with qualitatively different atoms) to all atoms, thus explaining the elective affinity in chemistry (the attraction of 'loving' atoms, inclination; the repulsion of 'hating' atoms, disinclination)."
It is impossible to form a clear or intelligent idea of the phenomenon of chemical affinity, etc., unless we attribute to the Atoms something akin to Sensation. It is likewise impossible to understand the actions of the Molecules, unless we think of them as possessing something akin to Sensation. The Law of Attraction is based upon Mental States in Substance. The response of Inorganic Substance to Electricity and Magnetism is also another evidence of Sensation and the response thereto.
It’s impossible to have a clear or intelligent understanding of chemical affinity and similar phenomena without attributing something like Sensation to atoms. It’s also impossible to grasp the behavior of molecules without considering them as having something similar to Sensation. The Law of Attraction is rooted in the mental states of substances. The way inorganic substances respond to electricity and magnetism further supports the idea of Sensation and their responses to it.
In the movements and operations of crystal-life we obtain evidences of still a little higher forms of Sensation and response thereto. The action of crystallization is very near akin to that of some low forms of plasmic action. In fact, the "missing link" between plant life and the crystals is claimed to have been found in some recent discoveries of Science, the connection being found in certain crystals in the interior of plants composed of carbon combinations, and resembling the inorganic crystals in many ways.
In the movements and activities of crystal life, we find evidence of even more advanced forms of sensation and their responses. The process of crystallization is quite similar to some basic forms of plasmic activity. In fact, recent scientific discoveries claim to have uncovered the "missing link" between plant life and crystals, identifying this connection in certain crystals found inside plants that are made up of carbon compounds and resemble inorganic crystals in many ways.
Crystals grow along certain lines and forms up to a certain size. Then they begin to form "baby-crystals" on their surfaces, which then take on the growth—the processes being almost analogous to cell-life. Processes akin to fermentation have been detected among chemicals. In many ways it may be seen that the beginning of Mental Life must be looked for among the Minerals and Particles—the latter, be it remembered, composing not only inorganic, but also Organic Substance.
Crystals develop in specific shapes and patterns until they reach a certain size. After that, they start to grow "baby crystals" on their surfaces, which continue to grow—this process is quite similar to how cells multiply. Similar processes, like fermentation, have been observed among chemicals. In many ways, we should consider that the origins of mental life can be found in minerals and particles—the latter, remember, make up not just inorganic matter, but also organic substances.
As we advance in the scale of life, we are met with constantly increasing unfoldment of mentation, the simple giving place to the complex manifestations. Passing by the simple vital processes of the monera, or single-celled "things," we notice the higher forms of cell life, with growing sensibility or sensation. Then we come to the cell-groups, in which the individual cells manifest sensation of a kind, coupled with a community-sensation. Food is distinguished, selected and captured, and movements exercised in pursuit of the same. The living thing is beginning to manifest more complex mental states. Then the stage of the lower plants is reached, and we notice the varied phenomena of that region, evidencing an increased sensitiveness, although there are practically no signs of special organs of sense. Then we pass on to the higher plant life, in which begin to manifest certain "sensitive-cells," or groups of such cells, which are rudimentary sense organs. Then the forms of animal life, and considered with rising degrees of sensations and growing sense apparatus, or sense organs, gradually unfolding into something like nervous systems.
As we move up the hierarchy of life, we encounter an ever-growing development of thinking, where the simple gives way to more complex expressions. Skipping over the basic life processes of monera, or single-celled organisms, we observe more advanced forms of cellular life, which exhibit increasing sensitivity or sensation. Next, we reach groups of cells where individual cells show a kind of sensation, along with a shared sensation among the group. They identify, select, and capture food, and they move in pursuit of it. Living beings begin to show more complex mental states. Then we enter the realm of lower plants, where we notice various phenomena indicating heightened sensitivity, even though there are almost no signs of specialized sense organs. We then advance to higher plant life, where we see the emergence of certain "sensitive cells," or clusters of such cells that serve as rudimentary sense organs. Following that, we encounter forms of animal life, which are characterized by increasing levels of sensation and a developing array of sense organs, gradually evolving into something resembling nervous systems.
Among the lower animal forms there are varying degrees of mentation with accompanying nerve centers and sense-organs, but little or no signs of consciousness, gradually ascending until we have dawning consciousness in the reptile kingdom, etc., and fuller consciousness and a degree of intelligent thought in the still higher forms, gradually increasing until we reach the plane of the highest mammals, such as the horse, dog, elephant, ape, etc., which animals have complex nervous systems, brains and well developed consciousness. We need not further consider the forms of mentation in the forms of life below the Conscious stage, for that would carry us far from our subject.
Among lower animal species, there are different levels of mental activity along with nerve centers and sense organs, but there are few to no signs of consciousness. This gradually progresses until we see the beginnings of consciousness in reptiles and more developed consciousness and some intelligent thought in even higher forms. It keeps increasing until we reach the level of the most advanced mammals, like horses, dogs, elephants, and apes, which have complex nervous systems, brains, and well-developed consciousness. We don’t need to explore mental activity in life forms below the conscious stage, as that would take us too far from our topic.
Among the higher forms of animal life, after a "dawn period" or semi-consciousness, we come to forms of life among the lower animals possessing a well developed degree of mental action and Consciousness, the latter being called by psychologists "Simple Consciousness," but which term we consider too indefinite, and which we will term "Physical Consciousness," which will give a fair idea of the thing itself. We use the word "Physical" in the double sense of "External," and "Relating to the material structure of a living being," both of which definitions are found in the dictionaries. And that is just what Physical Consciousness really is—an "awareness" in the mind, or a "consciousness" of the "external" world as evidenced by the senses; and of the "body" of the animal or person. The animal or person thinking on the plane of Physical Consciousness (all the higher animals do, and many men seem unable to rise much higher) identifies itself with the physical body, and is conscious only of thoughts of that body and the outside world. It "knows," but not being conscious of mental operations, or of the existence of its mind, it does not "know that it knows." This form of consciousness, while infinitely above the mentation of the nonconscious plane of "sansation," is like a different world of thought from the consciousness of the highly developed intellectual man of our age and race.
Among the higher forms of animal life, after a "dawn period" or semi-consciousness, we encounter lower animals with a well-developed level of mental activity and consciousness. Psychologists refer to this as "Simple Consciousness," but we think that term is too vague, so we will call it "Physical Consciousness," which more accurately reflects the concept. The word "Physical" is used here in two ways: "External," and "Relating to the material structure of a living being," both definitions found in dictionaries. And that's exactly what Physical Consciousness is—an "awareness" in the mind or a "consciousness" of the "external" world as perceived through the senses; and of the "body" of the animal or person. An animal or person operating on the level of Physical Consciousness (which all higher animals do, and many humans seem unable to progress much beyond) identifies itself with its physical body and is conscious only of thoughts related to that body and the outside world. It "knows," but since it is not aware of its mental processes or the existence of its mind, it does not "know that it knows." This form of consciousness, while significantly more advanced than the non-conscious state of "sansation," feels entirely different from the consciousness of a highly developed intellectual human of our era and species.
It is difficult for a man to form an idea of the Physical Consciousness of the lower animals and savages, particularly as he finds it difficult to understand his own consciousness except by the act of being conscious. But observation and reason have given us a fair degree of understanding of what this Physical Consciousness of the animal is like—or at least in what respect it differs from our own consciousness. Let us take a favorite illustration. A horse standing out in the cold sleet and rain undoubtedly feels the discomfort, and possibly pain, for we know by observation that animals feel both. But he is not able to analyze his mental states and wonder when his master will come out to him—think how cruel it is to keep him out of the warm stable—wonder whether he will be taken out in the cold again tomorrow—feel envious of other horses who are indoors—wonder why he is compelled to be out cold nights, etc., etc.,—in short, he does not think as would a reasoning man under such circumstances. He is aware of the discomfort, just as would be the man—and he would run home if he could just as would the man. But he is not able to pity himself, nor to think about his personality as would the man, nor does he wonder whether such a life is worth living, after all. He "knows," but is not able to think of himself as knowing—he does not "know that he knows," as we do. He experiences the physical pain and discomfort, but is spared the mental discomfort and concern arising from the physical, which man so often experiences.
It's hard for a person to grasp the Physical Consciousness of lower animals and primitive people, especially since he struggles to understand his own consciousness unless he’s conscious. However, observation and reason have given us a decent understanding of what this Physical Consciousness in animals is like—or at least how it differs from our own consciousness. Let's consider a common example. A horse standing out in the cold sleet and rain definitely feels discomfort and possibly pain, since we know from observation that animals can feel both. But he can’t analyze his mental states or wonder when his owner will come to him—think about how cruel it is to leave him out of the warm stable—wonder if he’ll have to face the cold again tomorrow—feel envious of other horses who are inside—question why he has to be out in the cold at night, and so on—basically, he doesn’t think like a reasoning person would in that situation. He knows he’s uncomfortable, just like a person would, and he would run home if he could, just like a person. But he can’t feel sorry for himself, think about his identity like a person does, or wonder if such a life is even worth living. He "knows," but he can't think of himself as knowing—he doesn't "know that he knows" like we do. He feels the physical pain and discomfort, but he's spared the mental distress and anxiety that often come with physical pain, which people frequently experience.
The animal cannot shift its consciousness from the sensations of the outer world to the inner states of being. It is not able to "know itself." The difference may be clumsily illustrated by the example of a man feeling, seeing or hearing something that gives him a pleasurable sensation, or the reverse. He is conscious of the feeling or sensation, and that it is pleasurable or otherwise. That is Physical Consciousness, and the animal may share it with him. But it stops right there with the animal. But the man may begin to wonder why the sensation is pleasurable and to associate it with other things and persons; or speculate why he dislikes it, what will follow, and so on—that is Mental Consciousness, because he recognizes an inward self, and is turning his attention inward. He may see another man and experience a feeling or sensation of attraction or aversion—like or dislike. This is Physical Consciousness, and an animal also may experience the sensation. But the man goes further than the animal, and wonders just what there is about the man he likes or detests, and may compare himself to the man and wonder whether the latter feels as he does, and so on—this is Mental Consciousness.
The animal can't shift its awareness from the sensations of the outside world to its own inner experiences. It can't "know itself." A clumsy example of the difference is a man who feels, sees, or hears something that gives him pleasure, or the opposite. He is aware of the feeling or sensation and recognizes whether it is enjoyable or not. That’s Physical Consciousness, which the animal may share. But that's where it ends for the animal. The man might start to wonder why the sensation is pleasurable and connect it to other things and people; or he might question why he dislikes it, what might come next, and so on—this is Mental Consciousness, because he acknowledges an inner self and turns his focus inward. He may see another man and feel attracted to him or dislike him—this is Physical Consciousness, which an animal can also experience. But the man goes deeper than the animal and thinks about what it is about that man that he likes or dislikes, and he might compare himself to him, wondering if the other man feels the same way—this is Mental Consciousness.
In animals the mental gaze is freely directed outward, and never returns upon itself. In man the mental gaze may be directed inward, or may return inward after its outward journey. The animal "knows"—the man not only "knows," but he "knows that he knows," and is able to investigate that "knowing" and speculate about it. We call this higher consciousness Mental Consciousness. The operation of Physical Consciousness we call Instinct—the operation of Mental Consciousness we call Reason.
In animals, their mental focus is easily directed outward and does not turn back on itself. In humans, the mental focus can move inward or return inward after looking outward. An animal "knows"—a human not only "knows" but is also aware that he "knows," and can explore that "knowing" and think about it. We refer to this advanced awareness as Mental Consciousness. The function of Physical Consciousness is called Instinct, while the function of Mental Consciousness is called Reason.
The Man who has Mental Consciousness not only "feels" or "senses" things, but he has words or mental concepts of these feelings and sensations and may think of himself as experiencing them, separating himself, the sensation or feeling, and the thing felt or sensed. The man is able to think: "I feel; I hear; I see; I smell; I taste; I desire; I do," etc., etc. The very words indicate Mental Consciousness recognizing mental states and giving them names, and also recognizing something called "I" that experiences the sensations. This latter fact has caused psychologists to speak of this stage as "Self-consciousness," but we reserve this idea of the "I" consciousness for a higher stage.
The person with mental awareness doesn't just "feel" or "sense" things; they also have words or mental concepts for these feelings and sensations and can think of themselves as experiencing them, distinguishing themselves from the sensation or feeling and the thing being felt or sensed. They can think: "I feel; I hear; I see; I smell; I taste; I desire; I act," and so on. These words show that mental awareness is identifying mental states and naming them, while also recognizing something called "I" that experiences these sensations. This fact has led psychologists to refer to this stage as "self-consciousness," but we save the notion of "I" consciousness for a higher level.
The animal experiences something that gives it the impressions or feeling that we call "pain," "hurt," "pleasant," "sweet," "bitter," etc., all being forms of sensation, but it is unable to think of them in words. The pain seems to be a part of itself, although possibly associated with some person or thing that caused it. The study of the unfoldment of consciousness in a young baby will give one a far better idea of the grades and distinctions than can be obtained from reading mere words.
The animal experiences something that gives it the impressions or feelings we call "pain," "hurt," "pleasant," "sweet," "bitter," etc., all being forms of sensation, but it can't think of them in words. The pain feels like a part of itself, although it might be linked to someone or something that caused it. Observing the development of consciousness in a young baby provides a much clearer understanding of the different levels and distinctions than simply reading words can offer.
Mental Consciousness is a growth. As Halleck says, "Many persons never have more than a misty idea of such a mental attitude. They always take themselves for granted, and never turn the gaze inward." It has been doubted whether the savages have developed Self-consciousness, and even many men of our own race seem to be but little above the animals in intellect and consciousness. They do not seem able to "know themselves" even slightly. To them the "I" seems to be a purely physical thing—a body having desires and feeling but little more. They are able to feel an act, but scarcely more. They are not able to set aside any physical "not—I," being utterly unable to think of themselves as anything else but a Body. The "I" and the Body are one with them, and they seem incapable of distinguishing between them.
Mental consciousness is a development. As Halleck says, "Many people never have more than a vague idea of this mental attitude. They always take themselves for granted and never look inward." There's been doubt about whether primitive people have developed self-consciousness, and even many people from our own culture seem to be only slightly more advanced than animals in intellect and awareness. They don’t appear to be able to "know themselves" even a little. For them, the "I" seems to be just a physical entity—a body with desires, but not much more. They can feel an action, but little beyond that. They are unable to set aside any physical "not-I," being completely incapable of thinking of themselves as anything other than a body. The "I" and the body are the same to them, and they seem unable to differentiate between the two.
Then comes another stage in which mental-consciousness proper sets in. The man begins to realize that he has "a mind." He is able to "know himself" as a mental being, and to turn the gaze inward a little. This period of development may be noticed in young children. For a time they speak of themselves as a third person, until finally they begin to say "I." Then a little later comes the ability to know their own mental states as such—they know that they have a mind, and are able to distinguish between it and the body. It is related that some children experience a feeling of terror when they pass into this stage. They exhibit signs of bashfulness and what is commonly termed "self-consciousness" in that sense. Some tell us in after years that when they became aware of themselves as an entity they were overcome with alarm, as if by a sense of loneliness and apartness from the Universe. Young people often feel this way for several years. There seems to be a distinct feeling that the Universe is antagonistic to and set apart from them.
Then comes another stage where true mental awareness begins. The person starts to realize that they have "a mind." They can "know themselves" as a mental being and can look inward a bit. This phase of development can be seen in young children. For a while, they refer to themselves in the third person, but eventually, they start saying "I." Then, a little later, they gain the ability to recognize their own mental states—they understand that they have a mind and can distinguish it from their body. It’s noted that some children feel a sense of terror when they reach this stage. They show signs of shyness and what is often called "self-consciousness" in that way. Some share later in life that when they became aware of themselves as individuals, they were struck with fear, as if feeling loneliness and separation from the Universe. Many young people experience this feeling for several years. There seems to be a clear sense that the Universe is hostile and disconnected from them.
And, although this feeling of separateness and apartness grows less acute as the man grows older, yet it is always present to a greater or less degree until a still higher stage—the Ego-consciousness is reached, when it disappears as we shall see. And this mental-conscious stage is a hard one for many. They are entangled in a mass of mental states which the man thinks is "himself," and the struggle between the real "I" and its confining sheaths is painful. And it becomes still more painful as the end is neared, for as man advances in mental-consciousness and knowledge he feels more keenly and suffers accordingly. Man eats the fruit of the Tree of Knowledge and begins to suffer, and is driven out of the Garden of Eden of the child and primitive races, who live like the birds of the air and concern themselves not about mental states and problems. But there is deliverance ahead in the shape of a higher consciousness, although but few realize it and still fewer have gained it. Perhaps this lesson may point out the way for you.
And even though this feeling of being separate and disconnected gets less intense as a person gets older, it’s still there to some extent until a higher level—the Ego-consciousness—is reached, at which point it disappears, as we will see. This mental-consciousness stage is challenging for many. They get caught up in a jumble of mental states that they believe represent "themselves," and the struggle between the true "I" and its limiting layers is painful. It becomes even more painful as they approach the end, because as a person gains more mental awareness and knowledge, they feel more deeply and suffer more. People eat from the Tree of Knowledge and start to experience suffering, being cast out of the Garden of Eden like children and primitive peoples, who live freely like birds and don’t worry about mental states and issues. But there is hope ahead in the form of higher consciousness, though only a few recognize it and even fewer have achieved it. Perhaps this lesson can show you the way.
With the birth of mental-consciousness comes the knowledge that there is a mind in others. Man is able to speculate and reason about the mental states of other men, because he recognizes these states within himself. As man advances in the Mental Consciousness he begins to develop a constantly increasing degree and grade of Intellect, and accordingly he attaches the greatest importance to that part of his nature. Some men worship Intellect as a God, ignoring its limitations which other thinkers have pointed out. Such people are apt to reason that because the human intellect (in its present state of development) reports that such a thing must be, or cannot possibly be, that the matter is forever settled. They ignore the fact that it is possible that Man's Intellect, in its present state of unfoldment, may be able to take cognizance of only a very small part of the Universal Fact, and that there may be regions upon regions of Reality and Fact of which he cannot even dream, so far are they removed from his experience. The unfoldment of a new sense would open out a new world and might bring to light facts that would completely revolutionize our entire world of conceptions by reason of the new information it would give us.
With the emergence of mental awareness comes the realization that others have minds too. Humans can think and reason about the mental states of others because they recognize similar states within themselves. As people progress in their mental awareness, they start to develop a deeper and more advanced intellect, placing great importance on this aspect of their nature. Some individuals worship intellect as if it's a deity, overlooking its limitations that other thinkers have pointed out. These people tend to assume that because human intellect (at its current level of development) insists that something must be or absolutely cannot be, that’s the final word on the matter. They ignore the possibility that human intellect, in its present state of development, may only be aware of a tiny fraction of Universal Truth, and that there are vast areas of Reality and Truth beyond their imagination, so distant from their experiences. The development of a new sense could reveal a new world and might uncover facts that would completely transform our entire understanding due to the new information it would provide.
But, nevertheless, from this Mental Consciousness has come the wonderful work of Intellect, as shown in the achievements of Man up to this time, and while we must recognize its limitations, we gladly join in singing its praises. Reason is the tool with which Man is digging into the mine of Facts, bringing to light new treasures every day. This stage of Mental Consciousness is bringing to Man knowledge of himself—knowledge of the Universe—that is well worth the price he pays for it. For Man does pay a price for entrance into this stage—and he pays an increasing price as he advances in its territory, for the higher he advances the more keenly he feels and suffers, as well as enjoys. Capacity for pain is the price Man pays for Attainment, up to a certain stage. His pain passes from the Physical to the Mental consciousness, and he becomes aware of problems that he never dreamt existed, and the lack of an intelligent answer produces mental suffering. And the mental suffering that comes to him from unsatisfied longings, disappointment, the pain of others whom he loves, etc., is far worse than any physical suffering.
But still, from this Mental Consciousness comes the amazing work of Intellect, as seen in what humanity has achieved so far. While we must acknowledge its limits, we happily celebrate its accomplishments. Reason is the tool that humanity uses to dig into the mine of Facts, uncovering new treasures every day. This stage of Mental Consciousness is providing humanity with knowledge of itself and the Universe that is well worth the cost. Because humanity does pay a price to enter this stage—and that price increases as one progresses further, because the higher one advances, the more deeply one feels and suffers, as well as enjoys. The ability to feel pain is the cost humanity pays for Achievement, up to a certain point. His pain shifts from the Physical to the Mental consciousness, and he becomes aware of problems he never imagined existed. The absence of an intelligent answer leads to mental suffering. The mental suffering that arises from unfulfilled desires, disappointment, and the pain of loved ones, etc., is far worse than any physical suffering.
The animal lives its animal life and is contented, for it knows no better. If it has enough to eat—a place to sleep—a mate—it is happy. And some men are likewise. But others find themselves involved in a world of mental discomfort. New wants arise, and the lack of satisfaction brings pain. Civilization becomes more and more complex, and brings its new pains as well as new pleasures. Man attaches himself to "things," and each day creates for himself artificial wants, which he must labor to meet. His Intellect may not lead him upward, but instead may merely enable him to invent new and subtle means and ways of gratifying his senses to a degree impossible to the animals. Some men make a religion of the gratification of their sensuality—their appetites—and become beasts magnified by the power of Intellect. Others become vain, conceited and puffed up with a sense of the importance of their Personality (the false "I"). Others become morbidly introspective, and spend their time analyzing and dissecting their moods, motives, feelings, etc. Others exhaust their capacity for pleasure and happiness, but looking outside for it instead of within, and become blase, bored, ennuied and an affliction to themselves We mention these things not in a spirit of Pessimism but merely to show that even this great Mental Consciousness has a reverse and ugly side as well as the bright face that has been ascribed to it.
The animal lives its life contentedly because it knows no different. If it has enough food, a place to sleep, and a mate, it is happy. Some men are the same. But others get caught up in a world of mental discomfort. New desires emerge, and the lack of fulfillment causes pain. Civilization is becoming increasingly complex, bringing both new challenges and new pleasures. People become attached to "things," creating artificial wants for themselves each day that they must work to fulfill. Their intellect might not elevate them; instead, it may just help them invent new and clever ways to satisfy their senses to a level that animals can't. Some people turn the pursuit of their desires into a kind of religion, becoming more like beasts, amplified by their intellect. Others become vain, arrogant, and overly concerned with the significance of their personal identity (the false "I"). Some become obsessively introspective, spending their time analyzing their moods, motives, feelings, and so on. Others exhaust their ability to enjoy pleasure and happiness by searching for it outside themselves instead of within, becoming blase, bored, ennuied, and a burden to themselves. We mention these observations not out of pessimism, but simply to illustrate that even this heightened mental awareness has a dark and ugly side, alongside the bright aspects often attributed to it.
As man reaches the higher stages of this Mental Consciousness, and the next higher stage begins to dawn upon him, he is apt to feel more keenly than ever the insufficiency of Life as it appears to him. He is unable to understand Himself—his origin, destiny, purpose and nature—and he chafes against the bars of the cage of Intellect in which he is confined. He asks himself the question, "Whence come I—Whither go I—What is the object of my Existence?" He becomes dissatisfied with the answers the world has to give him to these questions, and he cries aloud in despair—and but the answer of his own voice comes back to him from the impassable walls with which he is surrounded. He does not realize that his answer must come from Within—but so it is.
As a person reaches higher levels of Mental Consciousness and the next stage starts to unfold, they often feel more intensely than ever that life is inadequate as they perceive it. They struggle to understand themselves—where they came from, their purpose, their destiny, and their nature—and feel trapped by the limitations of their Intellect. They ponder questions like, "Where do I come from? Where am I going? What is the purpose of my existence?" They become dissatisfied with the answers the world provides and cry out in despair, only to hear their own voice echoing back from the unyielding walls surrounding them. They don’t realize that the answers they seek need to come from within themselves—but that is indeed the case.
Psychology stops when it reaches the limits of Mental Consciousness, or as it calls it "Self-Consciousness," and denies that there is anything beyond—any unexplored regions of the Mind. It laughs at the reports that come from those who have penetrated farther within the recesses of their being, and dismisses the reports as mere "dreams," "fantasies," "illusions," "ecstatic imaginings," "abnormal states," etc., etc. But, nevertheless, there are schools of thought that teach of these higher states, and there are men of all ages and races that have entered them and have reported concerning them. And we feel justified in asking you to take them into consideration.
Psychology stops at the boundaries of Mental Consciousness, or what it refers to as "Self-Consciousness," and insists that there’s nothing beyond that—no unexplored areas of the Mind. It ridicules the accounts from those who have delved deeper into their inner selves, dismissing these accounts as mere "dreams," "fantasies," "illusions," "ecstatic imaginings," "abnormal states," and so on. However, there are schools of thought that discuss these higher states, and people from various ages and backgrounds have experienced them and shared their insights. We believe it’s reasonable to ask you to consider these perspectives.
There are two planes of Consciousness, of which we feel it proper to speak, for we have obtained more or less information regarding them. There are still higher planes, but they belong to higher phases of life than are dealt with here.
There are two levels of consciousness that we feel it’s important to discuss, as we have gathered some information about them. There are even higher levels, but those pertain to more advanced stages of life than what we cover here.
The first of these planes or states of Consciousness, above the "Self-Consciousness" of the psychologists (which we have called "Mental Consciousness") may be called "Ego-consciousness," for it brings an "awareness" of the Reality of the Ego. This "awareness" is far above the Self-consciousness of the man who is able to distinguish "I" from "You," and to give it a name. And far above the consciousness that enables a man, as he rises in the scale, to distinguish the "I" from faculty after faculty of the mind, which he is able to recognize as "not—I," until he finds left a mental something that he cannot set aside, which he calls "I"—although this stage alone is very much higher than that of the average of the race, and is a high degree of Attainment itself. It is akin to this last stage, and yet still fuller and more complete. In the dawning of Ego Consciousness the "I" recognizes itself still more clearly and, more than this, is fully imbued with a sense and "awareness" of its own Reality, unknown to it before. This awareness is not a mere matter of reasoning—it is a "consciousness," just as is Physical Consciousness and Mental Consciousness something different from an "intellectual conviction." It is a Knowing, not a Thinking or Believing. The "I" knows that it is Real—that it has its roots in the Supreme Reality underlying all the Universe, and partakes of its Essence. It does not know what this Reality is, but it knows that it is Real, and something different from anything in the world of name, form, number, time, space, cause and effect—something Transcendental and surpassing all human experience. And knowing this, it knows that it cannot be destroyed or hurt; cannot die, but is immortal; and that there is Something which is the very essence of Good behind of, underneath and even in itself. And in this certainty and consciousness is there Peace, Understanding and Power. When it fully bursts upon one, Doubt, Fear, Unrest and Dissatisfaction drop from him like wornout garments and he finds himself clothed in the Faith that Knows; Fearlessness; Restfulness; Satisfaction. Then he is able to say understandingly and with meaning "I AM."
The first of these planes or states of consciousness, above the "self-awareness" of psychologists (which we call "mental consciousness"), can be called "ego-consciousness," as it brings an "awareness" of the reality of the ego. This "awareness" is much greater than the self-awareness of a person who can distinguish "I" from "you" and can name it. It's also higher than the consciousness that allows a person, as they progress, to differentiate the "I" from various faculties of the mind that they recognize as "not-I," until they find a mental aspect they cannot dismiss, which they label "I." This stage is already significantly higher than the average person's level and is a significant achievement in itself. It is similar to this last stage but even fuller and more complete. In the emergence of ego consciousness, the "I" recognizes itself more clearly and, more importantly, is fully infused with an awareness of its own reality, previously unknown to it. This awareness is not simply a matter of reasoning; it is a "consciousness," just as physical consciousness and mental consciousness are distinct from an "intellectual conviction." It is a knowing, not a thinking or believing. The "I" knows that it is real—that its roots lie in the supreme reality that underlies the entire universe and that it shares in its essence. It does not know exactly what this reality is, but it knows that it is real and is something different from anything in the world of names, forms, numbers, time, space, causes, and effects—something transcendental and beyond all human experience. And knowing this, it understands that it cannot be destroyed or harmed; it cannot die, but is immortal; and that there is something that is the very essence of good behind, underneath, and even in itself. In this certainty and consciousness lies peace, understanding, and power. When this realization fully dawns, doubt, fear, unrest, and dissatisfaction fall away like worn-out garments, and the person finds themselves clothed in the faith that knows; in fearlessness; in tranquility; in satisfaction. Then they can express with understanding and meaning, "I AM."
This Ego Consciousness is coming to many as a dawning knowledge—the light is just rising from behind the hills. To others it has come gradually and slowly, but fully, and they now live in the full light of the consciousness. Others it has burst upon like a flash, or vision—like a light falling from the clear sky, almost blinding them at first, but leaving them changed men and women, possessed of that something that cannot be understood by or described to those who have not experienced it. This last stage is called "Illumination" in one of its forms.
This awareness of the self is emerging for many people as a new understanding—the light is just starting to rise beyond the hills. For others, it has come gradually and slowly but completely, and they now live in the bright clarity of this awareness. For some, it's hit them like a thunderbolt, or a vision—like a blinding light coming from a clear sky, initially overwhelming them, but ultimately transforming them into people who possess an insight that cannot be fully understood or explained to those who haven't experienced it. This final stage is referred to as "Illumination" in one of its forms.
The man of the Ego Consciousness may not understand the Riddle of the Universe or be able to give an answer to the great Questions of Life—but he has ceased to worry about them—they now disturb him not. He may use his intellect upon them as before, but never with the feeling that in their intellectual solution rests his happiness or peace of mind. He knows that he stands on solid rock, and though the storms of the world of matter and force may beat upon him, he will not be hurt. This and other things he knows. He cannot prove these things to others, for they are not demonstrable by argument—he himself did not get them in that way. And so he says but little about it—but lives his life as if he knew them not, so far as outward appearances go. But inwardly he is a changed man—his life is different from that of his brothers, for while their souls are wrapped in slumber or are tossing in troubled dreams, his Soul has awakened and is gazing upon the world with bright and fearless eyes. There are, of course, different stages or degrees of this Consciousness, just as there are in the lower planes of consciousness. Some have it to a slight degree, while others have it fully. Perhaps this lesson will tell some of its readers just what is the thing that has "happened" to them and which they hesitate to speak of to their closest friend or life companion. To others it may open the way to a fuller realization. We sincerely trust so, for one does not begin to Live until he knows the "I" as Reality.
The person with Ego Consciousness might not grasp the Mystery of the Universe or provide answers to Life's big Questions—but he no longer worries about them; they don't bother him anymore. He can still analyze them as he did before, but he doesn't believe that finding intellectual answers will bring him happiness or peace of mind. He knows he stands on firm ground, and even though the storms of the material world may batter him, he won’t be harmed. He understands this and other things. He can’t prove these insights to others because they can't be demonstrated through argument—he didn’t acquire them that way himself. So, he doesn’t talk much about it—but he lives his life as if he hadn’t discovered these truths, at least on the surface. However, inside, he’s a changed person—his life is different from that of others, because while their souls are either in deep slumber or troubled by nightmares, his Soul has awakened and looks at the world with bright and fearless eyes. Naturally, there are various stages or degrees of this Consciousness, just like there are in lower levels of awareness. Some have it only a little, while others possess it fully. Perhaps this message will help some readers understand what has "happened" to them, something they hesitate to discuss with their closest friends or partners. For others, it may pave the way to a deeper understanding. We sincerely hope so, because one doesn’t truly begin to Live until they recognize the "I" as Reality.
There is a stage still higher than this last mentioned but it has come to but very few of the race. Reports of it come from all times, races, countries. It has been called "Cosmic Consciousness," and is described as an awareness of the Oneness of Life—that is, a consciousness that the Universe is filled with One Life—an actual perception and "awareness" that the Universe is full of Life, Motion and Mind, and that there is no such thing as Blind Force, or Dead Matter, but that All is alive, vibrating and intelligent. That is, of course, that the Real Universe, which is the Essence or background of the Universe of Matter, Energy and Mind, is as they describe. In fact, the description of those who have had glimpses of this state would indicate that they see the Universe as All Mind—that All is Mind at the last. This form of consciousness has been experienced by men here and there—only a few—in moments of "Illumination," the period lasting but a very short space of time, then fading away, leaving but a memory. In the moment of the "Illumination" there came to those experiencing it a sense of "intouch-ness" with Universal Knowledge and Life, impossible to describe, accompanied by a Joy beyond understanding.
There is a level even higher than the one just mentioned, but very few people have reached it. Accounts of it come from all times, cultures, and countries. It's called "Cosmic Consciousness" and is described as an awareness of the Oneness of Life—that is, a consciousness that the Universe is filled with One Life—an actual perception and understanding that the Universe is brimming with Life, Motion, and Mind, and that there’s no such thing as Blind Force or Dead Matter; everything is alive, vibrating, and intelligent. This means that the Real Universe, which is the Essence or foundation of the Universe of Matter, Energy, and Mind, is as they describe. In fact, those who have glimpsed this state suggest that they see the Universe as entirely Mind—that everything is ultimately Mind. This level of consciousness has been experienced by only a handful of people during moments of "Illumination," which lasts just a brief time before fading away, leaving only a memory. In that moment of "Illumination," those experiencing it felt a sense of being connected to Universal Knowledge and Life, something that’s hard to describe, accompanied by a Joy beyond comprehension.
Regarding this last, "Cosmic Consciousness," we would state that it means more than an intellectual conviction, belief or realization of the facts as stated, for an actual vision and consciousness of these things came in the moment of Illumination. Some others report that they have a deep abiding sense of the reality of the facts described by the report of the Illumined, but have not experienced the "vision" or ecstasy referred to. These last people seem to have with them always the same mental state as that possessed by those who had the "vision" and passed out of it, carrying with them the remembrance and feeling, but not the actual consciousness attained at the moment. They agree upon the essential particulars of the reports. Dr. Maurice Bucke, now passed out of this plane of life, wrote a book entitled "Cosmic Consciousness," in which he describes a number of these cases, including his own, Walt Whitman's and others, and in which he holds that this stage of consciousness is before the race and will gradually come to it in the future. He holds that the manifestation of it which has come to some few of the race, as above stated, is but the first beams of the sun which are flashing upon us and which are but prophecies of the appearance of the great body of light itself.
Regarding this last concept, "Cosmic Consciousness," we want to emphasize that it represents more than just an intellectual belief, realization, or acknowledgment of the facts as presented. An actual vision and consciousness of these truths occur at the moment of Illumination. Some individuals report having a deep, lasting sense of the reality of what the Illumined have described, but they haven't experienced the "vision" or ecstasy mentioned. These people seem to maintain the same mental state as those who did have the "vision" and moved beyond it, holding onto the memory and feeling but not the actual consciousness reached at that moment. They agree on the essential details of the accounts. Dr. Maurice Bucke, who has since passed away, wrote a book called "Cosmic Consciousness," where he outlines several of these cases, including his own, Walt Whitman's, and others. He believes that this stage of consciousness is ahead of humanity and will gradually emerge in the future. He argues that the manifestations experienced by a few individuals, as mentioned above, are merely the first rays of sunlight breaking through, foreshadowing the arrival of the greater body of light itself.
We shall not here consider at length the reports of certain great religious personages of the past, who have left records that in moments of great spiritual exaltation they became conscious of "being in the presence of the Absolute," or perhaps within the radius of "the light of Its countenance." We have great respect for these reports, and have every reason for believing many of them authentic, notwithstanding the conflicting reports that have been handed down to us by those experiencing them. These reports are conflicting because of the fact that the minds of those who had these glimpses of consciousness were not prepared or trained to fully understand the nature of the phenomena. They found themselves in the spiritual presence of Something of awful grandeur and spiritual rank, and were completely dazed and bewildered at the sight. They did not understand the nature of the Absolute, and when they had sufficiently recovered they reported that they had been in the "presence of God"—the word "God" meaning their particular conception of Deity—that is, the one appearing as Deity in their own particular religious creed or school. They saw nothing to cause them to identify this Something with their particular conception of Deity, except that they thought that "it must be God," and knowing no other God except their own particular conception, they naturally identifying the Something with "God" as they conceived Him to be. And their reports naturally were along these lines.
We won't go into detail about the accounts of some significant religious figures from the past who documented experiences where they felt they were "in the presence of the Absolute" or encountered "the light of Its countenance" during intense spiritual moments. We respect these accounts and believe many of them are genuine, despite the conflicting narratives passed down from those who experienced them. These discrepancies arise because the minds of those who glimpsed this consciousness weren't equipped or trained to fully grasp the nature of what they encountered. They found themselves in the spiritual presence of something incredibly profound and impressive, leaving them dazed and confused by the experience. They didn't comprehend the essence of the Absolute, and once they regained their composure, they described it as being in the "presence of God"—with "God" reflecting their own understanding of divinity, which could be seen as the deity recognized within their specific religious tradition. They observed nothing that would specifically link this entity to their personal view of God, except that they believed "it must be God," and since they only knew their own concept of God, they naturally equated this entity with "God" as they understood Him to be. Consequently, their reports were mostly in this vein.
Thus the reports of all religions are filled with accounts of the so-called miraculous occurrences. The Catholic saint reports that he "saw of light of God's countenance," and the non-Catholic reports likewise regarding God as he knows him. The Mohammedan reports that he caught a glimpse of the face of Allah, and the Buddhist tells us that he saw Buddha under the tree. The Brahman has seen the face of Brahma, and the various Hindu sects have men who give similar reports regarding their own particular deities. The Persians have given similar reports, and even the ancient Egyptians have left records of similar occurrences. These conflicting reports have led to the belief, on the part of those who did not understand the nature of the phenomena, that these things were "all imagination" and fancy, if indeed not rank falsehood and imposture. But the Yogis know better than this. They know that underneath all these varying reports there is a common ground of truth, which will be apparent to anyone investigating the matter. They know that all of these reports (except a few based upon fraudulent imitation of the real phenomenon) are based upon truth and are but the bewildered reports of the various observers. They know that these people were temporarily lifted above the ordinary plane of consciousness and were made aware of the existence of a Being or Beings higher than mortal. It does not follow that they saw "God" or the Absolute, for there are many Beings of high spiritual growth and development that would appear to the ordinary mortal as a very God. The Catholic doctrine of Angels and Arch-angels is corroborated by those among the Yogis who have been "behind the Veil," and they give us reports of the "Devas" and other advanced Beings. So the Yogi accepts these reports of the various mystics, saints and inspired ones, and accounts for them all by laws perfectly natural to the students of the Yogi Philosophy, but which appear as supernatural to those who have not studied along these lines.
Thus, reports from all religions are filled with accounts of so-called miraculous events. The Catholic saint claims he "saw the light of God's presence," and non-Catholics share similar insights about God as they understand Him. The Muslim says he caught a glimpse of Allah's face, while the Buddhist tells us he saw Buddha under the tree. The Brahmin has seen the face of Brahma, and various Hindu sects have individuals who share similar experiences about their own deities. The Persians have made similar claims, and even the ancient Egyptians have left records of comparable events. These conflicting accounts have led some, who did not grasp the nature of the phenomena, to believe that these stories are "all imagination" and fantasy, if not outright falsehoods and deception. But the Yogis understand better. They know that beneath all these differing reports lies a shared truth, which will become clear to anyone who investigates the issue. They recognize that most of these reports (aside from a few based on deceitful imitation of the real phenomenon) are grounded in truth and reflect the confused observations of various witnesses. They understand that these individuals were temporarily elevated beyond the normal state of awareness and became aware of a Being or Beings greater than humans. However, it doesn't mean they saw "God" or the Absolute, since many highly spiritual Beings would seem to an average person like a true God. The Catholic belief in Angels and Archangels is supported by those Yogis who have been "behind the Veil," and they provide accounts of the "Devas" and other advanced Beings. Therefore, the Yogi accepts these reports from various mystics, saints, and inspired individuals, and explains them all through laws that are completely natural to students of Yogi Philosophy, yet appear supernatural to those who haven't studied these concepts.
But we cannot speak further of this phase of the subject in this lesson, for a full discussion of it would lead us far away from the phase of the general subject before us. But we wish to be understood as saying that there are certain centers in the mental being of Man from which may come light regarding the existence of the Absolute and higher order of Beings. In fact, from these centers come to man that part of his mental "feelings" that he calls "the religious instinct or intuition." Man does not arrive at that underlying consciousness of "Something Beyond" by means of his Intellect—it is the glimmer of light coming from the higher centers of the Self. He notices these gleams of light, but not understanding them, he proceeds to erect elaborate theological and creedal structures to account for them, the work of the Intellect, however, always lacking that "feeling" that the intuition itself possesses. True religion, no matter under what name it may masquerade, comes from the "heart" and is not comforted or satisfied with these Intellectual explanations, and hence comes that unrest and craving for satisfaction which comes to Man when the light begins to break through.
But we can't discuss this part of the topic in this lesson, as a full discussion would take us far off track from the main subject at hand. However, we want to emphasize that there are specific centers in the human mind that can provide insight into the existence of the Absolute and higher beings. In fact, it's from these centers that people experience what they refer to as the "religious instinct or intuition." Humans don't reach that deep awareness of "Something Beyond" through their intellect—it's a spark of light coming from the higher aspects of the self. They notice these flashes of light but, not fully understanding them, they go on to create complex theological and doctrinal systems to explain them, a product of the intellect that always lacks the "feeling" that the intuition itself has. True religion, regardless of the name it takes on, originates from the "heart" and isn't comforted or fulfilled by these intellectual explanations, which leads to the unrest and longing for satisfaction that arises when the light starts to emerge.
But we must postpone a further discussion of this part of the subject for the present. We shall consider it again in a future lesson in connection with other matters. As we have said, our next two lessons will take upon the inquiry regarding the regions outside of the consciousness of the ordinary man. You will find it a most fascinating and instructive inquiry and one that will open up new fields of thought for many of you.
But we need to put off further discussion of this part of the topic for now. We’ll come back to it in a future lesson alongside other topics. As mentioned, our next two lessons will focus on exploring areas beyond the awareness of the average person. You’ll find it a truly captivating and educational exploration that will open up new avenues of thought for many of you.
MANTRAM (AFFIRMATION.)
I Am a Being far greater and grander than I have as yet conceived. I am unfolding gradually but surely into higher planes of consciousness. I am moving Forward and Upward constantly. My goal is the Realization of the True Self, and I welcome each stage of Unfoldment that leads me toward my aim. I am a manifestation of REALITY. I AM.
I am a being much greater and more magnificent than I have yet imagined. I am slowly but surely evolving into higher levels of awareness. I am continuously moving forward and upward. My goal is to realize my True Self, and I embrace each stage of growth that brings me closer to that goal. I am a manifestation of REALITY. I AM.
THE EIGHTH LESSON.
THE HIGHLANDS AND LOWLANDS OF MIND.
The Self of each of us has a vehicle of expression which we call the Mind, but which vehicle is much larger and far more complex than we are apt to realize. As a writer has said "Our Self is greater than we know; it has peaks above, and lowlands below the plateau of our conscious experience." That which we know as the "conscious mind" is not the Soul. The Soul is not a part of that which we know in consciousness, but, on the contrary, that which we know in consciousness is but a small part of the Soul—the conscious vehicle of a greater Self, or "I."
The Self of each of us has a way to express itself, which we call the Mind, but this way of expression is much bigger and more complex than we tend to realize. As a writer once said, "Our Self is greater than we know; it has peaks above and lowlands below the plateau of our conscious experience." What we refer to as the "conscious mind" is not the Soul. The Soul is not just a part of what we understand in consciousness; instead, what we know in consciousness is just a small part of the Soul—the conscious expression of a greater Self, or "I."
The Yogis have always taught that the mind has many planes of manifestation and action—and that many of its planes operated above and below the plane of consciousness. Western science is beginning to realize this fact, and its theories regarding same may be found in any of the later works on psychology. But this is a matter of recent development in Western science. Until very recently the text books held that Consciousness and Mind were synonymous, and that the Mind was conscious of all of its activities, changes and modifications.
The Yogis have always taught that the mind has many levels of expression and action—and that many of these levels work both above and below the conscious level. Western science is starting to recognize this idea, and you can find discussions about it in recent psychology books. However, this understanding is a relatively new development in Western science. Until quite recently, textbooks claimed that Consciousness and Mind were the same thing, and that the Mind was aware of all its activities, changes, and adjustments.
Liebnitz was one of the first Western philosophers to advance the idea that there were planes of mental activity outside of the plane of consciousness, and since his time the leading thinkers have slowly but surely moved forward to his position.
Liebnitz was one of the first Western philosophers to propose that there are levels of mental activity beyond just consciousness, and since then, major thinkers have gradually progressed toward his viewpoint.
At the present time it is generally conceded that at least ninety per cent of our mental operations take place in the out-of-conscious realm. Prof. Elmer Gates, the well known scientist, has said: "At least ninety per cent of our mental life is sub-conscious. If you will analyze your mental operations you will find that conscious thinking is never a continuous line of consciousness, but a series of conscious data with great intervals of subconscious. We sit and try to solve a problem, and fail. We walk around, try again, and fail. Suddenly an idea dawns that leads to the solution of the problem. The subconscious processes were at work. We do not volitionally create our own thinking. It takes place in us. We are more or less passive recipients. We cannot change the nature of a thought, or of a truth, but we can, as it were, guide the ship by a moving of the helm. Our mentation is largely the result of the great Cosmic Whole upon us."
Right now, it’s widely accepted that at least ninety percent of our mental processes happen outside of our conscious awareness. Professor Elmer Gates, the well-known scientist, stated: "At least ninety percent of our mental life is subconscious. If you analyze your thinking, you'll discover that conscious thought isn't a continuous stream of awareness, but rather a collection of conscious pieces with significant gaps of subconscious activity. We sit down and try to solve a problem, but we struggle. We walk around, take another shot, and still can't succeed. Then, suddenly, an idea comes to us that helps us solve the issue. The subconscious was at work all along. We don’t actively create our thoughts; they happen within us. We’re more like passive receivers. We can't change the nature of a thought or a truth, but we can, in a way, steer the ship by moving the helm. Our thinking mostly results from the influence of the larger Cosmic Whole around us."
Sir William Hamilton says that the sphere of our consciousness is only a small circle in the center of a far wider sphere of action and thought, of which we are conscious through its effects.
Sir William Hamilton says that the area of our awareness is just a small circle in the center of a much larger sphere of action and thought, of which we are aware through its effects.
Taine says: "Outside of a little luminous circle, lies a large ring of twilight, and beyond this an indefinite night; but the events of this twilight and this night are as real as those within the luminous circle."
Taine says: "Outside of a small bright circle, there's a big ring of twilight, and beyond that, an endless night; but the happenings in this twilight and night are just as real as those within the bright circle."
Sir Oliver Lodge, the eminent English scientist, speaking of the planes of the mind, says: "Imagine an iceberg glorying in its crisp solidity, and sparkling pinnacles, resenting attention paid to its submerged self, or supporting region, or to the saline liquid out of which it arose, and into which in due course it will some day return. Or, reversing the metaphor, we might liken our present state to that of the hulls of ships submerged in a dim ocean among strange monsters, propelled in a blind manner through space; proud perhaps of accumulating many barnacles as decoration; only recognizing our destination by bumping against the dock-wall; and with no cognizance of the deck and cabins above us, or the spars and sails—no thought of the sextant, and the compass, and the captain—no perception of the lookout on the mast—of the distant horizon. With no vision of objects far ahead—dangers to be avoided—destinations to be reached—other ships to be spoken to by means other than by bodily contact—a region of sunshine and cloud, of space, or perception, and of intelligence utterly inaccessible to parts below the waterline."
Sir Oliver Lodge, the distinguished English scientist, talks about the planes of the mind: "Picture an iceberg proudly displaying its sharp edges and sparkling peaks, resenting any attention paid to its submerged part or the salty water it came from and will eventually return to. Alternatively, we could compare our current state to the hulls of ships submerged in a murky ocean among strange creatures, moving blindly through space; maybe feeling proud of the barnacles they’ve accumulated as decoration; only recognizing their destination when they bump against the dock; completely unaware of the deck and cabins above, or the masts and sails—no consideration for the sextant, the compass, or the captain—no awareness of the lookout on the mast—or the distant horizon. Without any view of far-off objects—dangers to avoid—destinations to reach—other ships to communicate with in ways beyond physical contact—a realm of sunshine and clouds, of space, perception, and intelligence entirely unreachable by parts below the waterline."
We ask our students to read carefully the above expression of Sir Oliver
Lodge, for it gives one of the clearest and most accurate figures of the
actual state of affairs concerning the mental planes that we have seen in
Western writings.
We ask our students to carefully read the above statement from Sir Oliver
Lodge, as it provides one of the clearest and most accurate descriptions of the
current situation regarding the mental planes that we've encountered in
Western writings.
And other Western writers have noted and spoken of these out-of-conscious realms. Lewes has said: "It is very certain that in every conscious volition—every act that is so characterized—the larger part of it is quite unconscious. It is equally certain that in every perception there are unconscious processes of reproduction and inference. There is a middle distance of sub-consciousness, and a background of unconsciousness."
And other Western writers have pointed out and discussed these unconscious realms. Lewes stated: "It's clear that in every conscious decision—every action marked by it—a significant portion is completely unconscious. It's also clear that in every perception, there are unconscious processes of recall and interpretation. There's a middle ground of subconsciousness and a backdrop of unconsciousness."
Taine has told us that: "Mental events imperceptible to consciousness are far more numerous than the others, and of the world that makes up our being we only perceive the highest points—the lighted-up peaks of a continent whose lower levels remain in the shade. Beneath ordinary sensations are their components, that is to say, the elementary sensations, which must be combined into groups to reach our consciousness."
Taine has told us that: "Mental events that we aren't aware of are far more common than those we notice, and in the world that makes up our being, we only see the highest points—the bright peaks of a continent while its lower areas stay in the dark. Beneath everyday sensations are their building blocks, the basic sensations, which need to be combined into groups to reach our awareness."
Maudsley says: "Examine closely and without bias the ordinary mental operations of daily life, and you will find that consciousness has not one-tenth part of the function therein which it is commonly assumed to have. In every conscious state there are at work conscious, sub-conscious, and infra-conscious energies, the last as indispensable as the first."
Maudsley says: "Take a good, unbiased look at the everyday mental processes, and you'll see that consciousness plays only a tiny fraction of the role we usually think it does. In every conscious moment, there are conscious, subconscious, and infra-conscious energies at play, with the latter being just as essential as the former."
Oliver Wendall Holmes said: "There are thoughts that never emerge into consciousness, which yet make their influence felt among the perceptible mental currents, just as the unseen planets sway the movements of those that are watched and mapped by the astronomer."
Oliver Wendell Holmes said: "There are thoughts that never come to the surface, yet they still impact the visible flow of our minds, just like the hidden planets influence the paths of those that are observed and charted by astronomers."
Many other writers have given us examples and instances of the operation of the out-of-consciousness planes of thought. One has written that when the solution of a problem he had long vainly dealt with, flashed across his mind, he trembled as if in the presence of another being who had communicated a secret to him. All of us have tried to remember a name or similar thing without success, and have then dismissed the matter from our minds, only to have the missing name or thought suddenly presented to our conscious mind a few minutes, or hours, afterwards. Something in our mind was at work hunting up the missing word, and when it found it it presented it to us.
Many other writers have shown us examples of how our unconscious thoughts work. One person wrote that when the solution to a problem he struggled with for a long time suddenly came to him, he felt a tremor as if he were in the presence of another being sharing a secret. We've all tried to remember a name or something similar without success, then pushed it out of our minds, only to have that missing name or thought pop into our heads a few minutes or hours later. Something in our mind was searching for the missing word, and when it found it, it brought it to our attention.
A writer has mentioned what he called "unconscious rumination," which happened to him when he read books presenting new points of view essentially opposed to his previous opinions. After days, weeks, or months, he found that to his great astonishment the old opinions were entirely rearranged, and new ones lodged there. Many examples of this unconscious mental digestion and assimilation are mentioned in the books on the subject written during the past few years.
A writer talked about what he called "unconscious rumination," which happened to him when he read books that presented new viewpoints completely opposite to his previous beliefs. After days, weeks, or even months, he was amazed to find that his old opinions had shifted entirely, and new ones had taken their place. Many examples of this unconscious mental processing and integration are cited in the books on the topic written in recent years.
It is related of Sir W. R. Hamilton that he discovered quarternions one day while walking with his wife in the observatory at Dublin. He relates that he suddenly felt "the galvanic circle of thought" close, and the sparks that fell from it was the fundamental mathematical relations of his problem, which is now an important law in mathematics.
It is said that Sir W. R. Hamilton discovered quaternions one day while walking with his wife at the observatory in Dublin. He describes how he suddenly felt "the galvanic circle of thought" come together, and the sparks that emerged from it were the fundamental mathematical relationships of his problem, which is now a significant law in mathematics.
Dr. Thompson has written: "At times I have had a feeling of the uselessness of all voluntary effort, and also that the matter was working itself clear in my mind. It has many times seemed to me that I was really a passive instrument in the hands of a person not myself. In view of having to wait for the results of these unconscious processes, I have proved the habit of getting together material in advance, and then leaving the mass to digest itself till I am ready to write about it. I delayed for a month the writing of my book 'System of Psychology,' but continued reading the authorities. I would not try to think about the book. I would watch with interest the people passing the windows. One evening when reading the paper, the substance of the missing part of the book flashed upon my mind, and I began to write. This is only a sample of many such experiences."
Dr. Thompson has written: "There have been times when I felt that all my efforts were pointless, and that things were becoming clear in my mind on their own. Often, it seemed like I was just a passive tool in the hands of a force beyond myself. Knowing that I had to wait for the outcomes of these unconscious processes, I developed the habit of gathering information beforehand, then letting it sit until I was ready to write about it. I postponed writing my book 'System of Psychology' for a month but kept reading the relevant sources. I didn’t force myself to think about the book. Instead, I found myself observing people passing by the windows with interest. One evening, while reading the newspaper, the missing part of the book suddenly came to me, and I started writing. This is just one example of many similar experiences."
Berthelot, the founder of Synthetic Chemistry has said that the experiments leading to his wonderful discoveries have never been the result of carefully followed trains of thought—of pure reasoning processes—but have come of themselves, so to speak, from the clear sky.
Berthelot, the founder of Synthetic Chemistry, has said that the experiments leading to his amazing discoveries have never come from carefully followed lines of thought—pure reasoning processes—but have emerged, so to speak, out of the blue.
Mozart has written: "I cannot really say that I can account for my compositions. My ideas flow, and I cannot say whence or how they come. I do not hear in my imagination the parts successively, but I hear them, as it were, all at once. The rest is merely an attempt to reproduce what I have heard."
Mozart has written: "I can't really explain where my compositions come from. My ideas just flow, and I can't tell you where they originate or how they arrive. I don’t hear the parts one by one in my mind; instead, it’s like I hear them all together at once. The rest is just my effort to recreate what I've heard."
Dr. Thompson, above mentioned, has also said: "In writing this work I have been unable to arrange my knowledge of a subject for days and weeks, until I experienced a clearing up of my mind, when I took my pen and unhesitatingly wrote the result. I have best accomplished this by leading the (conscious) mind as far away as possible from the subject upon which I was writing."
Dr. Thompson, as previously mentioned, has also said: "While writing this work, I struggled to organize my thoughts about the subject for days and weeks, until I had a moment of clarity when I picked up my pen and confidently wrote down my conclusions. I found I was most successful when I distracted my conscious mind as much as possible from the topic I was writing about."
Prof. Barrett says: "The mysteriousness of our being is not confined to subtle physiological processes which we have in common with all animal life. There are higher and more capacious powers wrapped up in our human personality than are expressed even by what we know of consciousness, will, or reason. There are supernormal and transcendental powers of which, at present, we only catch occasional glimpses; and behind and beyond the supernormal there are fathomless abysses, the Divine ground of the soul; the ultimate reality of which our consciousness is but the reflection or faint perception. Into such lofty themes I do not propose to enter, they must be forever beyond the scope of human inquiry; nor is it possible within the limits of this paper to give any adequate conception of those mysterious regions of our complex personality, which are open to, and beginning to be disclosed by, scientific investigation."
Prof. Barrett says: "The enigma of our existence isn't limited to subtle physiological processes that we share with all animal life. There are greater and broader powers embedded in our human identity than what we can express even with our understanding of consciousness, will, or reason. There are extraordinary and transcendental capabilities of which we currently only catch occasional glimpses; and beyond these extraordinary aspects lie unfathomable depths, the divine essence of the soul; the ultimate reality of which our consciousness is merely a reflection or faint awareness. I don’t intend to delve into such lofty subjects, as they will always be beyond human exploration; nor is it possible within this paper to provide an adequate understanding of those mysterious aspects of our complex personality that are being opened up and starting to be revealed through scientific research."
Rev. Dr. Andrew Murray has written: "Deeper down than where the soul with its consciousness can enter there is spirit matter linking man with God; and deeper down than the mind and feelings or will—in the unseen depths of the hidden life—there dwells the Spirit of God." This testimony is remarkable, coming from that source, for it corroborates and reiterates the Yogi teachings of the Indwelling Spirit Schofield has written: "Our conscious mind as compared with the unconscious mind, has been likened to the visible spectrum of the sun's rays, as compared to the invisible part which stretches indefinitely on either side. We know now that the chief part of heat comes from the ultra-red rays that show no light; and the main part of the chemical changes in the vegetable world are the results of the ultra-violet rays at the other end of the spectrum, which are equally invisible to the eye, and are recognized only by their potent effects. Indeed as these invisible rays extend indefinitely on both sides of the visible spectrum, so we may say that the mind includes not only the visible or conscious part, and what we have termed the sub-conscious, that which lies below the red line, but the supraconscious mind that lies at the other end—all those regions of higher soul and spirit life, of which we are only at times vaguely conscious, but which always exist, and link us on to eternal verities, on the one side, as surely as the sub-conscious mind links us to the body on the other."
Rev. Dr. Andrew Murray wrote: "Deeper than where the soul with its consciousness can reach lies a spiritual connection between man and God; and deeper than the mind, feelings, or will—in the unseen depths of hidden life—resides the Spirit of God." This statement is significant coming from him, as it supports and echoes the Yogi teachings about the Indwelling Spirit. Schofield wrote: "Our conscious mind, compared to the unconscious mind, has been likened to the visible spectrum of the sun's rays, in contrast to the invisible part that extends indefinitely on both sides. We now know that most of the heat comes from the ultra-red rays, which emit no visible light; and the main part of the chemical changes in the plant world results from the ultra-violet rays on the other end of the spectrum, which are also invisible to the eye and recognized only by their powerful effects. Just as these invisible rays extend endlessly on both sides of the visible spectrum, we can say that the mind encompasses not just the visible or conscious part and what we call the subconscious, which lies below the red line, but also the supraconscious mind that lies at the other end—all those areas of higher soul and spirit life, of which we are only occasionally vaguely aware, yet which always exist and connect us to eternal truths, on one side, just as the subconscious mind connects us to the body on the other."
We know that our students will appreciate the above testimony of Dr.
Schofield, for it is directly in the line of our teachings in the Yogi
Philosophy regarding the Planes of the Mind (see "Fourteen Lessons").
We know that our students will value the testimony of Dr.
Schofield, as it aligns perfectly with our teachings in Yogi
Philosophy about the Planes of the Mind (see "Fourteen Lessons").
We feel justified in quoting further from Dr. Schofield, for he voices in the strongest manner that which the Yogi Philosophy teaches as fundamental truths regarding the mind. Dr. Schofield is an English writer on Psychology, and so far as we know has no tendency toward occultism, his views having been arrived at by careful scientific study and investigation along the lines of Western psychology, which renders his testimony all the more valuable, showing as it does, how the human mind will instinctively find its way to the Truth, even if it has to blaze a new trail through the woods, departing from the beaten tracks of other minds around it, which lack the courage or enterprise to strike out for themselves.
We believe it's important to quote more from Dr. Schofield because he strongly expresses what Yogi Philosophy considers fundamental truths about the mind. Dr. Schofield is an English writer on Psychology and, as far as we know, doesn’t lean toward occultism. His ideas come from careful scientific study and research in Western psychology, making his insights even more valuable. They demonstrate how the human mind will naturally seek the Truth, even if it means forging a new path through the woods, moving away from the familiar routes of others who lack the courage or initiative to explore for themselves.
Dr. Schofield writes: "The mind, indeed, reaches all the way, and while on the one hand it is inspired by the Almighty, on the other it energizes the body, all whose purposive life it originates. We may call the supra-conscious mind the sphere of the spirit life, the sub-conscious the sphere of the body life, and the conscious mind the middle region where both meet."
Dr. Schofield writes: "The mind truly extends in every direction; it's inspired by the Almighty on one side and energizes the body, generating its entire purposeful life on the other. We can refer to the supra-conscious mind as the realm of spiritual life, the sub-conscious as the realm of bodily life, and the conscious mind as the middle ground where both intersect."
Continuing, Dr. Schofield says: "The Spirit of God is said to dwell in believers, and yet, as we have seen, His presence is not the subject of direct consciousness. We would include, therefore, in the supra-conscious, all such spiritual ideas, together with conscience—the voice of God, as Max Muller calls it—which is surely a half-conscious faculty. Moreover, the supra-conscious, like the sub-conscious, is, as we have said, best apprehended when the conscious mind is not active. Visions, meditations, prayers, and even dreams have been undoubtedly occasions of spiritual revelations, and many instances may be adduced as illustrations of the workings of the Spirit apart from the action of reason or mind. The truth apparently is that the mind as a whole is an unconscious state, by that its middle registers, excluding the highest spiritual and lowest physical manifestations, are fitfully illuminated in varying degree by consciousness; and that it is to this illuminated part of the dial that the word "mind," which rightly appertains to the whole, has been limited."
Continuing, Dr. Schofield says: "The Spirit of God is believed to live in believers, and yet, as we've seen, His presence isn't something we directly feel. We should include, then, in the supra-conscious, all of these spiritual concepts, along with conscience—the voice of God, as Max Muller puts it—which is definitely a partly conscious ability. Moreover, the supra-conscious, like the sub-conscious, is, as we've mentioned, best understood when the conscious mind is inactive. Visions, meditations, prayers, and even dreams have certainly provided opportunities for spiritual insights, and there are many examples that illustrate how the Spirit operates without the involvement of reason or rational thought. The reality seems to be that the mind as a whole exists in an unconscious state, where its middle layers, which exclude the highest spiritual and lowest physical expressions, are intermittently illuminated to varying degrees by consciousness; and it's this illuminated part of the spectrum that the term 'mind,' which correctly applies to the whole, is often restricted to."
Oliver Wendell Holmes has said: "The automatic flow of thought is often singularly favored by the fact of listening to a weak continuous discourse, with just enough ideas in it to keep the (conscious) mind busy. The induced current of thought is often rapid and brilliant in inverse ratio to the force of the inducing current."
Oliver Wendell Holmes said: "The automatic flow of thought is often uniquely enhanced by listening to a weak, continuous discourse, with just enough ideas to keep the (conscious) mind occupied. The resulting current of thought is often quick and brilliant, inversely proportional to the strength of the inducing current."
Wundt says: "The unconscious logical processes are carried on with a certainty and regularity which would be impossible where there exists the possibility of error. Our mind is so happily designed that it prepares for us the most important foundations of cognition, whilst we have not the slightest apprehension of the modus operandi. This unconscious soul, like a benevolent stranger, works and makes provisions for our benefit, pouring only the mature fruits into our laps."
Wundt says: "The unconscious logical processes happen with a certainty and consistency that would be impossible if there were a chance of error. Our mind is designed so well that it builds the most important foundations of understanding for us, even though we have no awareness of the modus operandi. This unconscious mind, like a helpful stranger, works and makes arrangements for our benefit, delivering only the ripe rewards into our hands."
A writer in an English magazine interestingly writes: "Intimations reach our consciousness from unconsciousness, that the mind is ready to work, is fresh, is full of ideas." "The grounds of our judgment are often knowledge so remote from consciousness that we cannot bring them to view." "That the human mind includes an unconscious part; that unconscious events occurring in that part are proximate causes of consciousness; that the greater part of human intuitional action is an effect of an unconscious cause; the truth of these propositions is so deducible from ordinary mental events, and is so near the surface that the failure of deduction to forestall induction in the discerning of it may well excite wonder." "Our behavior is influenced by unconscious assumptions respecting our own social and intellectual rank, and that of the one we are addressing. In company we unconsciously assume a bearing quite different from that of the home circle. After being raised to a higher rank the whole behavior subtly and unconsciously changes in accordance with it." And Schofield adds to the last sentence: "This is also the case in a minor degree with different styles and qualities of dress and different environments. Quite unconsciously we change our behavior, carriage, and style, to suit the circumstance."
A writer in an English magazine interestingly writes: "We get hints from our unconscious that the mind is ready to work, is fresh, and is full of ideas." "The basis of our judgment is often knowledge that is so far from our consciousness that we can't bring it to light." "The human mind has an unconscious part; unconscious events in that part are close causes of conscious thought; most of our intuitive actions result from unconscious causes; the truth of these ideas is so clearly evident in everyday mental events that the inability to deduce them before inductive reasoning might be surprising." "Our behavior is shaped by unconscious beliefs about our own social and intellectual status, as well as that of the person we are talking to. In social settings, we unconsciously adopt a different demeanor than we do at home. Once we attain a higher status, our behavior subtly and unconsciously shifts to match it." And Schofield adds to the last sentence: "This also happens, albeit to a lesser extent, with different styles and qualities of clothing and different environments. Without even realizing it, we alter our behavior, posture, and style to fit the situation."
Jensen writes: "When we reflect on anything with the whole force of the mind, we may fall into a state of entire unconsciousness, in which we not only forget the outer world, but also know nothing at all of ourselves and the thoughts passing within us after a time. We then suddenly awake as from a dream, and usually at the same moment the result of our meditations appears as distinctly in consciousness without our knowing how we reached it."
Jensen writes: "When we think deeply about anything, we can become completely unaware, to the point where we forget the outside world and lose track of ourselves and our thoughts over time. Then, we suddenly snap back to reality, almost like waking from a dream, and usually at that moment, the outcome of our thoughts comes to mind clearly, even though we’re unsure how we got there."
Bascom says: "It is inexplicable how premises which lie below consciousness can sustain conclusions in consciousness; how the mind can wittingly take up a mental movement at an advanced stage, having missed its primary steps."
Bascom says: "It's hard to understand how ideas that are below our awareness can support beliefs we are conscious of; how the mind can intentionally engage in a thought process at a later stage, missing the initial steps."
Hamilton and other writers have compared the mind's action to that of a row of billiard balls, of which one is struck and the impetus transmitted throughout the entire row, the result being that only the last ball actually moves, the others remaining in their places. The last ball represents the conscious thought—the other stages in the unconscious mentation. Lewes, speaking of this illustration, says: "Something like this, Hamilton says, seems often to occur in a train of thought, one idea immediately suggesting another into consciousness—this suggestion passing through one or more ideas which do not themselves rise into consciousness. This point, that we are not conscious of the formation of groups, but only of a formed group, may throw light on the existence of unconscious judgments, unconscious reasonings, and unconscious registrations of experience."
Hamilton and other writers have likened how the mind works to a row of billiard balls, where one ball is hit and the force travels along the entire row, resulting in only the last ball moving while the others stay in place. The last ball symbolizes conscious thought, while the other balls represent stages of unconscious thinking. Lewes, referring to this analogy, states: "Something like this, Hamilton suggests, often happens in a chain of thought, where one idea quickly leads to another in our conscious mind—this connection moving through one or more ideas that don’t become conscious themselves. This point, that we aren’t aware of how groups of ideas form but only of the final formed group, might help explain the presence of unconscious judgments, unconscious reasoning, and unconscious recordings of experience."
Many writers have related the process by which the unconscious mentation emerges gradually into the field of consciousness, and the discomfort attending the process. A few examples may prove interesting and instructive.
Many writers have described how unconscious thoughts gradually come into consciousness and the discomfort that comes with this process. A few examples might be interesting and helpful.
Maudsley says: "It is surprising how uncomfortable a person may be made by the obscure idea of something which he ought to have said or done, and which he cannot for the life of him remember. There is an effort of the lost idea to get into consciousness, which is relieved directly the idea bursts into consciousness."
Maudsley says: "It's surprising how uncomfortable someone can feel because of a vague thought of something they should have said or done, but just can’t remember. There’s a struggle for that lost thought to surface, and the discomfort disappears as soon as the thought comes to mind."
Oliver Wendell Holmes said: "There are thoughts that never emerge into consciousness, and which yet make their influence felt among the perceptive mental currents, just as the unseen planets sway the movements of the known ones." The same writer also remarks: "I was told of a business man in Boston who had given up thinking of an important question as too much for him. But he continued so uneasy in his brain that he feared he was threatened with palsy. After some hours the natural solution of the question came to him, worked out, as he believed, in that troubled interval."
Oliver Wendell Holmes said: "There are thoughts that never come to consciousness, yet they still impact the active mental processes, just like unseen planets influence the movements of visible ones." The same author also notes: "I heard about a businessman in Boston who stopped thinking about an important question because he thought it was too much for him. But he remained so restless in his mind that he feared he was at risk of paralysis. After a few hours, the natural solution to his question came to him, developed, as he believed, during that troubled time."
Dr. Schofield mentions several instances of this phase of the workings of the unconscious planes of the mind. We mention a couple that seem interesting and to the point:
Dr. Schofield points out several examples of this aspect of how the unconscious levels of the mind operate. Here are a couple that seem interesting and relevant:
"Last year," says Dr. Schofield, "I was driving to Phillmore Gardens to give some letters to a friend. On the way, a vague uneasiness sprang up, and a voice seemed to say, 'I doubt if you have those letters.' Conscious reason rebuked it, and said, 'Of course you have; you took them out of the drawer specially.' The vague feeling was not satisfied, but could not reply. On arrival I found the letters were in none of my pockets. On returning I found them on the hall table, where they had been placed a moment putting on my gloves."
"Last year," says Dr. Schofield, "I was driving to Phillmore Gardens to drop off some letters to a friend. On the way, I felt a strange uneasiness, and it was like a voice said, 'I doubt you have those letters.' My rational mind dismissed it, telling me, 'Of course you have them; you took them out of the drawer on purpose.' The uneasy feeling wasn't satisfied but had no counterargument. When I arrived, I realized the letters were in none of my pockets. On my way back, I found them on the hall table, where I had put them down for a moment while I was putting on my gloves."
"The other day I had to go to see a patient in Folkestone, in Shakespeare Terrace. I got there very late, and did not stay but drove down to the Pavilion for the night, it being dark and rainy. Next morning at eleven I walked up to find the house, knowing the general direction, though never having walked there before. I went up the main road, and, after passing a certain turning, began to feel a vague uneasiness coming into consciousness, that I had passed the terrace. On asking the way, I found it was so; and the turning was where the uneasiness began. The night before was pitch dark, and very wet, and anything seen from a close carriage was quite unconsciously impressed on my mind."
"The other day, I had to visit a patient in Folkestone, on Shakespeare Terrace. I arrived very late and didn’t stay long; instead, I drove down to the Pavilion for the night since it was dark and raining. The next morning at eleven, I walked up to find the house. I knew the general direction, even though I had never walked there before. I went up the main road and, after passing a certain turn, I started to feel a vague uneasiness that I might have gone too far. When I asked for directions, I learned I had indeed passed the terrace, and that was where the uneasy feeling started. The night before was pitch dark and very wet, and anything I saw from the backseat of the car was completely etched in my mind."
Prof. Kirchener says: "Our consciousness can only grasp one quite clear idea at once. All other ideas are for the time somewhat obscure. They are really existing, but only potentially for consciousness, i.e., they hover, as it were, on our horizon, or beneath the threshold of consciousness. The fact that former ideas suddenly return to consciousness is simply explained by the fact that they have continued psychic existence: and attention is sometimes voluntarily or involuntarily turned away from the present, and the appearance of former ideas is thus made possible."
Prof. Kirchener says: "Our consciousness can only focus on one clear idea at a time. All other ideas are somewhat unclear for the moment. They do exist, but only in potential for consciousness, i.e., they linger, so to speak, on our horizon, or just below the threshold of awareness. The reason former ideas can suddenly come back to consciousness is simply because they still have a psychic existence: sometimes, attention is turned away from the present, either voluntarily or involuntarily, which makes it possible for previous ideas to reappear."
Oliver Wendell Holmes says: "Our different ideas are stepping-stones; how we get from one to another we do not know; something carries us. We (our conscious selves) do not take the step. The creating and informing spirit, which is within us and not of us, is recognized everywhere in real life. It comes to us as a voice that will be heard; it tells us what we must believe; it frames our sentences and we wonder at this visitor who chooses our brain as his dwelling place."
Oliver Wendell Holmes says: "Our different ideas are like stepping-stones; we don't know how we move from one to another; something guides us. We (our conscious selves) don't make the leap. The creative and inspiring spirit that is within us and not of us is recognized all around in real life. It comes to us as a voice that we will hear; it tells us what we should believe; it shapes our sentences, and we marvel at this visitor who makes our mind its home."
Galton says: "I have desired to show how whole states of mental operation that have lapsed out of ordinary consciousness, admit of being dragged into light."
Galton says: "I've wanted to demonstrate how entire mental processes that have slipped out of normal awareness can be brought to the surface."
Montgomery says: "We are constantly aware that feelings emerge unsolicited by any previous mental state, directly from the dark womb of unconsciousness. Indeed all our most vivid feelings are thus mystically derived. Suddenly a new irrelevant, unwilled, unlooked-for presence intrudes itself into consciousness. Some inscrutable power causes it to rise and enter the mental presence as a sensorial constituent. If this vivid dependence on unconscious forces has to be conjectured with regard to the most vivid mental occurrences, how much more must such a sustaining foundation be postulated for those faint revivals of previous sensations that so largely assist in making up our complex mental presence!"
Montgomery says: "We are always aware that feelings come up unexpectedly, without any prior thoughts, directly from the depths of our unconscious mind. In fact, all our strongest emotions seem to come from this mysterious place. Suddenly, an irrelevant, unintended, and unexpected thought pops into our awareness. Some unknown force makes it rise and become part of our conscious experience as a sensory element. If we have to speculate about this strong connection to unconscious forces for our most intense thoughts, how much more do we need to consider this underlying foundation for those faint reminders of past sensations that contribute so significantly to our complex mental experience!"
Sir Benjamin Brodie says: "It has often happened to me to have accumulated a store of facts, but to have been able to proceed no further. Then after an interval of time, I have found the obscurity and confusion to have cleared away: the facts to have settled in their right places, though I have not been sensible of having made any effort for that purpose."
Sir Benjamin Brodie says: "I've often found myself with a lot of information but unable to move forward. Then, after some time has passed, I’ve noticed that the confusion has lifted: the facts have organized themselves in the right order, even though I wasn't consciously trying to make that happen."
Wundt says: "The traditional opinion that consciousness is the entire field of the internal life cannot be accepted. In consciousness, psychic acts are very distinct from one another, and observation itself necessarily conducts to unity in psychology. But the agent of this unity is outside of consciousness, which knows only the result of the work done in the unknown laboratory beneath it. Suddenly a new thought springs into being. Ultimate analysis of psychic processes shows that the unconscious is the theater of the most important mental phenomena. The conscious is always conditional upon the unconscious."
Wundt says: "The old belief that consciousness is the totality of our inner experiences isn't valid. Within consciousness, mental activities are clearly different from each other, and observation itself leads to unity in psychology. However, the source of this unity lies outside of consciousness, which only perceives the results of processes happening in the hidden depths below it. Suddenly, a new thought appears. A thorough examination of mental processes reveals that the unconscious hosts the most significant mental events. What we are aware of is always dependent on the unconscious."
Creighton says: "Our conscious life is the sum of these entrances and exits. Behind the scenes, as we infer, there lies a vast reserve which we call 'the unconscious,' finding a name for it by the simple device of prefixing the negative article. The basis of all that lies behind the scene is the mere negative of consciousness."
Creighton says: "Our conscious life is made up of these entrances and exits. Behind the scenes, as we infer, there's a huge reserve that we call 'the unconscious,' simply named by adding the word 'not' in front. The foundation of everything behind the scenes is just the absence of consciousness."
Maudsley says: "The process of reasoning adds nothing to knowledge (in the reasoner). It only displays what was there before, and brings to conscious possession what before was unconscious." And again: "Mind can do its work without knowing it. Consciousness is the light that lightens the process, not the agent that accomplishes it."
Maudsley says: "The process of reasoning doesn’t add anything to knowledge (in the reasoner). It just reveals what was already there and brings to awareness what was previously unconscious." And again: "The mind can do its work without being aware of it. Consciousness is the light that illuminates the process, not the force that carries it out."
Walstein says: "It is through the sub-conscious self that Shakespeare must have perceived, without effort, great truths which are hidden from the conscious mind of the student; that Phidias painted marble and bronze; that Raphael painted Madonnas, and Beethoven composed symphonies."
Walstein says: "Shakespeare must have effortlessly tapped into profound truths that are hidden from the conscious mind of the student through the subconscious self; just like Phidias sculpted marble and bronze; Raphael painted Madonnas, and Beethoven composed symphonies."
Ribot says: "The mind receives from experience certain data, and elaborates them unconsciously by laws peculiar to itself, and the result merges into consciousness."
Ribot says: "The mind takes in certain information from experience and processes it unconsciously according to its own rules, and the outcome becomes part of our awareness."
Newman says: "When the unaccustomed causes surprise, we do not perceive the thing and then feel the surprise; but surprise comes first, and then we search out the cause; so the theory must have acted on the unconscious mind to create the feeling, before being perceived in consciousness."
Newman says: "When something unexpected catches us off guard, we don't notice the thing first and then feel the surprise; instead, the surprise hits us first, and then we look for the reason behind it. So, the theory must have influenced our unconscious mind to create that feeling before we actually acknowledge it in our conscious mind."
A writer in an English magazine says: "Of what transcendent importance is the fact that the unconscious part of the mind bears to the conscious part such a relation as the magic lantern bears to the luminous disc which it projects; that the greater part of the intentional action, the whole practical life of the vast majority of men, is an effect of events as remote from consciousness as the motion of the planets."
A writer in an English magazine says: "The unconscious part of the mind is incredibly important compared to the conscious part, much like how a magic lantern relates to the bright disc it projects; most of what we do intentionally and our daily lives are influenced by events that are far removed from our awareness, just like the movement of the planets."
Dr. Schofield says: "It is quite true that the range of the unconscious mind must necessarily remain indefinite; none can say how high or low it may reach…. As to how far the unconscious powers of life that, as has been said, can make eggs and feathers out of Indian corn, and milk and beef and mutton out of grass, are to be considered within or beyond the lowest limits of unconscious mind, we do not therefore here press. It is enough to establish the fact of its existence; to point out its more important features; and to show that in all respects it is as worthy of being called mind as that which works in consciousness. We therefore return to our first definition of Mind, as 'the sum of psychic action in us, whether conscious or unconscious.'"
Dr. Schofield says: "It's true that the range of the unconscious mind is ultimately unknown; no one can determine how high or low it might go…. As for how far the unconscious powers of life, which can turn Indian corn into eggs and feathers, and grass into milk, beef, and mutton, fall within or beyond the basic limits of the unconscious mind, we won't delve into that here. It's enough to acknowledge its existence, highlight its key features, and demonstrate that it's just as deserving of the title 'mind' as the processes that occur in consciousness. So, we return to our original definition of Mind as 'the sum of psychic action in us, whether conscious or unconscious.'"
Hartmann calls our attention to a very important fact when he says: "The unconscious does not fall ill, the unconscious does not grow weary, but all conscious mental activity becomes fatigued."
Hartmann highlights a crucial point when he states: "The unconscious doesn't get sick, the unconscious doesn’t get tired, but all conscious mental activity gets fatigued."
Kant says: "To have ideas and yet not be conscious of them—therein seems to lie a contradiction. However, we may still be immediately aware of holding an idea, though we are not directly conscious of it."
Kant says: "Having ideas and not being aware of them seems like a contradiction. However, we can still be immediately aware that we have an idea, even if we're not directly conscious of it."
Maudsley says: "It may seem paradoxical to assert not merely that ideas may exist in the mind without any consciousness of them, but that an idea, or a train of associated ideas, may be quickened into action and actuate movements without itself being attended to. When an idea disappears from consciousness it does not necessarily disappear entirely; it may remain latent below the horizon of consciousness. Moreover it may produce an effect upon movement, or upon other ideas, when thus active below the horizon of consciousness."
Maudsley says: "It might seem contradictory to claim that ideas can exist in the mind without us being aware of them, but that an idea, or a series of related ideas, can be triggered into action and lead to movements without us specifically focusing on them. When an idea fades from our awareness, it doesn’t mean it vanishes completely; it can stay hidden just out of our conscious view. Furthermore, it can still influence our movements or other ideas while it’s active beneath the surface of our awareness."
Liebnitz says: "It does not follow that because we do not perceive thought that it does not exist. It is a great source of error to believe that there is no perception in the mind but that of which it is conscious."
Liebnitz says: "Just because we don’t recognize our thoughts doesn’t mean they aren’t there. It’s a major mistake to think that the only things our mind perceives are the things of which it is aware."
Oliver Wendell Holmes says: "The more we examine the mechanism of thought the more we shall see that anterior unconscious action of the mind that enters largely into all of its processes. People who talk most do not always think most. I question whether persons who think most—that is who have most conscious thought pass through their mind—necessarily do most mental work. Every new idea planted in a real thinker's mind grows when he is least conscious of it."
Oliver Wendell Holmes says: "The more we look into how thinking works, the more we'll realize that a lot of unconscious mental activity plays a big role in all of it. People who talk the most don't always think the most. I wonder if those who think the most—who have the most conscious thoughts—actually do the most mental work. Every new idea planted in a true thinker's mind develops when they're least aware of it."
Maudsley says: "It would go hard with mankind indeed, if they must act wittingly before they acted at all. Men, without knowing why, follow a course for which good reasons exist. Nay, more. The practical instincts of mankind often work beneficially in actual contradiction to their professed doctrines."
Maudsley says: "It would be really tough for humanity if they had to think everything through before they acted. People often follow a path without understanding why, even though there are solid reasons for it. Moreover, the practical instincts of humanity often operate in ways that are beneficial but completely oppose what they say they believe."
The same writer says: "The best thoughts of an author are the unwilled thoughts which surprise himself; and the poet, under the influence of creative activity, is, so far as consciousness is concerned, being dictated to."
The same writer says: "The best ideas from an author are the spontaneous ones that catch him off guard; and the poet, while in the flow of creativity, is, as far as awareness goes, being inspired."
A writer in an English magazine says: "When waiting on a pier for a steamer, I went on to the first, which was the wrong one. I came back and waited, losing my boat, which was at another part of the pier, on account of the unconscious assumption I had made, that this was the only place to wait for the steamer. I saw a man enter a room, and leave by another door. Shortly after, I saw another man exactly like him do the same. It was the same man; but I said it must be his twin brother, in the unconscious assumption that there was no exit for the first man but by the way he came (that by returning)."
A writer in an English magazine says: "While I was waiting on a pier for a steamer, I went to the first one, which was the wrong choice. I came back and ended up waiting, missing my boat, which was at a different part of the pier, because I unconsciously assumed this was the only spot to wait for the steamer. I saw a man walk into a room and then exit through another door. Soon after, I saw another man who looked exactly like him do the same thing. It was the same guy; but I thought it must be his twin brother, assuming without realizing that the first man could only leave through the way he came back."
Maudsley says: "The firmest resolve or purpose sometimes vanishes issueless when it comes to the brink of an act, while the true will, which determines perhaps a different act, springs up suddenly out of the depths of the unconscious nature, surprising and overcoming the conscious."
Maudsley says: "The strongest determination or intent can sometimes disappear without a trace when faced with action, while the true will, which might lead to a different action, unexpectedly emerges from the depths of the unconscious, catching the conscious mind off guard and taking over."
Schofield says: "Our unconscious influence is the projection of our unconscious mind and personality unconsciously over others. This acts unconsciously on their unconscious centers, producing effects in character and conduct, recognized in consciousness. For instance, the entrance of a good man into a room where foul language is used, will unconsciously modify and purify the tone of the whole room. Our minds cast shadows of which we are as unconscious as those cast by our bodies, but which affect for good or evil all who unconsciously pass within their range. This is a matter of daily experience, and is common to all, though more noticeable with strong personalities."
Schofield says: "Our unconscious influence is the projection of our unconscious mind and personality onto others without us even realizing it. This impacts their unconscious minds, which in turn affects their character and behavior, becoming apparent in their conscious awareness. For example, when a good person enters a room filled with foul language, they will unconsciously change and uplift the atmosphere of the entire space. Our minds create shadows, just like our bodies do, but we aren't aware of them. However, these shadows can influence everyone who unknowingly comes into their vicinity, for better or worse. This is a daily reality that everyone experiences, though it's more noticeable with strong personalities."
Now we have given much time and space to the expressions of opinion of various Western writers regarding this subject of there being a plane or planes of the mind outside of the field of consciousness. We have given space to this valuable testimony, not alone because of its intrinsic value and merit, but because we wished to impress upon the minds of our students that these out-of-conscious planes of mind are now being recognized by the best authorities in the Western world, although it has been only a few years back when the idea was laughed at as ridiculous, and as a mere "dream of the Oriental teachers." Each writer quoted has brought out some interesting and valuable point of the subject, and the student will find that his own experiences corroborate the points cited by the several writers. In this way we think the matter will be made plainer, and will become fixed in the mind of those who are studying this course of lessons.
Now we have spent a lot of time discussing the opinions of various Western writers on the idea of there being levels or aspects of the mind that exist beyond our conscious awareness. We value this testimony not only for its merit but also because we want to emphasize to our students that these non-conscious aspects of the mind are being acknowledged by leading authorities in the Western world. Just a few years ago, this idea was dismissed as absurd and labeled as just a "dream of the Eastern teachers." Each writer we've included has highlighted some interesting and important points on the topic, and students will likely find that their own experiences support the points made by these writers. This approach should clarify the topic and help solidify this understanding for those studying these lessons.
But we must caution our students from hastily adopting the several theories of Western writers, advanced during the past few years, regarding these out-of-conscious states. The trouble has been that the Western writers dazzled by the view of the subconscious planes of mentation that suddenly burst upon the Western thought, hastily adopted certain theories, which they felt would account for all the phenomena known as "psychic," and which they thought would fully account for all the problems of the subject. These writers while doing a most valuable work, which has helped thousands to form new ideas regarding the nature and workings of the mind, nevertheless did not sufficiently explore the nature of the problem before them. A little study of the Oriental philosophies might have saved them and their readers much confusion.
But we need to warn our students not to quickly embrace the various theories from Western writers that have emerged in recent years about these altered states of consciousness. The issue is that Western writers, dazzled by the insights into the subconscious mind that suddenly came to light, rushed to adopt certain theories they believed would explain all the "psychic" phenomena and solve all the related problems. While these writers have done valuable work that has helped thousands to rethink the nature and functions of the mind, they didn't delve deeply enough into the complexities of the issues they were addressing. A bit of study into Eastern philosophies might have spared them and their readers a lot of confusion.
For instance, the majority of these writers hastily assumed that because there was an out-of-conscious plane of mentation, therefore all the workings of the mind might be grouped under the head of "conscious" and "sub-conscious," and that all the out-of-conscious phenomena might be grouped under the head of "subconscious mind," "subjective mind," etc., ignoring the fact that this class of mental phenomena embraced not only the highest but the lowest forms of mentation In their newly found "mind" (which they called "subjective" or "sub-conscious"), they placed the lowest traits and animal passions; insane impulses; delusions; bigotry; animal-like intelligence, etc., etc., as well as the inspiration of the poet and musician, and the high spiritual longings and feelings that one recognizes as having come from the higher regions of the soul.
For example, most of these writers quickly concluded that since there was an unconscious aspect of thought, all mental processes could be categorized as "conscious" or "subconscious," and everything else could be labeled as "subconscious mind," "subjective mind," and so on. They overlooked the fact that this category of mental phenomena included both the highest and lowest forms of thought. In their newly defined "mind" (which they referred to as "subjective" or "subconscious"), they included the most primal traits and animal instincts, insane urges, delusions, prejudice, animal-like intelligence, and so on, alongside the inspiration of poets and musicians and the profound spiritual aspirations and emotions that are recognized as stemming from the higher aspects of the soul.
This mistake was a natural one, and at first reading the Western world was taken by storm, and accepted the new ideas and theories as Truth. But when reflection came, and analysis was applied there arose a feeling of disappointment and dissatisfaction, and people began to feel that there was something lacking. They intuitively recognized that their higher inspirations and intuitions came from a different part of the mind than the lower emotions, passions, and other sub-conscious feelings, and instincts.
This mistake was understandable, and at first, the Western world was captivated and embraced the new ideas and theories as Truth. However, upon reflection and analysis, disappointment and dissatisfaction surfaced, and people started to sense that something was missing. They instinctively realized that their higher inspirations and intuitions came from a different part of the mind than the lower emotions, passions, and other subconscious feelings and instincts.
A glance at the Oriental philosophies will give one the key to the problem at once. The Oriental teachers have always held that the conscious mentation was but a small fraction of the entire volume of thought, but they have always taught that just as there was a field of mentation below consciousness, so was there a field of mentation above consciousness as much higher than Intellect as the other was lower than it. The mere mention of this fact will prove a revelation to those who have not heard it before, and who have become entangled with the several "dual-mind" theories of the recent Western writers. The more one has read on this subject the more he will appreciate the superiority of the Oriental theory over that of the Western writers. It is like the chemical which at once clears the clouded liquid in the test-tube.
A look at Eastern philosophies will quickly provide the answer to the issue. Eastern teachers have always believed that conscious thought is just a tiny part of the whole spectrum of thinking, and they have consistently taught that, just as there is a realm of thought below consciousness, there is also a realm of thought above consciousness, which is much higher than Intellect, just as the other is lower. The very mention of this idea will be eye-opening for those who haven’t come across it before and who have gotten caught up in the various "dual-mind" theories of recent Western authors. The more you read on this topic, the more you'll recognize the superiority of the Eastern theory compared to that of Western writers. It's like a chemical that instantly clears up a cloudy liquid in a test tube.
In our next lesson we shall go into this subject of the above-conscious planes, and the below-conscious planes, bringing out the distinction clearly, and adding to what we have said on the subject in previous books.
In our next lesson, we'll explore the topic of the above-conscious and below-conscious planes, clearly outlining the differences and expanding on what we've discussed in prior books.
And all this is leading us toward the point where we may give you instruction regarding the training and cultivation—the retraining and guidance of these out-of-conscious faculties. By retraining the lower planes of mentation to their proper work, and by stimulating the higher ones, man may "make himself over." mentally, and may acquire powers of which he but dreams now. This is why we are leading you up to the understanding of this subject, step by step. We advise you to acquaint yourself with each phase of the matter, that you may be able to apply the teachings and instructions to follow in later lessons of the course.
And all of this is guiding us toward the point where we can give you instructions on the training and development—the retraining and guidance of these subconscious faculties. By retraining the lower levels of thinking to do their proper work, and by stimulating the higher ones, a person can mentally "transform" themselves and gain abilities they only dream about now. That’s why we are taking you through this topic gradually, step by step. We encourage you to familiarize yourself with each part of this subject so that you can apply the teachings and instructions in the later lessons of the course.
MANTRAM (AFFIRMATION).
I recognize that my Self is greater than it seems—that above and below consciousness are planes of mind—that just as there are lower planes of mind which belong to my past experience in ages past and over which I must now assert my Mastery—so are there planes of mind into which I am unfolding gradually, which will bring me wisdom, power, and joy. I Am Myself, in the midst of this mental world—I am the Master of my Mind—I assert my control of its lower phases, and I demand of its higher all that it has in store for me.
I understand that my true self is bigger than it appears—that there are levels of consciousness above and below my awareness—that just as there are lower levels of thought related to my past experiences that I need to take charge of—there are also higher levels of thought that I’m gradually stepping into, which will bring me wisdom, strength, and happiness. I Am Myself, in the center of this mental landscape—I am in control of my Mind—I claim authority over its lower aspects and I ask for everything its higher aspects have to offer me.
THE NINTH LESSON.
THE MENTAL PLANES.
In our last lesson we told you something about the operation of the mind outside of the field of consciousness. In this lesson we will attempt to classify these out-of-consciousness planes, by directing your attention to the several mental planes above and below the plane of consciousness. As we stated in the last lesson, over 90 per cent of our mental operations are conducted outside of the field of consciousness, so that the consideration of the planes is seen to be an important subject.
In our last lesson, we talked about how the mind operates beyond our conscious awareness. In this lesson, we’ll try to classify these unconscious areas by focusing on the different mental levels above and below the level of consciousness. As we mentioned before, more than 90 percent of our mental processes happen outside of our conscious awareness, so it’s clear that understanding these levels is a significant topic.
Man is a Centre of Consciousness in the great One Life of the Universe. His soul has climbed a great many steps before it reached its present position and stage of unfoldment. And it will pass through many more steps until it is entirely free and delivered from the necessity of its swaddling clothes.
Man is a center of consciousness in the vast life of the universe. His soul has gone through many stages before arriving at its current state of development. It will go through many more stages until it is completely free from the confines of its limitations.
In his mental being man contains traces of all that has gone before—all the experiences of himself and the great race movement of which he is a part. And, likewise, his mind contains faculties and mental planes which have not as yet unfolded into consciousness, and of the existence of which he is but imperfectly aware. All of these mental possessions, however, are useful and valuable to him—even the lowest. The lowest may be used to advantage, under proper mastery, and are only dangerous to the man who allows them to master him instead of serving him as they should, considering his present stage of development.
In his mind, a person holds traces of everything that has come before—all his own experiences and the great movement of humanity that he is part of. Also, his mind has abilities and mental levels that have not yet become conscious, and he is only vaguely aware of their existence. All of these mental assets are useful and valuable to him, even the least developed ones. The least developed can be beneficial when properly controlled and only pose a risk to those who let them control instead of serve them, given their current level of growth.
In this consideration of the several mental planes we shall not confine ourselves to the technical occult terms given to these several planes, but will place them in general groups and describe the features and characteristics of each, rather than branch off into long explanations of the growth and reason of the several planes, which would take us far away from the practical consideration of the subject.
In this discussion of the different mental levels, we won't limit ourselves to the specific occult terminology used for these levels. Instead, we'll categorize them into general groups and describe the traits and characteristics of each one, rather than diving into lengthy explanations about the development and purpose of each level, which would distract us from the practical aspects of the topic.
Beginning at the lowest point of the scale we see that man has a body. The body is composed of minute cells of protoplasm. These cells are built up of countless molecules, atoms and particles of matter—precisely the same matter that composes the rocks, trees, air, etc., around him. The Yogi philosophy tells us that even the atoms of matter have life and an elementary manifestation of mind, which causes them to group together according to the law of attraction, forming different elements, combinations, etc. This law of attraction is a mental operation, and is the first evidence of mental choice, action and response. Below this is Prana or Force, which, strictly speaking, is also a manifestation of mind, although for convenience we designate it as a separate manifestation of the Absolute.
Starting at the most basic level, we see that humans have a body. The body consists of tiny cells made of protoplasm. These cells are made up of countless molecules, atoms, and particles of matter—the same matter that makes up the rocks, trees, air, and so on around them. The Yogi philosophy suggests that even the atoms of matter possess life and a basic form of consciousness, which leads them to group together according to the law of attraction, creating different elements and combinations. This law of attraction is a mental process, and it represents the first signs of mental choice, action, and response. Beneath this is Prana or Force, which, strictly speaking, is also a manifestation of mind, though we conveniently refer to it as a separate aspect of the Absolute.
And therefore we find that this law of attraction between the atoms and particles of matter is a mental action, and that it belongs to man's mental kingdom, because he has a body and this mental action is continually going on in his body. So therefore this is the lowest mental plane to be considered in the make-up of the man. This plane is, of course, far sunken beneath the plane of consciousness, and is scarcely identified with the personality of the man at all, but rather belongs to the life of the whole, manifest in the rock as well as in the man.
And so we discover that the attraction between atoms and particles of matter is a mental process, belonging to the human mind, as it continuously occurs within our bodies. Thus, this represents the most basic level of mental activity to be considered in human makeup. This level is, of course, much deeper than conscious awareness and is hardly linked to a person's individuality at all; instead, it is associated with the life of the whole, present in both rocks and humans alike.
But after these atoms have been grouped by the law of attraction and have formed molecules of matter, they are taken possession of by a higher mental activity and built up into cells by the mental action of the plant. The life impulse of the plant begins by drawing to it certain particles of inorganic matter—chemical elements—and then building them into a single cell. Oh, mystery of the cell! The intellect of man is unable to duplicate this wonderful process. The Mind Principle on the Vegetative Plane, however, knows exactly how to go to work to select and draw to itself just the elements needed to build up the single cell. Then taking up its abode in that cell—using it as a basis of operations, it proceeds to duplicate its previous performance, and so cell after cell is added, by the simple reproductive process of division and subdivision—the primitive and elemental sex process—until the mighty plant is built up. From the humblest vegetable organism up to the greatest oak the process is the same.
But after these atoms have been combined through attraction and formed into molecules, they are taken over by a higher mental activity and developed into cells by the plant’s mental processes. The plant’s life force starts by attracting specific particles of inorganic matter—chemical elements—and then assembles them into a single cell. Oh, the mystery of the cell! Human intellect cannot replicate this amazing process. The Mind Principle on the Vegetative Plane, however, knows exactly how to select and draw in the elements necessary to create that single cell. Once it occupies that cell—using it as a base of operations—it goes on to replicate its earlier actions, adding cell after cell through the straightforward reproductive process of division and subdivision—the basic and elemental reproductive process—until the magnificent plant is formed. From the simplest vegetable organism to the grandest oak, the process remains the same.
And it does not stop there. The body of man is also built up in just this way, and he has this vegetative mind also within him, below the plane of consciousness, of course. To many this thought of a vegetative mind may be somewhat startling. But let us remember that every part of our body has been built up from the vegetable cell. The unborn child starts with the coalition of two cells. These cells begin to build up the new body for the occupancy of the child—that is, the mind principle in the cells directs the work, of course—drawing upon the body of the mother for nourishment and supplies. The nourishment in the mother's blood, which supplies the material for the building up of the child's body, is obtained by the mother eating and assimilating the vegetable cells of plants, directly or indirectly. If she eats fruit, nuts, vegetables, etc., she obtains the nourishment of the plant life directly—if she eats meat she obtains it indirectly, for the animal from which the meat was taken built up the meat from vegetables. There is no two ways about this—all nourishment of the animal and human kingdom is obtained from the vegetable kingdom, directly or indirectly.
And it doesn’t stop there. The human body is also formed this way, and it has this vegetative mind within it, beneath the level of awareness, of course. For many, the idea of a vegetative mind might be a bit shocking. But we should remember that every part of our body is built from plant cells. The unborn child begins with the merging of two cells. These cells start to create the new body for the child—that is, the mind principle in the cells directs the process, of course—drawing nourishment and resources from the mother's body. The nutrients in the mother’s blood, which provide the materials to build the child's body, come from the mother eating and processing plant cells, either directly or indirectly. If she eats fruits, nuts, vegetables, etc., she gets the nourishment from plant life directly—if she consumes meat, she gets it indirectly, because the animal that provided the meat built its body from plants. There’s no doubt about it—all nourishment in the animal and human kingdoms comes from the plant kingdom, either directly or indirectly.
And the cell action in the child is identical with the cell action in the plant. Cells constantly reproducing themselves and building themselves up into bodily organs, parts, etc., under the direction and guidance of the mind principle. The child grows in this way until the hour of birth. It is born, and then the process is but slightly changed. The child begins to take nourishment either from the mother's milk or from the milk of the cow, or other forms of food. And as it grows larger it partakes of many different varieties of food. But always it obtains building material from the cell life of the plants.
And the cell activity in the child is the same as in the plant. Cells are constantly reproducing themselves and forming bodily organs and parts, guided by the mind principle. The child develops this way until birth. When it’s born, the process changes only slightly. The child starts getting nourishment from either the mother’s milk, cow’s milk, or other types of food. As it grows, it eats a variety of foods. But it always gets building materials from the cell life of plants.
And this great building up process is intelligent, purposeful, to a wonderful degree. Man with his boasted intellect cannot explain the real "thingness" of the process. A leading scientist who placed the egg of a small lizard under microscopical examination and then watched it slowly develop has said that it seemed as if some hand was tracing the outlines of the tiny vertebrae, and then building up around it. Think for a moment of the development of the germ within the egg of the humming-bird, or the ant, or the gnat, or the eagle. Every second a change may be noticed. The germ cell draws to itself nourishment from the other part of the egg, and then it grows and reproduces another cell. Then both cells divide—then subdivide until there are millions and millions and millions of cells. And all the while the building up process continues, and the bird or insect assumes shape and form, until at last the work is accomplished and the young bird emerges from the egg.
And this incredible process of development is intelligent and purposeful to an amazing extent. Humans, despite their claimed intelligence, can’t truly explain the essence of how it works. A prominent scientist who examined a lizard's egg under a microscope and observed it slowly develop remarked that it felt like some invisible hand was outlining the tiny vertebrae and building around it. Just take a moment to think about the development of the embryo inside the egg of a hummingbird, an ant, a gnat, or an eagle. A change can be observed every second. The germ cell absorbs nourishment from the rest of the egg, growing and producing another cell. Then both cells divide, and then subdivide until there are millions and millions of cells. Throughout this time, the process of development keeps going, and the bird or insect takes shape, ultimately leading to the young bird breaking free from the egg.
And the work thus commenced continues until the death of the animal. For there is a constant using-up and breaking-down of cell and tissue, which the organism must replace. And so the vegetative mind of the plant, or insect, or animal, or man, is constantly at work building up new cells from the food, throwing out worn-out and used-up material from the system. Not only this, but it attends to the circulation of the blood in order that the materials for the building up may be carried to all parts of the system. It attends to the digestion and assimilation of the food—the wonderful work of the organs of the body. It attends to the healing of wounds, the fight against disease, the care of the physical body. And all this out of the plane of consciousness—in the infant man the animal world, the vegetable kingdom—ever at work, untiring, intelligent, wonderful. And this plane of mind is in man as well as in the plant, and it does its work without aid from the conscious part of man, although man may interfere with it by adverse conscious thought, which seems to paralyze its efforts. Mental Healing is merely the restoring of normal conditions, so that this part of the body may do its work without the hindrance of adverse conscious thought.
And the work that started goes on until the animal dies. There's a constant process of using and breaking down cells and tissues, which the organism has to replace. So, the vegetative mind of plants, insects, animals, and humans is always busy creating new cells from food, getting rid of damaged and used-up materials from the body. It also manages blood circulation to ensure that building materials are delivered to all parts of the system. It oversees digestion and nutrient absorption—the remarkable functions of the body’s organs. It looks after wound healing, fights off diseases, and takes care of the physical body. All this happens outside of our conscious awareness—in infants, animals, and plants—always at work, tireless, intelligent, and amazing. This aspect of the mind exists in humans as well as in plants, and it functions without help from our conscious mind, even though we can disrupt it with negative thoughts that seem to hinder its efforts. Mental Healing is simply about restoring normal conditions so that this part of the body can operate without interference from negative conscious thoughts.
On this plane of the mind is found all of the vital functions and operations. The work is done out-of-consciousness, and the consciousness is aware of this part of the mind only when it makes demands upon the conscious for food, etc. On this plane also resides the elementary instinct that tends toward reproduction and sexual activity. The demand of this part of the mind is always "increase and multiply," and according to the stage of growth of the individual is the mandate carried out, as we shall see presently. The elementary impulses and desires that we find rising into the field of consciousness come from this plane of the mind. Hunger, thirst and the reproductive desires are its messages to the higher parts of the mind. And these messages are natural and free from the abuses and prostitution often observed attached to them by the intellect of man in connection with his unrestrained animal impulses. Gluttony and unnatural lust arise not from the primitive demand of this plane of the mind—for the lower animals even are free from them to a great extent—but it is reserved for man to so prostitute these primitive natural tendencies, in order to gratify unnatural and artificial appetites, which serve to frustrate nature rather than to aid her.
On this level of the mind, all essential functions and operations are found. The work happens outside of conscious awareness, and the conscious mind only recognizes this part when it demands things like food, etc. This level also houses the basic instinct that drives reproduction and sexual activity. The underlying demand from this part of the mind is always "increase and multiply," and how this is fulfilled depends on the individual's stage of development, as we will see shortly. The basic impulses and desires that surface in our consciousness come from this level of the mind. Hunger, thirst, and sexual desires are its signals to the higher levels of the mind. These signals are natural and free from the misuse and distortion often attached to them by human intellect in relation to uncontrolled animal instincts. Gluttony and unnatural desire do not stem from the primitive demands of this level of the mind—lower animals, for the most part, are free from them—but it is humanity that tends to distort these natural impulses to satisfy unnatural and artificial cravings, which ultimately disrupt nature rather than support it.
As Life advanced in the scale and animal forms appeared on the scene new planes of mind were unfolded, in accordance to the necessity of the living forms. The animal was compelled to hunt for his food—to prey upon other forms, and to avoid being preyed upon by others. He was compelled to struggle for the unfoldment of latent powers of his mind that would give him means to play his part in the scheme of life. He was compelled to do certain things in order to live and reproduce his kind. And he demanded not in vain. For there came to him slowly an unfolding knowledge of the things necessary for the requirements of his life. We call this Instinct. But, pray remember, by Instinct we do not mean the still higher something that is really rudimentary Intellect that we notice in the higher animals. We are speaking now of the unreasoning instinct observed in the lower animals, and to a certain degree in man. This Instinctive plane of mentality causes the bird to build its nest before its eggs are laid, which instructs the animal mother how to care for its young when born, and after birth; which teaches the bee to construct its cell and to store up its honey. These and countless other things in animal life, and in the higher form of plant life, are manifestations of Instinct—that great plane of the mind. In fact, the greater part of the life of the animal is instinctive although the higher forms of animals have developed something like rudimentary Intellect or Reason, which enables them to meet new conditions where Intellect alone fails them.
As life progressed and animals emerged, new levels of thought developed based on the needs of these living beings. Animals had to search for food, hunt other creatures, and avoid being hunted themselves. They were driven to tap into their hidden mental abilities to fulfill their roles in the ecosystem. They had to perform certain actions to survive and reproduce. And their efforts weren't wasted. Gradually, they gained instinctive knowledge about what was necessary for their survival. We refer to this as Instinct. However, it's important to note that we are not talking about the more advanced rudimentary Intellect seen in higher animals. We are focused on the unthinking instinct found in lower animals and, to some extent, in humans. This instinctual mentality drives a bird to build its nest before laying eggs, teaches animal mothers how to care for their young, and instructs bees on how to create their hives and store honey. These behaviors, along with many others in animal life and advanced plant life, are expressions of Instinct—this significant level of the mind. In fact, most of an animal's life is instinctual, even though higher animals have developed a basic form of Intellect or Reason, allowing them to adapt to new situations where pure Intellect might fall short.
And man has this plane of mind within him, below consciousness. In fact the lower forms of human life manifest but little Intellect, and live almost altogether according to their Instinctive impulses and desires.
And humans have this level of awareness inside them, beneath consciousness. In fact, the lower forms of human life show very little intellect and mostly act based on their instinctive urges and desires.
Every man has this Instinctive mental region within him and from it are constantly arising impulses and desires to perplex and annoy him, as well as to serve him occasionally. The whole secret consists in whether the man has Mastery of his lower self or not.
Every man has this instinctive part of his mind, and from it come constant impulses and desires that can confuse and bother him, as well as occasionally help him. The key is whether the man has control over his lower self or not.
From this plane of the mind arise the hereditary impulses coming down from generations of ancestors, reaching back to the cavemen, and still further back into the animal kingdom. A queer storehouse is this. Animal instincts—passions, appetites, desires, feelings, sensations, emotions, etc., are there. Hate, envy, jealousy, revenge, the lust of the animal seeking the gratification of his sexual impulses, etc., etc., are there, and are constantly intruding upon our attention until we have asserted our mastery. And often the failure to assert this mastery comes from an ignorance of the nature of the desire, etc. We have been taught that these thoughts were "bad" without being told why, and we have feared them and thought them the promptings of an impure nature, or a depraved mind, etc. This is all wrong. These things are not "bad" of themselves—they came to us honestly—they are our heritage from the past. They belong to the animal part of our nature, and were necessary to the animal in his stage of development. We have the whole menagerie within us, but that does not mean that we should turn the beasts loose upon ourselves or others. It was necessary for the animal to be fierce, full of fight, passionate, regardless of the rights of others, etc., but we have outgrown that stage of development, and it is ignoble for us to return to it, or to allow it to master us.
From this level of the mind come the inherited impulses passed down from generations of ancestors, dating back to cavemen and even further into the animal kingdom. It’s a strange storage area. Animal instincts—passions, appetites, desires, feelings, sensations, emotions, and so on—are all present. Hate, envy, jealousy, revenge, the primal urge seeking sexual satisfaction, and more are there, constantly demanding our attention until we assert our control. Often, failing to assert this control stems from misunderstanding the nature of these desires. We’ve been taught that these thoughts were “bad” without understanding why, leading us to fear them and label them as signs of an impure nature or a corrupted mind. This is all misguided. These feelings aren’t “bad” in themselves—they come to us honestly—they are our inheritance from the past. They belong to the animal part of our nature and were essential for the animal at that stage of development. We hold the entire menagerie within us, but that doesn’t mean we should unleash the beasts on ourselves or others. It was necessary for the animal to be fierce, aggressive, passionate, and indifferent to the rights of others, but we have evolved beyond that stage. It is beneath us to revert to that or to let it control us.
This lesson is not intended as a discourse upon Ethics or morals. We do not intend going into a discussion of the details of "Right and Wrong," for we have touched upon that phase of the subject in other works. But we feel justified in calling your attention to the fact that the human mind intuitively recognizes the "Rightness" of the living up to that which comes to us from the highest parts of the mind—the highest product of our unfoldment. And it likewise intuitively recognizes the "Wrongness" of the falling back into that which belongs to the lower stages of our mentality—to the animal part of us, that is our heritage from the past and that which has gone before.
This lesson isn’t meant to be a discussion about Ethics or morals. We're not diving into the specifics of "Right and Wrong," since we've addressed that aspect in other works. However, we want to highlight that the human mind instinctively recognizes the "Rightness" of living up to what comes from the highest parts of our mind—the best result of our personal growth. It also instinctively understands the "Wrongness" of reverting to the lower levels of our mentality—those instinctual behaviors that are part of our past and heritage.
While we may be puzzled about many details of morals and ethics and may not be able to "explain" why we consider certain things right or wrong, we still intuitively feel that the highest "Right" of which we are capable is the acting out of that which is coming to us from the highest pole of our mental being, and that the lowest "Wrong" consists in doing that which carries us back to the life of the lower animals, in so far as mentality is concerned. Not because there is anything absolutely "Wrong" in the mental processes and consequent of the animals in themselves—they are all right and perfectly natural in the animals—but we intuitively recognize that for us to fall back to the animal stage is a "going backward" in the scale of evolution. We intuitively shrink at an exhibition of brutality and animality on the part of a man or woman. We may not know just why, but a little reflection will show us that it is a sinking in the evolutionary scale, against which the spiritual part of us revolts and protests.
While we might be confused about many aspects of morals and ethics and may not be able to "explain" why we view certain things as right or wrong, we still have an instinctive sense that the highest "Right" we can achieve comes from connecting with the most elevated part of our minds. Conversely, the lowest "Wrong" involves acting in ways that regress us to a more primal state, at least in terms of our mentality. This isn’t because there’s anything inherently "Wrong" with the mental processes of animals—they are perfectly natural and acceptable for them—but we instinctively understand that reverting to an animalistic state represents a "backslide" in our evolutionary journey. We instinctively react negatively to displays of brutality and animalistic behavior from others. While we may not fully understand why, some contemplation reveals that such behavior represents a decline in our evolutionary status, which the spiritual part of us instinctively rejects and opposes.
But this must not be construed to mean that the advanced soul looks upon the animal world with disgust or horror. On the contrary, there is nowhere to be found a higher respect for animal life and being than among the Yogi and other advanced souls. They delight in watching the animals filling their places in life—playing out their parts in the divine scheme of life. Their animal passions and desires are actions viewed sympathetically and lovingly by the advanced soul, and nothing "Wrong" or disgusting is seen there. And even the coarseness and brutality of the savage races are so regarded by these advanced souls. They see everything as natural according to the grade and degree of development of these people.
But this shouldn’t be taken to mean that the advanced soul views the animal world with disgust or horror. In fact, there’s no one who shows greater respect for animal life than yogis and other advanced souls. They take pleasure in observing animals fulfilling their roles in life—playing their parts in the divine plan. The animal instincts and desires are seen with sympathy and love by the advanced soul, and nothing "wrong" or repulsive is perceived there. Even the harshness and brutality of primitive cultures are understood by these advanced souls. They see everything as natural, based on the level of development of these people.
It is only when these advanced souls view the degeneracies of "civilized" life that they feel sorrow and pain. For here they see instances of devolution instead of evolution—degeneration instead of regeneration and advancement. And not only do they know this to be the fact, but the degenerate specimens of mankind themselves feel and know it. Compare the expression of the animal or savage going through their natural life actions and performances. See how free and natural are their expressions, how utterly apart are evidences of wrong doing. They have not as yet found out the fatal secret of Good and Evil—they have not as yet eaten the forbidden fruit. But, on the contrary, look into the faces of the degenerates and fallen souls of our civilized life. See the furtive glance and the self-consciousness of "Wrong" evident in every face. And this consciousness of "Wrong" bears heavily upon these people—it is heavier than the punishments heaped upon them That nameless something called "conscience" may be smothered for a while, but sooner or later it comes to light and demands the pound of flesh from its victim.
It’s only when these advanced souls witness the decline of “civilized” life that they experience sorrow and pain. Here, they observe examples of devolution rather than evolution—degeneration instead of regeneration and progress. They not only recognize this as truth, but the degenerate individuals themselves are aware of it too. Compare the expression of an animal or a primitive person living out their natural actions and behaviors. Notice how free and genuine their expressions are, completely devoid of signs of wrongdoing. They haven't yet discovered the devastating truth of Good and Evil—they haven't yet tasted the forbidden fruit. In contrast, look into the faces of the degenerates and fallen souls in our civilized society. Observe the guilty glance and the self-awareness of “Wrong” visible in every face. This awareness of “Wrong” weighs down on these individuals—it’s heavier than the punishments inflicted upon them. That indescribable thing called “conscience” may be silenced for a time, but sooner or later it surfaces and demands its due from its victim.
And yet you will say that it seems hard to think that the same thing can be Right in one person and Wrong in another. This seems like a hard saying and a dangerous doctrine, but it is the Truth. And man instinctively recognizes it. He does not expect the same sense of moral responsibility in a young child, or in a savage, that he does in a mature, developed, civilized man. He may restrain the child and the savage, for self-protection and the welfare of all, but he realizes the distinction, or at least should do so. And not only is this true, but as man advances in the scale he casts off many ideas of "Wrong" that he once held, having outgrown the old ideas and having grown into new conceptions. And the tendency is always upward and onward. The tendency is constantly from Force and Restraint toward Love and Freedom. The ideal condition would be one in which there were no laws and no necessity for them—a condition in which men had ceased to do wrong because they had outgrown the desire rather than from fear or restraint or force. And while this condition as yet seems afar off, there is constantly going on an unfoldment of higher planes and faculties of the mind, which when once fully manifest in the race will work a complete revolution in ethics and laws and government—and for the better, of course. In the meantime Mankind moves along, doing the best it can, making a steady though slow progress.
And yet you might say it’s hard to believe that the same thing can be Right for one person and Wrong for another. This idea seems challenging and risky, but it’s the Truth. People instinctively understand this. They don’t expect the same level of moral responsibility in a young child or a savage as they do in a mature, developed, civilized person. They might control the child and the savage for self-protection and the well-being of everyone, but they recognize the difference, or at least they should. Moreover, this is true; as people evolve, they shed many concepts of "Wrong" that they once believed, having matured out of old ideas and embraced new ones. The direction is always upward and forward. The trend constantly shifts from Force and Restraint to Love and Freedom. The ideal situation would be one where there are no laws and no need for them—a scenario in which people stop doing wrong because they've outgrown the desire instead of from fear or restraint or force. While this situation seems far off, there is a continuous unfolding of higher levels and abilities of the mind, which, once fully realized in humanity, will bring about a complete transformation in ethics, laws, and governance—and for the better, of course. In the meantime, humanity continues to move forward, doing its best and making steady, if slow, progress.
There is another plane of the mind which is often called the "Instinct," but which is but a part of the plane of the Intellect, although its operations are largely below the field of consciousness. We allude to what may be called the "Habit Mind," in order to distinguish it from the Instinctive Plane. The difference is this: The Instinctive plane of mind is made up of the ordinary operations of the mind below the plane of the Intellect, and yet above the plane of the Vegetative mind—and also of the acquired experiences of the race, which have been transmitted by heredity, etc. But the "Habit Mind" contains only that which has been placed there by the person himself and which he has acquired by experience, habit, and observation, repeated so often until the mind knows it so well that it is carried below the field of consciousness and becomes "second nature," and akin to Instinct.
There’s another level of the mind often referred to as "Instinct," but it’s really just a part of the Intellectual level, even though its functions mostly operate below our conscious awareness. We refer to what can be called the "Habit Mind" to set it apart from the Instinctive level. Here’s the distinction: The Instinctive level of mind consists of the basic functions of the mind that are below the Intellectual level but above the Vegetative mind, as well as the accumulated experiences of humanity that have been passed down through heredity and other means. On the other hand, the "Habit Mind" holds only what the individual has placed there through personal experience, habits, and observations, practiced so many times that it becomes so familiar it sinks below conscious awareness and turns into "second nature," resembling Instinct.
The text books upon psychology are filled with illustrations and examples of the habit phase or plane of the mental operations, and we do not think it necessary to repeat instances of the same kind here. Everyone is familiar with the fact that tasks which at first are learned only by considerable work and time soon become fixed in some part of the mind until their repetition calls for little or no exercise of conscious mental operation. In fact, some writers have claimed that no one really "learns" how to perform a task until he can perform it almost automatically. The pupil who in the early stages of piano playing finds it most difficult to control and manage his fingers, after a time is able to forget all about his fingering and devote his entire attention to the pages of his music, and after this he is able to apparently let his fingers play the entire piece of music by themselves without a thought on his part. The best performers have told us that in the moments of their highest efforts they are aware that the out-of-conscious portion of their mind is doing the work for them, and they are practically standing aside and witnessing the work being done. So true is this that in some cases it is related that if the performer's conscious mind attempts to take up the work the quality is impaired and the musician and the audience notice the difference.
The textbooks on psychology are full of illustrations and examples of the habit phase or level of mental processes, and we don’t think it’s necessary to repeat similar instances here. Everyone knows that tasks that initially require a lot of effort and time to learn eventually become ingrained in our minds, so their repetition needs little or no conscious thought. In fact, some writers argue that no one truly "learns" a task until they can do it almost automatically. A student who struggles to control their fingers while playing the piano will eventually be able to focus entirely on the music in front of them, letting their fingers seemingly play the entire piece without any conscious effort. The best performers have shared that during their peak moments, they feel as if the unconscious part of their mind is doing the work, while they observe it happening. This is so true that in some cases, it’s noted that when the performer’s conscious mind tries to take over, the quality suffers, and both the musician and the audience can tell the difference.
The same thing is true in the case of the woman learning to operate the sewing machine. It is quite difficult at first, but gradually it grows to "run itself." Those who have mastered the typewriter have had the same experience. At first each letter had to be picked out with care and effort. After a gradual improvement the operator is enabled to devote her entire attention to the "copy" and let the fingers pick out the keys for themselves. Many operators learn rapid typewriting by so training the habit mind that it picks out the letter-keys by reason of their position, the letters being covered over in order to force the mind to adapt itself to the new requirements. A similar state of affairs exists wherever men or women have to use tools of any kind. The tool soon is recognized by the mind and used as if it were a part of the body, and no more conscious thought is devoted to the manipulation than we devote to the operation of walking, which, by the way, is learned by the child only by the expenditure of time and labor. It is astonishing how many things we do "automatically" in this way. Writers have called our attention to the fact that the average man cannot consciously inform you how he puts on his coat in the morning—which arm goes in first, how the coat is held, etc. But the habit mind knows—knows very well. Let the student stand up and put on his coat in the regular way, following the leadings of the habit mind. Then, after removing it, let him attempt to put it on by inserting the other arm first, for instance. He will be surprised to find out how awkward it will be for him, and how completely he has been depending upon the habit mind. And tomorrow morning let him find out which shoe the habit mind has been putting on him first and then try to reverse the order and notice how flurried and disturbed the habit mind will become, and how frantically it will signal to the conscious mind: "Something wrong up there!" Or try to button on your collar, reversing the order in which the tabs are placed over the button—right before left, or left before right, as the case may be, and notice the involuntary protest. Or, try to reverse the customary habit in walking and attempt to swing your right arm with the movement of your right leg, and so on, and you will find it will require the exercise of great will power. Or, try to "change hands" and use your knife and fork. But we must stop giving examples and illustrations. Their number is countless.
The same is true for a woman learning to use a sewing machine. It’s pretty tough at first, but eventually, it starts to feel like it “runs itself.” Those who have gotten the hang of a typewriter have gone through a similar experience. Initially, every letter has to be selected with care and effort. Over time, the operator can focus entirely on the text and let her fingers find the keys automatically. Many people learn to type quickly by training their muscle memory to locate the letter keys based on their position, covering the letters to encourage their minds to adjust to the new demands. A similar process happens whenever anyone uses tools. The tool quickly becomes familiar to the mind and is used as if it’s part of the body, with no more conscious thought dedicated to it than we give to walking, which a child learns only through time and practice. It’s surprising how many things we do “automatically” like this. Writers have pointed out that most people can’t consciously describe how they put on their coat in the morning—like which arm goes in first, how they hold the coat, and so on. But the muscle memory knows—very well. Have the student stand up and put on his coat as usual, following the cues from his muscle memory. After taking it off, let him try putting it on by starting with the other arm, for example. He’ll be surprised at how awkward this feels and how much he has been relying on muscle memory. Tomorrow morning, let him discover which shoe his muscle memory puts on first and then switch the order, noticing how flustered and disturbed his muscle memory becomes, signaling to his conscious mind: “Something’s off here!” Or try buttoning your collar in the opposite order—right over left, or left over right, whichever it is, and feel the instinctive resistance. Or try changing your usual walking habits and see how hard it is to swing your right arm with your right leg, and so on. You’ll find it takes a lot of willpower. Or try "changing hands" to use your knife and fork. But we should stop with examples and illustrations—there are countless more.
Not only does the habit mind attend to physical actions, etc., but it also takes a hand in our mental operations. We soon acquire the habit of ceasing to consciously consider certain things, and the habit mind takes the matter for granted, and thereafter we will think automatically on those particular questions, unless we are shaken out of the habit by a rude jolt from the mind of someone else, or from the presentation of some conflicting idea occasioned by our own experience or reasoning processes. And the habit mind hates to be disturbed and compelled to revise its ideas. It fights against it, and rebels, and the result is that many of us are slaves to old outgrown ideas that we realize are false and untrue, but which we find that we "cannot exactly get rid of." In our future lessons we will give methods to get rid of these old outgrown ideas.
Not only does the habit mind manage our physical actions, but it also influences our mental processes. We quickly develop the habit of no longer consciously thinking about certain things, and the habit mind treats them as a given. After that, we will think automatically about those specific issues unless we are jolted out of the routine by a sudden insight from someone else or by encountering a conflicting idea from our own experiences or reasoning. The habit mind dislikes being interrupted and forced to change its views. It resists and fights back, resulting in many of us becoming stuck with outdated beliefs that we know are false but feel we "just can't shake off." In our upcoming lessons, we will provide strategies to let go of these outdated ideas.
There are other planes of mind which have to do with the phenomena known as "psychic," by which is meant the phases of psychic phenomena known as clairvoyance, psychometry, telepathy, etc., but we shall not consider them in this lesson, for they belong to another part of the general subject. We have spoken of them in a general way in our "Fourteen Lessons in Yogi Philosophy, etc."
There are other areas of the mind related to what we call "psychic" phenomena, which include things like clairvoyance, psychometry, telepathy, and so on. However, we won’t explore these in this lesson, as they fall under a different section of the broader topic. We've discussed them in a more general sense in our "Fourteen Lessons in Yogi Philosophy, etc."
And now we come to the plane of mind known to us as Intellect or the Reasoning Faculties. Webster defines the word Intellect as follows: The part or faculty of the human soul by which it knows, as distinguished from the power to feel and to will; the thinking faculty; the understanding. The same authority defines the word Reason as follows: "The faculty or capacity of the human mind by which it is distinguished from the intelligence of the inferior animals." We shall not attempt to go into a consideration of the conscious Intellect, for to do so we would be compelled to take up the space of the remaining lessons of the course, and besides, the student may find extended information on this subject in any of the text books on psychology. Instead we will consider other faculties and planes of mind which the said text books pass by rapidly, or perhaps deny. And one of these planes is that of Unconscious Reasoning, or Intellect. To many this term will seem paradoxical, but students of the unconscious will understand just what is meant.
And now we come to the area of the mind known as Intellect or the Reasoning Faculties. Webster defines Intellect as: The part or faculty of the human soul that allows it to know, distinct from the ability to feel and to will; the thinking faculty; the understanding. The same authority defines Reason as: "The faculty or capacity of the human mind that sets it apart from the intelligence of lower animals." We won't try to delve into the conscious Intellect, as doing so would take up the remainder of the course, and the student can find detailed information on this topic in any psychology textbooks. Instead, we will explore other faculties and areas of the mind that are often overlooked or even dismissed in those textbooks. One of these areas is Unconscious Reasoning, or Intellect. This term may seem contradictory to many, but those who study the unconscious will know exactly what it means.
Reasoning is not necessarily conscious in its operations, in fact, a greater part of the reasoning processes are performed below or above the conscious field. In our last lesson we have given a number of examples proving this fact, but a few more remarks may not be out of place, nor without interest to the student.
Reasoning doesn’t always happen consciously; in fact, much of the reasoning we do occurs outside of our conscious awareness. In our last lesson, we provided several examples to demonstrate this, but a few more comments might be helpful and interesting for the student.
In our last lesson you will see many instances stated in which the sub-conscious field of the Intellect worked out problems, and then after a time handed to the conscious reason the solution of the matter. This has occurred to many of us, if not indeed to all of us. Who has not endeavored to solve a problem or question of some sort and after "giving it up" has had it suddenly answered and flashed into consciousness when least expected. The experience is common to the race. While the majority of us have noticed these things, we have regarded them as exceptional and out of the general rule. Not so, however, with students of the mental planes. The latter have recognized these planes of reason, and have availed themselves of their knowledge by setting these unconscious faculties to work for them. In our next lesson we will give directions to our students regarding this accomplishment, which may prove of the greatest importance to those who will take the trouble to practice the directions given. It is a plan that is known to the majority of men who have "done things" in the world, the majority of them, however, having discovered the plan for themselves as the result of a need or demand upon the inner powers of mind.
In our last lesson, you’ll see many examples where the subconscious mind worked through problems and later handed the solutions to our conscious thought. This has likely happened to many, if not all, of us. Who hasn’t tried to solve some issue, given up, and then had the answer suddenly come to mind when least expected? This experience is common to everyone. While most of us have noticed these occurrences, we have often thought of them as rare exceptions. However, this isn’t the case for students of mental processes. They have recognized these levels of reasoning and have learned to use them by activating these unconscious abilities. In our next lesson, we will provide guidance on this skill, which may be extremely valuable for those willing to put in the effort to practice the techniques shared. This is a method that many successful people know, although most of them discovered it on their own out of necessity or a demand on their inner mental capabilities.
The plane of mind immediately above that of Intellect is that known as Intuition. Intuition is defined by Webster as follows: "Direct apprehension or cognition; immediate knowledge, as in perception or consciousness, involving no reasoning process; quick or ready insight or apprehension." It is difficult to explain just what is meant by Intuition, except to those who have experienced it—and these people do not need the explanation. Intuition is just as real a mental faculty as is Intellect—or, to be more exact, is just as much a collection of mental faculties. Intuition is above the field of consciousness, and its messages are passed downward, though its processes are hidden. The race is gradually unfolding into the plane of Intuition, and the race will some day pass into full consciousness on that plane. In the meantime it gets but flashes and glimpses from the hidden region. Many of the best things we have come from that region. Art, music, the love of the beautiful and good poetry, the higher form of love, spiritual insight to a certain degree, intuitive perception of truth, etc., etc., come from this region. These things are not reasoned out by the intellect, but seem to spring full born from some unknown region of the mind.
The level of mind right above Intellect is called Intuition. Webster defines Intuition as: "Direct understanding or knowledge; immediate awareness, as in perception or consciousness, without a reasoning process; quick or immediate insight." It's tough to explain what Intuition really means, except to those who have felt it—and those people don’t need an explanation. Intuition is just as valid a mental ability as Intellect—or more accurately, it's a combination of mental abilities. Intuition exists beyond our conscious awareness, and its messages flow down, even though its processes remain hidden. Humanity is gradually evolving into the realm of Intuition, and eventually, we will achieve full awareness in that realm. For now, we only get brief flashes and glimpses from that hidden space. Many of the greatest things we have come from there. Art, music, the appreciation of beauty, great poetry, a deeper form of love, spiritual insight to some extent, intuitive understanding of truth, and so on, all originate from this place. These things aren’t figured out by intellect; they seem to emerge fully formed from some unknown area of the mind.
In this wonderful region dwells Genius. Many, if not all of the great writers, poets, musicians, artists and other examples of genius have felt that their power came to them from some higher source. Many have thought that it emanated from some being kindly to them, who would inspire them with power and wisdom. Some transcendent power seemed to have been called into operation, and the worker would feel that his product or creation was not his handiwork, but that of some outside intelligence. The Greeks recognized this something in man, and called it man's "Daemon." Plutarch in his discourse on the daemon that guided Socrates speaks of the vision of Timarchus, who, in the case of Trophonius, saw spirits which were partly attached to human bodies, and partly over and above them, shining luminously over their heads. He was informed by the oracle that the part of the spirit which was immersed in the body was called the "soul," but that the outer and unimmersed portion was called the "daemon." The oracle also informed him that every man had his daemon, whom he is bound to obey; those who implicitly follow that guidance are the prophetic souls, the favorites of the gods. Goethe also spoke of the daemon as a power higher than the will, and which inspired certain natures with miraculous energy.
In this amazing region lives Genius. Many, if not most, of the great writers, poets, musicians, artists, and other examples of genius have felt that their talent came from a higher source. Many believed it came from a benevolent being that would inspire them with power and wisdom. Some transcendent force seemed to be at play, and the creator would sense that their product or creation was not solely their own work, but that of some outside intelligence. The Greeks recognized this aspect of humanity and called it a person's "Daemon." Plutarch, in his discussion about the daemon that guided Socrates, mentions the vision of Timarchus, who, in the case of Trophonius, saw spirits that were partly connected to human bodies, and partly above them, shining brightly over their heads. He was told by the oracle that the part of the spirit connected to the body was called the "soul," while the outer, unconnected part was referred to as the "daemon." The oracle also revealed that every person has their daemon, whom they are destined to follow; those who wholeheartedly embrace that guidance are the prophetic souls, favored by the gods. Goethe also described the daemon as a force beyond the will, which inspired certain individuals with extraordinary energy.
We may smile at these conceptions, but they are really very close to the truth. The higher regions of the mind, while belonging to the individual, and a part of himself, are so far above his ordinary consciousness that to all intents and purposes messages from them are as orders from another and higher soul. But still the voice is that of the "I," speaking through its sheaths as best it is able.
We might chuckle at these ideas, but they actually come pretty close to the truth. The deeper parts of the mind, while belonging to the individual and being a part of who they are, are so far above their regular awareness that, for all practical purposes, messages from those areas feel like orders from another, higher self. Yet, the voice is still that of the "I," speaking through its layers as best it can.
This power belongs to every one of us, although it manifests only in the degree that we are able to respond to it. It grows by faith and confidence, and closes itself up, and withdraws into its recesses when we doubt it and would question its veracity and reality. What we call "originality" comes from this region. The Intuitive faculties pass on to the conscious mind some perception of truth higher than the Intellect has been able to work out for itself, and lo! it is called the work of genius.
This power belongs to each of us, though it only shows up to the extent that we can respond to it. It increases with faith and confidence, but shrinks back and hides away when we doubt it and question its truth and existence. What we refer to as "originality" comes from this area. Our intuitive abilities share with our conscious mind some understanding of truth that’s beyond what our intellect has figured out on its own, and suddenly, it’s labeled as genius.
The advanced occultist knows that in the higher regions of the mind are locked up intuitive perceptions of all truth, and that he who can gain access to these regions will know everything intuitively, and as a matter of clear sight, without reasoning or explanation. The race has not as yet reached the heights of Intuition—it is just beginning to climb the foothills. But it is moving in the right direction. It will be well for us if we will open ourselves to the higher inner guidance, and be willing to be "led by the Spirit." This is a far different thing from being led by outside intelligence, which may, or may not, be qualified to lead. But the Spirit within each of us has our interests at heart and is desirous of our best good, and is not only ready but willing to take us by the hand and lead us on. The Higher Self is doing the best it can for our development and welfare, but is hampered by the confining sheaths. And alas, many of us glory in these sheaths and consider them the highest part of ourselves. Do not be afraid to let the light of the Spirit pierce through these confining sheaths and dissolve them. The Intuition, however, is not the Spirit, but is one of its channels of communication to us. There are other and still higher planes of mind, but the Intuition is the one next in the line of unfoldment, and we should open ourselves to its influence and welcome its unfoldment.
The advanced occultist understands that in the deeper levels of the mind are intuitive insights into all truth, and that anyone who can access these levels will know everything intuitively, clearly, without needing reasoning or explanations. Humanity has not yet reached the heights of Intuition—it is just beginning to explore the basics. But we are heading in the right direction. It would be beneficial for us to be open to higher inner guidance and to be willing to be "led by the Spirit." This is very different from being guided by external intelligence, which may or may not be qualified to lead. The Spirit within each of us truly cares about our interests and desires what’s best for us. It’s not only ready but eager to take us by the hand and guide us. The Higher Self is doing everything it can for our growth and well-being, but it’s limited by the confining layers we have. Unfortunately, many of us take pride in these layers and see them as the highest part of ourselves. Do not be afraid to let the light of the Spirit break through these layers and dissolve them. However, Intuition is not the Spirit itself; it is one of its channels of communication to us. There are other, even higher levels of mind, but Intuition is the next step in our development, and we should open ourselves to its influence and embrace its growth.
Above the plane of Intuition is that of the Cosmic Knowing, upon which we will find the consciousness of the Oneness of All. We have spoken of this plane in our lesson on the Unfoldment of Consciousness. When one is able to "conscious" on this plane—this exalted plane of mind—he is able to see fully, plainly and completely that there is One Great Life underlying all the countless forms and shapes of manifestation. He is able to see that separateness is only "the working fiction of the Universe." He is able to see that each Ego is but a Centre of Consciousness in the great Ocean of Life—all in pursuance of the Divine Plan, and that he is moving forward toward higher and higher planes of manifestation, power and individuality, in order to take a greater and grander part in the Universal work and plans.
Above the level of Intuition is the realm of Cosmic Knowing, where we can experience the consciousness of the Oneness of All. We discussed this realm in our lesson on the Unfoldment of Consciousness. When someone can become "conscious" in this realm—this elevated state of mind—they can clearly and fully see that there is One Great Life underlying all the countless forms and shapes of existence. They realize that separateness is merely "the working fiction of the Universe." They understand that each Ego is just a Center of Consciousness in the vast Ocean of Life—all contributing to the Divine Plan, and that they are progressing toward higher and higher levels of existence, power, and individuality, in order to play a greater and grander role in the Universal work and plans.
The Cosmic Knowing in its fulness has come to but few of the race, but many have had glimpses, more or less clear, of its transcendent wonder, and others are on the borderland of this plane. The race is unfolding gradually, slowly but surely, and those who have had this wonderful experience are preparing others for a like experience. The seed is being sown, and the harvest will come later. This and other phases of the higher forms of consciousness are before the race. The individuals who read this lesson are perhaps nearer to it than they think; their interest in the lessons is an indication of that hunger of the soul which is a prophecy of the satisfaction of the cry for spiritual bread. The Law of Life heeds these cries for aid and nourishment and responds accordingly, but along the lines of the highest wisdom and according to the real requirements of the individual.
The Cosmic Knowing in its fullness has reached only a few people, but many have had clear glimpses of its incredible beauty, and others are on the edge of this understanding. Humanity is gradually evolving, slowly but surely, and those who have experienced this wonder are preparing others for similar experiences. The seeds are being planted, and the harvest will come in time. This and other aspects of higher consciousness lie ahead for humanity. Those who read this lesson might be closer than they realize; their interest in it shows a deep spiritual hunger that hints at the fulfillment of their need for spiritual nourishment. The Law of Life responds to these cries for help and sustenance, but it does so in the way that best serves the highest wisdom and meets the true needs of each individual.
Let us close this lesson with a quotation from "Light on the Path," which bears directly upon the concluding thought. Read it carefully and let it sink down deep into your inner consciousness, and you will feel the thrill of joy that comes to him who is nearing the goal.
Let’s finish this lesson with a quote from "Light on the Path" that relates directly to our final thought. Read it carefully and let it resonate deeply within you, and you will experience the joy that comes to those who are close to reaching their goal.
"Look for the flower to bloom in the silence that follows the storm; not till then.
"Wait for the flower to blossom in the quiet that comes after the storm; not until then."
"It shall grow, it will shoot up, it will make branches and leaves, and form buds while the storm lasts. But not until the entire personality of the man is dissolved and melted—not until it is held by the divine fragment which has created it, as a mere subject for grave experiment and experience—not until the whole nature has yielded and become subject unto its higher self, can the bloom open. Then will come a calm such as comes in a tropical country after the heavy rain, when nature works so swiftly that one may see her action. Such a calm will come to the harassed spirit. And in the deep silence the mysterious event will occur which will prove that the way has been found. Call it by whatever name you will. It is a voice that speaks where there is none to speak, it is a messenger that comes—a messenger without form or substance—or it is the flower of the soul that has opened. It cannot be described by any metaphor. But it can be felt after, looked for, and desired, even among the raging of the storm. The silence may last a moment of time, or it may last a thousand years. But it will end. Yet you will carry its strength with you. Again and again the battle must be fought and won. It is only for an interval that nature can be still."
"It will grow, it will shoot up, it will develop branches and leaves, and form buds while the storm is raging. But not until the man's whole personality is dissolved and transformed—not until it is held by the divine essence that created it, merely as a subject for serious experimentation and experience—not until the entire nature has surrendered and become aligned with its higher self, can the bloom finally open. Then will come a calm like that in a tropical region after heavy rain, when nature works so quickly that you can actually see it happening. Such a calm will come to the troubled spirit. And in the deep silence, the mysterious event will happen that will prove the way has been found. Call it whatever you like. It's a voice that speaks where there’s no one to talk, a messenger that arrives—a messenger without form or substance—or it’s the flower of the soul that has blossomed. It can't be accurately described by any metaphor. But it can be felt afterwards, sought after, and longed for, even amid the chaos of the storm. The silence might last for a moment, or it might last for a thousand years. But it will eventually end. Yet you will carry its strength with you. Time and again, the battle must be fought and won. Nature can only be still for a brief moment."
* * * * *
Understood. Please provide the text you'd like modernized.
The concluding three lessons of this series will be devoted to a practical course of instruction in the development of the hidden planes of the mind, or rather, in the development of the power of the individual to master the same and make use of them in his life. He will be taught to master the lower principles, not only in the surmounting of them, but in the transmitting of the elemental forces toward his higher ends. Power may be obtained from this part of the mind, under the direction of the Will. And the student will be told how to set the unconscious Intellect to work for him. And he will be told how to develop and train the Will. We have now passed the line between the theoretical and the practical phases of the subject, and from now on it will be a case of train, develop, cultivate and apply. Knowing what lies back of it all, the student is now prepared to receive the instructions which he might have misused before. Peace be with thee all.
The last three lessons of this series will focus on a practical course that teaches how to develop the hidden aspects of the mind, or rather, how to harness these abilities and use them in everyday life. Students will learn to master the lower principles, not just by overcoming them, but by channeling their basic forces toward higher goals. This part of the mind can yield power under the guidance of the Will. Students will also be shown how to activate their unconscious intellect and how to strengthen and train their Will. We have now moved from theory to practice, and from here on out, it will be about training, developing, cultivating, and applying. With an understanding of what's behind it all, students are now ready to receive the guidance they may have misused in the past. Peace to you all.
MANTRAM (AFFIRMATION).
I AM THE MASTER OF MY SOUL.
THE TENTH LESSON.
SUB-CONSCIOUSING.
In the Ninth Lesson we called your attention to the fact that Reasoning was not necessarily conscious in its operations, and that, in fact, a large part of the rational processes of the mind are performed below or above the field of consciousness. And in the Eighth Lesson we gave you a number of examples illustrating this fact. We also gave you a number of cases in which the sub-conscious field of the Intellect worked out problems, and then after a time passed on to the conscious field of the Intellect the solution of the matter. In this lesson we purpose instructing you in the methods by which this part of the Intellect may be set to work for you. Many have stumbled upon bits of this truth for themselves, and, in fact, the majority of successful men and men who have attained eminence in any walk of life have made more or less use of this truth, although they seldom understand the reason of it.
In the Ninth Lesson, we pointed out that reasoning doesn't always happen consciously, and that a significant part of our mental processes occurs outside of our awareness. In the Eighth Lesson, we provided several examples to illustrate this point. We also shared a number of cases where the subconscious mind solved problems and then, after some time, the solutions became conscious. In this lesson, we aim to teach you how to tap into this part of your intellect to work for you. Many people have stumbled upon aspects of this truth on their own, and in fact, most successful individuals and those who have achieved prominence in any field have utilized this insight, even though they might not fully grasp why it works.
Very few Western writers have recognized the work of this plane of the mind. They have given us full and ingenious theories and examples of the workings of the Instinctive Mind, and in some cases they have touched upon the workings and operations of the Intuitional planes, but in nearly every case they have treated the Intellect as something entirely confined to the Conscious plane of mentation. In this they have missed some of the most interesting and valuable manifestations of sub-conscious mentation.
Very few Western writers have acknowledged the work of this mental level. They have provided detailed and innovative theories and examples of how the Instinctive Mind operates, and in some instances, they have touched on the functions of the Intuitional levels. However, almost always, they have viewed the Intellect as being solely limited to the Conscious level of thinking. In doing so, they have overlooked some of the most fascinating and valuable aspects of subconscious thought processes.
In this lesson we will take up this particular phase of mentation, and trust to be able to point out the way to use it to the best advantage, giving some simple instructions that have been given by the Hindu teachers to their students for centuries past, such instructions of course, being modified by us to conform to the requirements and necessities of the Western student of today.
In this lesson, we will explore this specific phase of thinking and aim to show you how to use it effectively. We'll provide some straightforward instructions that have been passed down by Hindu teachers to their students for centuries, which we will, of course, adapt to meet the needs and demands of today's Western students.
We have taken the liberty of bestowing a new title upon this phase of mentation—we have thought it well to call it "Sub-consciousing." The word "Sub," of course means "under; below;" and the word "Consciousing" is a favorite term employed by Prof. Elmer Gates, and means receiving impressions from the mind. In a general way, "Sub-consciousing," as used in this lesson, may be understood to mean "using the subconscious mind, under orders of the conscious mind."
We’ve decided to give a new name to this stage of thinking—we think it's fitting to call it "Sub-consciousing." The term "Sub" refers to "under; below;" while "Consciousing" is a term popularized by Prof. Elmer Gates, meaning receiving impressions from the mind. Generally, "Sub-consciousing," as used in this lesson, can be understood as "utilizing the subconscious mind, directed by the conscious mind."
By referring to our Eighth Lesson, we see mention made of the case of the man who indulged in "unconscious rumination," which happened to him when he read books presenting new points of view essentially opposed to his previous opinion. You will note that after days, weeks, or months, he found that to his great astonishment the old opinions were entirely rearranged, and new ones lodged there.
By looking back at our Eighth Lesson, we see the example of the man who engaged in "unconscious rumination." This happened when he read books that presented new viewpoints that were essentially different from his previous beliefs. You’ll notice that after days, weeks, or months, he was greatly surprised to find that his old opinions had completely shifted, and new ones took their place.
On the same page you will see mentioned the case of Sir William Hamilton, who discovered an important law of mathematics while walking with his wife. In this case he had been previously thinking of the missing link in his chain of reasoning, and the problem was worked out for him by the sub-conscious plane of his Intellect.
On the same page, you'll find the case of Sir William Hamilton, who uncovered an important mathematical principle while walking with his wife. Before this moment, he had been pondering the missing piece in his reasoning, and his subconscious mind worked out the problem for him.
On the same page, and the one following, is found the case of Dr. Thompson, who gives an interesting account of the workings of this part of his mind, which caused him at times to experience a feeling of the uselessness of all voluntary effort, coupled with a feeling that the matter was working itself clear in his mind. He tells us that at times he seemed to be merely a passive instrument in the hands of some person other than himself, who compelled him to wait until the work was performed for him by some hidden region of the mind. When the subconscious part of the mind had completed its work, it would flash the message to his conscious mind, and he would begin to write.
On the same page, and the one after that, is the case of Dr. Thompson, who shares an interesting insight into how this part of his mind worked. At times, he felt like all his efforts were pointless, while simultaneously feeling that the solution was coming together in his mind on its own. He explains that sometimes he felt like a passive tool in the hands of someone other than himself, who made him wait until a hidden part of his mind did the work for him. Once the subconscious mind finished its task, it would send a message to his conscious mind, and he would start writing.
On page 178 mention is also made of the great French chemist Berthelot, who relates that some of his best conceptions have flashed upon him as from the clear sky. In fact, the Eighth Lesson is largely made up of examples of this kind, and we ask the student to re-read the same, in order to refresh his mind with the truth of the workings of the sub-conscious mentality.
On page 178, there’s a mention of the great French chemist Berthelot, who shares that some of his best ideas came to him suddenly, like a clear sky. In fact, the Eighth Lesson is mostly filled with examples like this, and we encourage the student to re-read it to help refresh their understanding of how the subconscious mind works.
But you will notice in nearly all the cases mentioned, that those who related instances of the help of the sub-conscious mind had merely stumbled upon the fact that there was a part of the mind below consciousness that could and would work out problems for one, if it could somehow be set in operation. And these people trusted to luck to start that part of the mind in operation. Or rather, they would saturate their conscious mind with a mass of material, like stuffing the stomach with food, and then bid the subconscious mind assort, separate, arrange and digest the mental food, just as does the stomach and digestive apparatus digest the natural food—outside of the realm of consciousness or volition. In none of the cases mentioned was the subconscious mind directed specially to perform its wonderful work. It was simply hoped that it might digest the mental material with which it had been stuffed—in pure self defense. But there is a much better way, and we intend to tell you about it. The Hindu Yogis, or rather those who instruct their pupils in "Raja Yoga," give their students directions whereby they may direct their sub-conscious minds to perform mental tasks for them, just as one may direct another to perform a task. They teach them the methods whereby, after having accumulated the necessary materials, they may bid the sub-conscious mentality to sort it out, rearrange, analyze, and build up from it some bit of desired knowledge. More than this, they instruct their pupils to direct and order the sub-conscious mentality to search out and report to them certain information to be found only within the mind itself—some question of philosophy or metaphysics. And when such art has been acquired, the student or Yogi rests assured that the desired result will be forthcoming in due time, and consequently dismisses the matter from his conscious mind, and busies himself with other matters, knowing that day and night, incessantly, the sub-consciousing process is going on, and that the sub-conscious mind is actively at work collecting the information, or working out the problem.
But you’ll notice in almost all the cases mentioned that those who shared examples of how the subconscious mind helped them had just stumbled upon the idea that there’s a part of the mind beneath consciousness that can and will solve problems if it can be activated somehow. These people relied on luck to trigger that part of the mind. Or, rather, they would fill their conscious mind with a lot of information, like overloading their stomach with food, and then expect the subconscious mind to sort, organize, and digest that mental material, just like the stomach and digestive system break down natural food—without any conscious effort or control. In none of the mentioned cases was the subconscious mind specifically directed to do its amazing work. They simply hoped it would process the mental material it had been fed—in pure self-defense. But there’s a much better way, and we’re going to tell you about it. Hindu Yogis, or rather those who teach their students about "Raja Yoga," provide guidance on how to direct their subconscious minds to perform mental tasks for them, just as one might direct another person to complete a task. They teach methods so that, after gathering the necessary information, students can instruct their subconscious mind to sort it out, rearrange, analyze, and create some desired knowledge from it. Furthermore, they instruct their students to direct the subconscious mind to seek out and report specific information that can only be found within the mind itself—like certain philosophical or metaphysical questions. Once this skill is mastered, the student or Yogi confidently trusts that the desired result will come in due time, and so they let go of the matter in their conscious mind and focus on other things, knowing that day and night, tirelessly, the subconscious process is occurring, and that the subconscious mind is actively working on collecting information or solving the problem.
You will see at once the great superiority of this method over the old "hit-or-miss," "hope-it-will-work" plan pursued by those who have stumbled upon bits of the truth.
You will immediately notice how much better this approach is compared to the old "hit-or-miss," "hope-it-will-work" strategy used by those who have accidentally discovered parts of the truth.
The Yogi teacher begins by impressing upon his students the fact that the mind is capable of extending outward toward an object, material or mental, and by examining it by methods inherent in itself, extracting knowledge regarding the object named. This is not a startling truth, because it is so common, everyone employing it more or less every day. But the process by which the knowledge is extracted is most wonderful, and really is performed below the plane of consciousness, the work of the conscious mind being chiefly concerned in holding the Attention upon the object. We have spoken of the importance of Attention in previous lessons, which it will be well for you to re-read, at this time.
The yoga teacher starts by stressing to the students that the mind can reach out toward an object, whether it's physical or mental, and by using its own methods, it gathers knowledge about that object. This isn't a shocking idea since it's so common; everyone does it to some extent every day. However, the way knowledge is gathered is truly amazing and actually happens below the level of consciousness, with the conscious mind primarily focused on holding the Attention on the object. We've talked about the importance of Attention in earlier lessons, and it would be beneficial for you to review that now.
When the student is fully impressed with the details of the process of Attention, and the subsequent unfoldment of knowledge, the Yogi proceeds to inform him that there are other means of obtaining knowledge about an object, by the employment of which the Attention may be firmly directed toward the object and then afterwards held there unconsciously—that is, a portion of the Attention, or a sub-conscious phase of mentation, which will hold the sub-conscious mind firmly upon the work until accomplished, leaving the conscious Attention and mentality free to employ itself with other things.
When the student fully understands the details of Attention and how knowledge develops, the Yogi goes on to explain that there are other ways to gain knowledge about an object. By using these methods, Attention can be firmly focused on the object and subsequently kept there unconsciously—meaning a part of Attention, or a sub-conscious aspect of thinking, that will keep the sub-conscious mind focused on the task until it's done, while leaving conscious Attention and thought free to engage in other activities.
The Yogis teach the students that this new form of Attention is far more intense and powerful than is the conscious Attention, for it cannot be disturbed or shaken, or distracted from its object, and that it will work away at its task for days, months, years, or a lifetime if necessary, according to the difficulty of the task, and in fact carries its work over from one life to another, unless recalled by the Will. They teach the student that in everyone's life there is going on a greater or less degree of this sub-conscious work, carried on in obedience to a strong desire for knowledge manifested in some former life, and bearing fruit only in the present existence. Many important discoveries have been made in obedience to this law. But it is not of this phase of the matter that we wish to speak in this lesson.
The Yogis teach students that this new form of Attention is much more intense and powerful than conscious Attention, as it cannot be disturbed, shaken, or distracted from its focus. It will persist in its task for days, months, years, or even a lifetime if needed, depending on the complexity of the task, and actually continues its work from one life to another unless directed otherwise by the Will. They explain that there is a varying degree of this subconscious work happening in everyone's life, driven by a strong desire for knowledge that was formed in a past life, and this effort only bears fruit in the present life. Many significant discoveries have been made in line with this principle. However, that's not the aspect we want to focus on in this lesson.
The Yogi theory is that the sub-conscious intellectual faculty may be set to work under the direction of orders given by the Will. All of you know how the sub-conscious mentality will take up an order of the Will, or a strong wish, that the person be awakened at a certain hour in order to catch a train. Or, in the same way how the remembrance of a certain engagement at, say, four o'clock, will flash into the mind when the hands of the clock approach the stated hour. Nearly every one can recall instances of this sort in his own experience.
The Yogi theory suggests that the subconscious mind can be activated by commands given by our Will. Everyone knows how the subconscious can respond to a directive from the Will, like a strong desire to wake up at a specific time to catch a train. Similarly, the memory of a particular appointment, like one at four o'clock, can suddenly come to mind as the clock approaches that time. Most people can recall examples of this in their own lives.
But the Yogis go much further than this. They claim that any and all faculties of the mind may be "set going," or working on any problem, if ordered thereto by the Will. In fact, the Yogis, and their advanced students have mastered this art to such a surprising extent that they find it unnecessary to do the drudgery of thinking in the conscious field, and prefer to relegate such mental work to the sub-conscious, reserving their conscious work for the consideration of digested information and thought presented to them by the sub-conscious mind.
But the Yogis take it a step further. They assert that any and all mental abilities can be activated to tackle any problem, as directed by the Will. In fact, the Yogis and their advanced students have perfected this skill to such an impressive degree that they no longer see the need to engage in the tedious task of thinking at a conscious level. Instead, they choose to delegate that mental work to the subconscious, using their conscious minds for processing the information and thoughts that the subconscious provides.
Their directions to their students cover a great deal of ground, and extend over a long period of time, and many of the directions are quite complicated and full of detail. But we think that we can give our students an abbreviated and condensed idea in a few pages of the lesson. And the remaining lessons of the course will also throw additional light on the subject of sub-conscious mental action, in connection with other subjects.
Their instructions to students are quite extensive and span a long time, with many of the directions being complex and detailed. However, we believe we can provide our students with a summarized and concise overview in just a few pages of the lesson. The rest of the course lessons will also provide more insight into the topic of subconscious mental action in relation to other subjects.
The Yogi takes the student when the latter is much bothered by a consideration of some knotty and perplexing philosophical subject. He bids the student relax every muscle,—take the tension from every nerve—throw aside all mental strain, and then wait a few moments. Then the student is instructed to grasp the subject which he has had before his mind firmly and fixedly before his mental vision, by means of concentration. Then he is instructed to pass it on to the sub-conscious mentality by an effort of the Will, which effort is aided by forming a mental picture of the subject as a material substance, or bundle of thought, which is being bodily lifted up and dropped down a mental hatch-way, or trap-door, in which it sinks from sight. The student is then instructed to say to the sub-conscious mentality: "I wish this subject thoroughly analyzed, arranged, classified (and whatever else is desired) and then the results handed back to me. Attend to this."
The Yogi helps the student when they're deeply troubled by a tricky and confusing philosophical issue. He tells the student to relax every muscle, release the tension from every nerve, let go of all mental strain, and then wait for a few moments. Next, the student is guided to focus firmly and clearly on the subject that's been on their mind through concentration. Then, they are instructed to transfer it to their subconscious mind by making an effort with their Will, which is supported by creating a mental image of the subject as a physical object, or bundle of thought, being lifted up and dropped down a mental hatchway or trap-door, where it disappears from view. The student is then told to communicate with their subconscious mind: "I want this subject thoroughly analyzed, organized, classified (and whatever else is needed) and then please return the results to me. Pay attention to this."
The student is taught to speak to the sub-conscious mentality just as if it were a separate entity of being, which had been employed to do the work. He is also taught that confident expectation is an important part of the process, and that the degree of success depends upon the degree of this confident expectation.
The student learns to communicate with the subconscious mind as if it were an independent being that's been hired to do the job. They are also taught that confident expectation is a key part of the process, and that the level of success relies on the level of this confident expectation.
In obstinate cases, the student is taught to use the Imagination freely, until he is able to make a mental image or picture of the sub-conscious mind doing what is required of it. This process clears away a mental path for the feet of the sub-conscious mind, which it will choose thereafter, as it prefers to follow the line of least resistance.
In stubborn cases, the student is encouraged to use their imagination freely until they can create a mental image of the subconscious mind doing what’s needed. This process clears a mental path for the subconscious mind, which will then prefer to take the route of least resistance.
Of course much depends upon practice—practice makes perfect, you know, in everything else, and sub-consciousing is no exception to the rule.
Of course, a lot depends on practice—practice makes perfect, as you know, in everything, and subconscious training is no exception.
The student gradually acquires a proficiency in the art of sub-consciousing, and thereafter devotes his time to acquiring new facts for mental digestion, rather than bestowing it upon the mechanical act of thinking.
The student slowly becomes skilled in the art of subconscious learning, and then spends his time absorbing new information for mental processing instead of focusing on the mechanical act of thinking.
But a very important point to be remembered is that the Will-power back of the transferred thought-material, which Will-power is the cause of the subconscious action, depends very greatly upon the attention and interest given to the acquired material. This mass of thought-material which is to be digested, and threshed out by the sub-conscious mind, must be well saturated with interest and attention, in order to obtain the best results. In fact interest and attention are such important aids to the Will, that any consideration of the development and acquirement of Will-power is practically a development and acquirement of attention and interest. The student is referred to previous lessons in this course in which the importance of interest and attention is explained and described.
But a very important point to remember is that the willpower behind the transferred thought material, which is the cause of subconscious action, greatly depends on the attention and interest given to the acquired material. This mass of thought material that needs to be processed and analyzed by the subconscious mind must be well saturated with interest and attention in order to achieve the best results. In fact, interest and attention are such crucial aids to willpower that any discussion about developing and acquiring willpower is essentially about developing and acquiring attention and interest. The student is referred to previous lessons in this course where the importance of interest and attention is explained and described.
In acquiring the mass of thought-material which is to be passed on to the sub-conscious digestion, one must concentrate a great degree of interest and attention upon each item of thought-material gathered up. The gathering of this thought-material is a matter of the greatest importance, and must not be lightly passed by. One cannot hastily gather together all sorts of thought-material, and then expect the subconscious mind to do its work properly—it will not, in fact, and the student proceeding upon any such erroneous supposition is doomed to disappointment.
In gathering the wealth of thoughts that will be processed by the subconscious, it’s crucial to focus a lot of interest and attention on each piece of gathered thought. Collecting this thought material is extremely important and shouldn't be taken lightly. You can't just quickly throw together any random thoughts and expect your subconscious to handle them well—it won't. Anyone thinking this way is bound to end up disappointed.
The proper way to proceed, is to take up each bit of thought-material in turn, and examine it with the greatest possible interest, and consequently the greatest attention, and then after having fairly saturated it with this interested attention, place it with the pile of material which, after a while, is to be passed on to the sub-conscious mentality. Then take up the next bit of material, and after giving it similar treatment, pass it along to the pile also. Then after a while when you have gathered up the main facts of the case, proceed to consider the mass as a whole, with interest and attention, giving it as it were a "general treatment." Then drop it down the trap-door into the sub-conscious mind, with a strong command, "Attend to this thought-material," coupled with a strong expectant belief that your order will be obeyed.
The right way to go about it is to take each piece of thought material one at a time, examining it with as much interest and focus as possible. After thoroughly engaging with it, add it to the stack of material that will eventually be passed on to your subconscious mind. Then, move on to the next piece of material, giving it the same level of attention before adding it to the pile as well. After some time, once you’ve gathered the main points, look at the overall collection with interest and focus, providing what you could call a "general treatment." Finally, send it down to your subconscious mind with a firm command: "Pay attention to this thought material," along with a strong belief that your request will be followed.
The idea underlying this treatment of the thought-material with interest and attention is that by so doing a strong "Mental Image" is created, which may be easily handled by the sub-conscious mind. Remember that you are passing on "thoughts" for the sub-consciousness to act upon, and that the more tangible and real these thoughts are, the better can they be handled. Therefore any plan that will build these thoughts up into "real" things is the plan to pursue. And attention and interest produce just this result.
The concept behind this approach to engaging with thoughts is that doing so creates a strong "Mental Image," which can be easily managed by the subconscious mind. Keep in mind that you are sending "thoughts" for the subconscious to work with, and the more concrete and real these thoughts are, the easier they can be processed. So, any strategy that helps turn these thoughts into "real" things is the one to follow. Engagement and interest lead to exactly that outcome.
If we may be pardoned for using a homely and commonplace illustration we would say that the idea may be grasped by the illustration of boiling an egg, whereby the fluid "white" and "yolk" becomes solid and real. Also the use of a shaving brush by a man, by which the thin lather is gradually worked up into a rich, thick, creamy mass, is an illustration. Again, the churning of butter is a favorite illustration of the Hindus, who thus call the attention of their students to the fact that thought-material if worked upon with attention and interest become "thought-forms" that may be handled by the mind just as the hands handle a material object. We ask you to think of these illustrations, for when you once grasp the idea that we wish to convey to you, you will have the secret of great thinking powers within your grasp.
If we may be excused for using a simple and familiar example, we would say that the concept can be understood by boiling an egg, where the liquid "white" and "yolk" become solid and real. Similarly, when a man uses a shaving brush, the thin lather is gradually built up into a rich, thick, creamy foam. Additionally, the process of churning butter is a popular example among Hindus, who use it to highlight the point that thought-material, when engaged with attention and interest, transforms into "thought-forms" that can be manipulated by the mind just like how hands handle a physical object. We encourage you to reflect on these examples because once you understand the idea we want to share, you'll hold the key to exceptional thinking abilities.
And this power of sub-consciousing is not confined alone to the consideration of philosophical questions. On the contrary it is applicable to every field of human thought, and may be properly employed in any and all of them. It is useful in solving the problems of every-day life and work, as well as to the higher flights of the human mind. And we wish every one of our students to realize that in this simple lesson we are giving them the key to a great mental power.
And this ability to tap into the subconscious isn't limited to philosophical questions. In fact, it's relevant to every area of human thinking and can be effectively applied in all of them. It helps with solving everyday problems as well as the more complex challenges of the human mind. We want all our students to understand that in this straightforward lesson, we are providing them with the key to a significant mental power.
To realize just what we are offering to you, we would remind you of the old fairy tales of all races, in which there is to be found one or more tales telling of some poor cobbler, or tailor, or carpenter, as the case may be, who had by his good deeds, gained favor with the "brownies" or good fairies, who would come each night when the man and his family were asleep, and proceed to complete the work that the artisan had laid out for the morrow. The pieces of leather would be made into shoes; the cloth would be sewed into garments; the wood would be joined, and nailed together into boxes, chairs, benches and what not. But in each case the rough materials were prepared by the artisan himself during the day.
To understand what we’re offering you, we should remind you of the old fairy tales from various cultures, where there’s often a story about a poor cobbler, tailor, or carpenter. These characters, through their good deeds, earn the favor of the "brownies" or good fairies, who come each night while the man and his family are asleep to finish the work the artisan had set aside for the next day. Leather is turned into shoes, cloth is sewn into clothing, and wood is joined and nailed together into boxes, chairs, benches, and more. But in every case, the rough materials are prepared by the artisan during the day.
Well, that is just what we are trying to introduce to you. A clan of mental brownies, loving and kindly disposed toward you, who are anxious and willing to help you in your work. All you have to do is to give them the proper materials, and tell then what you want done, and they will do the rest. But these mental brownies are a part of your own mentality, remember, and no alien and foreign entities, as some have imagined.
Well, that’s exactly what we’re trying to share with you. A group of mental helpers, friendly and eager to support you, who are ready and willing to assist you in your tasks. All you need to do is provide them with the right materials and let them know what you want done, and they’ll take care of the rest. But remember, these mental helpers are a part of your own mind, not outside or unrelated beings, as some have thought.
A number of people who have accidentally discovered this power of the sub-conscious mind to work out problems, and to render other valuable service to its owner, have been led to suppose that the aid really came from some other entity or intelligence. Some have thought that the messages came from friends in the spirit land, and others have believed that some high intelligence—God or his angels—was working in their behalf. Without discussing spirit communication, or Divine messages, in both of which we believe (with certain provisional reservations) we feel justified in saying that the majority of cases of this kind may be referred to the sub-conscious workings of one's own mentality.
A lot of people who have accidentally stumbled upon the power of the subconscious mind to solve problems and provide other valuable services have come to believe that the help actually came from some other entity or intelligence. Some think that the messages came from friends in the spirit world, while others believe that a higher intelligence—like God or his angels—is working for them. Without getting into spirit communication or divine messages, both of which we believe in (with some certain reservations), we feel confident in saying that most cases like this can be traced back to the subconscious workings of one's own mind.
Each of us has "a friend" in our own mind—a score of them in fact, who delight in performing services for us, if we will but allow them to do so. Not only have we a Higher Self to whom we may turn for comfort and aid in times of deep distress and necessity, but we have these invisible mental workers on the sub-conscious plane, who are very willing and glad to perform much of our mental work for us, if we will but give them the material in proper shape.
Each of us has "a friend" in our minds—actually, a whole bunch of them—who love to help us out if we just let them. Not only do we have a Higher Self we can rely on for comfort and support during tough times, but we also have these invisible mental helpers on a subconscious level, who are eager and happy to do a lot of our mental work for us, as long as we provide them with the right material.
It is very difficult to impart specific directions for obtaining these results, as each case must depend to a great extent upon the peculiar circumstances surrounding it. But we may say that the main thing needed is to "lick into shape" the material, and then pass it on to the sub-conscious mind in the manner spoken of a few moments ago. Let us run over a few cases wherein this principle may be applied.
It’s really hard to give clear instructions for achieving these results since each situation relies heavily on its unique circumstances. However, we can say that the key requirement is to "shape" the material and then transfer it to the subconscious mind like we discussed earlier. Let’s go through a few examples where this principle can be applied.
Let us suppose that you are confronted with a problem consisting of an uncertainty as to which of two or more courses to adopt in some affair of life. Each course seems to have advantages and disadvantages, and you seem unable to pass upon the matter clearly and intelligently. The more you try the more perplexed and worried do you become. Your mind seems to tire of the matter, and manifests a state which may be called "mental nausea." This state will be apparent to any one who has had much "thinking" to do. The average person, however, persists in going over the matter, notwithstanding the tired condition of the mind, and its evident distaste for a further consideration of the subject. They will keep on forcing it back to the mind for consideration, and even at night time will keep thrashing away at the subject. Now this course is absurd. The mind recognizes that the work should be done by another part of itself—its digestive region, in fact—and naturally rebels at the finishing-up machinery being employed in work unsuited for it.
Let’s say you’re faced with a dilemma where you're unsure which of two or more options to take in some aspect of your life. Each option seems to come with its own pros and cons, and you find it hard to think clearly about the situation. The more you try to figure it out, the more confused and anxious you become. Your mind appears to get tired of the issue, entering a state that could be described as "mental nausea." This condition is familiar to anyone who has done a lot of thinking. Yet, the average person continues to ponder the issue, despite their mind’s exhaustion and clear reluctance to think about it anymore. They keep forcing themselves to think about it, even at night, obsessing over the topic. This approach is ridiculous. The mind understands that the resolution should come from another part of itself—its processing area, to be specific—and instinctively resents having its problem-solving resources used for work that isn’t suitable for them.
According to the Sub-consciousing plan, the best thing for the man to do would be for him first to calm and quiet his mind. Then he should arrange the main features of the problem, together with the minor details in their proper places. Then he should pass them slowly before him in review, giving a strong interest and attention to each fact and detail, as it passes before him, but without the slightest attempt to form a decision, or come to a conclusion. Then, having given the matter an interested and attentive review, let him Will that it pass on to his sub-conscious mind, forming the mental image of dropping it through the trap-door, and at the same time giving the command of the Will, "Attend to this for me!"
According to the Sub-consciousing plan, the best thing for a person to do is to first calm and quiet their mind. Then, they should organize the main aspects of the problem along with the minor details in their proper order. After that, they should slowly review them, paying strong interest and attention to each fact and detail as it comes up, but without trying to make any decisions or reach any conclusions. Once they’ve given the matter a focused and attentive review, they should Will it to pass into their subconscious mind, visualizing it as dropping through a trap-door, while at the same time asserting the command of the Will, "Take care of this for me!"
Then dismiss the matter from your conscious mind, by an effort of command of the Will. If you find it difficult to do this, you may soon acquire the mastery by a frequent assertion, "I have dismissed this matter from my conscious mind, and my sub-conscious mind will attend to it for me." Then, endeavor to create a mental feeling of perfect trust and confidence in the matter, and avoid all worry or anxiety about it. This may be somewhat difficult at the first trial, but will become a natural feeling after you have gained the confidence arising from successful results in several cases. The matter is one of practice, and, like anything else that is new, must be acquired by perseverance and patience. It is well worth the time and trouble, and once acquired will be regarded as something in the nature of a treasure discovered in an unexpected place. The sense of tranquillity and content—of calm and confidence—that comes to one who has practiced this plan, will of itself be worth all the trouble, not to speak of the main result. To one who has acquired this method, the old worries, frettings, and general "stewed up" feeling, will seem like a relic of barbarism. The new way opens up a world of new feelings and content.
Then push the matter out of your conscious mind with a strong mental effort. If you find this challenging, you can quickly learn to master it by repeatedly saying, "I have pushed this matter out of my conscious mind, and my subconscious will handle it for me." Next, try to foster a feeling of complete trust and confidence regarding the situation, while avoiding any worry or anxiety. This might be a bit tough at first, but it will become a natural feeling once you build confidence from achieving successful results in several instances. This process requires practice, and like anything new, it demands perseverance and patience. It’s definitely worth the time and effort, and once you have it down, it will feel like discovering hidden treasure. The sense of peace and satisfaction—of calm and confidence—that comes from practicing this approach will make all the effort worthwhile, not to mention the main outcome. For someone who has mastered this technique, old worries and that general "stressed out" feeling will seem like something from a much earlier time. The new approach opens up a world filled with fresh feelings and contentment.
In some cases the matter will be worked out by the sub-conscious mind in a very short time, and in fact we have known cases in which the answer would be flashed back almost instantly, almost like an inspiration. But in the majority of cases more or less time is required. The sub-conscious mind works very rapidly, but it takes time to arrange the thought-material properly, and to shape it into the desired forms. In the majority of cases it is well to let the matter rest until the next day—a fact that gives us a clue to the old advice to "sleep over" an important proposition, before passing a final decision.
In some situations, the subconscious mind will resolve the issue very quickly, and we’ve even seen cases where the answer comes back almost immediately, like a flash of inspiration. However, in most cases, it takes some time. The subconscious mind operates quickly, but it requires time to organize the ideas properly and shape them into the desired forms. Generally, it's a good idea to let the matter sit until the next day—this reflects the classic advice to "sleep on" an important decision before making a final choice.
If the matter does not present itself the following day, bring it up again before the conscious mind for review. You will find that it has shaped itself up considerably, and is assuming definite form and clearness. But right here—and this is important—do not make the mistake of again dissecting it, and meddling with it, and trying to arrange it with your conscious mind. But, instead, give it attention and interest in its new form, and then pass it back again to the sub-conscious mind for further work. You will find an improvement each time you examine it. But, right here another word of caution. Do not make the mistake of yielding to the impatience of the beginner, and keep on repeatedly bringing up the matter to see what is being done. Give it time to have the work done on it. Do not be like the boy who planted seeds, and who each day would pull them up to see whether they had sprouted, and how much.
If the issue doesn't come up the next day, revisit it with your conscious mind for reconsideration. You'll notice it's developed significantly and is taking on a clearer form. But here's something important—don't make the mistake of tearing it apart again, tweaking it, or trying to organize it with your conscious mind. Instead, focus on it with interest in its new state, then send it back to your subconscious for more processing. You'll notice improvement every time you look at it. But here's another word of caution: don't fall into the impatience of a beginner by constantly bringing it up to see what progress has been made. Give it time to develop. Don’t be like the boy who planted seeds and kept digging them up every day to check if they had sprouted and by how much.
Sooner or later, the sub-conscious mind will, of its own choice, lift up the matter and present it to you in its finished shape for the consideration of the conscious mind. The sub-conscious mind does not insist that you shall adopt its views, or accept its work, but merely hands out to you the result of its sorting, classifying and arranging. The choice and will still remains yours, but you will often find that there is seen to be one plan or path that stands out clearly from the others, and you will very likely adopt that one. The secret is that the sub-conscious mind with its wonderful patience and care has analyzed the matter, and has separated things before apparently connected. It has also found resemblances and has combined things heretofore considered opposed to each other. In short it has done for you all that you could have done with the expenditure of great work and time, and done it well. And then it lays the matter before you for your consideration and verdict.
Sooner or later, your subconscious will, on its own, bring up the issues and present them to you in a polished form for your conscious mind to consider. The subconscious doesn’t force you to accept its perspectives or conclusions; it simply shares the results of its sorting, organizing, and analyzing. The choice and decision still belong to you, but you’ll often notice that one plan or option stands out clearly among the rest, and you’re likely to go with that one. The key is that your subconscious, with its remarkable patience and care, has broken down the issue and separated what seemed to be connected. It has also found similarities and has combined things that were previously thought to be contradictory. In short, it has done for you all the hard work that you could have done yourself with a lot of effort and time, and it has done it well. Then it presents the matter to you for your consideration and decision.
Its whole work seems to have been in the nature of assorting, dissecting, analyzing, and arranging the evidence, and then presenting it before you in a clear, systematic shape. It does not attempt to exercise the judicial prerogative or function, but seems to recognize that its work ceases with the presentation of the edited evidence, and that of the conscious mind begins at the same point.
Its entire job seems to involve sorting, breaking down, analyzing, and organizing the evidence, and then presenting it to you in a clear, organized way. It doesn’t try to take on a judicial role or function, but it seems to understand that its work ends with the presentation of the edited evidence, and that’s where the conscious mind’s work starts.
Now, do not confuse this work with that of the Intuition, which is a very different mental phase or plane. This sub-conscious working, just mentioned, plays an entirely different part. It is a good servant, and does not try to be more. The Intuition, on the contrary, is more like a higher friend—a friend at court, as it were, who gives us warnings and advice.
Now, don't confuse this work with that of Intuition, which is a totally different mental phase or level. This subconscious process I just mentioned has an entirely different role. It's a helpful servant and doesn't try to be anything more. Intuition, on the other hand, is more like a higher friend—a friend in a powerful position, who offers us warnings and advice.
In our directions we have told you how to make use of this part of the mind, consciously and knowingly, so as to obtain the best results, and to get rid of worry and anxiety attendant upon unsettled questions. But, in fact, every one of us makes more or less use of this part of the mind unconsciously, and not realizing the important part it plays in our mental life. We are perplexed about a matter and keep it "on our minds" until we are forced to lay it aside by reason of some other demand, or when we sink to sleep. Often to our surprise we will find that when we next think of it the matter has somehow cleared up and straightened itself out, and we seem to have learned something about it that we did not know before. We do not understand it, and are apt to dismiss it as "just one of those things." In these lessons we are attempting to explain some of "those things," and to enable you to use them consciously and understandingly, instead of by chance, instinctively, and clumsily. We are teaching you Mastery of the Mind.
In our guide, we've explained how to consciously and intentionally use this part of the mind to achieve the best results and eliminate the worry and anxiety that come with unresolved issues. However, everyone tends to use this part of the mind unconsciously, often without realizing its significant role in our mental lives. We might get stuck on a problem and keep it "on our minds" until something else pulls our attention away, or until we fall asleep. Often, to our surprise, when we revisit the issue later, it seems to have resolved itself, and we find we've discovered something new about it. We don't quite understand how that happened and may brush it off as "just one of those things." In these lessons, we're aiming to clarify some of "those things" and help you use them purposefully and thoughtfully, rather than by chance, instinct, or awkwardness. We’re teaching you how to Master the Mind.
Now to apply the rule to another case. Suppose you wish to gather together all the information that you possess relating to a certain subject. In the first place it is certain that you know a very great deal more about any subject than you think you do. Stored away in the various recesses of the mind, or memory if you prefer that term, are stray bits of information and knowledge concerning almost any subject. But these bits of information are not associated with each other. You have never attempted to think attentively upon the particular question before you, and the facts are not correlated in the mind. It is just as if you had so many hundred pounds of anything scattered throughout the space of a large warehouse, a tiny bit here, and a tiny bit there, mixed up with thousands of other things.
Now let's apply the rule to another situation. Imagine you want to gather all the information you have on a specific topic. First of all, it's clear that you actually know a lot more about any subject than you realize. Hidden away in the different corners of your mind, or memory if you prefer, are random pieces of information and knowledge about almost any topic. However, these bits of information aren’t connected to one another. You’ve never really taken the time to think carefully about the particular question at hand, and the facts aren’t organized in your mind. It’s like having hundreds of pounds of items scattered throughout a large warehouse: a little here and a little there, mixed in with thousands of other things.
You may prove this by sitting down some time and letting your thoughts run along the line of some particular subject, and you will find emerging into the field of consciousness all sorts of information that you had apparently forgotten, and each fitting itself into its proper place. Every person has had experiences of this kind. But the work of gathering together the scattered scraps of knowledge is more or less tedious for the conscious mind, and the sub-conscious mind will do the work equally well with the wear and tear on the attention. In fact, it is the sub-conscious mind that always does the work, even when you think it is the conscious mind. All the conscious mind does is to hold the attention firmly upon the object before it, and then let the sub-consciousness pass the material before it. But this holding the attention is tiresome work, and it is not necessary for it to expend its energies upon the details of the task, for the work may be done in an easier and simpler way.
You can prove this by taking some time to sit down and let your thoughts flow on a specific topic, and you'll notice all sorts of information that you seemingly forgot coming back into your awareness, with each piece fitting into its rightful spot. Everyone has had experiences like this. However, gathering together the scattered bits of knowledge can be a bit tedious for the conscious mind, while the subconscious mind can handle it just as well without tiring you out. In fact, it’s the subconscious mind that always does the work, even when you think it’s the conscious mind. The conscious mind just keeps its focus on the task at hand and lets the subconscious present the information. But maintaining that focus can be exhausting, and it’s really not necessary for it to use up its energy on the details of the task, since the work can be done in a much easier and simpler way.
The best way is to follow a plan similar to the one mentioned a few pages back. That is, to fix the interested attention firmly upon the question before you, until you manage to get a clear, vivid impression of just what you want answered. Then pass the whole matter into the sub-conscious mind with the command "Attend to this," and then leave it. Throw the whole matter off of your mind, and let the sub-conscious work go on. If possible let the matter run along until the next morning and then take it up for consideration, when, if you have proceeded properly you will find the matter worked out, arranged in logical sequence, so that your conscious attention will be able to clearly review the string of facts, examples, illustrations, experiences, etc., relating to the matter in question.
The best approach is to follow a plan similar to the one mentioned a few pages back. Specifically, focus your attention on the question at hand until you get a clear and vivid idea of exactly what you want to be answered. Then, pass it onto your subconscious mind with the command "Focus on this," and let it go. Forget about it and allow your subconscious to keep working. If you can, let it sit until the next morning, and then revisit it. If you’ve done it right, you’ll find the issue is worked out and organized logically, allowing your conscious mind to clearly review the facts, examples, illustrations, experiences, etc., related to the question at hand.
Now, many of you will say that you would like this plan to work in cases in which you have not the time to sleep over it. In such cases we will say that it is possible to cultivate a rapid method of sub-consciousing, and in fact many business men and men of affairs have stumbled upon a similar plan, driven to the discovery by necessity. They will give a quick, comprehensive, strong flash of attention upon the subject, getting right to the heart of it, and then will let it rest in the sub-conscious mind for a moment or two, killing a minute or two of time n "preliminary conversation," until the first flash of answer comes to them. After the first flash, and taking hold of the first loose end of the subject that presents itself to them, they will unwind a string of information and "talk" about the subject that will surprise even themselves. Many lawyers have acquired this knowledge, and are what is known as "resourceful." Such men are often confronted with questions of conditions utterly unsuspected by them a moment before. Practice has taught them the folly of fear and loss of confidence at such moments, and has also impressed upon them the truth that something within them will come to the rescue. So, presenting a confident air, they will manage to say a few platitudes or commonplaces, while the sub-conscious mind is most rapidly gathering its materials for the answer. In a moment an opening thought "flashes upon" the man, and as he continues idea after idea passes before his conscious and eager attention, sometimes so rapidly that it is almost impossible to utter them and lo! the danger is over, and a brilliant success is often snatched from the jaws of an apparent failure and defeat. In such cases the mental demand upon the sub-conscious mind is not voiced in words, but is the result of a strong mental need. However, if one gives a quick verbal command "Attend to this," the result will be heightened.
Now, many of you might say you wish this method could work in situations where you don’t have time to think it over. In those cases, we’ll say it’s possible to develop a quick way of tapping into your subconscious, and in fact, many businesspeople and professionals have discovered similar techniques out of necessity. They give a short, focused burst of attention to the topic, getting straight to the point, and then let it sit in their subconscious for a moment or two, filling time with a bit of "small talk" until the first response comes to them. After that initial insight, grabbing hold of the first relevant thought that comes to mind, they can unravel a string of information and speak on the subject in a way that even surprises them. Many lawyers have gained this skill and are considered "resourceful." Such individuals often face questions about situations they had no idea were coming just moments before. Experience has taught them not to panic or lose confidence in these moments and reinforced the belief that something within them will help them out. So, by appearing confident, they can share a few obvious statements or common ideas while their subconscious mind quickly gathers the needed information for a proper answer. Then, a clear thought "flashes" to them, and as they continue, idea after idea streams through their conscious mind so quickly that it can be hard to verbalize them all, and just like that, the crisis passes, often turning a potential failure into a brilliant success. In these instances, the mental request made to the subconscious isn’t necessarily spoken but arises from a strong mental need. However, if one gives a quick verbal command, "Attend to this," the outcome will be even better.
We have known of cases of men prominent in the world's affairs who made a practice of smoking a cigar during important business interviews, not because they particularly cared for tobacco, but because they had learned to appreciate the value of a moment's time for the mind to "gather itself together," as one man expressed it. A question would be asked, or a proposition advanced suddenly, demanding an immediate answer. Under the watchful eyes of the other party the questioned party tried not to show by his expression any indication of searching for an answer, for obvious reasons. So, instead, he would take a long puff at the cigar, then a slow attentive look at the ashes on its tip, and then another moment consumed in flicking the ash into the receptacle, and then came the answer, slowly, "Well, as to that—" or some other words of that kind, prefacing the real answer which had been rapidly framed by the sub-conscious mind in time to be uttered in its proper place. The few moments of time gained had been sufficient for the sub-conscious mind to gather up its materials, and the matter to be shaped properly, without any appearance of hesitation on the part of the answerer. All of this required practice, of course, but the principle may be seen through it all and in every similar case. The point is that the man, in such cases, sets some hidden part of his mind to work for him, and when he begins to speak the matter is at least roughly "licked into shape for him."
We've seen instances of influential men who made it a habit to smoke a cigar during important business meetings, not because they were particularly fond of tobacco, but because they understood the value of taking a moment to "gather their thoughts," as one person put it. When a question was asked or a proposal was made unexpectedly, it required an immediate response. Under the watchful gaze of the other person, the one being questioned tried to avoid showing any signs of searching for an answer, for obvious reasons. Instead, they would take a long puff from the cigar, then slowly focus on the ashes at its tip, and spend another moment flicking the ash into the ashtray. Then came the answer, slowly, "Well, regarding that—" or similar words, setting up the real answer that their subconscious had quickly crafted in time to be delivered appropriately. The brief moments of time gained were enough for their subconscious to sort through its information, allowing the matter to be framed correctly without any sign of hesitation from the responder. This all required practice, of course, but the underlying principle is evident in every similar situation. The key point is that the person, in these situations, engages a hidden part of their mind to work for them, and when they begin to speak, the information is at least somewhat "shaped" for them.
Our students will understand, of course, that this is not advice to smoke cigars during interviews of importance, but is merely given to illustrate the principle. We have known other men to twirl a lead pencil in their fingers in a lazy sort of fashion, and then drop it at the important moment. But we must cease giving examples of this kind, lest we be accused of giving instructions in worldly wisdom, instead of teaching the use of the mind. The impressive pause of the teacher, before answering his pupil's question, is also an example of the workings of this law. One often says "stop, let me think a moment," and during his pause he does not really consciously think at all, but stares ahead in a dreamy fashion, while his sub-conscious mind does the work for him, although he little suspects the nature of the operation. One has but to look around him to realize the importance and frequent application of this truth.
Our students will understand, of course, that this isn't advice to smoke cigars during important interviews, but is only meant to illustrate the principle. We've seen others lazily twirl a pencil in their fingers and then drop it at the crucial moment. But we should stop sharing examples like this, so we don't get accused of offering worldly wisdom instead of teaching how to use the mind. The teacher's notable pause before answering a student's question is also an example of how this principle works. Often, someone might say, "Hold on, let me think for a moment," and during that pause, they're not really thinking consciously; they just stare ahead, daydreaming, while their subconscious mind does the work for them, even though they might not realize what's happening. One only needs to look around to see the importance and common application of this truth.
And not only may the sub-conscious mind be used in the directions indicated on preceding pages, but in nearly every perplexity and problem of life may it be called upon for help. These little sub-conscious brownies are ever at our disposal, and seem to be happy to be of service to us.
And not only can the subconscious mind be used in the ways mentioned on previous pages, but it can also be relied upon for assistance in almost every confusion and challenge we face in life. These little subconscious helpers are always available to us, and they seem to enjoy being helpful.
And so far from being apt to get us in a position of false dependence, it is calculated to make us self-confident—for we are calling upon a part of ourselves, not upon some outside intelligence. If those people who never feel satisfied unless they are getting "advice" from others would only cultivate the acquaintance of this little "home adviser" within them, they would lose that dependent attitude and frame of mind, and would grow self-confident and fearless. Just imagine the confidence of one who feels that he has within him a source of knowledge equal to that of the majority of those with whom he is likely to come in contact, and he feels less afraid to face them, and look them fearlessly in the eyes. He feels that his "mind" is not confined to the little field of consciousness, but is an area infinitely greater, containing a mass of information undreamed of. Everything that the man has inherited, or brought with him from past lives—everything that he has read, heard or seen, or experienced in this life, is hidden away there in some quarter of that great sub-conscious mind, and, if he will but give the command, the "essence" of all that knowledge is his. The details may not be presented to his consciousness (often it is not, for very good occult reasons) by the result, or essence of the knowledge will pass before his attention, with sufficient examples and illustrations, or arguments to enable him to make out "a good case" for himself.
And far from putting us in a position of false dependence, it actually helps us become self-confident—because we’re tapping into a part of ourselves, not relying on some outside source. If those who are never satisfied unless they’re getting “advice” from others would just get to know this little “home adviser” inside them, they would shed that dependent mindset and become self-confident and fearless. Just imagine the confidence of someone who believes they have a source of knowledge within them that matches the majority of people they might interact with; they would feel less intimidated and could look others in the eye without fear. They realize that their “mind” isn’t limited to the small area of their conscious thoughts but actually encompasses a much larger space filled with untapped information. Everything they’ve inherited or brought from past lives—everything they’ve read, heard, seen, or experienced in this life—is stored away in some part of that vast subconscious mind, and if they just command it, the “essence” of all that knowledge is theirs. The details might not come to their conscious thoughts (often for very valid reasons), but the essence of the knowledge will present itself with enough examples, illustrations, or arguments to help them build “a good case” for themselves.
In the next lesson we will call your attention to other features and qualities of this great field of mind, showing you how you can put it to work, and Master it. Remember, always, the "I" is the Master. And its Mastery must always be remembered and asserted over all phases and planes of the mind. Do not be a slave to the sub-conscious, but be its MASTER.
In the next lesson, we will highlight other aspects and qualities of this amazing realm of the mind, showing you how to harness it and master it. Always remember, the "I" is the Master. And its mastery must be recognized and asserted over all aspects and levels of the mind. Don’t be a slave to the subconscious; instead, be its MASTER.
MANTRAM (OR AFFIRMATION).
I have within me a great area of Mind that is under my command, and subject to my Mastery. This Mind is friendly to me, and is glad to do my bidding, and obey my orders. It will work for me when I ask it, and is constant, untiring, and faithful. Knowing this I am no longer afraid, ignorant or uninformed. The "I" is master of it all, and is asserting its authority. "I" am master over Body, Mind, Consciousness, and Sub-consciousness. I am "I"—a Centre of Power, Strength, and Knowledge. I am "I"—and "I" am Spirit, a fragment from the Divine Flame.
I have a vast Mind within me that I control and command. This Mind is supportive and eager to follow my directions and orders. It works for me whenever I ask, and it's reliable, tireless, and loyal. Knowing this, I'm no longer afraid, uninformed, or in the dark. The "I" is in charge of everything and is asserting its power. I am the master of my Body, Mind, Consciousness, and Subconsciousness. I am "I"—a source of Power, Strength, and Knowledge. I am "I"—and "I" am Spirit, a part of the Divine Flame.
THE ELEVENTH LESSON.
SUBCONSCIOUS CHARACTER BUILDING.
In our last lesson (the Tenth Lesson) we called your attention to the wonderful work of the sub-conscious regions of mentation in the direction of the performance of Intellectual work. Great as are the possibilities of this field of mentation in the direction named, they are equaled by the possibilities of building up character by similar methods.
In our last lesson (the Tenth Lesson), we highlighted the amazing functions of the subconscious mind when it comes to doing intellectual work. While the potential of this area of the mind for intellectual tasks is impressive, it's matched by the ability to develop character through similar methods.
Every one realizes that one may change his character by a strenuous course of repression and training, and nearly all who read these lines have modified their characteristics somewhat by similar methods. But it is only of late years that the general public have become aware that Character might be modified, changed, and sometimes completely altered by means of an intelligent use of the sub-conscious faculties of the mind.
Everyone understands that you can change your character through focused effort and training, and almost all who read this have somewhat modified their traits using similar methods. However, it's only in recent years that the general public has come to realize that character can be modified, changed, and sometimes completely transformed through the intelligent use of the subconscious mind.
The word "Character" is derived from ancient terms meaning "to mark," "to engrave," etc., and some authorities inform us that the term originally arose from the word used by the Babylonian brickmakers to designate the trade mark impressed by them upon their bricks, each maker having his own mark. This is interesting, in view of the recent theories regarding the cultivation of characteristics which may be found in the current Western works on psychology. But these theories are not new to the Yogi teachers of the East, who have employed similar methods for centuries past in training their students and pupils. The Yogis have long taught that a man's character was, practically, the crude character-stuff possessed by him at his birth, modified and shaped by outside influences in the case of the ordinary man, and by deliberate self-training and shaping by the wise man. Their pupils are examined regarding their characteristics, and then directed to repress the undesirable traits, and to cultivate the desirable ones.
The word "Character" comes from ancient terms that mean "to mark," "to engrave," etc. Some experts say the term originally came from the word used by Babylonian brickmakers to describe the trademark they would stamp on their bricks, with each maker having their own unique mark. This is interesting, considering the recent theories about developing characteristics that can be found in the latest Western psychology texts. However, these theories aren’t new to the Yogi teachers of the East, who have been using similar methods for centuries to train their students. The Yogis have long believed that a person's character is essentially the raw character traits they were born with, which are shaped and influenced by external factors in the case of an average person, and intentionally refined by the wise person through self-discipline. Their students are assessed on their traits and then guided to suppress the negative ones while nurturing the positive ones.
The Yogi practice of Character Building is based upon the knowledge of the wonderful powers of the sub-conscious plane of the mind. The pupil is not required to pursue strenuous methods of repression or cultivation, but, on the contrary, is taught that such methods are opposed to nature's plans, and that the best way is to imitate nature and to gradually unfold the desired characteristics by means of focusing the will-power and attention upon them. The weeding out of undesirable characteristics is accomplished by the pupil cultivating the characteristics directly opposed to the undesirable ones. For instance, if the pupil desires to overcome Fear, he is not instructed to concentrate on Fear with the idea of killing it out, but, instead, is taught to mentally deny that he has Fear, and then to concentrate his attention upon the ideal of Courage. When Courage is developed, Fear is found to have faded away. The positive always overpowers the negative.
The Yogi practice of Character Building is rooted in understanding the amazing powers of the subconscious mind. Students aren’t required to use harsh methods of suppression or training; instead, they learn that those methods go against nature's intentions. The best approach is to follow nature's lead and gradually develop the traits they want by focusing their willpower and attention on them. To eliminate unwanted traits, students should foster the characteristics that directly oppose those they want to change. For example, if a student wants to overcome Fear, they’re not advised to focus on Fear with the goal of extinguishing it. Instead, they’re taught to mentally affirm that they don’t have Fear and to direct their attention toward the ideal of Courage. As Courage grows, Fear naturally diminishes. The positive always outweighs the negative.
In the word "ideal" is found the secret of the Yogi method of sub-conscious character building. The teachings are to the effect that "ideals" may be built up by the bestowal of attention upon them. The student is given the example of a rose bush. He is taught that the plant will grow and flourish in the measure that care and attention is bestowed upon it and vice versa. He is taught that the ideal of some desired characteristic is a mental rosebush, and that by careful attention it will grow and put forth leaves and flowers. He is then given some minor mental trait to develop, and is taught to dwell upon it in thought—to exercise his imagination and to mentally "see" himself attaining the desired quality. He is given mantrams or affirmation to repeat, for the purpose of giving him a mental center around which to build an ideal. There is a mighty power in words, used in this way, providing that the user always thinks of the meaning of the words, and makes a mental picture of the quality expressed by them, instead of merely repeating them parrot fashion.
In the word "ideal" lies the secret of the Yogi method for building character subconsciously. The teachings suggest that "ideals" can be developed by focusing attention on them. The student is shown the example of a rose bush. He learns that the plant will grow and thrive to the extent that care and attention are given to it and vice versa. He understands that the ideal of a desired characteristic is like a mental rosebush, and with careful attention, it will grow and produce leaves and flowers. He is then assigned a minor mental trait to develop and is taught to focus on it—using his imagination to mentally "see" himself achieving that quality. He receives mantras or affirmations to repeat, aimed at giving him a mental center around which to build an ideal. There is immense power in words used this way, as long as the user considers the meaning of the words and creates a mental image of the quality they represent, rather than just repeating them like a parrot.
The Yogi student is trained gradually, until he acquires the power of conscious direction of the sub-conscious mind in the building up process, which power comes to anyone—Oriental or Occidental—who will take the trouble to practice. In fact, nearly everyone possesses and actively uses this power, although he may not be aware of it. One's character is largely the result of the quality of thoughts held in the mind, and of the mental pictures or ideals entertained by the person. The man who constantly sees and thinks of himself as unsuccessful and down-trodden is very apt to grow ideals of thought forms of these things until his whole nature is dominated by them, and his every act works toward the objectification of the thoughts. On the contrary, the man who makes an ideal of success and accomplishment finds that his whole mental nature seems to work toward that result—the objectification of the ideal. And so it is with every other ideal. The person who builds up a mental ideal of Jealousy will be very apt to objectify the same, and to unconsciously create condition that will give his Jealousy food upon which to feed. But this particular phase of the subject, properly belongs to our next lesson. This Eleventh Lesson is designed to point out the way by which people may mould their characters in any way they desire—supplanting undesirable characteristics by desirable ones, and developing desirable ideals into active characteristics. The mind is plastic to him who knows the secret of its manipulation.
The Yogi student is gradually trained until he gains the ability to consciously direct his subconscious mind during the development process. This ability is available to anyone—whether from the East or West—who is willing to put in the effort to practice. In fact, almost everyone has and actively uses this power, even if they aren't aware of it. A person's character is largely shaped by the quality of thoughts they hold in their mind and the mental images or ideals they entertain. A person who constantly sees and thinks of himself as unsuccessful and oppressed is likely to develop thought patterns centered around those ideas, dominating his entire being and driving every action towards realizing those thoughts. Conversely, someone who focuses on success and achievement will find that their entire mental state works towards that outcome—the realization of their ideals. This applies to every other ideal as well. A person who builds a mental image of jealousy is likely to bring that image to life, unconsciously creating situations that nourish their jealousy. However, this part of the topic belongs more appropriately in our next lesson. This Eleventh Lesson aims to show how people can shape their characters in any way they wish—replacing undesirable traits with desirable ones and transforming positive ideals into active characteristics. The mind is flexible for those who understand how to manage it.
The average person recognizes his strong and weak points of character, but is very apt to regard them as fixed and unalterable, or practically so. He thinks that he "is just as the Lord made him," and that is the end of it. He fails to recognize that his character is being unconsciously modified every day by association with others, whose suggestions are being absorbed and acted upon. And he fails to see that he is moulding his own character by taking interest in certain things, and allowing his mind to dwell upon them. He does not realize that he himself is really the maker of himself, from the raw and crude material given him at his birth. He makes himself negatively or positively. Negatively, if he allows himself to be moulded by the thoughts and ideals of others, and positively, if he moulds himself. Everyone is doing one or the other—perhaps both. The weak man is the one who allows himself to be made by others, and the strong man is the one who takes the building process in his own hands.
The average person is aware of their strengths and weaknesses but tends to see them as fixed and unchangeable, or nearly so. They believe that they "are just as they were made," and that's where it ends. They don't realize that their character is being unconsciously shaped every day by the people they associate with, whose ideas they absorb and act upon. They also overlook the fact that they're shaping their own character by taking an interest in certain things and allowing their minds to focus on them. They don't understand that they are truly the creators of themselves, using the raw and unfinished material they were given at birth. They can shape themselves negatively or positively. Negatively, if they let themselves be influenced by the thoughts and ideals of others, and positively, if they actively shape themselves. Everyone is doing one or the other—maybe even both. The weak person is the one who lets others define them, while the strong person is the one who takes control of their own development.
The process of Character-building is so delightfully simple that its importance is apt to be overlooked by the majority of persons who are made acquainted with it. It is only by actual practice and the experiencing of results that its wonderful possibilities are borne home to one.
The process of character-building is so wonderfully straightforward that many people tend to overlook its significance once they learn about it. It's only through real practice and experiencing the results that its amazing potential truly becomes clear.
The Yogi student is early taught the lesson of the power and importance of character building by some strong practical example. For instance, the student is found to have certain tastes of appetite, such as a like for certain things, and a corresponding dislike for others. The Yogi teacher instructs the student in the direction of cultivating a desire and taste for the disliked thing, and a dislike for the liked thing. He teaches the student to fix his mind on the two things, but in the direction of imagining that he likes the one thing and dislikes the other. The student is taught to make a mental picture of the desired conditions, and to say, for instance, "I loathe candy—I dislike even the sight of it," and, on the other hand, "I crave tart things—I revel in the taste of them," etc., etc., at the same time trying to reproduce the taste of sweet things accompanied with a loathing, and a taste of tart things, accompanied with a feeling of delight. After a bit the student finds that his tastes are actually changing in accordance with his thoughts, and in the end they have completely changed places. The truth of the theory is then borne home to the student, and he never forgets the lesson.
The Yogi student is taught early on about the power and importance of building character through practical examples. For instance, a student may have specific cravings for certain things and a dislike for others. The Yogi teacher guides the student to develop a desire for what they dislike and a dislike for what they like. He teaches the student to focus their mind on these two things, imagining that they like the thing they actually dislike and dislike the thing they enjoy. The student is encouraged to create a mental image of their desired mindset, saying things like, "I can't stand candy—I dislike even seeing it," while also saying, "I crave sour things—I enjoy the taste of them," and so on, all while trying to experience the taste of sweetness with disgust and the taste of sourness with pleasure. Over time, the student realizes that their preferences are genuinely shifting in line with their thoughts, and eventually, they completely swap places. The truth of this theory then becomes clear to the student, and they never forget the lesson.
In order to reassure readers who might object to having the student left in this condition of reversed tastes, we may add that the Yogi teachers then teach him to get rid of the idea of the disliked thing, and teach him to cultivate a liking for all wholesome things, their theory being that the dislike of certain wholesome eatables has been caused by some suggestion in childhood, or by some prenatal impression, as wholesome eatables are made attractive to the taste by Nature. The idea of all this training, however, is not the cultivation of taste, but practice in mental training, and the bringing home to the student the truth of the fact that his nature is plastic to his Ego, and that it may be moulded at will, by concentration and intelligent practice. The reader of this lesson may experiment upon himself along the lines of the elementary Yogi practice as above mentioned, if he so desires. He will find it possible to entirely change his dislike for certain food, etc., by the methods mentioned above. He may likewise acquire a liking for heretofore distasteful tasks and duties, which he finds it necessary to perform.
To reassure readers who might be concerned about the student being left with reversed preferences, we can add that the Yogi teachers then guide him to let go of his dislike for certain things and help him develop a taste for all wholesome items. Their theory is that the aversion to specific healthy foods stems from childhood suggestions or prenatal influences, as Nature makes wholesome foods appealing. The aim of this training isn't just to refine taste but to practice mental training and to help the student understand that his nature is flexible to his ego and can be shaped at will through focus and thoughtful practice. Readers of this lesson can try these basic Yogi techniques themselves if they wish. They may find it possible to completely change their aversion to certain foods, etc., using the methods described. Additionally, they can also learn to enjoy tasks and responsibilities they previously found unpleasant but feel they need to accomplish.
The principle underlying the whole Yogi theory of Character Building by the sub-conscious Intellect, is that the Ego is Master of the mind, and that the mind is plastic to the commands of the Ego. The Ego or "I" of the individual is the one real, permanent, changeless principle of the individual, and the mind, like the body, is constantly changing, moving, growing, and dying. Just as the body may be developed and moulded by intelligent exercises, so may the mind be developed and shaped by the Ego if intelligent methods are followed.
The core idea behind the Yogi theory of Character Building through the subconscious mind is that the Ego is in control of the mind, and the mind is flexible to the Ego's commands. The Ego, or "I," of a person is the one true, lasting, and unchanging aspect of that individual, while the mind, just like the body, is always changing, evolving, growing, and fading. Just as the body can be developed and shaped through smart exercises, the mind can also be developed and molded by the Ego if effective methods are used.
The majority of people consider that Character is a fixed something, belonging to a man, that cannot be altered or changed. And yet they show by their everyday actions that at heart they do not believe this to be a fact, for they endeavor to change and mould the characters of those around them, by word of advice, counsel, praising or condemnation, etc.
Most people think that character is a fixed trait belonging to a person that can’t be modified or changed. Yet, their daily actions reveal that deep down, they don’t truly believe this is the case, as they try to influence and shape the character of those around them through advice, encouragement, criticism, and so on.
It is not necessary to go into the matter of the consideration of the causes of character in this lesson. We will content ourselves by saying that these causes may be summed up, roughly, as follows: (1) Result of experiences in past lives; (2) Heredity; (3) Environment; (4) Suggestion from others; and (5) Auto-suggestion. But no matter how one's character has been formed, it may be modified, moulded, changed, and improved by the methods set forth in this lesson, which methods are similar to what is called by Western writers, "Auto-suggestion."
It’s unnecessary to dive into the reasons behind character in this lesson. We can simply say that these reasons can be roughly summarized as follows: (1) Results of experiences in past lives; (2) Heredity; (3) Environment; (4) Suggestions from others; and (5) Auto-suggestion. However, regardless of how one’s character has been shaped, it can be changed, molded, and improved through the methods outlined in this lesson, which are similar to what Western writers refer to as "Auto-suggestion."
The underlying idea of Auto-suggestion is the "willing" of the individual that the changes take place in his mind, the willing being aided by intelligent and tried methods of creating the new ideal or thought-form. The first requisite for the changed condition must be "desire" for the change. Unless one really desires that the change take place, he is unable to bring his Will to bear on the task. There is a very close connection between Desire and Will. Will is not usually brought to bear upon anything unless it is inspired by Desire. Some people connect the word Desire with the lower inclinations, but it is equally applicable to the higher. If one fights off a low inclination or Desire, it is because he is possessed of a higher inclination or Desire. Many Desires are really compromises between two or more conflicting Desires—a sort of average Desire, as it were.
The basic concept of Auto-suggestion is that an individual "wills" changes to occur in their mind, and this willingness is supported by effective methods for creating a new ideal or thought process. The first requirement for this change is a genuine "desire" for it to happen. If someone doesn't truly want the change, they can't focus their Will on achieving it. There's a strong link between Desire and Will. Will typically isn't applied to anything unless it’s driven by Desire. Some people associate the term Desire with negative impulses, but it also applies to positive ones. When someone resists a negative impulse or Desire, it's because they’re motivated by a higher impulse or Desire. Many Desires actually represent compromises between two or more conflicting Desires—a sort of middle ground, so to speak.
Unless one desires to change his character he will not make any move toward it. And in proportion to the strength of the desire, so will be the amount of will-power that is put in the task. The first thing for one to do in character building is to "want to do it." And if he finds that the "want" is not sufficiently strong to enable him to manifest the perseverance and effort necessary to bring it to a successful conclusion, then he should deliberately proceed to "build up the desire."
Unless someone wants to change their character, they won’t take any steps toward it. The stronger the desire, the more willpower they will put into the task. The first thing one must do in character building is to "want to do it." If they find that their "want" isn’t strong enough to show the perseverance and effort needed to see it through to a successful conclusion, then they should actively work to "build up the desire."
Desire may be built up by allowing the mind to dwell upon the subject until a desire is created. This rule works both ways, as many people have found out to their sorrow and misery. Not only may one build up a commendable desire in this way, but he may also build up a reprehensible one. A little thought will show you the truth of this statement. A young man has no desire to indulge in the excesses of a "fast" life. But after a while he hears, or reads something about others leading that sort of life, and he begins to allow his mind to dwell upon the subject, turning it around and examining it mentally, and going over it in his imagination. After a time he begins to find a desire gradually sending forth roots and branches, and if he continues to water the thing in his imagination, before long he will find within himself a blossoming inclination, which will try to insist upon expression in action. There is a great truth behind the words of the poet:
Desire can grow by letting your mind focus on a certain topic until a desire forms. This principle works in both directions, as many people have learned to their regret and unhappiness. You can cultivate a positive desire this way, but you can also nurture a negative one. A little reflection will make this clear. A young man might have no interest in living a wild lifestyle. However, after a while, he hears or reads about others who live that way, and he starts to think about it, analyzing it mentally and replaying it in his mind. Eventually, he begins to notice a desire taking root, and if he keeps feeding that thought, he’ll soon find himself wanting to express it through his actions. There’s a deep truth in the poet’s words:
"Vice is a monster of so frightful mien,
That to be hated needs but to be seen.
Yet seen too oft, familiar with her face,
We first endure, then pity, and then embrace."
"Vice is a monster that looks so scary,
That all it takes to be hated is to be seen.
But when we see it too often, and get to know its face,
We first tolerate it, then feel sorry for it, and then accept it."
And the follies and crimes of many a man have been due to the growing of desire within his mind, through this plan of planting the seed, and then carefully watering and tending to it—this cultivation of the growing desire. We have thought it well to give this word of warning because it will throw light upon many things that may have perplexed you, and because it may serve to call your attention to certain growing weeds of the mind that you have been nourishing.
And many people's foolishness and wrongdoings have come from the increase of desire in their minds, through this idea of planting a seed and then carefully watering and taking care of it—this nurturing of growing desire. We thought it was important to offer this warning because it will clarify many things that might have confused you, and because it may help you notice certain harmful thoughts that you have been encouraging.
But remember, always, that the force that leads downward may be transmuted and made to lead upward. It is just as easy to plant and grow wholesome desires as the other kind. If you are conscious of certain defects and deficiencies in your character (and who is not?) and yet find yourself not possessed of a strong enough desire to make the changes necessary, then you should commence by planting the desire seed and allowing it to grow by giving it constant care and attention. You should picture to yourself the advantages of acquiring the desirable traits of character of which you have thought. You should frequently go over and over them in your mind, imaging yourself in imagination as possessing them. You will then find that the growing desire will make headway and that you will gradually begin to "want to" possess that trait of character more and more. And when you begin to "want to" hard enough, you will find arising in your consciousness a feeling of the possession of sufficient Will-power to carry it through. Will follows the Desire. Cultivate a Desire and you will find back of it the Will to carry it through. Under the pressure of a very strong Desire men have accomplished feats akin to miracles.
But always remember that the force that pushes you down can be transformed to lift you up. It's just as easy to nurture positive desires as it is to cultivate negative ones. If you recognize certain flaws in your character (and who doesn’t?), but feel like you lack the strong desire to make the necessary changes, start by planting the seed of desire and nurture it with consistent care and attention. Visualize the benefits of adopting the positive character traits you've considered. Regularly revisit these thoughts in your mind, imagining yourself already possessing them. You'll find that as your desire grows, you'll increasingly want to embody those traits. When you truly start to want it enough, you'll discover a sense of Will-power emerging within you to make it happen. Will follows Desire. Cultivate a Desire, and you’ll find the Will to see it through. Under the pressure of a deep Desire, people have achieved things that seem miraculous.
If you find yourself in possession of desires that you feel are hurtful to you, you may rid yourself of them by deliberately starving them to death, and at the same time growing opposite desires. By refusing to think of the objectionable desires you refuse them the mental food upon which alone they can thrive. Just as you starve a plant by refusing it nourishing soil and water, so may you starve out an objectionable desire by refusing to give it mental food. Remember this, for it is most important. Refuse to allow the mind to dwell upon such desires, and resolutely turn aside the attention, and, particularly, the imagination, from the subject. This may call for the manifestation of a little will-power in the beginning, but it will become easier as you progress, and each victory will give you renewed strength for the next fight. But do not temporize with the desire—do not compromise with it—refuse to entertain the idea. In a fight of this kind each victory gives one added strength, and each defeat weakens one.
If you find yourself wanting things that are bad for you, you can get rid of them by consciously ignoring them and instead focusing on positive desires. By refusing to think about the negative desires, you deny them the mental energy they need to survive. Just like you would kill a plant by not giving it soil and water, you can eliminate a negative desire by not giving it any mental attention. Keep this in mind, as it is very important. Don’t let your mind linger on those unwanted desires, and actively shift your focus, especially your imagination, away from them. At first, this might require some willpower, but it will get easier over time, and each success will empower you for the next challenge. But don’t negotiate with the desire—don’t make any compromises—just refuse to entertain the thought. In this kind of struggle, every win gives you more strength, while every loss drains you.
And while you are refusing to entertain the objectionable guest you must be sure to grow a desire of an entirely opposite nature—a desire directly opposed to the one you are starving to death. Picture the opposite desire, and think of it often. Let your mind dwell upon it lovingly and let the imagination help to build it up into form. Think of the advantages that will arise to you when you fully possess it, and let the imagination picture you as in full possession of it, and acting out your new part in life strong and vigorous in your new found power.
And while you’re rejecting the unwelcome guest, make sure to cultivate a completely opposite desire—a desire that stands in stark contrast to the one you're neglecting. Visualize this opposite desire and think about it frequently. Allow your mind to focus on it fondly and let your imagination help shape it into reality. Consider the benefits you’ll gain when you fully achieve it, and let your imagination portray you as fully possessing it, confidently embracing your new role in life with strength and energy from your newfound power.
All this will gradually lead you to the point where you will "want to" possess this power. Then you must be ready for the next step which is "Faith" or "Confident Expectation."
All this will gradually lead you to the point where you will "want to" have this power. Then you need to be ready for the next step, which is "Faith" or "Confident Expectation."
Now, faith or confident expectation is not made to order in most persons, and in such cases one must acquire it gradually. Many of you who read these lines will have an understanding of the subject that will give you this faith. But to those who lack it, we suggest that they practice on some trivial phases of the mental make-up, some petty trait of character, in which the victory will be easy and simple. From this stage they should work up to more difficult tasks, until at last they gain that faith or confident expectation that comes from persevering practice.
Now, having faith or strong expectations isn't something that can just be summoned in most people, and in those situations, it needs to be developed over time. Many of you reading this will have enough understanding of the topic to develop that faith. But for those who don't, we recommend starting with some small aspects of your mindset or a minor personality trait, where success will come easily. From there, you should gradually take on more challenging tasks until you finally achieve that faith or strong expectation that comes from consistent practice.
The greater the degree of faith or confident expectation that one carries with him in this task of character building, the greater will be his success. And this because of well established psychological laws. Faith or confident expectation clears away the mental path and renders the work easier, while doubt or lack of faith retards the work, and acts as obstacles and stumbling blocks. Strong Desire, and Faith, or confident expectation are the first two steps. The third is Will-power.
The more faith or confidence you have in building your character, the more successful you'll be. This is due to established psychological principles. Faith or confident expectation clears your mind and makes the task easier, while doubt or lack of faith slows you down and creates obstacles. Strong desire and faith, or confident expectation, are the first two steps. The third is willpower.
By Will-power we do not mean that strenuous, clenching-of-fist-and-frowning-brow thing that many think of when they say "Will." Will is not manifested in this way. The true Will is called into play by one realizing the "I" part of himself and speaking the word of command from that center of power and strength. It is the voice of the "I." And it is needed in this work of character building.
By willpower, we don't mean that intense, clenching-your-fist-and-furrowing-your-brow thing that many associate with the term "will." Will isn't expressed in that way. The true will emerges when someone recognizes the "I" within themselves and speaks commands from that center of power and strength. It's the voice of the "I." This is essential in the process of building character.
So now you are ready for work, being possessed of (1) Strong Desire; (2) Faith or Confident Expectation; and (3) Will-power. With such a triple-weapon nothing but Success is possible.
So now you're ready for work, having (1) Strong Desire; (2) Faith or Confident Expectation; and (3) Will-power. With this powerful trio, only Success is possible.
Then comes the actual work. The first thing to do is to lay the track for a new Character Habit. "Habit?" you may ask in surprise. Yes, Habit! For that word gives the secret of the whole thing. Our characters are made up of inherited or acquired habits. Think over this a little and you will see the truth of it. You do certain things without a thought, because you have gotten into the habit of doing them. You act in certain ways because you have established the habit. You are in the habit of being truthful, honest, virtuous, because you have established the habit of being so. Do you doubt this? Then look around you—or look within your own heart, and you will see that you have lost some of your old habits of action, and have acquired new ones. The building up of Character is the building up of Habits. And the changing of Character is the changing of Habits. It will be well for you to settle this fact in your own mind, for it will give you the secret of many things connected with the subject.
Then comes the actual work. The first thing to do is to lay the foundation for a new Character Habit. "Habit?" you might ask in surprise. Yes, Habit! That word holds the key to everything. Our characters are made up of inherited or learned habits. Think about this for a moment, and you'll see the truth of it. You do certain things automatically because you've gotten into the habit of doing them. You behave in particular ways because you've developed those habits. You have the habit of being truthful, honest, and virtuous because you've made it a habit to be that way. Do you doubt this? Then look around you—or look inside your own heart, and you'll notice that you've lost some of your old habits and gained new ones. Building Character is about building Habits. And changing Character is about changing Habits. It’s important to establish this fact in your own mind; it will reveal many secrets related to this topic.
And, remember this, that Habit is almost entirely a matter of the sub-conscious mentality. It is true that Habits originate in the conscious mind, but as they are established they sink down into the depths of the sub-conscious mentality, and thereafter become "second nature," which, by the way, is often more powerful than the original nature of the person. The Duke of Wellington said that habit was as strong as ten natures, and he proceeded to drill habits into his army until they found it natural to act in accordance with the habits pounded into them during the drills. Darwin relates an interesting instance of the force of habit over the reason. He found that his habit of starting back at the sudden approach of danger was so firmly established that no will-power could enable him to keep his face pressed up against the cage of the cobra in the Zoological Gardens when the snake struck at him, although he knew the glass was so thick that there could be no danger, and although he exerted the full force of his will. But we venture to say that one could overcome even this strongly ingrained habit, by gradually training the sub-conscious mentality and establishing a new habit of thought and action.
And remember, habit is mostly a matter of the subconscious mind. It’s true that habits start in the conscious mind, but once they’re formed, they sink deep into the subconscious and become "second nature," which, by the way, can be even more powerful than a person's original nature. The Duke of Wellington said that habit is as strong as ten natures, and he drilled habits into his army until they found it natural to act according to the routines enforced during training. Darwin shared an interesting example of habit overpowering reason. He discovered that his instinct to pull back in response to sudden danger was so strong that no amount of willpower could make him keep his face pressed against the cobra's cage at the zoo when the snake lunged at him, even though he knew the glass was thick enough to pose no real threat and he was using all his willpower. However, we believe that with gradual training of the subconscious mind, one could overcome even this deeply ingrained habit and establish a new habit of thought and action.
It is not only during the actual process of "willing" the new habit that the work of making the new mental path goes on. In fact, the Yogis believe that the principal part of the work goes on sub-consciously between the intervals of commend, and that the real progress is made in that way, just as the real work of solving the problem is performed sub-consciously, as related in our last lesson. As an example, we may call your attention to some instances of the cultivation of physical habits. A physical task learned in the evening is much easier to perform the following-morning than it was the night before, and still easier the following Monday morning than it was on the Saturday afternoon previous. The Germans have a saying that "we learn to skate in summer, and to swim in winter," meaning that the impression passed on to the subconscious mentality deepens and broadens during the interval of rest. The best plan is to make frequent, sharp impressions, and then to allow reasonable periods of rest in order to give the sub-conscious mentality the opportunity to do its work. By "sharp" impressions we mean impressions given under strong attention, as we have mentioned in some of the earlier lessons of this series.
It’s not just during the actual process of "wanting" to form a new habit that the work of creating a new mental pathway occurs. In fact, Yogis believe that most of the work happens subconsciously during the intervals of focus, and that real progress is made this way, just as the main work of solving problems happens subconsciously, as we discussed in our last lesson. For example, think about some instances of developing physical habits. A physical skill learned in the evening is much easier to perform the next morning than it was the night before, and even easier the following Monday morning than it was on that previous Saturday afternoon. The Germans have a saying that "we learn to skate in summer, and to swim in winter," meaning that the impressions we make on our subconscious minds deepen and expand during periods of rest. The best approach is to make frequent, strong impressions, and then allow for reasonable breaks to give the subconscious mind a chance to do its work. By "strong" impressions, we mean impressions made with intense focus, as we’ve mentioned in some of the earlier lessons in this series.
A writer has well said: "Sow an act, reap a habit; sow a habit, reap a character; sow a character, reap a destiny," thus recognizing habit as the source of character. We recognize this truth in our training of children, forming goods habits of character by constant repetition, by watchfulness, etc. Habit acts as a motive when established, so that while we think we are acting without motive we may be acting under the strong motive power of some well established habit. Herbert Spencer has well said: "The habitually honest man does what is right, not consciously because he 'ought' but with simple satisfaction; and is ill at ease till it is done." Some may object that this idea of Habit as a basis of Character may do away with the idea of a developed moral conscientiousness, as for instance, Josiah Royce who says: "The establishment of organized habit is never in itself enough to ensure the growth of an enlightened moral conscientiousness" but to such we would say that one must "want to" cultivate a high character before he will create the habits usual to the same, and the "want to" is the sign of the "moral conscientiousness," rather than the habit. And the same is true of the "ought to" side of the subject. The "ought to" arises in the conscious mind in the beginning, and inspires the cultivation of the habit, although the latter after a while becomes automatic, a matter of the sub-conscious mentality, without any "ought to" attachment. It then becomes a matter of "like to."
A writer once said: "Sow an act, reap a habit; sow a habit, reap a character; sow a character, reap a destiny," highlighting the role of habit in shaping character. We see this truth in how we raise children, building good character habits through consistent practice and attentiveness, among other methods. Once established, habit acts as a motive, so even when we think we are acting without any reason, we might be driven by the strong influence of a well-entrenched habit. Herbert Spencer pointed out: "The habitually honest person does what is right, not out of conscious obligation but with simple satisfaction, and feels uneasy until it’s done." Some might argue that viewing Habit as a foundation for Character undermines the concept of developed moral conscientiousness, like Josiah Royce who states: "The establishment of organized habit alone is never enough to ensure the growth of an enlightened moral conscientiousness." However, we would argue that one must "want to" develop a strong character before they can form the associated habits, and this "want to" reflects moral conscientiousness more than the habit itself. The same goes for the "ought to" aspect. The "ought to" initially arises in our conscious mind and drives the formation of the habit, but over time, it becomes automatic, part of our subconscious mentality, detached from any "ought to" obligation. It then shifts to being a matter of "like to."
Thus we see that the moulding, modifying, changing, and building of Character is largely a matter of the establishing of Habits. And what is the best way to establish Habits? becomes our next question. The answer of the Yogi is: "Establish a Mental Image, and then build your Habit around it." And in that sentence he has condensed a whole system.
Thus we see that shaping, adjusting, changing, and developing Character is largely about establishing Habits. And what’s the best way to establish Habits? That’s our next question. The Yogi's answer is: "Create a Mental Image, and then build your Habit around it." In that sentence, he has summarized an entire system.
Everything we see having a form is built around a mental image—either the mental image of some man, some animal, or of the Absolute. This is the rule of the universe, and in the matter of character-building we but follow a well established rule. When we wish to build a house, we first think of "house" in a general way. Then we begin to think of "what kind" of a house. Then we go into details. Then we consult an architect, and he makes us a plan, which plan is his mental image, suggested by our mental image. Then, the plan once decided upon, we consult the builder, and at last the house stands completed—an objectified Mental Image. And so it is with every created thing—all manifestation of a Mental Image.
Everything we see that has a form is built around a mental image—either the mental image of a person, an animal, or the Absolute. This is the universal principle, and when it comes to shaping our character, we are simply following a well-established guideline. When we want to build a house, we first think about "house" in general. Then we consider "what kind" of house we want. After that, we dive into the details. Next, we consult an architect who creates a plan based on our mental image. Once we agree on the plan, we consult the builder, and eventually, the house is completed—an objectified Mental Image. The same goes for everything created—every manifestation is a Mental Image.
And so, when we wish to establish a trait of Character, we must form a clear, distinct Mental Image of what we wish to be. This is an important step. Make your picture clear and distinct, and fasten it in your mind. Then begin to build around it. Let your thoughts dwell upon the mental picture. Let your imagination see yourself as possessed of the desired trait, and acting it out. Act it out in your imagination, over and over again, as often as possible, persevering, and continuously, seeing yourself manifesting the trait under a variety of circumstances and conditions. As you continue to do this you will find that you will gradually begin to express the thought in action—to objectify the subjective mental image. It will become "natural" for you to act more and more in accordance with your mental image, until at last the new habit will become firmly fixed in your mind, and will become your natural mode of action and expression.
So, when we want to develop a character trait, we need to create a clear, distinct mental image of who we want to be. This is a crucial step. Make your image clear and vivid, and hold it in your mind. Then start to build around it. Let your thoughts focus on that mental image. Imagine yourself having the desired trait and actually acting it out. Enact it in your mind repeatedly, as often as you can, staying persistent and consistent, visualizing yourself displaying the trait in different situations and conditions. As you keep doing this, you'll find that you gradually start to express that thought in action—transforming the subjective mental image into reality. It will become "natural" for you to act more in line with your mental image, until eventually, the new habit is firmly established in your mind and becomes your natural way of acting and expressing yourself.
This is no vague, visionary theory. It is a well known and proven psychological fact, and thousands have worked marvelous changes in their character by its means.
This isn’t some vague, dreamy theory. It’s a well-known and proven psychological fact, and thousands have made amazing changes in their character by using it.
Not only may one elevate his moral character in this way, but he may mould his "work-a-day" self to better conform to the needs of his environment and occupation. If one lacks Perseverance, he may attain it; if one is filled with Fear, he may supplant it with Fearlessness; if one lacks Self-confidence, he may gain it. In fact, there is no trait that may not be developed in this way. People have literally "made themselves over" by following this method of character-building. The great trouble with the race has been that persons have not realized that they could do these things. They have thought that they were doomed to remain just the creatures that they found themselves to be. They did not realize that the work of creation was not ended, and that they had within themselves a creative power adapted to the needs of their case. When man first realizes this truth, and proves it by practice, he becomes another being. He finds himself superior to environment, and training—he finds that he may ride over these things. He makes his own environment, and he trains himself.
Not only can someone improve their moral character in this way, but they can also shape their everyday self to better fit the demands of their environment and job. If someone lacks perseverance, they can develop it; if someone is filled with fear, they can replace it with courage; if someone lacks self-confidence, they can build it. In fact, there’s no trait that can’t be developed this way. People have truly "reinvented" themselves by using this approach to character-building. The main issue has been that people haven’t realized that they could make these changes. They have believed they were stuck being the person they found themselves to be. They didn’t understand that the process of creation was ongoing, and that they held a creative power within themselves that could address their specific needs. When a person finally understands this truth and puts it into practice, they transform into a different individual. They discover they can rise above their environment and training—they learn that they can overcome these challenges. They create their own environment, and they train themselves.
In some of the larger schools in England and the United States, certain scholars who have developed and manifested the ability to control themselves and their actions are placed on the roll of a grade called the "Self-governed grade." Those in this grade act as if they had memorized the following words of Herbert Spencer: "In the supremacy of self-control consists one of the perfections of the ideal man. Not to be impulsive—not to be spurred hither and thither by each desire—but to be self-restrained, self-balanced, governed by the just decision of the feelings in council assembled * * * that it is which moral education strives to produce." And this is the desire of the writer of this lesson—to place each student in the "Self-governed class."
In some of the larger schools in England and the United States, certain students who have shown the ability to control themselves and their actions are put in a grade called the "Self-governed grade." Those in this grade act as if they have memorized the following words by Herbert Spencer: "The essence of self-control is one of the key qualities of the ideal person. It’s about not being impulsive—not being pushed around by every desire—but being self-restrained, balanced, and guided by thoughtful decisions made together * * * that is what moral education aims to achieve." This is also the goal of the writer of this lesson—to place each student in the "Self-governed class."
We cannot attempt, in the short space of a single lesson, to map out a course of instruction in Character Building adapted to the special needs of each individual. But we think that what we have said on the subject should be sufficient to point out the method for each student to map out a course for himself, following the general rules given above. As a help to the student, however, we will give a brief course of instruction for the cultivation of one desirable trait of character. The general plan of this course may be adapted to fit the requirements of any other case, if intelligence is used by the student. The case we have selected is that of a student who has been suffering from "a lack of Moral Courage—a lack of Self-Confidence—an inability to maintain my poise in the presence of other people—an inability to say 'No!'—a feeling of Inferiority to those with whom I come in contact." The brief outline of the course of practice given in this case is herewith given:
We can't possibly lay out a full Character Building curriculum tailored to everyone's unique needs in just one lesson. However, we believe that what we've shared on the topic should be enough to help each student create their own personalized plan, based on the general guidelines provided earlier. To assist students further, we will outline a concise course aimed at developing one specific positive trait. This general framework can be adjusted to meet the needs of any other situation, as long as the student applies some thought. The situation we've chosen involves a student who struggles with "a lack of Moral Courage—a lack of Self-Confidence—difficulty maintaining my composure around others—difficulty saying 'No!'—a sense of Inferiority compared to those I interact with." Below is a brief outline of the practice course for this scenario:
PRELIMINARY THOUGHT. You should fix firmly in your mind the fact that you are the Equal of any and every man. You come from the same source. You are an expression of the same One Life. In the eyes of the Absolute you are the equal of any man, even the highest in the land. Truth is "Things as God sees them"—and in Truth you and the man are equal, and, at the last, One. All feelings of Inferiority are illusions, errors, and lies, and have no existence in Truth. When in the company of others remember this fact and realize that the Life Principle in you is talking to the Life Principle in them. Let the Life Principle flow through you, and endeavor to forget your personal self. At the same time, endeavor to see that same Life Principle, behind and beyond the personality of the person in whose presence you are. He is by a personality hiding the Life Principle, just as you are. Nothing more—nothing less! You are both One in Truth. Let the conscious of the "I" beam forth and you will experience an uplift and sense of Courage, and the other will likewise feel it. You have within you the Source of Courage, Moral and Physical, and you have naught to Fear—Fearlessness is your Divine Heritage, avail yourself of it. You have Self-Conscience, for the Self is the "I" within you, not the petty personality, and you must have confidence in that "I." Retreat within yourself until you feel the presence of the "I," and then will you have a Self-Confidence that nothing can shake or disturb. Once having attained the permanent consciousness of the "I," you will have poise. Once having realized that you are a Center of Power, you will have no difficulty in saying "No!" when it is right to do so. Once having realized your true nature—your Real Self—you will lose all sense of Inferiority, and will know that you are a manifestation of the One Life and have behind you the strength, power, and grandeur of the Cosmos. Begin by realizing YOURSELF, and then proceed with the following methods of training the mind.
PRELIMINARY THOUGHT. You should firmly remind yourself that you are equal to every person. You come from the same source. You are an expression of the same One Life. In the eyes of the Absolute, you are equal to anyone, even the highest person in the land. Truth is "Things as God sees them"—and in Truth, you and that person are equal, and ultimately, One. All feelings of Inferiority are illusions, mistakes, and lies, and do not exist in Truth. When you're around others, keep this in mind and understand that the Life Principle in you is connecting with the Life Principle in them. Allow the Life Principle to flow through you, and try to forget your individual self. At the same time, try to see that same Life Principle, beyond the personality of the person with you. Their personality is just a cover for the Life Principle, just like yours. Nothing more—nothing less! You are both One in Truth. Let the awareness of the "I" shine through, and you will feel an uplift and sense of Courage, which the other person will feel too. You have within you the Source of Courage, both Moral and Physical, and you have nothing to Fear—Fearlessness is your Divine Heritage, so embrace it. You have Self-Consciousness, as the Self is the "I" within you, not the trivial personality, and you need to trust that "I." Go within yourself until you sense the presence of the "I," and then you will have a Self-Confidence that nothing can shake or disturb. Once you achieve a lasting awareness of the "I," you will find stability. Once you recognize that you are a Center of Power, you will easily say "No!" when it's right to do so. Once you understand your true nature—your Real Self—you will lose all sense of Inferiority and will know that you are a manifestation of the One Life, with the strength, power, and grandeur of the Universe behind you. Start by realizing YOURSELF, and then proceed with the following methods of training the mind.
WORD IMAGES. It is difficult for the mind to build itself around an idea, unless that idea be expressed in words. A word is the center of an idea, just as the idea is the center of the mental image, and the mental image the center of the growing mental habit. Therefore, the Yogis always lay great stress upon the use of words in this way. In the particular case before us, we should suggest the holding before you of a few words crystallizing the main thought. We suggest the words "I Am"; Courage; Confidence; Poise; Firmness; Equality. Commit these words to memory, and then endeavor to fix in your mind a clear conception of the meaning of each word, so that each may stand for a Live Idea when you say it. Beware of parrot-like or phonographic repetition. Let each word's meaning stand out clearly before you, so that when you repeat it you may feel its meaning. Repeat the words over frequently, when opportunity presents itself, and you will soon begin to notice that they act as a strong mental tonic upon you, producing a bracing, energizing effect. And each time you repeat the words, understandingly, you have done something to clear away the mental path over which you wish to travel.
WORD IMAGES. It’s hard for the mind to grasp an idea unless it's expressed in words. A word is the core of an idea, just as the idea is the core of the mental image, and the mental image is the core of developing mental habits. That's why Yogis emphasize the importance of words in this way. In this specific case, we recommend keeping a few key words in mind to encapsulate the main thought. We suggest the words "I Am"; Courage; Confidence; Poise; Firmness; Equality. Memorize these words, and then try to form a clear understanding of what each one means, so that they represent a Living Idea when you say them. Avoid mindless repetition, like a parrot or a tape recorder. Let the meaning of each word be clear to you, so that when you say it, you can genuinely *feel* its significance. Repeat the words frequently whenever you get the chance, and you'll soon notice they act as a powerful mental booster, giving you an energizing effect. And each time you repeat the words, with understanding, you will have done something to clear the mental path you want to travel.
PRACTICE. When you are at leisure, and are able to indulge in "day dreams" without injury to your affairs of life, call your imagination into play and endeavor to picture yourself as being possessed of the qualities indicated by the words named. Picture yourself under the most trying circumstances, making use of the desired qualities, and manifesting them fully. Endeavor to picture yourself as acting out your part well, and exhibiting the desired qualities. Do not be ashamed to indulge in these day-dreams, for they are the prophecies of the things to follow, and you are but rehearsing your part before the day of the performance. Practice makes perfect, and if you accustom yourself to acting in a certain way in imagination, you will find it much easier to play your part when the real performance occurs. This may seem childish to many of you, but if you have an actor among your acquaintances, consult him about it, and you will find that he will heartily recommend it. He will tell you what practice does for one in this direction, and how repeated practice and rehearsals may fix a character so firmly in a man's mind that he may find it difficult to divest himself of it after a time. Choose well the part you wish to play—the character you wish to be yours—and then after fixing it well in your mind, practice, practice, practice. Keep your ideal constantly before you, and endeavor to grow into it. And you will succeed, if you exercise patience and perseverance.
PRACTICE. When you have some free time and can enjoy "day dreams" without disrupting your life, engage your imagination and try to visualize yourself possessing the qualities described by those words. Imagine yourself in the toughest situations, using those desired qualities and expressing them fully. Picture yourself performing your role well and showcasing the qualities you want. Don't feel embarrassed about indulging in these day-dreams; they're like previews of what’s to come, and you're just rehearsing for the actual performance. Practice makes perfect, and if you get used to acting in a certain way in your mind, it will be much simpler to play your part when the real moment arrives. This might seem childish to some, but if you know an actor, ask them about it, and you’ll see that they would strongly encourage it. They can explain what practice does for someone in this regard and how repeated practice and rehearsals can embed a character so deeply in someone's mind that it might be hard to let go of it later. Choose wisely the role you want to play—the identity you want to embody—and, after solidifying it in your mind, practice, practice, practice. Keep your ideal in front of you and strive to grow into it. You will succeed if you remain patient and persistent.
But, more than this. Do not confine your practice to mere private rehearsal. You need some "dress rehearsals" as well—rehearsals in public. Therefore, after you get well started in your work, manage to exercise your growing character-habits in your everyday life. Pick out the little cases first and "try it on them."
But, more than that. Don't limit your practice to just private rehearsal. You need some "dress rehearsals" too—performances in front of an audience. So, after you get going with your work, find a way to apply your developing character habits in your daily life. Start with small situations and "test it out on them."
You will find that you will be able to overcome conditions that formerly bothered you much. You will become conscious of a growing strength and power coming from within, and you will recognize that you are indeed a changed person. Let your thought express itself in action, whenever you get a good chance. But do not try to force chances just to try your strength. Do not, for instance, try to force people to ask for favors that you may say "No!" You will find plenty of genuine tests without forcing any. Accustom yourself to looking people in the eye, and feeling the power that is back of you, and within you. You will soon be able to see through their personality, and realize that it is just one portion of the One Life gazing at another portion, and that therefore there is nothing to be afraid of. A realization of your Real Self will enable you to maintain your poise under trying circumstances, if you will but throw aside your false idea about your personality. Forget yourself—your little personal self—for a while, and fix your mind on the Universal Self of which you are a part. All these things that have worried you are but incidents of the Personal Life, and are seen to be illusions when viewed from the standpoint of the Universal Life.
You’ll find that you can overcome things that used to bother you a lot. You’ll become aware of a growing strength and power coming from within you, and you’ll realize that you’re truly a different person. Let your thoughts translate into action whenever you have a good opportunity. But don’t try to force those opportunities just to test your strength. For example, don’t try to make people ask for favors just so you can say "No!" You’ll come across plenty of real tests without needing to force anything. Get used to looking people in the eye and sensing the power behind you and within you. Soon, you’ll be able to see beyond their personalities and understand that it’s just one part of the One Life looking at another part, so there’s nothing to fear. Understanding your True Self will help you keep your composure in tough situations, as long as you let go of any false ideas about your personality. Forget about your little personal self for a moment, and focus on the Universal Self that you’re a part of. All those things that have troubled you are just events of the Personal Life and appear to be illusions when seen from the perspective of the Universal Life.
Carry the Universal Life with you as much as possible into your everyday life. It belongs there as much as anywhere, and will prove to be a tower of strength and refuge to you in the perplexing situations of your busy life.
Carry the Universal Life with you as much as you can in your everyday life. It belongs there just as much as anywhere else, and it will serve as a source of strength and a safe haven for you in the confusing situations of your busy life.
Remember always that the Ego is master of the mental states and habits, and that the Will is the direct instrument of the Ego, and is always ready for its use. Let your soul be filled with the strong Desire to cultivate those mental habits that will make you Strong. Nature's plan is to produce Strong Individual expressions of herself, and she will be glad to give you her aid in becoming strong. The man who wishes to strengthen himself will always find great forces back of him to aid him in the work, for is he not carrying out one of Nature's pet plans, and one which she has been striving for throughout the ages. Anything that tends to make you realize and express your Mastery, tends to strengthen you, and places at your disposal Nature's aid. You may witness this in everyday life—Nature seems to like strong individuals, and delights in pushing them ahead. By Mastery, we mean mastery over your own lower nature, as well as over outside nature, of course. The "I" is Master—forget it not, O student, and assert it constantly. Peace be with you.
Always remember that the Ego controls your mental states and habits, and the Will is the Ego's direct tool, always ready to be used. Fill your soul with a strong desire to develop mental habits that will make you strong. Nature's goal is to create powerful individual expressions of herself, and she will gladly help you become strong. A person who wants to empower themselves will always find great forces supporting them in that effort, as they are engaging in one of Nature's favorite plans, which she has been working towards throughout the ages. Anything that helps you recognize and express your Mastery strengthens you and grants you Nature's assistance. You can see this in daily life—Nature seems to favor strong individuals and takes joy in promoting them. By Mastery, we mean mastery over your own lower nature, as well as over the external world, of course. The "I" is Master—never forget that, O student, and assert it constantly. Peace be with you.
MANTRAM (OR AFFIRMATION).
I am the Master of my Mental Habits—I control my Character. I Will to be
Strong, and summon the forces of my Nature to my aid.
I am in charge of my mental habits—I control my character. I choose to be
strong and call upon the strengths of my nature to help me.
THE TWELFTH LESSON.
SUB-CONSCIOUS INFLUENCES.
In this lesson we wish to touch upon a certain feature of sub-conscious mentation that has been much dwelt upon by certain schools of western writers and students during the past twenty years, but which has also been misunderstood, and, alas, too often misused, by some of those who have been attracted to the subject. We allude to what has been called the "Power of Thought." While this power is very real, and like any other of the forces of nature may be properly used and applied in our every day life, still many students of the power of the Mind have misused it and have stooped to practices worthy only of the followers of the schools of "Black Magic." We hear on all sides of the use of "treatments" for selfish and often base ends, those following these practices seeming to be in utter ignorance of the occult laws brought into operation, and the terrible reaction inevitably falling to the lot of those practicing this negative form of mental influence. We have been amazed at the prevailing ignorance concerning the nature and effects of this improper use of mental force, and at the same time, at the common custom of such selfish, improper uses. This, more particularly, when the true occultist knows that these things are not necessary, even to those who seek "Success" by mental forces. There is a true method of the use of mental forces, as well as an improper use, and we trust that in this lesson we may be able to bring the matter sharply and clearly before the minds of our students.
In this lesson, we want to address a particular aspect of subconscious thinking that has been discussed extensively by some Western writers and students over the past twenty years. However, this concept has also been misunderstood and, unfortunately, misused by some who are drawn to the topic. We're referring to what's been called the "Power of Thought." While this power is genuine and, like any natural force, can be appropriately used in our daily lives, many students of the power of the Mind have misapplied it and have resorted to practices akin to those of "Black Magic" followers. We often hear about "treatments" being used for selfish and sometimes questionable purposes, with those engaging in these practices seemingly unaware of the occult laws at play and the severe backlash that inevitably befalls those who practice this negative form of mental influence. We are astonished by the widespread ignorance around the nature and consequences of this improper use of mental force, alongside the common occurrence of such selfish, inappropriate uses. This is especially concerning since the true occultist understands that these actions are unnecessary, even for those pursuing "Success" through mental forces. There is a proper way to apply mental forces, as well as an improper one, and we hope to clearly and sharply present this subject to our students in this lesson.
In our first course (The Fourteen Lessons) in the several lessons entitled, respectively, "Thought Dynamics," "Telepathy, etc.," and "Psychic Influence," we have given a general idea of the effect of one mind upon other minds, and many other writers have called the attention of the Western world to the same facts. There has been a general awakening of interest in this phase of the subject among the Western people of late years, and many and wonderful are the theories that have been advanced among the conflicting schools regarding the matter. But, notwithstanding the conflicting theories, there is a general agreement upon the fundamental facts. They all agree that the mental forces may be used to affect oneself and others, and many have started in to use these mental forces for their own selfish ends and purposes, believing that they were fully justified in so doing, and being unaware of the web of psychic causes and effects which they were weaving around them by their practices.
In our first course (The Fourteen Lessons) covering the topics titled "Thought Dynamics," "Telepathy," and "Psychic Influence," we explained how one mind can impact other minds. Many other writers have brought the attention of the Western world to these same ideas. Recently, there has been a growing interest in this area among Western people, and there are numerous fascinating theories being proposed by various conflicting schools. However, despite these differing theories, there is a general consensus on the basic facts. Everyone agrees that mental forces can be used to influence oneself and others, and many have begun to exploit these mental forces for their own selfish purposes, believing they are justified in doing so, while remaining unaware of the intricate web of psychic causes and effects they are creating through their actions.
Now, at the beginning, let us impress upon the minds of our students the fact that while it is undoubtedly true that people who are unaware of the true sources of strength within them, may be, and often are affected by mental force exerted by others, it is equally true that no one can be adversely affected in this way providing he realizes the "I" within himself, which is the only Real part of him, and which is an impregnable tower of strength against the assaults of others. There is no cause for all of this fear that is being manifested by many Western students of thought-power, who are in constant dread of being "treated" adversely by other people. The man or woman who realizes the "I" within, may by the slightest exercise of the Will surround himself with a mental aura which will repel adverse thought-waves emanating from the minds of others. Nay, more than this—the habitual recognition of the "I," and a few moments' meditation upon it each day, will of itself erect such an aura, and will charge this aura with a vitality that will turn back adverse thought, and cause it to return to the source from which it came, where it will serve the good purpose of bringing to the mistaken mind originating it, the conviction that such practices are hurtful and to be avoided.
Now, to begin, let's make it clear to our students that while it's certainly true that people who don’t know their true inner strength can be influenced by the mental energy of others, it’s also true that no one can be negatively impacted in this way if they understand the "I" within themselves, which is the only genuine part of them and serves as a stronghold against the negativity of others. There’s no need for all the fear being shown by many Western students of thought power, who worry constantly about being negatively affected by others. A person who recognizes the "I" within can, with just a bit of willpower, create a mental barrier that deflects harmful thoughts coming from others. Furthermore, simply acknowledging the "I" regularly and spending a few moments each day in meditation on it will naturally build that barrier and energize it to repel negative thoughts, sending them back to their source, where they will serve the purpose of making the sender realize that such thoughts are harmful and should be avoided.
This realization of the "I," which we brought out in the first few lessons of the present series, is the best and only real method of self-protection. This may be easily understood, when we remind you that the whole phenomena of mental influencing belongs to the "illusion" side of existence—the negative side—and that the Real and Positive side must of necessity be stronger. Nothing can affect the Real in you—and the nearer you get to the Real, in realization and understanding, the stronger do you become. This is the whole secret. Think it over.
This understanding of the "I" that we discussed in the first few lessons of this series is the best and only true way to protect yourself. This is easy to grasp when we remember that all mental influencing falls under the "illusion" aspect of existence—the negative side—and that the Real and Positive side must naturally be stronger. Nothing can impact the Real within you—and the closer you get to the Real, in terms of awareness and understanding, the stronger you become. This is the entire secret. Think about it.
But, there are comparatively few people who are able to rest firmly in the "I" consciousness all the time and the others demand help while they are growing. To such, we would say "Creep as close the Realization of the I, as possible, and rest your spiritual feet firmly upon the rock of the Real Self." If you feel that people, circumstances, or things are influencing you unduly, stand up boldly, and deny the influence. Say something like this, "I DENY the power or influence of persons, circumstances, or things to adversely affect me. I ASSERT my Reality, Power and Dominion over these things." These words may seem very simple, but when uttered with the consciousness of the Truth underlying them, they become as a mighty force. You will understand, of course, that there is no magic or virtue in the words themselves—that is, in the grouping of the letters forming the words, or the sounds of the words—the virtue resting in the idea of which the words are the expression. You will be surprised at the effect of this STATEMENT upon depressing, or adverse influences surrounding you. If you—you who are reading these words now—feel yourself subject to any adverse or depressing influences, will then stand up erect, throwing your shoulders back, raising your head, and looking boldly and fearlessly ahead, and repeat these words firmly, and with faith, you will feel the adverse influences disappearing. You will almost see the clouds falling back from you. Try it now, before reading further, and you will become conscious of a new strength and power.
But there are relatively few people who can stay fully in the "I" consciousness all the time, while others need help as they grow. To those people, we would say, "Get as close to realizing the I as you can, and firmly plant your spiritual feet on the solid ground of your true self." If you feel that people, circumstances, or things are influencing you too much, stand up boldly and reject that influence. Say something like, "I DENY the power or influence of people, circumstances, or things to negatively affect me. I ASSERT my reality, power, and control over these things." These words may seem very simple, but when said with awareness of the Truth behind them, they become a powerful force. You should understand, of course, that there’s no magic or special quality in the words themselves—that is, in the arrangement of the letters or the sounds of the words—the value lies in the idea that the words express. You’ll be amazed at the effect this STATEMENT has on the negative or adverse influences around you. If you—you who are reading this now—feel subject to any negative or depressing influences, then stand up straight, throw your shoulders back, lift your head, and look boldly and confidently ahead, and repeat these words firmly and with belief, and you’ll feel those adverse influences fading away. You will almost see the clouds retreating from you. Try it now, before reading more, and you will become aware of a new strength and power.
You are perfectly justified in thus denying adverse influence. You have a perfect right to drive back threatening or depressing thought-clouds. You have a perfect right to take your stand upon the Rock of Truth—your Real Self—and demand your Freedom. These negative thoughts of the world in general, and of some people in particular, belong to the dark side of life, and you have a right to demand freedom from them. You do not belong to the same idea of life, and it is your privilege—yes, your duty—to repel them and bid them disappear from your horizon. You are a Child of Light, and it is your right and duty to assert your freedom from the things of darkness. You are merely asserting the Truth when you affirm your superiority and dominion over these dark forces. And in the measure of your Recognition and Faith, will be the power at your disposal. Faith and Recognition renders man a god. If we could but fully recognize and realize just what we are, we could rise above this entire plane of negative, dark world of thought. But we have become so blinded and stupefied with the race-thought of fear and weakness, and so hypnotized with the suggestions of weakness that we hear on all sides of us, that even the best of us find it hard to avoid occasionally sinking back into the lower depths of despair and discouragement. But, let us remember this, brothers and sisters, that these periods of "back-sliding" become less frequent, and last a shorter time, as we proceed. Bye-and-bye we shall escape them altogether.
You are completely justified in rejecting negative influence. You have every right to push away threatening or depressing thoughts. You have every right to stand firm on the foundation of Truth—your true self—and claim your Freedom. These negative thoughts about the world in general, and some people in particular, belong to the darker side of life, and you have the right to demand freedom from them. You don’t subscribe to those ideas about life, and it’s your privilege—indeed, your duty—to push them away and make them vanish from your view. You are a Child of Light, and it is your right and responsibility to declare your freedom from the things of darkness. When you affirm your superiority and control over these dark forces, you are simply acknowledging the Truth. The more you recognize and believe in this, the greater power you will have at your disposal. Faith and Recognition elevate a person to god-like status. If we could fully realize who we are, we could rise above this entire realm of negative, dark thoughts. However, we have become so blinded and dulled by the collective mindset of fear and weakness, and so entranced by the messages of inadequacy that we hear all around us, that even the best of us occasionally struggle to avoid sinking back into despair and discouragement. But let us remember, brothers and sisters, that these moments of "backsliding" become less frequent and shorter as we move forward. Eventually, we will overcome them entirely.
Some may think that we are laying too much stress upon the negative side of the question, but we feel that what we have said is timely, and much needed by many who read these lessons. There has been so much said regarding this negative, adverse power of thought, that it is well that all should be taught that it is in their power to rise above this thing— that the weapon for its defeat is already in their hand.
Some people might think we're focusing too much on the negative side of this issue, but we believe what we've said is relevant and necessary for many who read these lessons. There's been a lot of discussion about this negative, harmful power of thought, so it's important for everyone to know they can overcome it—that the tool to defeat it is already in their hands.
The most advanced student may occasionally forget that he is superior to the adverse influence of the race-thought, and other clouds of thought influence that happen to be in his neighborhood. When we think of how few there are who are sending forth the positive, hopeful, thought-waves, and how many are sending forth continually the thoughts of discouragement, fear, and despair, it is no wonder that at times there comes to us a feeling of discouragement, helplessness, and "what's the use." But we must be ever alert, to stand up and deny these things out of existence so far as our personal thought world is concerned. There is a wonderful occult truth in the last sentence. We are the makers, preservers, and destroyers of our personal thought-world. We may bring into it that which we desire to appear; we may keep there what we wish, cultivating, developing and unfolding the thought-forms that we desire; we may destroy that which we wish to keep out. The "I" is the master of its thought-world. Think over this great truth, O student! By Desire we call into existence—by affirmation we preserve and encourage—by Denial we destroy. The Hindus in their popular religious conceptions picture the One Being as a Trinity, composed of Brahma, the Creator; Vishnu, the Preserver, and Siva, the Destroyer—not three gods, as is commonly supposed, but a Trinity composed of three aspects of Deity or Being. This idea of the threefold Being is also applicable to the Individual—"as above so below." The "I" is the Being of the Individual, and the thought-world is its manifestation. It creates, preserves, and destroys—as it Will. Carry this idea with you, and realize that your individual thought-world is your own field of manifestation. In it you are constantly creating—constantly preserving—constantly destroying. And if you can destroy anything in your own thought-world you remove it from its field of activity, so far as you are concerned. And if you create anything in your own thought-world, you bring it into active being, so far as you are concerned. And if you preserve anything, you keep it by you in effect and full operation and influence in your life. This truth belongs to the higher phases of the subject, for its explanation is inextricably bound up in the explanation of the "Thing-in-Itself"—the Absolute and Its Manifestations. But even what we have said above, should give to the alert student sufficient notice to cause him to grasp the facts of the case, and to apply the principles in his own life.
The most advanced student may sometimes forget that they are above the negative influence of societal thoughts and other mental distractions in their surroundings. When we consider how few people are sending out positive, hopeful thoughts, compared to how many are constantly spreading feelings of discouragement, fear, and despair, it's no surprise that we occasionally feel disheartened, helpless, or ask ourselves, "What's the point?" But we must always stay vigilant to stand up and deny these negative thoughts into nonexistence in our personal mental space. There is a profound truth in that last statement. We are the creators, preservers, and destroyers of our own mental landscape. We can invite in what we want to appear; we can keep what we desire there, nurturing, growing, and unfolding the thoughts we want; we can eliminate what we want to keep out. The "I" is the master of its own thought-world. Reflect on this important truth, dear student! By desire, we bring things into existence—by affirmation, we maintain and boost them—by denial, we eliminate them. The Hindus, in their common religious views, depict the One Being as a Trinity made up of Brahma, the Creator; Vishnu, the Preserver; and Siva, the Destroyer—not three gods, as is often assumed, but a Trinity of three aspects of the Divine or Existence. This concept of a threefold Being also applies to the Individual—"as above, so below." The "I" is the essence of the Individual, and the thought-world is its expression. It creates, sustains, and destroys—as it chooses. Keep this idea in mind and understand that your personal thought-world is your unique space of expression. Within it, you are always creating—constantly preserving—constantly destroying. If you can eliminate something in your own thought-world, you remove it from your area of influence as far as you’re concerned. If you create something in your own thought-world, you bring it into active existence for yourself. If you preserve something, you keep it with you, fully operational and impactful in your life. This insight belongs to the deeper aspects of the subject, as its understanding is intricately linked to the explanation of the "Thing-in-Itself"—the Absolute and Its Manifestations. However, even what we’ve discussed so far should give the attentive student enough knowledge to understand the situation and apply these principles in their life.
If one lives on the plane of the race-thought, he is subject to its laws, for the law of cause and effect is in full operation on each plane of life. But when one raises himself above the race-thought, and on to the plane of the Recognition of the Real Self—The "I"—then does he extricate himself from the lower laws of cause and effect, and places himself on a higher plane of causation, in which he plays a much higher part. And so we are constantly reminding you that your tower of strength and refuge lies on the higher plane. But, nevertheless, we must deal with the things and laws of the lower plane, because very few who read these lessons are able to rest entirely upon the higher plane. The great majority of them have done no more than to lift themselves partially on to the higher plane, and they are consequently living on both planes, partly in each, the consequence being that there is a struggle between the conflicting laws of the two planes. The present stage is one of the hardest on the Path of Attainment, and resembles the birth-pains of the physical body. But you are being born into a higher plane, and the pain after becoming the most acute will begin to ease, and in the end will disappear, and then will come peace and calm. When the pain becomes the most acute, then be cheered with the certainty that you have reached the crisis of your new spiritual birth, and that you will soon gain peace. And then you will see that the peace and bliss will be worth all the pain and struggle. Be brave, fellow followers of The Path—Deliverance is nigh. Soon will come the Silence that follows the Storm. The pain that you are experiencing—ah, well do we know that you are experiencing the pain—is not punishment, but is a necessary part of your growth. All Life follows this plan—the pains of labor and birth ever precede the Deliverance. Such is Life—and Life is based upon Truth—and all is well with the world. We did not intend to speak of these things in this lesson, but as we write there comes to us a great cry for help and a word of encouragement and hope, from the Class which is taking this course of lessons, and we feel bound to respond as we have done. Peace be with you—one and all.
If someone lives within the realm of collective mindset, they're bound by its rules, because the law of cause and effect operates fully on every level of existence. However, when a person elevates themselves above collective thought and reaches the recognition of their true self—the "I"—they free themselves from the lower laws of cause and effect and enter a higher level of causation, allowing them to play a much greater role. So, we constantly remind you that your source of strength and safety lies on this higher level. Yet, we still need to address the issues and laws of the lower level, since very few who read these lessons can fully rest on the higher level. The majority have only partially raised themselves to this higher level and are therefore living on both levels, partly in each one. This creates a struggle between the conflicting laws of the two levels. The current stage is one of the toughest on the path to achievement and is akin to the pains of childbirth. But you are being born into a higher level, and once the pain peaks, it will start to ease and eventually go away, leading to peace and calm. When the pain is at its most intense, take comfort in knowing that you've reached the turning point of your new spiritual birth and that peace will soon follow. You will discover that the peace and bliss will make all the pain and struggle worthwhile. Be courageous, fellow travelers on The Path—liberation is near. The silence that follows the storm will come soon. The pain you’re feeling—we know you’re feeling it—isn’t punishment; it’s a necessary part of your growth. Life follows this pattern—the pains of labor and birth always precede liberation. This is how life works—and life is rooted in truth—and everything is right with the world. We didn't plan to discuss these matters in this lesson, but as we write, we feel a strong call for help and a request for encouragement and hope from the class taking these lessons, and we feel compelled to respond as we have. Peace be with you—all of you.
And, now we will begin our consideration of the laws governing what we have called "Sub-conscious Influence."
And now we will start our discussion on the laws surrounding what we've referred to as "Subconscious Influence."
All students of the Occult are aware of the fact that men may be, and are, largely influenced by the thoughts of others. Not only is this the case in instances where thoughts are directed from the mind of one person to the mind of another, but also when there is no special direction or intention in the thought sent forth. The vibrations of thoughts linger in the astral atmosphere long after the effort that sent forth the thought has passed. The astral atmosphere is charged with the vibrations of thinkers of many years past, and still possesses sufficient vitality to affect those whose minds are ready to receive them at this time. And we all attract to us thought vibrations corresponding in nature with those which we are in the habit of entertaining. The Law of Attraction is in full operation, and one who makes a study of the subject may see instances of it on all sides.
All students of the Occult know that people can be, and often are, significantly influenced by the thoughts of others. This happens not only when one person's thoughts are directed towards another but also when there’s no specific focus or intention behind the thoughts being sent. The vibrations of thoughts linger in the astral atmosphere long after the original thought has been expressed. The astral atmosphere carries the vibrations of thinkers from many years ago and still has enough energy to impact those whose minds are open to receiving them now. We all attract thought vibrations that match the kinds of thoughts we usually entertain. The Law of Attraction is fully at work, and anyone who studies this topic can observe examples of it all around.
We invite to ourselves these thought vibrations by maintaining and entertaining thoughts along certain lines. If we cultivate a habit of thinking along the lines of Cheerfulness, Brightness and Optimism, we attract to ourselves similar thought vibrations of others and we will find that before long we will find all sorts of cheerful thoughts pouring into our minds from all directions. And, likewise, if we harbor thoughts of Gloom, Despair, Pessimism, we lay ourselves open to the influx of similar thoughts which have emanated from the minds of others. Thoughts of Anger, Hate, or Jealousy attract similar thoughts which serve to feed the flame and keep alive the fire of these low emotions. Thoughts of Love tend to draw to ourselves the loving thoughts of others which tend to fill us with a glow of loving emotion.
We invite these thought vibrations into our lives by focusing on certain types of thoughts. If we develop a habit of thinking positively—like Cheerfulness, Brightness, and Optimism—we attract similar vibes from others, and soon we'll notice cheerful thoughts coming to us from all around. Conversely, if we dwell on Gloom, Despair, and Pessimism, we open ourselves up to those same negative thoughts from others. Thoughts of Anger, Hate, or Jealousy attract similar ideas that fuel those negative feelings. On the other hand, thoughts of Love tend to bring in loving thoughts from others, filling us with a warm sense of affection.
And not only are we affected in this way by the thoughts of others, but what is known as "Suggestion" also plays an important part in this matter of sub-conscious influence. We find that the mind has a tendency to reproduce the emotions, moods, shades of thought, and feelings of other persons, as evidenced by their attitude, appearance, facial expression, or words. If we associate with persons of a gloomy temperament, we run the risk of "catching" their mental trouble by the law of suggestion, unless we understand this law and counteract it. In the same way we find that cheerfulness is contagious, and if we keep in the company of cheerful people we are very apt to take on their mental quality. The same rule applies to frequenting the company of unsuccessful or successful people, as the case may be. If we allow ourselves to take up the suggestions constantly emanating from them, we will find that our minds will begin to reproduce the tones, attitudes, characteristics, dispositions and traits of the other persons, and before long we will be living on the same mental plane. As we have repeatedly said, these things are true only when we allow ourselves to "take on" the impressions, but unless one has mastered the law of suggestion, and understands its principles and operations he is more or less apt to be affected by it. All of you readily recall the effect of certain persons upon others with whom they come in contact. One has a faculty of inspiring with vigor and energy those in whose company he happens to be. Another depresses those around him, and is avoided as a "human wet-blanket." Another will cause a feeling of uneasiness in those around him, by reason of his prevailing attitude of distrust, suspicion, and low cunning. Some carry an atmosphere of health around them, while others seem to be surrounded with a sickly aura of disease, even when their physical condition does not seem to indicate the lack of health. Mental states have a subtle way of impressing themselves upon us, and the student who will take the trouble to closely observe those with whom he comes in contact will receive a liberal education along these lines.
And not only are we influenced in this way by the thoughts of others, but what’s called "Suggestion" also plays a key role in this matter of subconscious influence. We notice that the mind tends to reproduce the emotions, moods, shades of thought, and feelings of other people, as shown by their behavior, appearance, facial expressions, or words. If we hang out with people who are gloomy, we risk "catching" their mental struggles due to the law of suggestion, unless we understand this law and counter it. Similarly, cheerfulness is contagious; if we spend time with happy people, we’re likely to adopt their mindset. The same principle applies when we’re around either unsuccessful or successful individuals. If we allow ourselves to absorb the suggestions constantly radiating from them, we’ll find that our minds start to reflect the tones, behaviors, characteristics, and traits of those people, and before long we’ll be living on the same mental wavelength. As we’ve repeatedly pointed out, this is true only when we allow ourselves to "absorb" these impressions, but if someone hasn’t mastered the law of suggestion and doesn’t understand its principles and workings, they are likely to be affected by it. Most of you can easily recall the impact certain individuals have on others they interact with. One person has a knack for inspiring vigor and energy in those around them. Another brings down the mood of those nearby and is shunned as a "human wet blanket." Yet another creates a sense of unease due to an attitude of distrust, suspicion, and cunning. Some radiate an aura of health, while others seem to carry a sickly vibe, even when their physical condition doesn’t indicate poor health. Mental states have a subtle way of impressing themselves on us, and anyone who takes the time to closely observe the people they interact with will gain valuable insights in this area.
There is of course a great difference in the degree of suggestibility among different persons. There are those who are almost immune, while at the other end of the line are to be found others who are so constantly and strongly impressed by the suggestions of others, conscious or unconscious, that they may be said to scarcely have any independent thought or will of their own. But nearly all persons are suggestible to a greater or lesser degree.
There is definitely a significant difference in how suggestible people are. Some individuals are nearly immune to suggestion, while others are so often and strongly influenced by the suggestions of those around them, whether they realize it or not, that they hardly seem to have any independent thoughts or will of their own. However, almost everyone is suggestible to some extent.
It must not be supposed from what we have said that all suggestions are "bad," harmful, or undesirable. Many suggestions are very good for us, and coming at the right time have aided us much. But, nevertheless, it is well to always let your own mind pass upon these suggestions, before allowing them to manifest in your sub-conscious mind. Let the final decision be your own—and not the will of another—although you may have considered outside suggestions in connection with the matter.
It shouldn't be assumed from what we've said that all suggestions are "bad," harmful, or unwanted. Many suggestions are actually quite beneficial and, if given at the right moment, have helped us a lot. However, it's still important to always let your own mind evaluate these suggestions before letting them impact your subconscious. Make sure the final decision is yours—not influenced by someone else—although you might consider external suggestions related to the issue.
Remember always that YOU are an Individual, having a mind and Will of your own. Rest firmly upon the base of your "I" consciousness, and you will find yourself able to manifest a wonderful strength against the adverse suggestions of others. Be your own Suggestor—train and influence your sub-conscious mind Yourself, and do not allow it to be tampered with by the suggestions of others. Grow the sense of Individuality.
Remember always that YOU are an Individual with your own mind and will. Stand strong on the foundation of your "I" consciousness, and you'll discover that you can show incredible resilience against the negative suggestions of others. Be your own Suggestor—train and influence your subconscious mind on your own, and don’t let it be affected by what others suggest. Cultivate your sense of Individuality.
There has been much written of recent years in the Western world regarding the effect of the Mental Attitude upon Success and attainment upon the material plane. While much of this is nothing but the wildest imagining, still there remains a very firm and solid substratum of truth underlying it all.
There has been a lot written in recent years in the Western world about how Mental Attitude affects Success and achievements in the material world. While much of this is just wild imagination, there is still a strong and solid foundation of truth behind it all.
It is undoubtedly true that one's prevailing mental attitude is constantly manifesting and objectifying itself in his life. Things, circumstances, people, plans, all seem to fit into the general ideal of the strong mental attitude of a man. And this from the operation of mental law along a number of lines of action.
It is definitely true that a person's dominant mindset is always showing up and becoming real in their life. Situations, circumstances, people, and plans all seem to align with the overall vision created by a strong mental attitude. This happens because of the way mental laws work across various actions.
In the first place, the mind when directed toward a certain set of objects becomes very alert to discover things concerning those objects—to seize upon things, opportunities, persons, ideas, and facts tending to promote the objects thought of. The man who is looking for facts to prove certain theories, invariably finds them, and is also quite likely to overlook facts tending to disprove his theory. The Optimist and the Pessimist passing along the same streets, each sees thousands of examples tending to fit in with his idea. As Kay says: "When one is engaged in seeking for a thing, if he keep the image of it clearly before the mind, he will be very likely to find it, and that too, probably, where it would otherwise have escaped his notice. So when one is engaged in thinking on a subject, thoughts of things resembling it, or bearing upon it, and tending to illustrate it, come up on every side. Truly, we may well say of the mind, as has been said of the eye, that 'it perceives only what it brings within the power of perceiving.'" John Burroughs has well said regarding this that "No one ever found the walking fern who did not have the walking fern in his mind. A person whose eye is full of Indian relics picks them up in every field he walks through. They are quickly recognized because the eye has been commissioned to find them."
In the first place, when the mind focuses on a specific set of objects, it becomes very alert to discover things related to those objects—whether they're things, opportunities, people, ideas, or facts that support the objects being considered. A person searching for facts to back certain theories will always find them and is likely to overlook facts that contradict his theory. The Optimist and the Pessimist walking down the same streets each see countless examples that align with their beliefs. As Kay says: "When someone is looking for something, if they keep a clear image of it in their mind, they are much more likely to find it, often in places they would have otherwise missed. So when someone is thinking about a topic, thoughts about similar things or relevant ideas come to mind from all sides. Indeed, we can say about the mind, just as has been said about the eye, that 'it perceives only what it is prepared to perceive.'" John Burroughs put it well when he said, "No one ever found the walking fern who didn’t have the walking fern in their mind. A person whose eye is filled with Indian relics notices them in every field they walk through. They are quickly recognized because the eye has been trained to find them."
When the mind is kept firmly fixed upon some ideal or aim, its whole and varied powers are bent toward the realization and manifestation of that ideal. In thousands of ways the mind will operate to objectify the subjective mental attitude, a great proportion of the mental effort being accomplished along sub-conscious lines. It is of the greatest importance to one who wishes to succeed in any undertaking, to keep before his mind's eye a clear mental image of that which he desires. He should picture the thing desired, and himself as securing it, until it becomes almost real. In this way he calls to his aid his entire mental force and power, along the sub-conscious lines, and, as it were, makes a clear path over which he may walk to accomplishment. Bain says regarding this: "By aiming at a new construction, we must clearly conceive what is aimed at. Where we have a very distinct and intelligible model before us, we are in a fair way to succeed; in proportion as the ideal is dim and wavering, we stagger or miscarry." Maudsley says: "We cannot do an act voluntarily unless we know what we are going to do, and we cannot know exactly what we are going to do until we have taught ourselves to do it." Carpenter says: "The continued concentration of attention upon a certain idea gives it a dominant power, not only over the mind, but over the body." Muller says: "The idea of our own strength gives strength to our movements. A person who is confident of effecting anything by muscular efforts will do it more easily than one not so confident of his own power." Tanner says: "To believe firmly is almost tantamount in the end to accomplishment. Extraordinary instances are related showing the influence of the will over even the involuntary muscles."
When the mind stays focused on an ideal or goal, all its diverse abilities are directed toward achieving and expressing that ideal. The mind works in countless ways to turn a subjective mental state into something tangible, with a significant amount of this effort occurring subconsciously. It’s crucial for anyone who wants to succeed in any endeavor to maintain a clear mental picture of what they desire. They should visualize the desired outcome and themselves achieving it until it feels almost real. This way, they activate their full mental force and power, along with subconscious processes, creating a clear path toward accomplishment. Bain points out: "By aiming at a new construction, we must clearly conceive what is aimed at. When we have a distinct and understandable model in front of us, we are likely to succeed; as the ideal becomes less clear, we tend to falter or fail." Maudsley states: "We can't perform an action voluntarily unless we know what we're going to do, and we can't know exactly what we're going to do until we've trained ourselves to do it." Carpenter remarks: "Consistently focusing attention on a particular idea gives it significant power, not just over the mind but also over the body." Muller notes: "The belief in our own strength enhances our physical movements. A person who is confident in achieving something through physical effort will find it easier than someone who lacks confidence in their own abilities." Tanner says: "A strong belief is almost equivalent to achieving the goal. There are remarkable examples illustrating the will's influence over even involuntary muscles."
Along the same lines, many Western writers have added their testimony to the Yogi principle of the manifestation of thought into action. Kay has written: "A clear and accurate idea of what we wish to do, and how it is to be effected, is of the utmost value and importance in all the affairs of life. A man's conduct naturally shapes itself according to the ideas in his mind, and nothing contributes more to success in life than having a high ideal and keeping it constantly in view. Where such is the case one can hardly fail in attaining it. Numerous unexpected circumstances will be found to conspire to bring it about, and even what seemed at first to be hostile may be converted into means for its furtherance; while by having it constantly before the mind he will be ever ready to take advantage of any favoring circumstances that may present themselves." Along the same lines, Foster has written these remarkable words: "It is wonderful how even the casualties of life seem to bow to a spirit that will not bow to them, and yield to subserve a design which they may, in their first apparent tendency, threaten to frustrate. When a firm, decisive spirit is recognized, it is curious to see how the space clears around a man and leaves him room and freedom." Simpson has said: "A passionate desire and an unwearied will can perform impossibilities, or what seem to be such to the cold and feeble." And Maudsley gives to aspiring youth a great truth, when he says: "Thus it is that aspirations are often prophecies, the harbingers of what a man shall be in a condition to perform." And we may conclude the paragraph by quoting Lytton: "Dream, O youth, dream manfully and nobly, and thy dreams shall be prophets."
Along the same lines, many Western writers have shared their insights on the Yogi principle of turning thoughts into actions. Kay wrote: "Having a clear and precise idea of what we want to achieve and how to do it is incredibly valuable in all areas of life. A person's actions naturally align with the ideas in their mind, and nothing helps achieve success more than maintaining a high ideal and keeping it in sight. When that happens, it’s hard not to reach it. Many unexpected situations will work together to make it happen, and even what initially seems like an obstacle can be turned into a way to support it; by keeping it constantly in mind, you’ll be ready to take advantage of any opportunities that come your way." Similarly, Foster wrote these remarkable words: "It’s amazing how even life’s random events seem to yield to a spirit that won’t give in to them, bending to support a purpose that might initially seem threatened by them. When a firm, determined spirit is present, it’s interesting to see how things clear around a person, creating space and freedom." Simpson stated: "A strong desire and an unwavering will can achieve what might seem impossible to the cold and weak." Maudsley offers aspiring youth a great truth when he says: "Aspirations often serve as prophecies, foreshadowing what a person will be able to accomplish." We can conclude this paragraph with a quote from Lytton: "Dream, youth, dream boldly and nobly, and your dreams will be prophetic."
This principle of the power of the Mental Image is strongly impressed upon the mind of the chela, or student, by the Yogi teachers. The student is taught that just as the house is erected in accordance with the plan of the architect, so is one's life built in accordance with the prevailing Mental Image. The mind sub-consciously moulds itself around the prevailing mental image or attitude, and then proceeds to draw upon the outer world for material with which to build in accordance with the plan. Not only is one's character built in this way, but the circumstances and incidents of his life follow the same rule. The Yogi student is instructed into the mysteries of the power of the mind in this direction, not that he may make use of it to build up material success, or to realize his personal desires—for he is taught to avoid these things—but he is fully instructed, nevertheless, that he may understand the workings of the law around him. And it is a fact well known to close students of the occult, that the few who have attained extraordinarily high degrees of development, make use of this power in order to help the race. Many a world movement has been directed by the mind, or minds, of some of these advanced souls who were able to see the ideal of evolution ahead of the race, and by visualizing the same, and concentrating upon it in meditation, actually hastened the progress of the evolutionary wave, and caused to actually manifest that which they saw, and upon which they had meditated.
This principle of the power of the Mental Image is strongly emphasized to the mind of the chela, or student, by the Yogi teachers. The student learns that just as a house is built according to an architect's plans, one's life is shaped by the dominant Mental Image. The mind subconsciously molds itself around this prevailing mental image or attitude, and then looks to the outside world for material to construct according to the plan. Not only is a person's character shaped this way, but the circumstances and events of their life follow the same pattern. The Yogi student is taught the mysteries of the mind's power in this area, not to achieve material success or fulfill personal desires—since he is advised to avoid these pursuits—but to understand the laws that govern his surroundings. It’s well known among serious students of the occult that a select few who have reached exceptionally high levels of development use this power to benefit humanity. Many significant world movements have been guided by the minds of these advanced individuals, who could envision the future evolution of society. By visualizing and concentrating on this vision during meditation, they actually accelerated the progress of the evolutionary wave and helped to bring into reality what they perceived and contemplated.
It is true that some occultists have used similar plans to further their own selfish personal ends—often without fully realizing just what power they were employing—but this merely illustrates the old fact that the forces of Nature may be used rightly and wrongly. And it is all the more reason why those who are desirous of advancing the race—of assisting in the evolution of the world—should make use of this mighty power in their work. Success is not reprehensible, notwithstanding the fact that many have interpreted and applied the word in such a matter as to make it appear as if it had no other meaning or application other than the crude, material selfish one generally attributed to it, by reason of its misuse. The Western world is playing its part in the evolution of the race, and its keynote is "Accomplishment." Those who have advanced so high that they are able to view the world of men, as one sees a valley from a mountain peak, recognize what this strenuous Western life means. They see mighty forces in operation—mighty principles being worked out by those who little dream of the ultimate significance of that which they are doing. Mighty things are before the Western world to-day—wonderful changes are going on—great things are in the womb of time, and the hour of birth draws near. The men and women in the Western world feel within them the mighty urge to "accomplish" something—to take an active part in the great drama of life. And they are right in giving full expression to this urge, and are doing well in using every legitimate means in the line of expression. And this idea of the Mental Attitude, or the Mental Image, is one of the greatest factors in this striving for Success.
It’s true that some occultists have used similar methods to serve their own selfish interests—often without fully understanding the power they were wielding—but this just shows the age-old truth that the forces of Nature can be used for both good and bad. This is all the more reason why those who want to advance humanity—who want to help in the world’s evolution—should harness this powerful force in their efforts. Success isn’t something to be ashamed of, even though many have interpreted and applied the term in such a way that it seems it can only mean the crude, selfish materialistic interpretation that has come from its misuse. The Western world is playing its role in human evolution, with the guiding principle of “Accomplishment.” Those who have reached a higher vantage point, able to see the human experience like looking down at a valley from a mountain peak, understand what this demanding Western lifestyle signifies. They witness immense forces at work—powerful principles being realized by those who have no idea of the ultimate importance of their actions. Significant changes are unfolding in the Western world today—remarkable transformations are in progress—great things are on the horizon, and the time for their realization is approaching. People in the Western world feel this strong drive to “achieve” something—to take part in the grand drama of life. They are right to fully express this motivation and are doing well to utilize every legitimate avenue for expression. The concept of Mental Attitude, or Mental Image, is one of the most crucial elements in this pursuit of Success.
In this lesson we do not purpose giving "Success Talks" for our students. These lessons are intended to fill another field, and there are many other channels of information along the lines named. What we wish to do is to point out to our students the meaning of all this strenuous striving of the age, in the Western world, and the leading principle employed therein. The great achievements of the material world are being accomplished by means of the Power of the Mind. Men are beginning to understand that "Thought manifests itself in Action," and that Thought attracts to itself the things, persons and circumstances in harmony with itself. The Power of Mind is becoming manifest in hundreds of ways. The power of Desire, backed by Faith and Will, is beginning to be recognized as one of the greatest of known dynamic forces. The life of the race is entering into a new and strange stage of development and evolution, and in the years to come MIND will be seen, more clearly and still more clearly, to be the great principle underlying the world of material things and happenings. That "All is Mind" is more than a dreamy, metaphysical utterance, is being recognized by the leaders in the world's thought.
In this lesson, we aren't planning to give "Success Talks" to our students. These lessons are designed to cover a different area, and there are many other sources of information on the topics mentioned. What we aim to do is show our students the significance of all the intense efforts happening in the Western world and the main principle behind it. The amazing achievements in the material world are being realized through the Power of the Mind. People are starting to understand that "Thought manifests itself in Action," and that thoughts attract the things, people, and situations that resonate with them. The Power of Mind is becoming evident in many ways. The power of Desire, supported by Faith and Will, is beginning to be recognized as one of the greatest known dynamic forces. Humanity is entering a new and unusual phase of development and evolution, and in the future, MIND will be increasingly acknowledged as the fundamental principle underlying the world of material things and events. The idea that "All is Mind" is being recognized by thought leaders around the world, and it's more than just a vague, metaphysical statement.
As we have said, great changes are before the world and the race, and every year brings us nearer to the beginning of them. In fact, the beginning is already upon us. Let any thinker stop and reflect over the wonderful changes of the past six years—since the dawning of the Twentieth Century, and he will be dull indeed if he sees not the trend of affairs. We are entering into a new Great Cycle of the race, and the old is being prepared for being dropped off like an old worn out husk. Old conventions, ideals, customs, laws, ethics, and things sociological, economical, theological, philosophical, and metaphysical have been outgrown, and are about to be "shed" by the race. The great cauldron of human thought is bubbling away fiercely, and many things are rising to its surface. Like all great changes, the good will come only with much pain—all birth is with pain. The race feels the pain and perpetual unrest, but knows not what is the disease nor the remedy. Many false cases of diagnosis and prescription are even now noticeable, and will become still more in evidence as the years roll by. Many self-styled saviours of the race—prescribers for the pain of the soul and mind—will arise and fall. But out of it all will come that for which the race now waits.
As we've mentioned, significant changes are ahead for the world and humanity, and each year brings us closer to them. In fact, the start is already here. Any thoughtful person who reflects on the remarkable changes of the past six years—since the start of the Twentieth Century—will be quite dull if they don't notice the direction things are heading. We are entering a new Great Cycle for humanity, and the old ways are being prepared to be discarded like a worn-out shell. Old conventions, ideals, customs, laws, ethics, and sociological, economic, theological, philosophical, and metaphysical concepts have been outgrown and are about to be "shed" by society. The great cauldron of human thought is bubbling vigorously, and many things are rising to the surface. Like all major changes, the good will come only with much pain—every birth comes with pain. Humanity feels the pain and constant unrest, yet does not know the cause or the solution. Many false diagnoses and prescriptions are already noticeable and will become even more apparent as the years go by. Many self-proclaimed saviors—those who claim to have solutions for the pain of the soul and mind—will emerge and fade away. But from all of this, something that humanity is currently waiting for will eventually arise.
The changes that are before us are as great as the changes in thought and life described in the late novel by H. G. Wells, entitled "In the Days of the Comet." In fact, Mr. Wells has indicated in that story some of the very changes that the advanced souls of the race have informed their students are before the race—the prophetic insight of the writer named seems marvelous, until one realizes that even that writer is being used as a part of the mental machinery of The Change itself. But the change will not come about by reason of the new gas caused by the brushing of the earth's surface by a passing comet. It will come from the unfolding of the race mind, the process being now under way. Are not the signs of mental unrest and discomfort becoming more and more apparent as the days go by? The pain is growing greater, and the race is beginning to fret and chafe, and moan. It knows not what it wants, but it knows that it feels pain and wants something to relieve that pain. The old things are beginning to totter and fall, and ideas rendered sacred by years of observance are being brushed aside with a startling display of irreverence. Under the surface of our civilization we may hear the straining and groaning of the ideas and principles that are striving to force their way out on to the plane of manifestation.
The changes we're facing are as significant as those in thought and life described in H. G. Wells' recent novel, "In the Days of the Comet." In fact, Mr. Wells has pointed out some of the very changes that the enlightened individuals of our society have told their students are ahead of us—the writer's prophetic insights seem incredible until you realize that even he is part of the mental process of The Change itself. But this change won't happen because of new gases created by a comet passing close to Earth. Instead, it will arise from the evolution of the collective mind, a process that is already underway. Aren't the signs of mental unrest and discomfort becoming more obvious as time goes on? The pain is growing more intense, and society is starting to feel anxious and restless, voicing its discontent. It doesn't know exactly what it wants, but it feels pain and seeks something to alleviate it. The old structures are beginning to wobble and collapse, and ideas that were once revered for ages are being sidelined with surprising disregard. Beneath the surface of our civilization, we can sense the struggling and straining of ideas and principles that are fighting to emerge into the open.
Men are running hither and thither crying for a leader and a savior. They are trying this thing, and that thing, but they find not that which they seek. They cry for Satisfaction, but it eludes them. And yet all this search and disappointment is part of the Great Change, and is preparing the race for That-which-must-Come. And yet the relief will not come from any Thing or Things. It will come from Within. Just as when, in Well's story, things righted themselves when the vapor of the comet had cleared men's minds, so will Things take their new places when the mind of the race becomes cleared by the new unfoldment that is even now under way. Men are beginning to feel each other's pains—they find themselves unsatisfied by the old rule of "every man for himself, and the devil take the hindmost"—it used to content the successful, but now it doesn't seem to be so satisfying. The man on top is becoming lonesome, and dissatisfied, and discontented—his success seems to appall him, in some mysterious manner. And the man underneath feels stirring within himself strange longings and desires, and dissatisfaction. And new frictions are arising, and new and startling ideas are being suddenly advanced, supported and opposed.
Men are running around everywhere, looking for a leader and a savior. They're trying one thing after another, but they can't find what they're searching for. They cry out for Satisfaction, but it slips away from them. Still, all this searching and disappointment is part of the Great Change, preparing humanity for What’s Coming. And yet, relief won't come from any Thing. It will come from Within. Just as in Well's story, when things fell into place after the comet's vapor cleared people's minds, so will Things find their new order when humanity's minds are cleared by the new development that’s already in progress. People are starting to feel each other's pain—they're realizing that the old rule of "every man for himself, and the devil take the hindmost" isn't fulfilling anymore. It used to satisfy the successful, but now it doesn’t feel as rewarding. The person on top is becoming lonely, dissatisfied, and unhappy—his success seems to haunt him in some mysterious way. Meanwhile, the person at the bottom feels strange longings and dissatisfaction stirring within him. New tensions are popping up, and fresh, surprising ideas are being suddenly put forward, debated, and challenged.
And the relations between people seem to be unsatisfactory. The old rules, laws, and bonds are proving irksome. New, strange, and wild thoughts are coming into the minds of people, which they dare not utter to their friends—and yet these same friends are finding similar ideas within themselves. And somehow, underneath it all is to be found a certain Honesty—yes, there is where the trouble seems to come, the world is tiring of hypocrisy and dishonesty in all human relations, and is crying aloud to be led back, someway, to Truth and Honesty in Thought and Action. But it does not see the way out! And it will not see the way out, until the race-mind unfolds still further. And the pain of the new unfoldment is stirring the race to its depths. From the deep recesses of the race-mind are rising to the surface old passions, relics from the cave-dweller days, and all sorts of ugly mental relics of the past. And they will continue to rise and show themselves until at last the bubbling pot will begin to quiet down, and then will come a new peace, and the best will come to the surface—the essence of all the experiences of the race.
And the relationships between people seem to be lacking. The old rules, laws, and connections are becoming burdensome. New, strange, and wild ideas are entering people's minds, which they are too afraid to share with their friends—and yet these same friends find similar thoughts within themselves. Deep down, there’s a certain honesty—yes, that’s where the trouble lies, the world is growing tired of hypocrisy and dishonesty in all human interactions, and is desperately wanting to be guided back to Truth and Honesty in Thought and Action. But it can’t see the way out! And it won’t see the way out until humanity’s collective consciousness evolves even further. The pain of this new development is stirring deep emotions within people. From the depths of the collective mind, old passions and remnants from our primitive past are bubbling up, along with all kinds of unpleasant mental artifacts from history. They will keep emerging until, finally, the chaos will start to settle down, leading to a new peace, and the best aspects will rise to the surface—the essence of all human experiences.
To our students, we would say: During the struggle ahead of the race, play well your part, doing the best you can, living each day by itself, meeting each new phase of life with confidence and courage. Be not deluded by appearances, nor follow after strange prophets. Let the evolutionary processes work themselves out, and do you fall in with the wave without struggling, and without overmuch striving. The Law is working itself out well—of that be assured. Those who have entered into even a partial understanding and recognition of the One Life underlying, will find that they will be as the chosen people during the changes that are coming to the race. They have attained that which the race is reaching toward in pain and travail. And the force behind the Law will carry them along, for they will be the leaven that is to lighten the great mass of the race in the new dispensation. Not by deed, or by action, but by Thought, will these people leaven the mass. The Thought is even now at work, and all who read these words are playing a part in the work, although they may know it not. If the race could realize this truth of the One Life underlying, to-day, the Change would occur in a moment, but it will not come in that way. When this understanding gradually dawns upon the race—this new consciousness—then will Things take their proper places, and the Lion and the Lamb lie down together in peace.
To our students, we want to say: As you face the challenges ahead of us, do your best and take each day as it comes, approaching every new chapter of life with confidence and courage. Don't be misled by appearances, and avoid following false prophets. Allow the natural processes to unfold, and go with the flow without too much struggle or effort. The laws of nature are working out just fine—take comfort in that. Those who have even a partial understanding of the One Life that connects us all will feel like the chosen ones during the upcoming changes. They have achieved what humanity is striving for, despite the difficulties. The force behind these laws will support them, as they will provide the uplifting influence needed for the mass of humanity in this new phase. Not through actions, but through Thought, will they inspire change. This Thought is already in motion, and everyone reading these words is part of this work, even if they don’t realize it. If humanity could grasp this truth of the One Life today, the Change would happen in an instant, but it won’t come that way. As this understanding gradually emerges within humanity—this new awareness—everything will fall into place, and peace will reign as the Lion and the Lamb lie down together.
We have thought it well to say these things in this the last lesson of this course. They are needed words—they will serve to point out the way to those who are able to read. "Watch and wait for the Silence that will follow the Storm."
We believe it's important to share these thoughts in the final lesson of this course. They are essential words—they will guide those who can understand. "Watch and wait for the Silence that will follow the Storm."
In this series of lessons we have endeavored to give you a plain, practical presentation of some of the more important features of "Raja Yoga." But this phase of the subject, as important and interesting as it is, is not the highest phase of the great Yoga teachings. It is merely the preparation of the soil of the mind for what comes afterward. The phase called "Gnani Yoga"—the Yoga of Wisdom—is the highest of all the various phases of Yoga, although each of the lower steps is important in itself. We find ourselves approaching the phase of our work for which we have long wished. Those who have advised and directed this work have counseled us to deal with the less advanced and simpler phases, in order to prepare the minds of those who might be interested, so that they would be ready for the higher teachings. At times we have felt an impatience for the coming of the day when we would be able to teach the highest that has come to us. And now the time seems to have come. Following this course, we will begin a series of lessons in "GNANI YOGA"—the Yoga of Wisdom—in which we will pass on to our students the highest teachings regarding the Reality and its Manifestations—the One and the Many. The teachings that "All is Mind" will be explained in such a manner as to be understood by all who have followed us so far. We will be able to impart to you the higher truths about Spiritual Evolution, sometimes called "Reincarnation," as well as Spiritual Cause and Effect, often called "Karma." The highest truths about these important subjects are often obscured by popular misconceptions occasioned by partial teaching. We trust that you—our students—will wish to follow us still higher—higher than we have ventured so far, and we assure you that there is a Truth to be seen and known that is as much higher than the other phases upon which we have touched, as those phases have been higher than the current beliefs of the masses of the race. We trust that the Powers of Knowledge may guide and direct us that we may be able to convey our message so that it may be accepted and understood. We thank our students who have traveled thus far with us, and we assure them that their loving sympathy has ever been a help and an inspiration to us.
In this series of lessons, we’ve tried to give you a straightforward and practical overview of some of the key aspects of "Raja Yoga." However, this part of the topic, while important and fascinating, isn’t the highest level of the great Yoga teachings. It’s just the groundwork for what comes next. The phase called "Gnani Yoga"—the Yoga of Wisdom—is the highest of all the different Yoga phases, although each of the earlier steps is valuable in its own right. We’re now getting close to the part of our work that we’ve been looking forward to for a long time. Those who have guided this work advised us to first cover the simpler and less advanced phases to prepare the minds of those who might be interested, so they would be ready for the deeper teachings. At times, we felt impatient for the day when we could teach the highest concepts we’ve learned. And now, that time seems to have come. Following this course, we will start a series of lessons in "GNANI YOGA"—the Yoga of Wisdom—where we’ll share the highest teachings about Reality and its Manifestations—the One and the Many. The concept that "All is Mind" will be explained in a way that everyone who has followed us so far can understand. We will also share the deeper truths about Spiritual Evolution, sometimes called "Reincarnation," as well as Spiritual Cause and Effect, often referred to as "Karma." The highest truths about these significant topics are often muddled by common misconceptions due to incomplete teachings. We hope you—our students—will want to continue following us to even greater heights—higher than we’ve ventured so far—and we assure you that there is a Truth that is far beyond the other phases we’ve touched on, just as those phases are higher than the current beliefs held by most people. We trust that the Powers of Knowledge will guide and direct us so we can share our message effectively and that it can be understood. We thank our students who have come this far with us, and we want them to know that their supportive presence has always been a source of help and inspiration to us.
Peace be with you.
Peace be with you.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!